Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
User's Guide
Version 2017
(9.00.00)
July 2016
Copyright
Copyright 1985-2016 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Contains RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc. Copyright 1998-2015 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions of the user interface copyright 2012-2015 Telerik AD.
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensees internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensees internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATIONS LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporations software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporations Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, Intergraph Smart, PDS, SmartPlant, SmartMarine, FrameWorks, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, Isogen,
SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.
Graphic Settings.................................................................................................................................... 72
Advanced Options .......................................................................................................................... 74
Background Colors ......................................................................................................................... 74
CADWorx Options .......................................................................................................................... 75
Component Colors .......................................................................................................................... 76
Marker Options ............................................................................................................................... 79
Miscellaneous Options ................................................................................................................... 79
Output Colors ................................................................................................................................. 83
Text Options ................................................................................................................................... 84
Visual Options ................................................................................................................................ 85
Miscellaneous Options .......................................................................................................................... 87
Input Items ...................................................................................................................................... 87
Output Items ................................................................................................................................... 89
System Level Items ........................................................................................................................ 90
SIFs and Stresses ................................................................................................................................. 91
Advanced Settings .......................................................................................................................... 92
Code-Specific Settings ................................................................................................................... 93
General Settings ............................................................................................................................. 96
Legacy Settings ............................................................................................................................ 101
Set/Change Password ........................................................................................................................ 103
New Password .............................................................................................................................. 103
Access Protected Data ................................................................................................................. 104
Change Password ........................................................................................................................ 104
Remove Password ....................................................................................................................... 104
3D Modeler.......................................................................................................................................... 370
Building Models Quickly ............................................................................................................... 374
Configuring 3D Graphics .............................................................................................................. 378
Changing the Model Display ........................................................................................................ 380
Highlighting Graphics ................................................................................................................... 381
Manipulating the Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 383
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and Wind/Wave Loads ............................... 384
Saving an Image for Later Presentation ....................................................................................... 385
Walking Through the Model ......................................................................................................... 386
Moving Elements .......................................................................................................................... 387
S3D/SPR Model View ......................................................................................................................... 388
Load an S3D/SPR Model ............................................................................................................. 388
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model ......................................................................................................... 393
Dim S3D/SPR Model .................................................................................................................... 393
S3D/SPR Visibility Options ........................................................................................................... 393
Technical Changes
Please be mindful of the following technical change for this release:
Disabled the Search tab in the Online Help due to an issue when your CAESAR II
installation uses OpenGL drivers. You can change the Graphics Settings > Miscellaneous
Options > Video Driver to Direct 3D in the CAESAR II Configuration Editor. If you use
Direct 3D drivers, you can download a copy of the Help with the Search tab enabled from
Smart Support.
Piping and Equipment Code Updates
Updated the software to the latest ASME B31.4 code standards, which included the ASME
B31.4 2009, B31.4 2012, and B31.4 2016 code.
The update included the following changes and improvements:
Updated materials applicable to the B31.4 code in the Material Database Editor.
Updated the Allowable Stress tab in the Piping Input module by including an
Allowable Stress Indicator option for B31.4 and B31.4 Ch XI and Design Factor and
Hoop Stress options for B31.3 Ch IX.
Deprecated the B31.11 piping code, which is now included in the B31.4 main code
standard.
Provided options for CAESAR II to automatically determine the restrained/unrestrained
state of the pipe elements, or for the user to specify the state. The software defaults to
automatically determining the state.
Added the evaluation of the creep condition using EN-13480 Creep code standards.
The update included the following improvements:
Expanded the Material Database Editor to support EN-1380 Creep by adding material
properties for 200k hours, in addition to existing properties for 100k hours. Refer to the
Technical Discussion on evaluating creep conditions in the Users Guide for more
information.
Added a new Creep (CRP) stress type in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. The
software does not include the CRP stress type when it recommends load cases.
Updated the software to support the June 2015 edition of Canadian Z662 and Z662 Chapter
11, the Canadian code for oil and gas pipelines.
Enhanced the software to support the 5th Edition of API-560, February 2016, the equipment
code for fired heaters.
Integration
Combined the individual flexible nozzle input export options into a single Flexible Nozzles
option on the Data Export Wizard to improve usability.
Improved integration with Smart 3D by adding a new LCASE_NAME column to files
exported to Microsoft Access through the Data Export Wizard (ODBC). When you export to
.mdb format, you can now see the Load Case Name (LCASE_NAME column) in applicable
exported files for quick identification of your load cases.
Documentation/Help
Updated Restraints in the Piping Input Reference section of the CAESAR II User's Guide.
Each restraint type includes a graphic example to assist identification.
Improved the Global Coordinates section of the CAESAR II User's Guide. The user's guide
now references local coordinates as a, b, c to reduce confusion between local and global
coordinates.
Updated the Hinged Joint section of the CAESAR II Application Guide. Updated the Hinged
Joint Model graphics to include all of the necessary components to model a hinged joint.
Added navigation information, such as the location on ribbons and menus, to command
topics to aid discovery when browsing the help.
Updated portions of the user documentation to the latest Intergraph PP&M standards for
formats, which included adding more white space and indentation for field property formats.
Converted the CAESAR II 2017 readme document to .pdf format to comply with the latest
Intergraph PP&M standards.
Updated the software to call the main CAESAR II Help file (C2ug.chm) when you press F1 in
Equipment and Auxiliary modules. Previously, these modules displayed in a text-based
help dialog box.
Introduction
CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software package that is developed, marketed
and sold by Intergraph CAS. This software is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design
and analysis of piping systems. Use CAESAR II to create a model of the piping system
represented by simple 3D beam elements and to define the loading conditions imposed on the
system.
With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses
throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by
recognized codes and standards.
CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with Intergraph CADWorx Plant, which is an
AutoCAD-based design and drafting system for creating orthographic, isometric, and 3D piping
drawings. The two-way-link automatically generates stress analysis models of piping layouts or
creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II models.
CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis application. It is a widely recognized product
with a large customer base and an excellent support and development record.
In This Section
About the CAESAR II Documentation ........................................... 23
Software Support/User Assistance ................................................ 23
Software Revision Procedures ...................................................... 24
Updates and License Types .......................................................... 26
To aid internet users when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option
that generates an e-mail template with the basic computer and CAESAR II version details. This
information is typically what is needed to resolve technical support issues. To use this option,
click Help > Email CAESAR II Support.
This command starts the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the default
information.
The e-mail is addressed to Technical Support and contains all the information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. Type the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and
attach any necessary files.
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:
ICAS Dealer Support (http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml ) or ICAS General
Support (http://support.intergraph.com/Default.asp)
Technical Support E-mail: ppmcrm@Intergraph.com
Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CAESAR II Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)
Fax: 281-890-3301
Sales E-mail: sales.icas@intergraph.com
Knowledge-based Articles/Tutorials (US and Canada only):
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com)
Getting Started
This section explains the CAESAR II basic operation, and steps you through a quick static
piping analysis.
The main steps required to perform a static analysis are:
1. Starting CAESAR II (on page 27)
2. Create a new job (on page 28)
3. Piping Input generation (on page 29)
4. Model Error Checking (on page 32)
5. Building Load Cases (on page 32)
6. Run a static analysis (on page 33)
7. Static Output Review (on page 33)
A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
In This Section
Starting CAESAR II........................................................................ 27
Understanding Jobs ....................................................................... 28
Basic Operation ............................................................................. 28
Main Menu ..................................................................................... 34
Starting CAESAR II
1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II. You may
also have a CAESAR II icon on your desktop that you can use to start CAESAR II.
The main CAESAR II window displays.
This window contains the main menu and toolbar from which you select jobs and analysis
types, start analysis, and review output.
Understanding Jobs
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. All subsequent input,
analysis, or output reviews reference the job specified. You create a new job by selecting File >
New or by clicking New on the main toolbar. You open an existing job by selecting File >
Open or by clicking Open on the main toolbar.
After you have created or opened a job, the job name displays in the title bar of the main
CAESAR II window. Use the commands on the Input, Analysis, and Output menus to define,
analyze, and review your data.
Basic Operation
To help you get familiar with CAESAR II, we will step through a basic piping analysis.
Topics
Create a new job............................................................................ 28
Basic Operation - Generate piping input ....................................... 29
Basic Operation - Check for errors in the model ........................... 32
Basic Operation - Build load cases................................................ 32
Run a static analysis ...................................................................... 33
Basic Operation - Review static output.......................................... 33
6. Click OK.
The job is created and the job name displays in the main window title bar.
This selection fills in the material parameters such as density and modulus elasticity.
10. Double-click the Allowable Stress check box.
The Allowable Stresses tab displays.
11. Select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
12. In the Fluid Den 1 box, type 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity).
The software automatically converts this value to density.
13. After you finish defining the first element, you need to move to the next element. You can do
this by pressing Alt-C, by clicking Continue , or by selecting Edit > Continue from the
menu.
Node numbers are automatically generated in the From and To boxes and data is carried
forward from the previous element.
14. In the DY box, type 10-0 (10 feet).
15. Double-click the Restraint check box.
16. In the first Node box, type 30, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
The two-element model (a well-defined configuration anchored at each end) is complete.
The piping input preprocessor has an interactive graphics and a list view function to make model
editing and verification easier. You can verify your model using the Graphics or List utilities,
although a combination of both modes is recommended. By default, the graphics screen
displays to the right of the input spreadsheet. You can click the small pin in the upper-left corner
to collapse the input spreadsheet to provide maximum graphic space.
1. From the Piping Input window, select Edit > Edit Static Load Cases .
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box displays.
2. You can build loads two ways:
Combine the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements,
temperatures, and so forth) into load cases (basic cases), or
Combine pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases).
3. Build the basic cases by selecting one or more load components in the Loads Defined in
Input list and then dragging and dropping them to the Load Cases list to the right. You can
also type on any of the individual load case lines. Stress types (indicating which code
equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) are selected from the Stress
Type list.
Combination cases, if needed, must follow the basic cases. You can build combination
cases by selecting one or more load components and dragging and dropping the basic load
cases from either the Load Defined in Input primitives or from the other previous load
cases (by dragging the load case number) to combine cases (or create new load cases)
later in the list.
You can have a maximum of 999 static load cases. For more information, see Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on page 536).
Main Menu
After starting CAESAR II, the software opens the main menu and toolbar. Keep this window as
small as possible to conserve screen space.
Topics
File Menu ....................................................................................... 34
Input Menu ..................................................................................... 37
Analysis Menu ............................................................................... 37
Output Menu .................................................................................. 40
Language Menu ............................................................................. 41
Tools Menu .................................................................................... 42
Diagnostics Menu .......................................................................... 44
ESL Menu ...................................................................................... 46
View Menu ..................................................................................... 47
FEA Tools Menu ............................................................................ 47
Help Menu ..................................................................................... 48
File Menu
Provides commands to create and save piping and structural jobs.
Topics
Set Default Data Directory ............................................................. 35
New ................................................................................................ 35
Open .............................................................................................. 36
The data directory specification is very important because any configuration, units, or
other data files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.
New
Main window ribbon: File > New
Main window menu: File > New
Starts a new piping or structural job.
Open
Main window ribbon: File > Open
Main window menu: File > Open
Opens an existing piping or structural job. Use the Open dialog box to browse to and select the
job file to open. Click System to jump to the CAESAR II system folder. Click Example to jump to
the CAESAR II delivered example jobs folder.
You can also roll-back to a previous revision of a piping input job using the Open dialog box.
CAESAR II saves the last 25 revisions, deleting the oldest revision when necessary.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.
3. In the Previous Revisions list in the bottom-right corner of the Open dialog box, select the
revision to rollback to.
4. Click Open.
The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.
5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.
Input Menu
The Input menu is used to select the modules to define the job input parameters. Piping and
Underground are available for piping jobs. Structural Steel is available for structural jobs.
Piping
Underground
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Underground Pipe Modeler
Main window menu: Input > Underground
Converts an existing piping model to buried pipe. For more information, see Underground
Pipe Modeler (on page 488).
Structural Steel
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu displays the available calculations in CAESAR II.
Statics
Dynamics
Performs dynamic analysis of pipe or structure. The command is avail\-able after error
checking the input files. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis (on page 628).
WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Flanges
B31.G
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Expansion Joint Rating
AISC
NEMA SM23
API 610
API 617
API 661
HEI Standard
API 560
Output Menu
The Output menu lists all available output of piping or structural calculations that can be
selected for review.
Static
Harmonic
Spectrum/Modal
Time History
Animation - Harmonic
Animation - Static
Language Menu
CAESAR II supports multiple languages.
Identifies that the current language is English, which is the default language.
Japanese
Main window menu: Language > Japanese
Changes portions of the CAESAR II user interface text and the user documentation to
Japanese.
Many of the CAESAR II modules are available in English and Japanese, such as the
Main Menu, the Classic Piping Input dialog box, the Static Load Case Editor, and the Static
Output Processor. Additionally, significant portions of the documentation, including the various
guides and F1 Help information, are translated.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu activates various CAESAR II supporting utilities.
Configure/Setup
Material Database
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Materials
Main window menu: Tools > Materials
Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Database. For more information, see Material
Database (on page 1034).
Accounting
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Change Model Units
Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. For more information, see Change
Model Units (on page 1051).
Calculator
Create/Review Units
Multi-job Analysis
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Open System Folder
Main window menu: Tools > Open System Folder
Opens the CAESAR II System folder.
External Interfaces
Main window menu: Tools > External Interfaces
Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical). For more
information, see External Interfaces (on page 1054).
ISOGEN Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > Generate Stress Isometrics
Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress Isometrics (on
page 757).
I-Configure
Diagnostics Menu
Activates utilities to help troubleshoot problem installations.
CRC Check
Build Version
Error Review
QA Test
Runs the QATEST software, which compares output file information between a new version
of the software and the previously verified version. For more information, see QA Test (on
page 46).
CRC Check
Build Version
Error Review
QA Test
ESL Menu
The ESL menu accesses utilities that interact with the External Software Lock (ESL).
These commands are not available if you are using SmartPlant License Manager.
View ESL
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > View ESL
Main window menu: ESL > View ESL
Displays data stored on the ESL.
Access Codes
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Access Codes
Main window menu: ESL > Access Codes
Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail (in
conjunction with option below).
Authorization Codes
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Authorization Codes
Main window menu: ESL > Authorization Codes
See the Access Codes option.
Check ESL
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Check ESL
Main window menu: ESL >Check ESL
Verifies the location and version of the ESL.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Install ESL Driver
Main window menu: ESL >Install ESL Driver
Installs the ESL drivers.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Admin Control Center
Main window menu: ESL >Admin Control Center
Opens the ESL administrator control center.
View Menu
The View menu is used to enable and customize the status bar and all toolbars.
Toolbar
Main window menu: View > Toolbar
Displays or hides toolbars and allows you to customize toolbars.
Status Bar
Main window menu: View > Status Bar
Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window.
FEA Translator
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > FEA Translation
Results Comparison
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > Results Comparisons
Criticality Evaluation
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > Criticality Evaluation
NozzlePRO
Help Menu
The Help menu displays the available CAESAR II documentation.
CAESAR II is context-sensitive, which means you can access on-screen help by
clicking ? or pressing F1 when the cursor is in any input field. The help displays a definition for
the field and the required units, if applicable.
What's New
Online Documentation
Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation
Displays CAESAR II documentation. For more information, see Online Documentation (on
page 50).
Online Help
Online Registration
Email Support
Information
Main window menu: Help > Information
Provides phone, email, and address contacts for Intergraph CAS technical support, and
provides internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and information.
About CAESAR II
Online Documentation
The following documentation is available.
User's Guide
Applications Guide
Isogen Help
Build.txt File
QA Certificate
Configuration Editor
Click Alt D to reset an individual field value in the current configuration file to its default
value.
Click Reset All -> Set Current Defaults to reset all the values for the current configuration
file to the default values.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
2. Click the Reset All drop-down menu.
The various default file options display.
3. Select a default file.
The values in left-hand pane change to the default values. Values change to normal text
from bold text.
4. Save the changes.
The following sections explain each of the CAESAR II configuration file Category options.
In This Section
Computational Control ................................................................... 54
Database Definitions...................................................................... 60
FRP Pipe Properties ...................................................................... 66
Geometry Directives ...................................................................... 70
Graphic Settings ............................................................................ 72
Miscellaneous Options................................................................... 87
SIFs and Stresses ......................................................................... 91
Set/Change Password ................................................................... 103
Computational Control
The Computational Control category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Convergence Tolerances (on page 54)
Input Spreadsheet Defaults (on page 56)
Miscellaneous (on page 58)
Convergence Tolerances
Topics
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ............................................ 55
Friction Angle Variation.................................................................. 55
Friction Normal Force Variation ..................................................... 55
Friction Slide Multiplier................................................................... 55
Friction Stiffness ............................................................................ 55
Rod Increment (Degrees) .............................................................. 56
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) .............................................................. 56
Friction Stiffness
Specifies the friction restraint stiffness.
The default value for the friction restraint stiffness is 1.0E+06 lb/in.
If the structural load normal to a friction restraint is less than the restraint load multiplied by the
coefficient of friction, the pipe will not move at this support this restraint node is "non-sliding."
To model the non-sliding state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions perpendicular to the
restraint's line of action to oppose any sliding motion.
Nonlinear convergence problems may be alleviated by reducing the friction restraint stiffness.
Lower friction stiffness will more readily distribute friction loads throughout the system and allow
nonlinear convergence. However, this lower stiffness affects the accuracy of the results. Lower
stiffness values permit more "non-sliding" movement, but given the indeterminate nature of the
friction problem in general, this error may not be crucial.
Alpha Tolerance
Indicates the breakpoint at which CAESAR II decides that the entry in the Temp fields on the
input spreadsheet is a thermal expansion coefficient or a temperature. The default value is 0.05.
Any entry in the Temp fields whose absolute magnitude is less than 0.05 is taken to be a
thermal expansion coefficient in terms of inches per inch (dimensionless).
For straight pipe, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 is the same as Bourdon Pressure Option #2.
For elbows, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 should apply for forged and welded fittings where
the bend cross-section can be considered essentially circular.
The Bourdon effect (Trans only) is always considered when FRP pipe is used, regardless of
the actual setting of the Bourdon flag.
Miscellaneous
Topics
Bend Axial Shape .......................................................................... 58
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness ..................................................... 58
Include Insulation in Hydrotest ...................................................... 59
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases ................. 59
Incore Numerical Check ................................................................ 59
Missing Mass ZPA ......................................................................... 59
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends ................................................. 59
WRC-107 Interpolation Method ..................................................... 59
WRC-107(537) Version ................................................................. 60
WRC-107(537) Version
Sets the version of the WRC-107(537) bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:
Aug'65 - August 1965
Mar'79 - March 1979
March '79 1B1/2B1 - March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves. This is the
default setting.
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
Database Definitions
The Database Definitions category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Databases (on page 61)
ODBC Settings (on page 65)
Databases
Topics
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path .................................. 61
Default Spring Hanger Table ......................................................... 62
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 62
Load Case Template ..................................................................... 62
Piping Size Specification ............................................................... 63
Structural Database ....................................................................... 63
Units File Name ............................................................................. 63
User Material Database Filename ................................................. 63
Valve/Flange Files Location........................................................... 64
Valves and Flanges ....................................................................... 65
You must also copy the LIB_I, LIB_M, and Spec folders (found in the Program folder
along with the System folder) to each new system folder location. You can leave the Backup,
Examples, and Temp folders in the original program folder location, as shown in the example
below.
The file name requirements mentioned in the previous section apply for system folders on a
network or in a secondary location as well. In addition, you can set up network system files that
apply at a project level.
There must be a primary system folder, named System, in which the software can place
accounting, version, and diagnostic files that it creates during execution. The location of the
primary system folder is dependent on the specific edition of the Windows operating system, as
follows:
Windows 7 and later
"C:\ProgramData\INTERGRAPH CAS\CAESAR II\x.xx\System"
The x.xx in each of the above sample path represents the CAESAR II version number.
Expansion Joints
Specifies which expansion joint database the software should reference during subsequent input
sessions. Available databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics, IWK, Piping
Technology, and China.
Because the software writes the CAESAR.cfg file to the local data folder, you can configure
different data directories to reference different template files.
Different piping codes have different requirements for load cases. If you use multiple piping
codes in your job, CAESAR II refers to the piping code defined on the last element in the
model to determine which load cases to recommend as per the code standards.
The load case template file name is limited to 15 characters (including the extension).
LOAD.TPL (default)
Select this option to include alternate Sustained (SUS) load cases to consider all support
configurations for each corresponding Operating (OPE) condition as required by the B31.3
code. This option, which is only applicable to the B31.3 piping code, also includes the
additional Expansion (EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple
operating conditions.
LOAD_BASIC.TPL
Select this option if you do not need additional EXP stress range load cases and do not use
the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3.
LOAD_EXP.TPL
Select this option to include additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions and do not use the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3.
LOAD_ALT.TPL
Select this option to include alternate SUS load cases to consider all support configurations
for each corresponding OPE condition as required by the 2014 edition of B31.3. This option
is applicable to all piping codes (except for IGE/TD/12), and not limited to B31.3 piping code.
This option also includes the additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions.
Structural Database
Specifies which database file is used to acquire the structural steel shape labels and cross
section properties. Select one of the following: AISC 1977, AISC 1989, German 1991, South
African 1991, Korean 1990, Australian 1990, United Kingdom, or China.
Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data directory, you can configure
different data directories to reference different units files.
The software first searches for units files in the local data directory, followed by the active
System directory.
will be necessary to rename any additional UMD files. As long as the file suffix is UMD, and the
file resides in the \System folder, the various CAESAR II modules will be able to access them.
Material database files are accessed as described below:
Piping Input and Analysis
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin).
The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses the updated
materials in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.
The Material Database Editor
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin).
The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses updated materials
in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.
CAESAR II saves any changes or additions to the specified user material database (UMD).
ODBC Settings
Topics
Append Reruns to Existing Data ................................................... 65
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases .................... 65
ODBC Compliant Database Name ................................................ 65
Material Properties
Topics
Axial Modulus of Elasticity ............................................................. 66
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) ......................................... 67
FRP Alpha (xe-06) ......................................................................... 67
FRP Density ................................................................................... 67
FRP Laminate Type ....................................................................... 67
FRP Property Data File .................................................................. 68
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus .......................................... 68
FRP Density
Displays the weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set the
default weight density of FRP materials in the piping input module.
The data lines must exactly follow the order shown in the above sample FRP data
file. The four data lines defining the UKOOA envelope are intended for future use and may be
omitted.
Settings
Topics
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening ......................................................... 68
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress ..................................... 69
Use FRP Flexibilities ...................................................................... 69
Use FRP SIF .................................................................................. 69
Geometry Directives
The Geometry Directives category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Bends (on page 70)
Input Items (on page 71)
Bends
Topics
Bend Length Attachment Percent .................................................. 70
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle ................................................... 70
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle .................................................... 71
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend ................................................. 71
Input Items
Topics
Auto Node Number Increment ....................................................... 71
Connect Geometry Through CNodes ............................................ 71
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance .......................................... 72
Loop Closure Tolerance ................................................................ 72
New Job Z-Axis Vertical................................................................. 72
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings category provides access to configuration settings that used to set the
different plot option colors, font characteristics, and the view options.
Advanced Options
Contains options that should only be used by graphics experts. For more information, see
Advanced Options (on page 74).
Background Colors
Contains options that define the color of the plot window. For more information, see
Background Colors (on page 74).
CADWorx Options
Contains options that define the color and behavior for CADWorx drawings imported into
CAESAR II models. For more information, see CADWorx Options (on page 75).
Component Colors
Contains options that define the color for various components in the plot. For more
information, see Component Colors (on page 76).
Marker Options
Contains options that set the node marker color and size. For more information, see Marker
Options (on page 79).
Miscellaneous Options
Contains options that determine how graphics are displayed either by default or when using
the Reset Plot option. For more information, see Miscellaneous Options (on page 79).
Output Colors
Contains options that set the colors used when plotting code stress in output. For more
information, see Output Colors (on page 83).
Text Options
Contains options for defining font, font style, font size, and color. Scripts are supported. For
more information, see Text Options (on page 84).
Visual Options
Contains options that control general plotting visibility. For more information, see Visual
Options (on page 85).
To change a color, click it once and then click the ellipses button that appears to the
right. Select a color in the dialog box that appears, and then click OK. To save the color settings,
click Save and Exit before closing the Configuration Editor.
Advanced Options
Topics
Backplane Culling .......................................................................... 74
Culling Maximum Extent ................................................................ 74
Use Culling Frustrum ..................................................................... 74
Backplane Culling
This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
Background Colors
Topics
Bottom............................................................................................ 74
Top ................................................................................................. 74
Use Uniform Background Color ..................................................... 74
Bottom
Sets the color for the bottom of the plot window.
Top
Sets the color for the top of the plot window.
CADWorx Options
Topics
Color - Ambient .............................................................................. 75
Color - Face ................................................................................... 75
Color - Line .................................................................................... 75
Color - Specular ............................................................................. 75
Color - Transmission...................................................................... 75
Gloss Value ................................................................................... 75
Show Lines .................................................................................... 75
Show Model ................................................................................... 76
Use AutoCAD Colors ..................................................................... 76
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough ..................................................... 76
Color - Ambient
Sets the color of the ambient properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Color - Face
Sets the color of the face of the CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Color - Line
Sets the color of the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Color - Specular
Sets the color of the specular properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Color - Transmission
Sets the color of the transmission lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Gloss Value
Sets the level of the gloss value on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Show Lines
Indicates to show or hide the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Show Model
Indicates to show or hide the CADWorx drawing (model) that was imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Component Colors
You can also change component colors on the Plot Settings dialog box. For more
informaition, see Display Options Toolbar (on page 347).
Topics
Anchor CNode ............................................................................... 76
Anchors .......................................................................................... 76
Displacements (Component Color) ............................................... 77
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 77
Flange ............................................................................................ 77
Forces/Moments 1 (Component Color) ......................................... 77
Forces/Moments 2 (Component Color) ......................................... 77
Hanger CNode ............................................................................... 77
Hangers ......................................................................................... 77
Nozzles .......................................................................................... 77
Nozzle Limit Color 1....................................................................... 78
Nozzle Limit Color 2....................................................................... 78
Pipes .............................................................................................. 78
Restraint CNode ............................................................................ 78
Restraints ....................................................................................... 78
Rigids ............................................................................................. 78
Selection ........................................................................................ 78
SIFs/Tees ...................................................................................... 78
Steel ............................................................................................... 78
Anchor CNode
Sets the color of Cnode anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Anchors
Sets the color of anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Expansion Joints
Sets the color of expansion joints when displayed in the graphics.
Flange
Sets the color of all flanges when displayed in the graphics.
Hanger CNode
Sets the color of Cnode hangers when displayed in the graphics.
Hangers
Sets the color of the spring hangers (and spring cans) when displayed in the graphics.
Nozzles
Sets the color of all nozzles when displayed in the graphics.
Pipes
Sets the color of all pipe elements when displayed in the graphics.
Restraint CNode
Sets the color of the restraint Cnode when displayed in the graphics.
Restraints
Sets the color of all restraints (except for anchors and hangers) when displayed in the graphics.
Rigids
Sets the color of all rigid elements when displayed in the graphics.
Selection
Sets the color of the selected element when displayed in the graphics.
SIFs/Tees
Sets the color of all tees when displayed in the graphics.
Steel
Sets the color of all structural steel elements in both the structural steel plot and the piping plot
when structural steel is included.
Marker Options
Topics
Marker Color .................................................................................. 79
Marker Size .................................................................................... 79
Marker Color
Sets the color of the node markers shown in the graphics.
Marker Size
Sets the size of the node markers shown in the graphics.
Miscellaneous Options
These options determine how graphics display by default or how they display when you use the
Reset Plot option while in the graphics.
Topics
Default Operator ............................................................................ 79
Default Projection Mode ................................................................ 79
Default Render Mode..................................................................... 80
Default View ................................................................................... 80
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble ..................................................... 80
Force Black and White Printing ..................................................... 80
Idle Processing Count.................................................................... 81
Optimal Frame Rate ...................................................................... 81
Restore Previous Anchor Size ....................................................... 81
Restore Previous Hanger Size ...................................................... 81
Restore Previous Operator ............................................................ 81
Restore Previous Projection Mode ................................................ 81
Restore Previous Render Mode .................................................... 82
Restore Previous Restraint Size .................................................... 82
Restore Previous View .................................................................. 82
Video Driver ................................................................................... 82
Default Operator
Controls the initial display of graphics. Available options are Zoom to Window, Annotate,
Orbit, Pan, Restore Previous, Select, and Zoom with Mouse. The default setting is Zoom to
Window.
Default View
Specifies the graphical view. Available options are SE Isometric, SW Isometric, NW Isometric,
NE Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and Restore Previous. The default
view setting is SE Isometric.
True
Restore the projection mode to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.
Video Driver
Determines the video driver used in plotting. Select OpenGL, Direct 3D, or Windows Basic
Video.
Output Colors
Topics
Actual Stress Settings.................................................................... 83
Displaced Shape ............................................................................ 83
Percent Stress Settings ................................................................. 83
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
percent of code allowable. For more information, see Percent Stress Settings (on page 83).
Displaced Shape
Sets the color of the Displaced Shape option when displayed in output graphics.
Level 2 20 to 40%
Level 3 40 to 60%
Level 4 60 to 80%
Level 5 80 to 100%
Level 6 >100%
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
actual stress. For more information, see Actual Stress Settings (on page 83).
Text Options
You can use these options to select font, font style, and font size and color. Scripts
are supported. The different plot texts are node numbers and names, annotation, and legends.
Topics
Annotation Text.............................................................................. 84
Legend Text ................................................................................... 84
Node Text ...................................................................................... 84
Output Text .................................................................................... 84
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible ............................................. 84
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible ............................................. 85
Annotation Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of annotation text.
Legend Text
Sets the text color and font style settings of all legends, such as displacements, temperatures,
and so forth, when displayed in the graphics.
Node Text
Determines the color and font style settings of node numbers and node names when displayed
in the graphics.
Output Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of output text.
Visual Options
These options control general plotting visibility.
Topics
Always Use System Colors ........................................................... 85
Always Use System Fonts ............................................................. 85
Axis Mode ...................................................................................... 85
Fixed Size Restraint Size .............................................................. 85
Hide Overlapping Text ................................................................... 85
Restraint Helix is a Line ................................................................. 86
Shadow Mode ................................................................................ 86
Show Bounding Box ...................................................................... 86
Smooth Transitions ........................................................................ 86
Use Fixed Size Restraints ............................................................. 86
Visibility % ...................................................................................... 86
Axis Mode
Turns on and off the display of the axes in the plot. By default, the axes displays in the lower left
corner of the plot.
Shadow Mode
Defines the shadow mode. Select Hard, Soft, or None. The default setting is None.
Smooth Transitions
Specifies whether graphics have a smooth transition when the view is changed.
True
Enable smooth transition.
False
Change the view instantly. This option reduces the video card memory requirements.
Visibility %
Determines the percentage of incident light that passes through an element volume when using
the Translucent Objects or Hidden Lines option in the graphics. Setting this to zero makes all
elements completely opaque while a setting of 100% renders all elements transparent. The
default setting is 50%.
Miscellaneous Options
The Miscellaneous Options category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Input Items (on page 87)
Output Items (on page 89)
System Level Items (on page 90)
Input Items
Topics
Autosave Time Interval .................................................................. 88
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail ........................................ 88
Disable Undo/Redo Ability ............................................................. 88
Dynamic Example Input Text ......................................................... 88
Enable Autosave ............................................................................ 89
Prompted Autosave ....................................................................... 89
Enable Autosave
Controls whether CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
True
Turn on Autosave.
False
Turn off Autosave.
Prompted Autosave
Controls whether the software prompts you at the specified time interval to save the input. You
must also set Enable Autosave to True.
True
Prompt before performing the autosave
False
Perform the autosave without prompting.
Output Items
Topics
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes ....................................... 89
Output Reports by Load Case ....................................................... 89
Output Table of Contents............................................................... 89
Time History Animation.................................................................. 90
True
Generate a table of contents upon exit. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of a table of contents.
Disadvantages
The archive makes it difficult to get to the component files.
The archive is big, because it contains all component files. Therefore, saving or
transmitting takes more resources than manipulating a single component file.
For larger jobs, the compression/decompression activity slows down file access.
User ID
Creates a control file for a specific computer. Type a three-character user ID for each user, or
more exactly, each workstation.
When multiple workstations attempt to access CAESAR II data in the same directory
simultaneously, the control file in the data directory becomes corrupted, which may cause
abnormal software execution. In situations where there may be more than one concurrent user
running CAESAR II in a given data directory, you can use this option to create a separate
control file for each computer, thus allowing simultaneous access of the CAESAR II data within
the same folder.
This user ID is not a password and is specific to the computer requiring access and
not to the user.
Advanced Settings
Topics
Class 1 Branch Flexibility............................................................... 92
Use Schneider ............................................................................... 93
Use WRC 329 ................................................................................ 93
flexible and will carry less load. All changes to the model are completely transparent to the user.
In systems where the intersection flexibility is a major component of the overall system stiffness,
you are urged to run the analysis both with and without the Class 1 Branch Flexibility active to
determine the effect of this modeling on the analysis.
Use Schneider
Activates the Schneider reduced intersection assumptions. By default, this setting is False.
It was because of observations by Schneider that much of the work on WRC 329 was started.
Schneider pointed out that the code SIFs could be in error when the d/D ratio at the intersection
was less than 1.0 and greater than 0.5. In this d/D range, the SIFs could be in error by a factor
as high as 2.0. Using the Schneider option in CAESAR II results in a multiplication of the out of
plane branch stress intensification by a number between 1 and 2 when the d/D ratio for the
inter\-section is between 0.5 and 1.0. For B31.1 and other codes that do not differentiate
between in and out-of-plane SIFs, the multiplication will be used for the single stress
intensification given.
Code-Specific Settings
Topics
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix ..................................................................... 93
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees .......................... 94
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF .......................... 94
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor ...................................................... 94
No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs ........................................... 94
Occasional Load Factor ................................................................. 95
Pressure Variation in EXP Case .................................................... 95
Reduced Intersection ..................................................................... 95
Reduced Intersection
Defines the code rules for reduced intersection. Select one of the following options:
B31.1 (Pre 1980)
Use the pre-1980 B31.1 code rules used for reduced intersection. These rules did not define
a separate branch SIF for the reduced branch end. The branch stress intensification factor
will be the same as the header stress intensification factor regardless of the branch-to-
header diameter ratio.
B31.1 (Post 1980)
Use the post-1980 B31.1 code rules for reduced intersections. The reduced intersection SIF
equations in B31.1 from 1980 through 1989 generated unnecessarily high SIFs because of
a mistake made in the implementation. (This is according to WRC329.) For this reason,
many analysts opted for the pre-1980 B31.1 SIF calculation. CAESAR II corrects this
mistake by automatically setting B31.1 Reduced Z Fix to True (the default setting). You can
vary the status of this flag in the CAESAR II configuration file to generate any interpretation
of B31.1 that you want. The default for a new job is for B31.1(Post 1980) and for B31.1
Reduced Z Fix to be set to True.
The No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs (on page 94) option also affects the
SIF calculations at reduced intersections.
WRC 329
Use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced intersection is
any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329 recommendations
result in more conservative stress calculations in some instances and less conservative
stress calculations in others. In all cases, the WRC329 values should be more accurate and
more in-line with the respective codes intent.
ASME Sect. III
Use the 1985 ASME Section III NC and ND rules for reduced intersections.
Schneider
Activate the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor multiplication. Has
the same effect as Use Schneider (on page 93).
General Settings
Topics
Add F/A in Stresses ....................................................................... 96
Add Torsion in SL Stress ............................................................... 96
All Cases Corroded........................................................................ 97
Allow User's SIF at Bend ............................................................... 97
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lam) .................................. 97
Default Piping Code ....................................................................... 98
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable ............................... 98
Use PD/4t ...................................................................................... 98
Yield Stress Criterion ..................................................................... 98
stresses by implicitly calling for longitudinal stresses only. To force CAESAR II to include the
torsion term in those codes that do not include it already by default, select Yes.
In a sustained stress analysis of a very hot piping system subject to creep, it is
recommended that you include torsion in the sustained stress calculation using this parameter in
the setup file.
When the piping code specifies hoop stress evaluation, the software uses the code's
hoop stress calculation and ignores Base Hoop Stress On. For example, offshore or
transportation piping codes, such as B31.4, B31.8, and DNV, specify hoop stress evaluation.
Use PD/4t
Instructs the software to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when computing
sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form when the pipe wall thickness is thin.
This option is used most often when you are comparing CAESAR II results to older pipe stress
software results. The more comprehensive calculation--the default--is recommended.
Code stress refers to a stress calculated by an equation provided by the code. For
more information on code-defined stresses, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
The Stresses Extended output report produced by CAESAR II contains a value representative of
the maximum stress state through the cross section, calculated according to the indicated yield
criteria theory.
Configuration
Failure Theory Calculated Stress
Setting
Maximum Energy of
von Mises Octahedral Shearing Stress
Distortion
CAESAR II computes the selected stress at four points along the axis normal to the plane of
bending (outside top, inside top, inside bottom, outside bottom), and includes the maximum
value in the stresses report. The equations used for each of these yield criteria are listed below.
If von Mises Theory is used, the software computes the octahedral shearing stress, which differs
from the von Mises stress by a constant factor.
For codes B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII,
and DnV, this setting controls which equation the software uses to compute the equivalent
stress. For these codes, the software uses the equations shown in the piping code to determine
the yield stress criterion in the Stresses Extended output report.
Stress Formulation
CAESAR II reports the largest stress using four calculation points through the pipe cross
section, as show in the following figure.
The four points are established by a line perpendicular to the bending moment acting on the
pipe (shown in red). Points 1 and 4 are on the outside surface of the pipe, where radial stress is
zero. Point 1 is in bending tension and Point 4 is in bending compression. Points 2 and 3 are on
the inside surface of the pipe where radial stress is compressive (negative) pressure.
Longitudinal stress (Sl), hoop stress (Sh), radial stress (Sr) and shear stress (St) are calculated
at each position using the appropriate formulas.
Radial
Shear
Stress
Position Longitudinal Stress (Sl) Hoop Stress (Sh) Stress (St)
(Sr)
The table formulas assume that this is a B31.3-style stress equation with Lam hoop
stress.
These stresses are translated into the principal stresses S1, S2, and S3. The following shows a
graphical representation of a typical calculation of the four position points.
Determine the principal stress using the longitudinal stress (Sl), the hoop stress (Sh), and the
shear stress (St)which sets the red line. The principal stress refers to the points where the red
circle crosses the normal stress axis (shear stress equals zero). Place the radial stress (Sr)
(which has a shear stress of zero) on the same axis. The largest intersection point is S1 and the
smallest is S3.
Use the S1, S2, and S3 values in the equation above to determine the octahedral shearing
stress at each position. CAESAR II reports the largest of these four values.
Legacy Settings
Topics
B31.3 Implement Appendix P ........................................................ 101
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) ................................. 101
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress ....................................... 101
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index ...................................... 102
|Sa| + Se
Include the absolute value of the axial force to the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range,
and report the sum as the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range, Se. This selection is
more conservative than (|Sa| + Sb)2.
(|Sa| + Sb)2
Include the absolute value for the axial force to the bending term in the (Expansion)
Displacement Stress Range equation (Se, Eq (17) in B31.3). This selection is less
conservative than |Sa| + Se. This option more closely follows theory.
Default
Follow the recommended setting for the axial force in expansion stress based on the piping
code you specified for the job. (For example, the B31.3 piping code recommends to use the
(|Sa| + Sb)2 equation for axial force. So, when you set this configuration setting to Default, if
the job uses the B31.3 piping code, the software uses the (|Sa| + Sb)2 option for calculating
axial force in the expansion stress.)
B31.3 Interpretation 1-34 (February 23, 1981) File: 1470-1 states that for sustained and
occasional loads, you can use an SIF of 0.75i, but not less than 1.0. To comply with this
interpretation (1-34), type 0.7500.
B31.3 Interpretation 6-03 (December 14, 1987) File B31-87-022 permits you to ignore the
stress intensification for sustained and occasional loads. To comply with this interpretation
(6-03), type 0.0001.
Set/Change Password
You can set password protection for the configuration file using the Security command. By
setting a password on the primary configuration file, a corporate standard can be enforced
throughout the network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data folders will
allow only modification of display or other environment directives that do not affect calculated
results.
New Password
Type a password. After entering a password, you have the ability to change configuration
settings from the program folder, or alter or remove the password.
Change Password
Allows you to change your current password. You must first type the correct existing password.
The current password may be changed at any time by anyone who has authorization to do so.
After a password has been set, the software disables all computation controls, stress options,
and any other configuration options, which could affect the CAESAR II computations.
Remove Password
Deletes the current password. Anyone with authorization can remove the current password by
entering the correct existing password for this option. After a password is removed, all options
that appear in the Configuration Editor can be modified from any folder where you have
read/write access rights.
This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menus and
toolbars which perform a number of supporting operations, and data fields that contain
information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model displays
automatically. This model updates as you add new elements.
In This Section
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box ..................................................... 106
Available Commands ..................................................................... 226
3D Modeler .................................................................................... 370
S3D/SPR Model View .................................................................... 388
F2 From Node
F3 DX
F4 Diameter
F5 Temp 1
F6 Material
F8 Refractory Thickness
F9 Line number
Node Numbers
Indicates the node numbers for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a
piping element, you must specify the element end points, called the From node and the To
node. The software uses these points as locations at which you can type or extract information.
You must specify a From and To node for all elements.
You can set the Auto Node Number Increment configuration setting in Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu and CAESAR II generates the From and To node values
automatically (to a value other than zero) based on the increment you specify.
For information on controlling the display of node numbers, see Node Numbers (on
page 338).
From
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be
numeric, ranging from 1 to 32000. Typically, the From node number is automatically
generated by CAESAR II from the preceding element. You can change the node numbers,
but be careful not to use the same node number more than once in a model.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 32000. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not to use the
same node number more than once in a model.
Name
Assigns non-numeric names to node points. Double-click the Name check box to display an
auxiliary dialog box where you can assign names of up to 10 characters to the From and To
nodes. These names display with (or instead) of the node numbers in graphic plots and
reports. In Piping Input, click the down arrow on Node Numbers (in the Plot Tools
toolbar) and select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not node
numbers.
Non-numeric names can be truncated in 80-column reports.
Deltas
Indicates the node numbers for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length.
The vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes
between the From node and the To node. In most cases you only need to use one of the three
options, because the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is
skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must define at least one option for all
elements except zero-length expansion joints.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid
entries include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the
orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.
DX
Specifies the X component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch -
fraction or meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use
simple forms of addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this
field.
DY
Specifies the Y component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch -
fraction or meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use
simple forms of addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this
field.
DZ
Specifies the Z component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch -
fraction or meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use
simple forms of addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this
field.
Offsets
Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its
actual dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box to select or clear this option.
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From
end of the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of
the element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to
zero.
Thermal expansion is 0 for the offset portion of an offset element. No element flexibility is
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage
for the offset element.
Length
Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this
field.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.
For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Y-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Z-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... 1.0
Pipe Sizes
Indicates the pipe dimensions for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type the dimensions for the element. Plus mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping
code. Seam weld is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from
one element to the next during the design session so you only need to type values for those
elements at which a change occurs. You can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules.
CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside
diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe
size specification. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu or click CAESAR II
Configuration on the CAESAR II Tools toolbar to select ANSI, JIS, or DIN as the piping
size specification.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Diameter
Specifies the pipe diameter. Normally, you should type the nominal diameter and CAESAR
II converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion:
Use a modified UNITS file with the Nominal Pipe Schedules turned off,
Specify diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units
the tolerance on diameter is 0.063 in.).
Use F1 to obtain additional information and the current units for this input box. Available
nominal diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set by the
configuration software. The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 42
JIS Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file jp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
Wt/Sch
Specifies the thickness of the pipe. Normal input consists of a schedule indicator (such as S,
XS, or 40), which is converted to the proper wall thickness by CAESAR II. If actual thickness
is entered, CAESAR II accepts it as entered. Available schedule indicators are determined
by the active piping specification, set by the configuration software.
ANSI B36.10 Steel Nominal Wall Thickness Designation:
S - Standard
XS - Extra Strong
XXS - Double Extra Strong
ANSI B36.10 Steel Pipe Numbers:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ANSI B36.19 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S 80S
JIS Pipe Schedules
1990 Steel Schedules:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1990 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S
DIN Pipe Schedules
None
Only the s (standard) schedule applies to wall thickness calculations for DIN.
Seam Welded
Indicates whether the piping element is seam welded
B31.1 / B31.3
If the B31.1 or B31.3 piping codes are active, select the Seam-welded check box to activate
the Wl box. Wl (the weld strength reduction factor) is used by the software to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the element.
IGE/TD/12
If the IGE/TD/12 piping code is active, select the Seam welded check box when straight
pipes are seam welded. This option affects the stress intensification factor calculations for
that pipe section due to seam welded fabrication.
WI Factor
Specifies the WI factor.
+Mill Tol %; Wl
Specifies the positive mill tolerance. This option is only enabled when IGE/TD/12 is active. It
is used when the Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is
set to Plus Mill Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on
the nominal wall thickness increased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
If the B31.3 piping code is activated, this box specifies the weld strength reduction factor
(W l), to be used in the minimum wall calculation for straight pipe.
-Mill Tol %
Displays the negative mill tolerance. This value is read from the configuration file and used
in minimum wall thickness calculations. Also, for IGE/TD/12, this value is used when the
Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to Plus Mill
Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal wall
thickness, decreased by this percentage. You can change this value on an element-by-
element basis.
Corrosion
Specifies the corrosion allowance used to calculate a reduced section modulus. There is a
configuration option available to consider all stress cases as corroded. For more
information, see All Cases Corroded (on page 97).
Pipe Density
Displays the pipe density value. The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when
you provide a proper material number. You can override this value at any time. The software
then duplicates the value through the rest of the input.
Fluid Density
Displays the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads. When the specific gravity of the fluid is
known, you can type that instead of the density. For example, you could type 0.85SG.
Specific gravities are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on input. To type
specific gravity, follow the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces). The software
automatically converts this value to density.
In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are typed in pounds per cubic
inch.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Operating Conditions
Indicates the temperatures and pressures for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test
pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures, not changes from
the ambient temperature. CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and
allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, you can
directly specify the thermal strains. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 56).
Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are
typed as gauge values and cannot be negative. Each temperature and each pressure that you
typed creates a loading for you to use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure
data carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Typing a value in the Hydro
pressure box causes CAESAR II to build a hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see New Job Ambient Temperature (on
page 57).
Temperatures
Specifies operating temperatures. There are nine temperature boxes to allow up to nine
different operating cases. The error checker validates temperature values to insure that they
are within the code allowed ranges. You can exceed the ranges by typing the expansion
coefficient in the temperature box in units of length/length. When you are using material 21
(user-defined material), type a thermal expansion coefficient instead of a temperature.
Values, whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance, in the temperature box
are taken to be thermal expansion coefficients. The Alpha Tolerance is a configuration file
parameter and is taken to be 0.05 by default. For example, if you wanted to type the thermal
expansion coefficient equivalent to 11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 1 ft./ 12in. = .009475 in./in.
Type this into the appropriate Temperature box.
A cut short does no more than reduce the length of a pipe element to zero. For
example; if you wanted 8.5 cm of cold spring you could put in an 8.5 cm long element and
then thermally shrink its length to zero. This allows the cold spring to be manipulated as an
individual thermal case rather than as a concentrated force.
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. Use the
following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
Thermal Expansion
Displays thermal expansion coefficients. CAESAR II displays the corresponding thermal
expansion coefficients in the fields when you type operating temperatures in the
temperature fields. When the thermal expansion coefficients are not in the material
database, you can type thermal expansion coefficients in the temperature field if the
absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance in the configuration. The Alpha
Tolerance is 0.05 by default. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 56). You
can type up to nine thermal expansion coefficients in units of length/length in the
temperature field on the Extended Operating Conditions dialogue box. CAESAR II
displays these values in the Thermal Expansion boxes.
Pressures
Specifies operating pressures. There are 10 pressure boxes, which allow up to nine
operating and one hydrotest pressure cases. When you type multiple pressures, be careful
with the setup of the analysis load cases. Review the recommended load cases provided by
the software carefully before proceeding.
Specify operating pressures 4 through 9 through the Extended Operating Conditions
dialog box, accessed by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the standard
Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can work with this dialog box open and move
the box around for your convenience.
Type a value in the HydroPress box to signal CAESAR II to recommend a hydrotest load
case.
Type the design gage pressure (that is, the difference between the internal and external
pressures).
The software disables the Bourdon effect (pressure elongation) by default because it
assumes the job to be non-conservative. If you want to enable the Bourdon effect, you
can do so by using the Special Execution options. For more information, see New Job
Bourdon Pressure (on page 58).
The Bourdon effect is always considered in the analysis of fiberglass reinforced plastic
pipe (Material ID=20).
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. You
must use the following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
Component Information
Specifies details for special components (such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints, and
tees), which require additional information. Select or clear these options by double-clicking the
applicable component check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Bend
Double-click Bend if the active element ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint. This displays
the auxiliary dialog box on the right side of the screen. CAESAR II usually assigns three
nodes to a bend to define the near, mid, and far nodes on the bend. For more information,
see Bends (on page 120).
Rigid
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays the auxiliary dialog box to collect the component weight. For
more information, see Rigid (on page 124).
For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II
computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then
adds that value to the defined weight value.
The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same
weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of
insulation added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an
equivalent straight pipe multiplied by 1.75.
If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the
element is an artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In
this case, the software does not calculate an insulation or fluid weight for that
element.
The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make
sure that the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.
Expansion Joint
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays the
auxiliary dialog box used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints (on page 125).
Expansion joints can be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point)
or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the single-point
case, you must type all stiffness. In the continuous element case, you must omit either the
lateral or angular stiffness.
Bends
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend mid-
point (M).
Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override
this value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.
3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.
5D - Indicates a 5D bend. The radius is equal to 5 times the nominal diameter.
Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and
can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend
should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the
bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types
are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Angle
Displays the angle to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional nodes at any
point on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five degrees of each
other. You can change the 5 node-spacing limit by using the configuration. For more
information, see Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend (on page 71).
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By
default, CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in
this box) as well as at the zero degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.
Node
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node
numbers must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If
numbering by fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for
the node number for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat
the added nodes on the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend
curvature may be restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes.
Nodes on a bend curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or
for the location of a restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent
intersection point for the bend.
Miter Points
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR
II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to
be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be
broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of cuts in
the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate
the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the
bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the
inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of
the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn,
and once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for
the flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
K-Factor
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. CAESAR II calculates the factor according to the current
piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.
Seam-Welded
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the
Wl box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine
the minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded
elbow fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available
when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Wl for Bends
B31.1 / B31.3 - Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W l) for bend elements. This
value is used in the minimum wall thickness calculations.
ISO 14692 - Replaces this box with EPTp/(EbTb) where Ep and Eb are the axial modulus of
the attached pipe and the bend respectively, T p and Tb are the average wall thickness of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively. If these values are omitted, the software uses a
default value of 1.0. This value affects the calculation of the flexibility factor for bends.
Rigid
Indicates that you are supplying rigid element data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Rigid check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type a value for Rigid Weight. This value should always be zero or positive and should not
include the weight of any insulation or fluid. If you type no weight, then CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.
Rigid weights are defined automatically if you use the Valve and Flange database.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe and 1.75
times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
Rigid elements with zero weight are considered to be modeling constructs and do not have fluid
or insulation weight added.
The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe. For example, a 13 in. long 12 in.
diameter rigid element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact should
be observed when modeling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel, or small
pipe/heavy equipment model. The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times the
thickness of the rigid element. For additional details, see Technical Discussions (on page 898).
Type the rigid element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes.
See Valve (on page 246) for automatic input for these types of components.
Expansion Joints
Indicates that you are supplying expansion joint data. Select or clear this option by double-
clicking Expansion Joint on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for expansion joint stiffness parameters and
effective diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, you must omit either the transverse or
the bending stiffness.
Setting the effective diameter to zero deactivates the pressure thrust load. Use this
method in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.
Effective ID
Specifies the effective inside diameter for pressure thrust from the manufacturer's catalog.
For all load cases, including pressure, CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust force
tending to blow the bellows apart. If left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to
pressure is calculated. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint:
Aeff. The Effective ID is calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / )1/2
Reducer
Indicates that you are supplying reducer data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Reducer on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Specifies the Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values at the To node of the reducer. The
diameter and wall thickness at the From node of the reducer element are taken from the current
piping element data.
CAESAR II constructs a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a
successively larger or smaller diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II
calculates SIFs according to the current piping code (for more information, see Code
Compliance Considerations (on page 977)) and applies these internally to the Code Stress
Calculations. These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other
code-specific considerations), Alpha. If Alpha is left blank, then the software calculates this
value based on the change in pipe diameter over 60% of the element length. If specified,
Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are carried forward when the next pipe element is created as
Diameter and Wt/Sch. If not specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are assumed to be equal
to Diameter and Wt/Sch on the following element dialog box.
If there is no value for Alpha is specified on the dialog box, CAESAR II reports the alpha value
in the Errors and Warnings dialog box.
Diameter 2
Specifies the diameter at the To of the reducer element. The value carries forward as the
diameter of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that
feature is active. If left blank, CAESAR II uses the diameter from the following element as
Diameter 2.
Thickness 2
Specifies the wall thickness at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries
forward as the wall thickness of the following element. Nominal values are converted to
actual values if that feature is active. If this option is left blank, CAESAR II uses the
thickness from the following element as Thickness 2.
Alpha
Specifies the slope, in degrees, of the reducer transition. If left blank, CAESAR II assumes
the slope equal to the arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) / (length of sloped portion of
reducer).
Because all reducers are different, the actual length of sloped portion of reducer is unknown
unless you define it. Because of this, if Alpha is not specified, CAESAR II makes an
assumption that the length of sloped portion of reducer is equal to 60% of the total reducer
length. If you leave the Alpha value blank, then CAESAR II defaults to arc tangent 1/2(the
change in diameters) / (0.60 x element length).
R1
Specifies the transition radius for the large end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4,
Table 8 of IGE/TD/12 Code. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
R2
Specifies the transition radius for the small end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4,
Table 8 of IGE/TD/12. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Indicates that you are supplying SIF and tee data. Select or clear by double-clicking the SIFs &
Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or fitting
types, for up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you override this
behavior. Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display as appropriate
for the selected fitting.
Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking.
These messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the
intersection SIFs.
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that follows.
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*
4 SWEEPOLET CROTC
H
5 WELDOLET CROTC
H
11 THREADED JOINT
*This list does not include input items effecting SIF calculations for ISO 14692. For more
information on ISO 14692, see Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692
(on page 139).
Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the
To node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is
most often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the
intersection if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type
once. CAESAR II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the
appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint
type once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only
apply to the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment
> Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe
the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad
can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration
option exists to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 97). If you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can
specify SIFs for bend To nodes. The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire
bend curvature.
CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend
curvature regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly
used to intensify injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-
type of supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF
Calculations (on page 131) table.
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of
tee type with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 148).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3),
and Joint (2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO
14692 code for non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the
calculations specified in the code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for
the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for
tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type
of Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee
types, CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement
tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in
the Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets,
and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the
WRC 329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted,
Ftg Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
CROTCH R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this
value can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection.
If you attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that
there is a smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce
the resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
WELD (D)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
FILLET
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31
piping codes for further clarification.
Weld ID
Specifies the weld identifier value. Choose from the following options:
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
This box is only applicable for:
IGE/TD/12
Bonney Forge Sweepolets
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets
Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes or the IGE/TD/12 code
If you specify a value of 1 - Finished/Ground Flush, then the software considers the weld
to be ground flush on the inside and out and it calculates the SIF as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt
welds, see WELD (D) (on page 136).
B1; Wc
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.
ASME Class 2 and ASME Class 3
Defines the primary stress index used for the given node on the current element.
Unless you otherwise over ride this value, the following values are applied for ASME Class 2
and Class 3 piping:
Intersections: B1 = 0.5
B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W c) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case.
BS-7159 and UKOOA
Defines the pressure stress multiplier (m) if it is different than the code requirements. For
straight pipe, m = 1.0; for bends and tees, m is defined in Figures 7.1 and 7.12 of the BS
7159 Code.
IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).
B2
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is
only applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Intersections: B1=0.5
You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values
for any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are
defined. SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.
1 Tee
2 Joint
3 Qualified Tee
Specifying a tee, a qualified tee, or a joint in the Type box allows CAESAR II to perform the
correct allowable stress calculations.
Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees.
Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints
and fittings.
Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for
qualified service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
Stresses are only intensified at the element end going to the specified node. For example, if
two pipes frame into node 10, one going from 5 to 10, and the other from 10 to 15 and a
stress intensification factor of 2.0 for node 10 is defined on the element from 5 to 10, then
the 10 end of the element from 5 to 10 has a stress intensification of 2.0 and the 10 end of
the element from 10 to 15 has a stress intensification of 1.0.
You can use user-defined stress intensification factors to override code calculated values for
nodes at intersections. For example, let node 40 be an intersection defined by an
unreinforced fabricated tee. The header pipes framing into the intersection go from 35 to 40
and from 40 to 45. The branch pipe framing into the intersection goes from 175 to 40. The
code-calculated values for the stress intensification factors in the header pipes are:
SIF (ii) = 4.50
SIF (io) = 3.75
and in the branch pipe are
SIF (ii) = 6.70
SIF (io) = 5.58
Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress
intensification factors to be 2.3 and 1.87 respectively and the branch stress intensification
factors to be equal to the code recommended value, which is 6.70 and 5.58. To properly
override the code-calculated stress intensification factors for the header pipes, two pipe
elements must be modified:
35 to 40 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
40 to 15 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so
part of the branch pipe data might appear:
175 to 40 NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF (ii):
SIF (io):
If either of the SIF boxes for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the code-
calculated value would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated values
exist along with user-specified values.
If the element from 110 to 115 needs the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is
2.0, then a part of that element data might appear:
Leaving the out-of-plane stress intensification factor blank implies that it is equal to the in-
plane stress intensification factor. There are no code-calculated values to override these
user-input values.
If you do not specify Torsion SIF (it), Axial SIF (ia), and Pressure SIF (ip), CAESAR II
calculates the values as 1.
The ASME B31.3 code update also introduced using the stress indices in sustained stress
equations.
If you do not specify the In-Plane Index (Ii), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of
either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
If you do not specify the Out-Plane Index (Io), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of
either of 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF (io) or 1.
If you do not specify the Torsion Index (It), Axial Index (Ia), and Pressure Index (Ip),
CAESAR II sets these values to 1.
Currently, the software does not use the Pressure SIF (ip) or Pressure Index (Ip) in
the calculation.
You are not permitted to override code-calculated stress intensification factors for bend
elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend option is set to True in the configuration file.
Additionally, bend stress intensification factors supersedes any code-calculated intersection
stress intensification factors for the same node. This characteristic allows you to apply code-
calculated intersection stress intensification factors to dummy legs without disturbing the
normal bend stress intensification factors. The node on the dummy leg, which is also on the
bend curvature, is defined as an intersection on the Intersection SIF Scratchpad. The
intersection stress intensification factors are calculated and can be applied to the dummy leg
end that connects to the bend. Bend stress intensification factors are unchanged.
Stress intensification factors can be calculated for intersections having one, two, or three
pipes framing into it. Where two pipes form a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that
the larger pipe is the header and the smaller the branch.
Where one pipe forms a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the intersection is full
sized.
CAESAR II does not calculate stress intensification factors for intersections having more
than three pipes framing into it (for example, a cross, and for non 90-degree branches, such
as lateral intersections).
SIF Scratchpad
View the stress intensification factors calculated by CAESAR II interactively from the
Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection
Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
View the stress intensification factors at bends from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by
clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Bends or Bend SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar.
The SIF scratchpads display after you type in the node number to review when prompted.
The node must be a valid bend node when reviewing SIFs at bends.
You can interactively change any of the data and recalculate the SIFs. This allows you to
see the effect of changing geometries and properties on code stress intensification factors.
CAESAR II allows you to transfer data from the scratchpad back to the actual
model.
IGE\TD\12 Requirements
IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized
SIF parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text
and figures at the end of this section.
Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the
To node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is
most often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the
intersection if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type
once. CAESAR II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the
appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint
type once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only
apply to the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment
> Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe
the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad
can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration
option exists to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 97). If you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can
specify SIFs for bend To nodes. The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire
bend curvature.
CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend
curvature regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly
used to intensify injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-
type of supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tees or joints.
Do/r3
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 148).
Weldolet
Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
T/Th/T'b
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 148).
Te/Tb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee with Pad
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Full Encirclement Tee
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
rp/do
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
r2/rc
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Sweepolet
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
r1/Tc/Lh
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Sweepolet
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
L1/Lb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
IGE\TD\12 Reference
Use the figures below to identify the specialized parameters.
Forged Tee
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
Sweepolet
Fabricated Tee
Weld ID
Specifies the weld identifier value. Choose from the following options:
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
This box is only applicable for:
IGE/TD/12
Bonney Forge Sweepolets
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets
Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes or the IGE/TD/12 code
If you specify a value of 1 - Finished/Ground Flush, then the software considers the weld
to be ground flush on the inside and out and it calculates the SIF as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt
welds, see WELD (D) (on page 136).
Fatigue Class
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any
values selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except
when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
Boundary Conditions
Indicates you are supplying information on items which restrain (or impose movement on) the
pipe, such as restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles, or displacements. Select or clear these
options by double-clicking the applicable check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Though not required, it is recommended that you define such information on the dialog box
which has that point as the From node or To node. This is of benefit if the data must be located
for modification. The auxiliary dialog box tabs allow you to specify up to four restraints (devices
which in some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of
nodal displacements per element. If needed, you can define additional conditions for any node
on other elements.
Restraints
You can specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as
X (1,0,1) for a restraint running at 45 in the X-Z plane.
You can specify as many as four restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than four
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
Do not use restraints in the following three situations:
1. Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the Displacement
Auxiliary box.
2. Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles Auxiliary Data
box to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API 650 to
calculate local nozzle flexibilities. After these flexibilities have been calculated, CAESAR II
automatically inserts the necessary restraints and flexibilities into the piping model.
3. Hangers program designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers check
box to open the Hanger Auxiliary Data box.
Node
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to
be on the current element.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes can be used to tie one
node in the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank then the restraint
node is tied by the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the connecting node is
specified then the restraint node is tied by the restraint stiffness to the connecting node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, CNodes can be
used to geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. This option is controlled
by the configuration option Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 71).
Type
Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraint
Auxiliary box. For more information, see Section 3 of the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
ANC Anchor
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
Mu
+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z Translational Directional +Y support with slide plates
Modifiers: Allows movement in the positive Y
direction and restrains movement in
Stiffness the negative Y direction.
Gap
Mu
The plus or minus
sign (+/-) on the restraint
specifies the direction of free
movement.
LIM Double Acting Limit Stop LIM with gap (or X with gap) and +Y
Modifiers: Gap between support and each limit
stop
Stiffness
Gap
Mu
A limit stop is axial
to the pipe, but may not align
with a global axis when
elements are non-orthogonal.
+LIM, -LIM Directional Limit Stop +LIM with gap in the direction of the
From node to the To node
Modifiers:
(also +Y)
Stiffness
Gap between support and the limit
Gap stop
Mu
A limit stop is axial
to the pipe, but may not align
with a global axis when
elements are non-orthogonal.
X2, Y2, Z2 Translational Double Acting X2 soil stiffness with a load limit
Bilinear
Modifiers:
K1
K2
Fy
+X2, -X2, +Y2, -Y2, Translational Directional The directional restraint allows
+Z2, -Z2 Bilinear movement in the specified direction.
Modifiers:
K1
K2
Fy
+RX2, -RX2, +RY2, - Rotational Directional Bilinear The directional restraint allows rotation
RY2, +RZ2, -RZ2 in the specified direction about the
Modifiers:
specified axis.
K1
K2
Fy
ANC
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at
the node.
X, Y, or Z
Specifies restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it defines the
direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom. For example,
a +Y restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is free to move in
the plus Y direction.
RX, RY, or RZ
Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
Guide
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.
LIM
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you
type a sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element
longitudinal axis.
X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses
associated with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear
restraints can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
K2
Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds
Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero
as rigid. Type a value of 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
Gap
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM RX RY RZ
GAP - Specifies the distance along the restraint line of action that the restrained node can
travel before resistance to movement begins. The gap value must be positive. The gap is
given in degrees for rotational restraints. If the translational restraint is not preceded by a
sign, then the restraint is double acting and the gap exists for both positive and negative
displacements along the line of action. For example, if a 0.25 in. gap is specified at a +Y
restraint, then the restrained node can move freely 0.25 in. in the minus Y direction before
restraint occurs. The gap specification does not affect the amount of free displacement that
can occur along the positive Y direction in this example.
You can type two restraints having the same line of action but with different signs at the
same node when you define windows of allowed movement. Be careful to remember to form
the window with signs on restraints rather than with signs on gaps. A gap is a measure of
length in CAESAR II. A gap is always positive.
Examples:
TYPE GUI GAP 1/4 ... One quarter in. gap on either side of the guided restraint.
TYPE +Y GAP 3.0 ... Three in. gap below the support that must be closed before the +Y
support begins acting.
TYPE RX GAP 5.0 ... Five degree gap about the X axis about which the pipe may rotate
freely before rotational restraint occurs.
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Len - Specifies the swinging length of the rod or hanger. This is the distance along the
restraint line of action from the restrained node to the pivot point. The restraint swings about
the pivot point. If a CNODE is defined then the restraint swings about the CNODE. Len is a
required entry.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
K2 - Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint
exceeds Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to
model shallow trench or groove-type pipeline supports. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero
as rigid. Type 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
"x" - Specifies the distance traveled along the spring axis before bottom-out occurs. In the
case of a typical YSPR, this is the movement in the negative Y direction before the spring
bottoms out.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
Stif
Specifies stiffness associated with any support, guide, limit stop, rod, or spring that can be
defined as a restraint. If you leave this option blank then the defined restraint is considered
rigid. The default rigid restraint stiffness is 1.0E12.
K1 is the initial stiffness of a bilinear restraint (for example, X2). If the restraint is not rigid,
then you can type any positive stiffness.
Avoid stiffnesses greatly in excess of 1.0E15. If a stiffness value is specified for an anchor,
the stiffness applies for all six degrees of freedom at the anchored node.
Mu
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM
MU - Specifies the static friction coefficient. Friction provides resistance to movement along
the direction normal to the restraint line of action. The magnitude of the friction force is equal
to MU * Fn, where Fn is the normal force on the restraint. You can automatically assign a
friction coefficient to every new translational restraint by assigning a value to the Coefficient
of Friction box in the configuration. For more information, see Coefficient of Friction (Mu)
(on page 57).
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Fi - Specifies the initial spring load. Leave this box blank for a rigid YROD. If you use YROD
to model a spring hanger, type the hanger stiffness into the STIF box. Type the initial cold
load on the hanger.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
Fy - Specifies the yield load. If the load on the support is less than Fy then the initial
stiffness K1 is used. If the load on the support is greater than Fy then the second stiffness
K2 is used.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
F - Specifies the initial spring cold load. This input is required and is almost always positive.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
na - Not Applicable. This box is not used when the restraint TYPE is snubber.
Hangers
Indicates that you are supplying hanger data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Hangers on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box controls options for hanger installations. You can fully define the hanger
data, or the hanger can be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run
and the results are used as design parameters to select the springs from the user-specified
catalog.
CAESAR II provides catalogs for more than 35 spring hanger vendors.
The Hangers auxiliary dialog box lets you specify details on a hanger-by-hanger basis in the
piping input. To specify values for all hangers in a model, see Hanger Design Control Data (on
page 259).
Any changes you type in the Hangers auxiliary dialog box override the global values
you specify in the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Node
Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.
Design Data
There are two sections on the Hanger auxiliary dialog box.
Design Data - Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for
you.
Predefined Hanger Data - Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data
dialog box (on page 259), accessed by clicking Hanger design criteria in the piping
input. Specify the default hanger table that appears in this dialog by specifying the Default
Spring Hanger Table configuration setting in Configuration Editor > Database
Definitions. For examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the
Hangers section in the CAESAR II Application Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit
the selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports
when the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended
load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers
build double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom
travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the
manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the
extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range
for a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold
or when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations.
A hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle
connection is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be
designed is at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because
the difference between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by
the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the
hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides
as much variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the
system is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping
systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated
by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of
the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The
CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the
middle of the larger spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is
effective, can only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot
load to the next higher spring when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the
spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Leave the box blank or set to zero if the Available Space is not an important design criteria.
When the available space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs
are typically chosen in place of one large spring.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty
five percent as 25.0.
Type a negative number to indicate the maximum number of hangers that you accept. For
example, if you want to use as few springs as possible, yet are willing to use as many as 5
springs if necessary, type -5 in the No. of Hangers at Location box.
Hanger A
1 0.752 in 730.0 lb
2 0.029 in 560.0 lb
10 0.752 in 730.0 lb
11 0.752 in 730.0 lb
12 0.3905 in 645.0 lb
13 0.752 in 730.0 lb
Hanger B
1 0.032 in 592.0 lb
2 0.733 in 587.0 lb
10 0.032 in 592.0 lb
11 0.733 in 587.0 lb
12 0.3825 in 589.5 lb
13 0.733 in 592.0 lb
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It
is run automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.
Free Code
Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or
restraint should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that
anchor in the Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the
directions to be released in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The
available free codes are as follows:
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)
Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint.
(X, Y, Z, RX, RY, and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use
that option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about
4 pipe diameters.
Spring Rate
Specifies the spring rate.
Nozzle Flex
Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The Nozzles auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for flexible nozzle connections. When you
type values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates the flexibilities and adds
them to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to your specified
criteria. You can select WRC 297, API 650, BS 5500, or Custom in the Nozzle Type box.
WRC 297
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.
After error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and
Warnings dialog box. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC
297 bulletin. It is sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the
several asymptotic limits, or to a curve boundary.
You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, the nozzle element must be perpendicular to the
vessel shell. If you want to model hillside nozzles and latrolets, the first (and possibly very
short) nozzle element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to
keep the local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go
off on the true centerline of the nozzle.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the
vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each
other).
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node
and fills the corresponding values in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle Wall
Thickness boxes.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is unrestrained and does not have displacements specified for any of
its degrees of freedom.
The software automatically includes nozzle flexibilities in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. CAESAR II establishes six restraints for each flexible nozzle
input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for
each of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for
nozzle nodes.
You should not put a restraint or an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle
flexibility data and any additional stiffnesses between these two nodes erroneously add to
the nozzle stiffnesses.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, if the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are
collinear, the software flags this as an error. Only nozzles that are perpendicular to the
shell are allowed.
PD 5500 allows nozzles on cylinders or spheres. The direction of the spherical head is
the line tangent to the point where the nozzle intersects the head surface.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on
the vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to
each other). Hence for the custom option you are not limited to radial nozzles.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only, and provides a
way to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.
API 650
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design of
Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, the nozzle element must be perpendicular to the
vessel shell. If you want to model hillside nozzles and latrolets, the first (and possibly very
short) nozzle element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to
keep the local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go
off on the true centerline of the nozzle.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the
vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each
other).
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node
and fills the corresponding values in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle Wall
Thickness boxes.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is unrestrained and does not have displacements specified for any of
its degrees of freedom.
The software automatically includes nozzle flexibilities in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. CAESAR II establishes six restraints for each flexible nozzle
input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for
each of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for
nozzle nodes.
You should not put a restraint or an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle
flexibility data and any additional stiffnesses between these two nodes erroneously add to
the nozzle stiffnesses.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, if the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are
collinear, the software flags this as an error.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on
the vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to
each other). Non-perpendicular nozzle and vessel directions are allowed.
Reinforcing
Specifies the location of the reinforcing. Select Shell or Nozzle.
Temperature Change
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences. For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the
temperature change would be 107 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature
defined in configuration and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Fluid Height
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.
Fluid SG
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.
PD 5500
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, the nozzle element must be perpendicular to the
vessel shell. If you want to model hillside nozzles and latrolets, the first (and possibly very
short) nozzle element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to
keep the local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go
off on the true centerline of the nozzle.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the
vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each
other).
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node
and fills the corresponding values in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle Wall
Thickness boxes.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is unrestrained and does not have displacements specified for any of
its degrees of freedom.
The software automatically includes nozzle flexibilities in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. CAESAR II establishes six restraints for each flexible nozzle
input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for
each of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for
nozzle nodes.
You should not put a restraint or an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle
flexibility data and any additional stiffnesses between these two nodes erroneously add to
the nozzle stiffnesses.
Vessel Type
Specifies the type of vessel. Select Cylinder or Sphere.
Custom
Allows you to define flexibility values that you calculate using another method. You can also
define informational properties that are included in reports.
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, the nozzle element must be perpendicular to the
vessel shell. If you want to model hillside nozzles and latrolets, the first (and possibly very
short) nozzle element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to
keep the local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go
off on the true centerline of the nozzle.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the
vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each
other).
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node
and fills the corresponding values in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle Wall
Thickness boxes.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is unrestrained and does not have displacements specified for any of
its degrees of freedom.
The software automatically includes nozzle flexibilities in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. CAESAR II establishes six restraints for each flexible nozzle
input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for
each of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for
nozzle nodes.
You should not put a restraint or an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle
flexibility data and any additional stiffnesses between these two nodes erroneously add to
the nozzle stiffnesses.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, if the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are
collinear, the software flags this as an error.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on
the vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to
each other). Non-perpendicular nozzle and vessel directions are allowed.
Axial (Nozzle)
Specifies the radial stiffness in the direction axial to the nozzle, as calculated using another
method.
In-Plane Bending
Specifies the longitudinal stiffness at the nozzle and along the run of the pipe, as calculated
using another method.
Out-of-Plane Bending
Specifies the circumferential stiffness at the nozzle and across the pipe cross-section, as
calculated using another method.
Torsional (Nozzle)
Specifies the torsional stiffness on the nozzle, as calculated using another method.
Displacements
Defines displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking Displacements on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The Displacements tab controls imposed displacements for up to two nodes for each element.
Type a value to specify the displacement allowed in a direction. Specify 0.0 to fully restrain the
node in a direction. Specify no value to allow free movement of the node in a direction.
Free
Indicates that the direction is undefined and free for all nine possible vectors. Free is the
default value for all degrees of freedoms at each node before you define any values.
After you define a value for a direction on one vector, Free changes to Fixed for
the same direction on the remaining vectors.
Fixed
If a displacement value is entered for any direction on a vector, indicates an undefined and
fixed displacement for the remaining vectors.
Fix DOFs
When you define a value for any direction, sets the remaining Free fields of the vector to the
fixed value of 0.00.
Specifying no value for directions for all nine vectors models the node as free to move in all
directions.
Specifying 0.00 for all directions is the same as defining an ANC (on page 160) anchor
restraint.
Example
1. Define directions on one vector. 2. Click Fix DOFs.
Node
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at
this node.
Free
Indicates that the direction is undefined and free for all nine possible vectors. Free is the
default value for all degrees of freedoms at each node before you define any values.
After you define a value for a direction on one vector, Free changes to Fixed for
the same direction on the remaining vectors.
Fixed
If a displacement value is entered for any direction on a vector, indicates an undefined and
fixed displacement for the remaining vectors.
Fix DOFs
When you define a value for any direction, sets the remaining Free fields of the vector to the
fixed value of 0.00.
Flange Checks
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this
option by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file
if you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are
located in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges in a
model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the flanges in the
Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor.
Flange evaluation can be performed for individual load cases and for ABS and MAX load
combination cases. For more information, see Combination Method (on page 544).
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method
or the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
Peq
Evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/()G3 + 4F/()G2 + PD Pressure Rating
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
NC-3658.3
Evaluate the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
S = 36,000 * Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) non-occasional load case
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) occasional load case
Where (note that the constants 36,000 and 3125 should be 248.22 and 21.6 in standard SI
units):
S = flange stress
Mfs = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during a non-occasional load case
Mfd = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during an occasional load case
Sy = yield strength of flange material at design temperature; (where Sy, given in psi,
shall not be taken as greater than 36,000 psi)
C = bolt circle diameter
Ab = total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = design pressure
Flange Class/Grade
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure
class and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange Temperature-
Pressure Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically builds a flange
name made up of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material Class.
Temperature-Pressure Table
Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange Temperature-
Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a particular material grade. You can type up
to 24 temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in ascending temperature
order.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the
flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.
Indicates that you are supplying equipment data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Nozzle Lmt Check check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system.
The various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be
less than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time consuming
task, which cannot be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables you to define overall nozzle limits. This permits CAESAR II to perform a first
pass screening. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail
this initial screening.
To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:
The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available, you
can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle
Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a
simple check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute for
the more rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.
Node
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node
should have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node
represents an equipment nozzle.
Comparison Method
Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits.
Available choices are:
Absolute - Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to
FX_allowable, FY to FY_allowable, and so on.
|Fa| |Fal|
|Fb| Fbl|
|Fc| |Fcl|
|Ma| |Mal|
|Mb| |Mbl|
|Mc| |Mcl|
SRSS - The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the
corresponding allowable is compared to 1.0.
Forces
and
Moments
Unity Check - The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by
their respective allowables is compared to 1.0.
and
Ref Vector X, Y, Z
Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system
ABC for this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments (on page 194) fields.
The vector must be perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:
( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction
( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction
( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z
plane.
Forces - Moments
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for
the load limits. The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A
is defined by the current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference
vector, and axis C is the cross product of A and B (the right hand rule). For more information
on the use of these limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method (on page
193).
A - Pipe/nozzle axis
B - Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft
direction.)
C - Other perpendicular direction.
Loading Conditions
Indicates that you are defining loads acting on the pipe. Select or clear these options by double-
clicking the applicable check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
These loads may be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform
loads (which can be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind
loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factorthe loads themselves
are specified when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check
boxes are unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were
removed from these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent
screens.
You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 52).
Forces/Moments
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by double-
clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per
element. You can use up to nine force vectors.
For information on controlling the display of forces and moments, see Forces (on
page 337).
Node
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.
Uniform Loads
Indicates that you are supplying uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Uniform Loads check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls up to three uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out.
The uniform load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Assuming uniform loading in F/L, a snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds
per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) could be specified as follows:
Y -8/12
or may be specified:
Y -.6667
Assuming uniform load in Gs, your entries of X = 1.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0 represent a 1.0g load on
the piping system in the horizontal X direction. Your entries of X = 0.0, Y = -1.0, Z = 0.0
represent a 1.0g load in the minus Y direction, and is exactly equal to the pipe weight load in Y-
up coordinate system.
Uniform load in Gs is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
You can activate uniform loads in Gs by selecting the Uniform load in Gs check
box using the Environment > Special Execution Parameters command on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
in G's, in F/L
Indicates the unit of the uniform load.
Indicates that you are supplying environmental load data. Select or clear this option by double-
clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab indicates whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or
wave loading. The pipe cannot be exposed to both.
Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave,
current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This dialog box tab is also used to specify the Wind Shape Factor when Wind is specified. The
dialog box tab is used to specify various wave coefficients when Wave is specified. The
software automatically computes the wave coefficients if you leave these boxes blank.
Entries on this auxiliary dialog box tab apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later
element.
Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.
Wind Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wind load data.
Wind load data is distributive and applies to the current and all following elements until you
change it.
Wave Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.
Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Drag Coefficient, Cd
Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6
to 1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Lift Coefficient, Cl
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.
Marine Growth
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The
software increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.
Off
Indicates that you do not want wind or wave loads on the current element and all following
elements until you change it.
Materials
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe materials elastic modulus, Poissons ratio,
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a database containing
the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a
material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire material name and
then picking it from the match list.
The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during
error checking.
These material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session
so you only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.
Material
Displays the material name. Materials are specified either by name or number. All available
material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are displayed in the list. Because
this list is quite long, typing a partial material name (such as A106) allows you to select from
matching materials.
Numbers 1-17 corresponds to the generic materials without code allowable
stresses.
Allowable Stress
Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by double-
clicking the Allowable Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab is used to select the piping code and to enter any data required
for the code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature
and code if available in the Material Database.
The Allowable Stress Auxiliary changes according to the piping code. It incorporates
piping codes with their associated inputs. Press F1 to display the help screen to be sure that
you correctly interpret each new input data cell.
Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following
elements until you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves (on page 215) to specify material fatigue curve data. The Material
Fatigue Curve dialog box displays. Type stress versus cycle data with up to 8 points per
curve.
Code
Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default setting
in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their current
publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.1 JPI
B31.3 Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 1)
B31.4 Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 2)
B31.4, Chapter IX B31.1 - 1967
B31.4, Chapter XI Stoomwezen
B31.5 RCC-M C
B31.8 RCC-M D
B31.8, Chapter VIII CODETI
B31.9 GPTC/Z380
Norwegian TBK-6 FDBR
ASME Sect III NC (Class 2) BS 7159
ASME Sect III ND (Class 3) UKOOA
Navy 505 IGE/TD/12
CAN/CSA Z662 DNV
CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11 ISO 14692
BS 806 PD 8010-1
EN-13480 PD 8010-2
HPGSL
The following topics discuss each of the input data cells. For more information about code
compliance considerations, see Technical Discussions (on page 898).
Sc
Specifies the cold stress value. Typically, this is the cold allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills this box automatically
after you select the material and piping code. The value of SC is usually divided by the
longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the notes that follow for the specific
piping code.
B31.1 - Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
where applicable. Do not use these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint
efficiency (Eff) is given on this dialog box, then CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint efficiency
before using it in the allowable stress equations.
B31.3 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The Eff value
should be zero, blank, or one. The 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies as part of the tables in Appendix A. If you are using this version of the code, then
you should type a value for Eff in the appropriate box on this dialog box.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI - Not used. The only stress value in B31.4 is the
yield stress taken from Table 1 in the appendix. For more information, see Sy (on page 208).
B31.5 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The value of Eff
should be zero, blank, or one.
B31.8 - Su, the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
B31.8 Chapter VIII - Not used. The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from
Appendix D. For more information, see Sy (on page 208).
B31.9 - SC is taken directly from I-1. If you define a value for Eff, the software only uses it in the
minimum wall thickness check.
ASME NC and ND - SC is taken directly from Appendix I. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
Navy 505 - There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is implied
in Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given, then CAESAR II divides SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should be zero, blank, or one.
CAN Z662 - Not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the
standards or specification under which the pipe was purchased. For more information, see Sy
(on page 208).
BS 806 - 0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. Eff is not used in BS
806. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Method 1 only uses the yield or creep rupture stress at
temperature (SHn and Fn respectively on this dialog box). Eff is used, but is the circumferential
weld joint efficiency and has a different meaning.
Swedish Method 2 - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. Eff is not
used. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
B31.1 (1967) - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix A.
These tables include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. Do not use these
efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If you define a value for Eff, then CAESAR II divides
the SC by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
Stoomwezen (1989) - SC is the yield stress at room temperature. This value is referred to as
Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D - SC is taken from the Appendix. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
CODETI - This is famb from the code. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software
ignores it.
Norwegian - This is f1 from the code. Eff is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given
in Section 403.3.2. The number of cycles can also be specified in this box for B31.4 which
allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to the equation. The
fatigue factor cannot exceed 1.2.
B31.4 Chapter IX - Not used.
B31.8 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section
833.8(b). The number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.8 which allows CAESAR
II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to this equation.
B31.8 CHAPTER VIII - Not used.
B31.9 - References B31.1 for detailed stress analysis. For more information, see Paragraph
919.4.1.b.
CODETI - Called U in the code.
NORWEGIAN - Called fr in the code. This value can be as high as 2.34.
DNV - Material ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
CAN Z662 -
F1 = L - the location factor is obtained from Table 4.2
Gas (non-sour)
HVP
LVP
Class 1 - Location areas containing ten or fewer dwelling units intended for human
occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing 11 to 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR
buildings with more than 20 persons
outside areas with more than 20 persons
industrial installations
Class 3 - Location areas with more than 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR institutions where rapid evacuation may be difficult
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.
F2 = T - The temperature derating factor, is obtained from Table 4.4
150 0.97
180 0.93
200 0.91
230 0.87
F3 - F9 - Not used.
CAN Z662 Chapter 11 -
F1 - Not used.
F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4
F3 = - Design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1.
F4 = - Design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1.
F5 - F9 - Not used.
BS 806 - Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This
value corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
FDBR - Identical to B31.1,unless you type the expansion coefficients directly instead of
temperatures. In that case, the software cannot determine Ehot. In this case, type a value of
1.0 in the FAC box and use these boxes to specify the product of f * Ehot / Ecold for each
temperature case.
SWEDISH METHOD 1 - Creep rupture stress at temperature. F1, F2 ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
STOOMWEZEN - Creep related material properties as follows:
F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours
at temperature (vm).
F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours
at temperature (vm).
BS 7159 - Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that
its value is greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
n = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life
UKOOA - Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio
is defined as sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for
each of the operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12 - UTS value.
EN-13480 - Stress range reduction factor taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the
B31.1 table above), or computed from equation 12.1.3-4. You can specify the number of
cycles in this box for EN-13480. This allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction
factor according to equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
Eff
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current
piping code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5 - Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies where applicable. If Eff is specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by
Eff before they are used in the flexibility calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall
calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, B31.9, NAVY 505, Z662 (J),
BS 806 (e), CODETI (z), FDBR (vl), GPTC/Z380 - Allowable stress or yield stress tables do
not include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies. Eff is ignored for the flexibility calculations.
SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D - Ignored for both flexibility
and minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6 - Circumferential joint factor
z and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than in the calculation of the
allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen - Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not
consider weld joint efficiency for this code.
BS 7159 - Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software
uses a default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA - Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically
0.67.
IGE/TD/12 - Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in
Table 2 of the IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV - Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2.
The value must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
EN-13480 - Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating
the minimum wall thickness.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Weld joint factor used in determining the allowable hoop stress. See
Section 6.4.3.1 for details.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 Eff is used in different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
JPI - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
Sy
Specifies the yield stress. CAESAR II fills the box automatically after you select the material
and piping code. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is generally
used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.3 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI - Specified minimum yield stress. Used for the
allowable stress determination.
B31.5 - Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph
addresses ferrous materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value typed
here should be the quantity (40% of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is
defined, the OPE case is considered a stress case. This value is the allowable reported in
the output report. The computed operating stress includes all longitudinal components and
ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII - Specified minimum yield stress.
B31.9 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3 - Basic Material Yield Strength at design temperature for use
in Eqn. 9 for consideration of Level A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits
must be satisfied in separate runs by adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the
CAESAR II configuration file. If the occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the
minimum of 1.2 x 1.5 SH or 1.5 SY. If the factor is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x
1.5 SH or 1.8 SY. If the factor is 2.0, the allowable is the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 S H or 2.0 SY.
To satisfy the code, replace SH with SM for the latter two.
Navy 505 - Not used.
CAN Z662 - Minimum yield strength taken from the standards or specifications under which
the pipe was purchased or according to clause 4.3.3.
BS 806 - Sustained stress limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep
rupture design stress value defined in Appendix A under cold, or any other, operating
condition. See 17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Type the yield stress at temperature in the respective SHn
boxes for the up to nine possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2 - Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989) - Tensile strength at room temperature. This value is referred to as Rm
in the code.
RCC-M C, D - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
CODETI - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
Norwegian - Allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If you do not
type a value, then this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
BS 7159 - Not used.
UKOOA - Not used.
IGE/TD/12 - Minimum yield stress (SMYS).
DnV - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
EN-13480 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
GPTC/Z380 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Minimum yield stress.
ISO-14692 - Sy is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SYa
Specifies the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature. This is also referred to as SMYS or SY.
If you do not type a value, the software takes the value from the Material
Database if that value is available and applicable.
SY (c)
Specifies the minimum yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at room temperature.
Ksd
Material shakedown factor described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
Carbon Steel: 1.8
Austenitic Steel: 2.0
UTSa
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength of the pipe material corresponding to the specified
ambient temperature.
UTS (c)
Specifies the minimum tensile strength at room temperature.
DFac
Specifies the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Its
value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
If you do not type a value, the software takes the value from the Material
Database if that value is available and applicable.
Fac
Specifies the multiplication factor. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is
generally used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Not used.
B31.3 - Not used
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI - Not used.
B31.4 Chapter IX - Used only when you select Custom for Design Factor (on page 214).
Define a Hoop Stress Factor value in the range of 0.5 and 0.72.
B31.5 - Not used.
B31.8 - Construction design factor from Table 841.114B.
D (CLASS 4) Multi-Story Buildings are prevalent, traffic is heavy, and 0.40 (0.4 defaults if
where there may be numerous other utilities underground. left blank)
B31.8 Chapter VIII - F1, Hoop stress design factor, according to Table A842.22 of B31.8.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.50 for platform piping and risers.
B31.9 - Not used.
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3 - Not used.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Navy 505 - Not used
CAN Z662 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a long
distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that
the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes the hoop stress
component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the axial
stress is compressive.
BS806 - Not used.
Swedish Power Code, Method 1 - Sigma(tn) multiplier. This value is usually 1.5. This value
should be 1.35 for prestressed (cold sprung) piping. The default value is 1.5.
Swedish Power Code, Method 2 - Not used.
Stoomwezen - Constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, see
Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
RCC-M C, D - Not used.
CODETI - Not used.
Norwegian - Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, RM. If this value is not
specified, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Overrides the ratio of Ehot/Ecold which is automatically determined by CAESAR II.
The modulus ratio is used to compute the expansion case allowable stress based on the
material and temperature. Normally, you can leave this box blank. However, if necessary, you
can type a value greater than zero and less than one to override the ratio calculated by the
software.
To use FBDR, type the hot modulus in the Elastic Modulus box of the dialog box. CAESAR II
looks up the cold modulus and computes this necessary ratio. Using the hot modulus in the
flexibility analysis is a deviation of FBDR from every other piping code in CAESAR II.
If you type expansion coefficients directly instead of temperatures, then the software cannot
determine Ecold. In this case, type a value of 1.0 in this cell and use the cyclic reduction factor
boxes to specify the product of (f * Ehot /Ecold) for each temperature case.
BS 7159 - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined in Section 7.2.1 of the code. This
should be 0.85 for liquids, 0.8 for gases, and 1.0 for ambient temperature changes. If left blank,
this value defaults to 1.0.
UKOOA - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined for the BS 7159. If left blank, this
value defaults to 1.0.
IGE/TD/12 - Material shakedown factor Ksd described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical
values are 1.8 for carbon steel and 2.0 for austenitic steel..
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
DNV - Usage factor Nu (pressure bursting) from Tables C1or C2. Values must be between 0.64
and 0.84.
EN-13480 - Not used.
GPTC/Z380 - Construction design factor from Table 192.111.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Same usage as B31.4.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - Fac is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
Pvar
Specifies the pressure variance. The field changes according to the current piping code.
ASME and RCC-M C, D - Variance in the pressure between operating and peak to be used
as the component in equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not type the
peak pressure for Pvar. Type the difference between the operating pressure and the peak
pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2 - Beta for the Seff calculation. If not given, this
value defaults to 10%. Type ten percent as 10.0. Values must be between 0.1 and 25.0.
Values specified outside of this range are automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the
allowed range. The definition for beta, as given in the Swedish piping code in section
5.6.2.1, is the "maximum allowable minus the tolerance as a percentage of the nominal wall
thickness".
Stoomwezen - Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian - Difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure
Pmaks (in equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping
code (V) or not required (N).
DNV - Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between
0.77 and 1.00.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1.2. Typical limits on this value
are 0.3 and 0.72, depending on categories and class locations. This design factor
determines the allowable hoop stress. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 1.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1 Table 2. Type the value of fd
for the hoop stress evaluation. This value should be either 0.6 (riser/land fall) or 0.72
(seabed/tie-in). CAESAR II determines the appropriate fd values for the equivalent stress
from Table 2. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 2.
This value is taken from the Material Database, if available and applicable,
unless you type a value.
ISO 14692 - Pvar is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
CAESAR II Determines - Specifies that the software selects the stress equations based on
the calculated axial load in the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress
calculation when the axial pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load, or applies the
unrestrained stress calculations when the axial load is different from the limiting load by
more than 2.5%. The limiting load is calculated as the linear superposition of thermal
expansion and Bourdon pressure effect.
You typically use this option with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when
modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler (on page 488).
Inland Riser/Platform - Specifies riser and platform piping on inland navigable waters and
instructs the software to select different sets of allowable values as defined in the Table
403.3.1-1.
For B31.4 Ch XI, select one of the following indicators:
Restrained Pipeline - Specifies fully restrained pipe, which is locked in position. The pipe is
fully restrained beyond the virtual anchoring at bearing points (such as elbows and tees).
Axial stress is defined without the use of bending moment.
Unrestrained Pipeline - Specifies all piping that is not fully restrained. Unrestrained pipe is
free to displace laterally and to strain axially.Stress calculation is dominated by bending
moment.
CAESAR II Determines - Specifies that the software selects the stress equations based on
the calculated axial load in the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress
calculation when the axial pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load, or applies the
unrestrained stress calculations when the axial load is different from the limiting load by
more than 2.5%. The limiting load is calculated as the linear superposition of thermal
expansion and Bourdon pressure effect.
You typically use this option with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when
modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler (on page 488).
Design Factor displays on the Allowables tab of List (on page 239).
Design Factor
Specifies the design factor and hoop stress value for B31.4 Ch IX, Table A402.3.5-1. Select one
of the following options:
Design Factor displays on the Allowables tab of List (on page 239).
Fatigue Curves
Displays the Material Fatigue Curves dialog box.
Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
al(0:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial stress (hoop stress
is 0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is double the axial stress
at this point). The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5
and 0.75 for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type.
al(1:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962,, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a
generalized failure profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error
Checker.
If you leave both the al(1:1) and hl(1:1) boxes blank, CAESAR II assumes that a simplified
envelope is used for plain pipe.
hl(1:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(1:1) is equal to
al(1:1), and displays a warning message in the Error Checker. For more information, see
al(1:1) (on page 216).
al(2:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop
stress is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is hl(2:1) = 2 * al(2:1). This is a natural
condition when a pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However CAESAR II allows you
to type different values for hl(2:1) 2 * al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
hl(2:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop
stress is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(2:1)= 2*al(2:1). However,
CAESAR II allows hl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR
II displays a warning message in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to
twice al(2:1), and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more information,
see al(2:1) (on page 217).
Qs
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees. A qualified stress, Qs, provided by
the manufacturer is defined as:
CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1),
and hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.
You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are
not in the piping model. You can type positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r,
for example) to pass the Error Checker.
r
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined
as:
where:
Short-term
Fitting Component Strength Bi-axial
Stress Ratio (r)*
Filament-wound unidirectional 90
0.45
and
Bends 1.0
Filament-wound and hand-lay 1
1.9
100% hand-lay
Other Hand
laminated
CSM/WR 1, 9 1.9
Spigot/Socket Adhesive or
1.0
Mechanical Connection
0.45
Joints Threaded
1.0
Flange
2.0
Laminated
CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not
be required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.
Eh/Ea
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If you leave this
box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 2.0.
Hand Lay
Indicates that the bend is hand-layed. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of both the flexibility factor and the SIFs for the bend.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.4 Fatigue and Cyclic
Loading.
Cyclic loading is not necessarily limited to pressure loads. Thermal and other cyclic loads
shall therefore be considered when assessing cyclic severity.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycle is less than 7000 over the design
life, the service shall be considered static. If required, the limited cyclic capability of the pipe
system components can be demonstrated according to 6.4.5 of ISO 14692-2:2002.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycles exceeds 7000 over the design
life, then the designer shall determine the design cyclic severity, R c, of the piping system. Rc
is defined as:
where Fmin and Fmax are the minimum and maximum loads (or stresses) of the load (or
stress) cycle.
The partial factor, A3 , for cyclic service is given by:
Sustained Including
Long-term 0.67 1.24 0.83
Thermal Loads
Sustained
Excluding Thermal Long-term 0.67 1.00 0.67
Loads
The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ
Load Factor.
Specifies the elastic modulus and Poissons ratio of the materialfor the selected element on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box. These values must be typed for Material type 21 (user
specified).
Material properties in the database can be changed permanently using the CAESAR
II Material Database editor. For more information, see Material Database (on page 1034).
Double-click >> to display the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box.
Material Properties
Displays the properties associated with the material. CAESAR II automatically fills in the
Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's Ratio, and other material properties. If you want to
change any material property extracted from the material database, change the value in the
corresponding box.
FRP pipe is specified by setting the Material box to 20. The material name displays and
FRP properties from the configuration file display on the dialog box.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: Elastic
Modulus changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to "Ea/Eh*h/a". The
latter entry requires the value of the following expression: (Ea*h/a) / Eh. This expression is
equal to a/h, Poisson's ratio of the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the
axial direction. The shear modulus G is defined by typing the ratio of G/Ea (shear modulus to
axial modulus) on the special execution parameters screen. You can type only one ratio for
each job.
The decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular
cross-section is typically negligible because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher
than the axial modulus for FRP pipe. Because of this, a default flexibility factor of 1 is used
for these components. Similarly, because the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe
are likely to have no bearing on FRP design, an SIF of 2.3 is applied for all fittings. CAESAR
II uses these recommendations for all FRP fittings unless you specifically override the
defaults. You can override the defaults on a point-by-point basis or by forcing all calculations
to adhere to the requirements of the governing code through a CAESAR II configuration
parameter. Note that if the BS 7159, UKOOA, or ISO 14692 code is in effect, all SIFs and
flexibility factors are calculated according to that code regardless of the configuration
parameter settings.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Densities
Specifies the densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents in this block from
the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material
Database. You can also type Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following
the input immediately with the letters: SG, for example, 0.85SG (there can be no spaces
between the number and the SG).
If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no
insulation density is specified, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Densities dialog box.
Refract Thk
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping. Refractory is applied to the inside
of the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system and reduces the internal pipe area
affecting the fluid weight in the system.
Refract Density
Displays the density of the refractory lining. If you select a value from the list, the numeric
value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could
lead to under sized restraints.
Densities for some typical refractory materials display below:
Insul Thk
Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the
outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe
area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness
values are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Clad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected
pipe area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness
values are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Insulation Density
Displays the density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. If you select a value from
the list, the numeric value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
If you leave this box blank, then the software assumes that the insulation is CALCIUM
SILICATE having a density of 0.006655.
Verify that this assumed value is appropriate for the current application. Sample density
values for insulation materials are:
MATERIAL DENSITY
CAREYTEMP .005787
FOAM-GLASS/CELLULAR .004630
GLASS
SUPER X .01447
Cladding Density
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also
included in the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Line Number
Specifies the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more pipe elements.
Line numbers carry forward to successive elements. Because of this, you only need to specify
data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number or name, do one of the following:
Select the Line Number box, or press F9. Select <new..> to automatically assign a name.
The line number is named Line Number <x>, where <x> is a sequential number.
Type to manually create a new name.
Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For
example, if you have a line named 8-300-123 and you want to assign 8-150-124, Type 8
and the box automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed.
Press End to change the last character.
You can also select elements on the graphics model and click Create from
Selection in the Line Numbers dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbers (on page
281).
Available Commands
The following commands are available in the the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Topics
File Menu ....................................................................................... 226
Edit Menu ....................................................................................... 234
Model Menu ................................................................................... 242
Environment Menu......................................................................... 282
Global Menu .................................................................................. 326
Options Menu ................................................................................ 333
View Menu ..................................................................................... 343
Tools Menu .................................................................................... 361
File Menu
Performs actions associated with opening, closing, and running the job file.
New
Piping Input menu: File > New
Standard toolbar: New
Creates a new CAESAR II job.
Open
Piping Input menu: File > Open
Standard toolbar: Open
Opens an existing CAESAR II job.
Name
Lists the files in the selected folder that match the selected file type. You can sort the list by
clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name
Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click a file in
the Name list.
Files of type
Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
System
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II Examples folder.
Save <filename>
Piping Input menu: File > Save
Standard toolbar: Save
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.
Save As
Piping Input menu: File > Save As
Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Error Check
Piping Input menu: File > Error Check
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Start Run
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis. When the
error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. For more
information, see Error Checking (on page 514).
Archive
Piping Input menu: File > Archive
Batch Run
Piping Input menu: File > Batch Run
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Batch Run
Error checks the model without any involvement required by you. This process stops only for
errors, which must be resolved for the analysis to run successfully. When you select Batch Run,
the software uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Print Setup
Piping Input menu: File > Print Setup
Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Print Preview
Piping Input menu: File > Print Preview
Displays a preview of the print job.
Print <filename>
Piping Input menu: File > Print
Standard toolbar: Print
Prints the current job. The software prompts you to select the reports to print, prior to printing.
You can change the report contents by modifying the input options.
Exit
Piping Input menu: File > Exit
Closes the session and the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box. The software prompts
you to save any unsaved changes.
Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.
Cut
Piping Input menu: Edit > Cut
Standard toolbar: Cut
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
Copy
Piping Input menu: Edit > Copy
Standard toolbar: Copy
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the
previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
Paste
Piping Input menu: Edit > Paste
Standard toolbar: Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.
Continue
Piping Input menu: Edit > Continue
Navigation Tools toolbar: Continue
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if
there is no next element.
Duplicate Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Duplicate Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Duplicate Element
Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly continue building the model.
Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For more information on duplicating
groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page 327).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
Insert Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Insert Element
Delete Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Delete Element
Input Tools toolbar: Delete Element
Deletes the current element.
Find
Piping Input menu: Edit > Find
Plot Tools toolbar: Find Node
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you to
specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can enter the node numbers
in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From node number, the software
searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you enter only the
To node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node number. When
the software locates the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom
out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
Global
Piping Input menu: Edit > Global
Input Tools toolbar: Global coordinates
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each discontiguous system
segment.
This may be required for three reasons:
1. To show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments allows the piping segments to plot in
the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.
Close Loop
Piping Input menu: Edit > Close Loop
Increment
Piping Input menu: Edit > Increment
Input Tools toolbar: Increment node
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto Node
Number Increment (on page 71).
Node Increment
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Distance
Piping Input menu: Edit > Distance
Input Tools toolbar: Distance
Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you select on the
model.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Use the Pan and Zoom functions to move around larger models when measuring the
distance between two nodes.
Press SHIFT to confine the measuring line to the x-, y-, or z-axis directions. When you press
SHIFT, the software selects the axis nearest to the cursor location. As the mouse moves
around the model, the software changes the measuring line direction to the closest axis to
the cursor location.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Measure Method
Snap to Nearest Node
Specifies for the software to choose the start and end point of an element on the model by
highlighting snap points. Snap points are markers that indicate element node points. The
software uses snap points to highlight a node when the mouse cursor comes within a certain
proximity range of it. The software defaults to having this check box selected. Clear this
check box for the software to measure without using the snapping functionality.
Clear the Snap to Nearest Node check box when measuring distance in imported
graphics models, such as from CADWorx or Smart 3D. The software cannot snap to
nodes on models created outside of CAESAR II.
Change the shape, size, and color of snap point markers by selecting Properties >
Display Options from the right-click context menu. Make changes to the Graphic
Edit Options>Symbol Information settings, and then click Apply in the Plot
Settings dialog box.
Origin and Selected Element
Calculates the distance between the origin point using the starting node coordinates (0,0,0),
and a selected point on the model.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side or even minimize the dialog box entirely. Then, as you measure
distances, the results display on the model and also in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open), or close the Distance dialog box.
Measure between two points on a model
1. Open a CAESAR II file.
2. Click Piping Input in the main menu.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side. Then, as you measure distances, the results display on the
model and also in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open), or close the Distance dialog box.
List
Piping Input menu: Edit > List
Displays all of the applicable input data in a dialog box. You can edit, delete, or modify data in
the lists.
Show All Lists
Piping Input menu: Edit > List > Show All Lists
List Operations toolbar: List input
Displays all of the available List dialog boxes.
Close All Lists
Piping Input menu: Edit > List > Close All Lists
Closes all of the List dialog boxes and clears (un-checks) all the list options, such as Allowables,
Bends, Elements, and so forth.
The List dialog boxes appear as a rows tabs at the bottom of the piping input. These tabs
specify the various list options that you can access.
When you select a tab, the headings at the top of the selected List dialog box display the
specific input data and controlling parameters in the corresponding columns. All of the input data
can be accessed through the various List dialog boxes.
The following shows an example of a List dialog box, the Elements dialog box.
The software displays the input information in the List dialog boxes in a column format. Move the
cursor into any box to type a new value to replace the original value. You can scroll through the
reports either vertically or horizontally.
Press F1 while within the data cells to display help information. You can delete the input
information by highlighting the selection and pressing Delete. The software supports many
standard Windows commands, such as Cut and Paste, on a box-by-box basis.
If you edit input data on a List dialog box, the software updates the Classic Piping Input dialog
box as well. The software indicates values that carry forward on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box by displaying the value in red if there is a change to the data value. For example, in the
example shown above, the PIPE OD value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the
element From Node 30 to To Node 50. The software displays the first element in the list with
the new value in red. Note that elements 2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1
automatically. In this example, the value of the PIPE OD does not change until you enter a new
value for element 4. All elements below element 4 inherit that value unless a new value is
entered.
Other options from the Elements dialog box include the following:
Find the Current Node
Use the Find command (started with Ctrl F or Edit > Find) to quickly jump to the element
where the given node is located. Find remembers the last node number that you typed, so
subsequent searches of the same node can be accomplished by pressing Ctrl F.
Perform Global (Block) Operations
Perform global editing operations on selected parts of the piping system by highlighting an
element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block Operation and one of
the global (block) options. These options include varieties of rotations, deletions,
duplications, node renumbering, and status reporting. For more information on the block
operations, see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 353).
Access Element Auxiliary Data
Access the Auxiliary Data dialog boxes located on the piping input by highlighting an
element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block Operation > Aux
Screens. By single-clicking on any checked items from the dialog box shown below the
appropriate Auxiliary Data box displays. You can edit the data in the Auxiliary Data box,
which updates the input dialog box. Additionally, you can type new data by double-clicking
on any of the unchecked boxes to open the Auxiliary Data dialog box. You can delete an
entire Auxiliary Data box by double-clicking on the checked item. A prompt warns you of
the operation.
Next Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Next Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Next Element
Skips to the next element.
Previous Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Prev Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Previous Element
Skips to the previous element.
First Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > First Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: First Element
Skips to the first element.
Last Element
Piping Input menu: Edit > Last Element
Navigation Tools toolbar: Last Element
Skips to the last element.
Undo
Piping Input menu: Edit > Undo
Input Tools toolbar: Undo
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z.
You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available
memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo function resets the redo function.
Redo
Piping Input menu: Edit > Redo
Input Tools toolbar: Redo
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by the
amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo function resets the undo function.
Review Units
Piping Input menu: Edit > Review Units
Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to create
the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To change the
input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.
Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling, as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.
Break
Piping Input menu: Model > Break
Input Tools toolbar: Break
Divides an element into two or more individual elements. This command displays the Break at
element <node> - <node> dialog box.
If there was some other node in the model with a restraint (or imposed displacements), like the
one to be put on the newly generated node 15, then the node identifying that restraint location
could be filled in at the line Get Support From Node and the restraint would be automatically
placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node 10 is copied to node 15.
For the Insert Multiple Nodes option, the software defines the Length of each element value
based on the values you specify for Total Number of Break Elements and Node Step.
If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:
Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed
directly when requested at the prompts.
Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of
the individual elements in the run are known.
To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions
in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node
Indicates that only one node is inserted.
Insert Multiple Nodes
Indicates that more than one node is inserted.
Insert Restraints
Piping Input menu: Model > Insert Restraints
Right-click menu: Restraint > Insert Restraint
Related commands:
Right-click menu: Restraint > Delete Restraint
Right-click menu: Restraint > Edit Restraint
Divides the selected element into two elements and places a restraint at the break. This
command displays the Insert Restraint dialog box.
Define restraint properties on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
Copy Restraint from Node
Copies the properties from the restraint at the specified node when creating the new
restraint.
Properties display in on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
OK
Creates the new restraint.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without creating a new restraint.
Valve
Piping Input menu: Model > Valve
The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database
offers nine different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves,
flange pair, and single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded,
or socket). Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves automatically provides
for gaskets.
Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two
flanges and gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the
two mating flanges.
Rigid Type
Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type
Specifies the end type for the fitting.
Class
Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element
Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end
Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end
Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends
Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange
Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve-flange
combinations.
Activate Flange Check
Turns on the flange check.
2. Click Valve/Flange on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.
3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.
4. Select where to insert the new element.
Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate
three RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data from
the Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.
If the particular selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of
the element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing a
table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
Should the line size change at a later time, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform
another table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:
The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights
than those typically available in the GENERIC database.
Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes
the efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files and
specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of the
CADWORX.VHD file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These specifications are
located in the CADWORX\SPEC subfolder. For more information on editing this file, see
below.
You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because the
specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves
possibly editing the CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described below.
The CADWORX.VHD file is structured as follows:
You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual.
Expansion Joint
Piping Input menu: Model > Expansion Joint
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined together and distributed
over the expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model
that are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not
use them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with
your intentions.
Untied
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in
all directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for,
external to the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the
expansion joint novice needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. Guide restrictions
limiting displacements into the joint, regular maintenance problems because of all of the
support hardware away from the bellows, and pressure thrust make using and analyzing this
type of bellows difficult.
Tied
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:
You do not have to design for pressure thrust.
Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field
easier.
There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly
to the rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively
complicated geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.
The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:
They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility
to sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.
The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility
that is unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows
displacement becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as
predicted.
Hinged
Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one
axis. Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often
used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very
little load to any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that
displacement into the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be
experienced by the system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism
are high, considerable friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing
of the joint. This transmits larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Gimbal
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These
joints are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions,
while transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.
U-UNIV
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single
unrestrained expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a
much higher capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied
universal subjects the system to pressure thrust loads which must be designed for external
to the expansion joint. Even when pressure is negligible, these joints can often be difficult to
use in practice unless proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects the joint against
unwanted movement.
T-UNIV
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the
tied universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust
loads are restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where
vertical pipe runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a
single mode (lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths
result in smaller lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of
the center spool. A good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten
times the pipe diameter. Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar
mechanisms are not designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to
the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Welded
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.
Slipon
Indicates a slip-on flange.
WN
Indicates a weld neck flange.
Plate
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure
ratings, such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions,
codes, and materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned
that there are no database values for his particular geometry and line size.
Movement Capability
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement
and then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After
an analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made
using the expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.
Spring Forces
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.
Available Space
The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a
confined area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.
Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated
joints. The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the
bellows in the database, and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against
the allowed pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain
applications.
Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic
T.I.G. butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the
specific media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to
system operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to
make specific recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four
most common bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:
304SSA240 tp 304 Stainless Steel
316SSA240 tp 316 Stainless Steel
600IncInco 600 High Nickel
625IncInco 625 High Nickel
Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces
pressure drop and also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers
catalog for additional information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or
turbulent flow systems. Also, heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage.
Covers are also recommended when the line is insulated.
Title Page
Piping Input menu: Model > Title
You can specify the number of temperature cases the software uses in the hanger design in the
Hanger Design Control Data dialog box, and these values are used in the hanger design
algorithm. In addition, you can specify if the software calculates the actual cold loads. For
examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the CAESAR II
Application Guide.
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty
five percent as 25.0.
hold down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the
rigid rod has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger
design inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts
are usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data
dialog box (on page 259), accessed by clicking Hanger design criteria in the piping
input. Specify the default hanger table that appears in this dialog by specifying the Default
Spring Hanger Table configuration setting in Configuration Editor > Database
Definitions. For examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the
Hangers section in the CAESAR II Application Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit
the selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports
when the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended
load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers
build double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom
travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the
manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the
extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range
for a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold
or when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations.
A hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle
connection is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be
designed is at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because
the difference between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by
the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.
Seismic Wizard
Piping Input menu: Model > Seismic Wizard
Wizards toolbar: Static Seismic Wizard
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
ASCE Example
For further information on the Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IP = 1
Component Response Modification Factor RP = 12.0, from Table 13.6-1, "Piping in accordance
with ASME B31,"
Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration Ss = 1.552, Mapped MCE Spectral Response
Acceleration at short periods according to Section 11.4.1.
Site Coefficient (Fa) = 1.0 for Site Class D, according to Table 11.4-1.
Maximum Considered Earthquake MCE SMS - The MCE is adjusted for site class effects as
defined in Section 11.4.3,
SMS = Fa SS = 1.552
SDS - Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4.
SDS= 2/3 SMS = 2/3 * 1.552 = 1.0347
The appropriate seismic acceleration is aH
= [ (0.4aPSDS) / ( RP / IP )] ( 1 + 2z/h)
= [(0.4 x 2.5 x 1.0347)/(12.0/1.0)](1 + 2 * 0.5)
= 0.17245
Check limits on aH:
aH <= 1.6 * SDS* IP = 1.6 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 1.65552
aH >= 0.3 * SDS * IP = 0.3 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 0.31041
aH = 0.31041
aH = 0.2 SDS= 0.2 * 1.0347 = 0.20694,
Section 13.1.7 states, "The earthquake loads determined in accordance with Section 13.3.1
shall be multiplied by a factor of 0.7."
aH = 0.7 * 0.31041 = 0.2173
av = 0.7 * 0.20694 = 0.1149
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
Low 0.8
Normal 1.0
High 1.3
Post-disaster 1.5
Sa(0.2) (NBC)
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
4.1.8.4.(1).
NBC Example
For further information on the use of the Static Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IE = 1.0 for a "Normal" category by Table 4.1.8.5.
The Site Class is "C" for "Very dense soil and soft rock" by Table 1.1.8.4.A:
Sa (0.2) = 0.55, spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 s, as defined in Sentence
4.1.8.4.(1).
According to Table 4.1.8.4.B.,Fa = 1.0:
Sp = Cp Ar Ax / Rp = 1 * 1 * (1 + 2 * 0.5) / 3 = 0.6667
Cp = 1, Ar = 1 and Rp = 3 according to Table 4.1.8.17.
Optimization Wizard
Piping Input menu: Model > Optimization Wizard
Wizards toolbar: Optimization Wizard
Assists with expansion loop design.
This wizard allows you to specify the element into which the loop should be incorporated, the
loop type, the item to be optimized - nodal stress or restraint load, and the target value to which
the item should be optimized. The optimization routines run the analysis several times to arrive
at an acceptable loop size such that the code stress or restraint load on the target element is at
the specified limit. Besides offering the opportunity to specify various loop configurations and a
selection of height to width ratios, the wizard also provides an option to allow CAESAR II to
select the most economical (based on length of pipe and number of bends) of those possible.
The Optimization Wizard automatically chooses the most economical loop solution
based on your target input. If there is an issue with the target input or loop sizing, the wizard
prompts you and attempts to insert the most ideal loop possible. However, you can always
revise your target input or loop sizing and re-run the wizard.
To use the optimization wizard, the job must be run at least once so that there is an issue, such
as an overstress, to resolve. These results must be current. The process is illustrated by the
example LOOP-WIZARD.C2, as displayed below.
Reviewing the results of the LOOP-WIZARD job shows that it is suffering an expansion
overstress of 46,741 psi. The allowable value at node 20 is 41,288 psi. This is due to the
expansion of the long run 60-140. A loop should be installed somewhere along that run. The
questions are where, and how big should it be?
Before you start the Loop Optimizer, examine the area of the plant surrounding the piping
system. To do this, import the CADWorx (or AutoCAD) plant model, using the CADWorx Model
command. In this case, import the ...\EXAMPLES\LOOP-WIZARD-PLANT\OVERALL.DWG
model. This model shows that there is a convenient area to place a loop beside element 60-70.
Select element 60-70 and then click Model > Optimization Wizard start the Loop
Optimization Wizard. The Loop Design Wizard dialog box displays.
At this point there are two alternatives to indicating where the loop should be placed.
8. Click Draw Cube to generate a transparent cube anchored on the selected element. You
can adjust the size and location of this cube by using the mouse. Use the corner points (Pt1
or Pt2) to adjust the major direction of the loop and the available space. Use the triangle to
adjust the minor axis of the loop and the available space. Drag the cube over the decking
adjacent to element 60-70 to build a cube with a Major dimension of 17ft 11 inches in the X
direction.
9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed of
how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.
10. Click Undo to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.
When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.
11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports an
error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element that is
not long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The best
characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe. When you
select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The default value of
100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent length of straight pipe.
Adjust this value as necessary.
Optimization Type
Specifies the type of output value to optimize or reduce. You can use the Loop Design
Wizard to improve Stress levels or Restraint load components for any piping loop in a
model.
Target Stress
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
Max. Stress
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
At Node
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be
optimized (along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill
in these entries.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
On Element
For Stress Optimization:
Specifies the element on which the node for which the stress level is to be optimized is
located. Double-click one of the entries in the Element/Node/Stress list to automatically fill
in this entry.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
For Restraint Load Optimization:
Specifies the restraint load component which is to be optimized. Double-click one of the
Load Component entries in the Restraint Load list to automatically fill in this entry.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
Loop Type
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.
Type #1 - places the loop at the From end of the original element in the
plane of the Major Direction.
Type #2 - Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From
end of the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the
plane of the Minor Direction.
Type #3 - Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane of
the Major Direction.
Type #4 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of
the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.
Type #5 - Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane
of the Major Direction.
Type #6 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of
the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.
Type # 8 - Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size
as the original element, first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor
Direction.
Type #9 - Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most
economically efficient solution based on total pipe length and number of bends.
Draw Cube
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard
tries to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.
Major Direction
Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.
Minor Direction
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.
Design (Button)
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.
Line Numbers
Piping Input menu: Model > Line Numbers
Organization Tools toolbar: Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box.
Reset Settings
Returns settings for all line numbers and their elements to their default values. Use the drop
down to select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or Reset All.
You can also right-click on a line and select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or
Reset All to only reset the selected line number.
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for a line number and its
elements.
Name
Displays the name of line number and elements. Click on a line number to change its name.
See Also
Line Number (on page 226)
Environment Menu
Performs actions associated with miscellaneous items.
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of
tee type with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 148).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3),
and Joint (2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO
14692 code for non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the
calculations specified in the code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for
the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for
tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of
Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee types,
CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement
tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in
the Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets,
and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the
WRC 329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted,
Ftg Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.Specifies the following terms for
each component type:
Fabricated Tee with Pad
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Full Encirclement Tee
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Branch OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Branch Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Header SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the header.
Header SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the header.
Branch SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the branch.
Branch SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the branch.
Flexibility Characteristic
Displays the flexibility characteristic. For more information on how wall thickness is used in
the flexibility characteristic (h) equation, see Wall Thickness of Bend (on page 790).
Branch Section Modulus
Displays the branch section modulus.
Recalculate
Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data,
CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
T/Th/T'b
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 148).
Te/Tb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee with Pad
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Full Encirclement Tee
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
rp/do
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
r2/rc
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Sweepolet
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
r1/Tc/Lh
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Sweepolet
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
L1/Lb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldolet
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Long Weldneck Flange
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Weldoflange
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
148).
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Bend Angle
Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the
inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of
the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn,
and once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for
the flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Number of Miter Cuts
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR
II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to
be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be
broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of cuts in
the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate
the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the
bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
The liberal expression is only used when there is at least one sustained stress case in the
load set. If there is more than one sustained stress case in a single problem, then the
largest of Sl, considering all of the sustained cases, for any single element end is chosen to
subtract from Sh. Because the sustained stress varies from one pipe to another, the
allowable expansion stress also varies.
By default, CAESAR II uses the liberal stress allowable setting in the configuration file in
its computation of the expansion stress allowable. New models are created using this
configuration setting. If you do not want to use this default setting for calculating the
expansion, clear this check box.
Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed
by the CAESAR II recommended load case logic. You must form your own
combination cases at the output processor level that represent the algebraic sum of
the stresses due to sustained and occasional loads. For more information, see
Occasional Load Factor (on page 95).
When you select this option, the in Gs radio button is activated on the first Uniform
Load auxiliary dialog box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can override
this option by selecting the in F/L option.
Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements
in the system is 70F/21C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero
expansion strain state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is
used in conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion
coefficient to calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the
element when going from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information,
see New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 57). The software uses this configuration file
value to set the ambient temperature when you create a new model.
This method does not provide for any variation in the thermal expansion coefficient as a
function of temperature. This could prove limiting should there be parts of the system at
different non-ambient temperatures. In this case, you can always calculate the thermal
expansion at temperature in inches per inch and input this value directly into the
Temperature box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that the Z axis is vertical. Traditionally CAESAR II has used a coordinate system
where the Y-axis coincides with the vertical axis. In one alternative coordinate system, the
Z-axis represents the vertical axis (with the X axis chosen arbitrarily, and the Y-axis being
defined according to the right hand rule. CAESAR II now gives you the ability to model using
either coordinate system. You can also switch between the systems in most cases.
You can specify that CAESAR II start with the Z axis vertical. For more information, see Z-
Axis Vertical (on page 72).
A new piping model determines its axis orientation based on the setting in the
Configure/Setup module. An existing piping model uses the same axis orientation under
which it was last saved. You can change the axis orientation from Y-Axis to Z-Axis vertical
by clicking the check box on the Environment-Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis
orientation. That is, Y-values become Z-values or the reverse. There is no change in the
model; only the representation changes.
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system
into the other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need
not match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need
not match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (such as wind and wave loads), the
Static Output Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is
dictated by the orientation of the model input file.
RotY
Specifies the angle about the Y axis to rotate the model before including it in the current job.
The rotation applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
Restraints, uniform loads, and concentrated forces are not rotated. Additionally,
the rotation of the model can be accomplished from the List utility For more information, see
Rotate (on page 326).
Inc
Specifies the increment to be added to all of the nodes in the model before including it in the
current job. The node increment applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
You can perform the APCF function to create a new model or add to any existing job model. The
CAESAR II input model constructed from the PCFs assumes the Units System of the current
job, plus automatically attach/intersect the piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping,
if appropriate.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. A PCF is a
flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.
Files can be arranged in the order you want to process them by dragging-and-dropping the
file names in the conversion list.
In the example, the elements of the header, which includes files TPA-551-0012, 551-00513,
521-90100_BL, 521-90100, and 521-90102, are processed first.
Vents off of that header are processed next (in the example, 521-12101, 521-12113, 521-
12112, 521-12111, 521-12138, 521-12137, 521-10103, 521-10104, 521-90461).
Finally, the separate detached section files (551-0012, 551-0041) are processed last.
5. Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.
Condense Options
Miscellaneous Options
CAESAR II Element Properties
The options can be set identically for all conversion passes, or they can be changed for
each pass. The example uses Piping Materials based on Pipe Spec and also set a Diameter
Limit (exclude pipes below 3" nominal) as well as condense rigids, tees, and bends.
In this example, clear the check boxes for all files except those comprising the header. This
converts the header files. To process them together, define a Start Node of 0 for files 2
through 5 ("0" signifies "carry on numbering with the next available number"). Start
numbering the system with node 1000 and continue with an increment of 10.
This means that all of the elements from all of the files are combined, sorted, ordered,
numbered, and so forth. For example, a header from the first five files is processed before
adding branches from the first file as though they came from a single large PCF. This is
assured by processing a group of files together during the same process, and defining the
Start Node for files after the first in the group as "0". Processing files individually or entering
a Start Node (or changing the Node Increment) for specific files in the group being
processed causes those files to be processed individually.
6. Begin the conversion by clicking the Begin Processing button.
This creates the first portion of the CAESAR II piping input model.
At this point, all CAESAR II functions (3D graphics pane, Classic Input Piping dialog box,
Elements dialog box) are available for examining the resultant piping input model.
Remember that you can use the Undo button.
7. In the example, you can select the vent lines to be processed separately, each with their
own numbering system.
8. In the example, check each of the next 9 file names, plus define the Start Node for each.
This causes each individual vent line to be fully processed before proceeding to the next.
Alternatively these files could be processed individually simply by running them one at a
time.
Undo is available.
9. Process the second detached section, with both files processed together, and the Start
Node set at node at 10000.
After the conversion processing completes, the CAESAR II piping input model looks like this
in the example.
At this point, the entries for Delta Coordinates, Temperatures, Pressures, and so forth may
contain values calculated to several decimal places due to repetitive unit conversions and
other calculations during the conversion process. For example, see the DX = -5390.7523
mm and the Temp 1 = 250.0214C.
These entries can be automatically rounded to the nearest integer by closing the APCF
Import dialog box using the "X" in the right top corner.
We recommend that this round-off process not be done until all PCFs have been
imported. This is because connectivity is determined based upon sharing global
coordinates. If element delta coordinates get rounded off, then nodal global coordinates may
get changed enough that they fall outside of the connection tolerances.
Topics
PCF Interface Custom Attributes ................................................... 307
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) ............................. 321
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF Displays the conversion factor used to convert the user-
supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for
the attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.
The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
A, B, C
These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the support/pipe
installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to the
"direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A
and B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by
prefixing with + or -. See the figure below.
<MU=>
Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=>
Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the END-
CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible
that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
SWAYSTRUT 1
B
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as
shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the
applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 310) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 324) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 324) to
zero.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
CAESAR II Configuration
Piping Input menu: Environment > CAESAR II Configuration
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration
Editor (on page 52).
Global Menu
Performs actions associated with commands you can perform on a group of elements, such as
the block operations (Rotate, Invert, and so forth).
Rotate
Piping Input menu: Global > Rotate
Block Operations toolbar: Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle
about the X, Y, or Z axis. For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 375).
Unskew
Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup
Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,
force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The
default is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees
Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Add Bends
Specifies that the software includes bends in the block rotation.
Duplicate
Piping Input menu: Global >Duplicate
Block Operations toolbar: Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can
also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes.
Mirror imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not
mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.
Setup
Restraints, displacements, forces/moments, uniform loads, nozzles, flanges, and element
characteristics can be individually included or excluded from the duplication.
After the type of duplication is determined, you must decide the following:
Where in the Elements List to put the duplicated group of elements, either at the end of the
current block, the end of the input file, or after a specific element in the model.
What node increments to add to the nodes in the block so that they define unique pipe
elements. Be sure this increment is large enough to avoid any duplication of node numbers.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 375).
Delete
Piping Input menu: Global > Delete
Block Operations toolbar: Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 375).
Nodes
Piping Input menu: Global > Nodes
Block Operations toolbar: Renumber
Rearranges the node numbers in the block.
You can use this command to clean up part or all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put
the entire model in one block and do a full renumber of all of the nodes.
To renumber the node numbers in a block
Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly careful
when renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with CNodes.
1. Select the block of nodes you want to renumber from the 3D Graphics pane or in the
Elements dialog box.
2. Click Renumber in the Block Operations toolbar.
The Block Renumber dialog box displays.
3. Select whether you want the software to increment or renumber the block nodes.
Select Increment to change all node numbers in the block. The change (+ or -) is
specified as the Node Increment. For example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25
and 670 in a block, and you select Increment and specify a Node Increment of
100, the software changes the node numbering in the block to 110, 130, 700, 125
and 770, respectively.
Select Renumber to enable the Start Node box and renumber the selected block of
nodes from the Start Node number by the Node Increment that you specify. For
example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25, and 670 in a block, and you select
Renumber and specify a Start Node of 100 and a Node Increment of 10, the
software changes the node block numbering to 100, 110, 120, 130, and 140,
respectively.
Be aware that the Start Node and Node Increment values may
introduce node numbers used elsewhere in the model.
4. Select Renumber Matching Nodes Outside to renumber the same nodes outside of
the selected block.
CAESAR II renumbers the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected
block, and the model remains connected in the same way as it was before the
renumber. The boundary nodes include the From and To nodes of the elements
connected to the selected block, plus the nodes of the auxiliary data block that are
connected to the selected block.
The software renumbers every node in the selected block on the model.
If you clear Renumber Matching Nodes Outside, the software does not apply the
increment or renumber action to restraints, displacements and branch connections in
the selected block of nodes.
CAESAR II does not typically renumber a CNode in a block, because the CNode is
connected to a node outside the block. The software does not renumber CNodes if they
do not connect to a node in the block and on the piping system.
To avoid any confusion when renumbering nodes, start the renumbering at a node
greater than the largest node in the model. If all of the nodes renumber successfully (that is,
there are not any dangling CNodes), then you can specify a Node Increment with a negative
increment to shift the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.
Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However CAESAR II can only
perform the renumber operation for the first block, with respect to the element list. In this case,
CAESAR II displays a message box with information about the block that is to be renumbered.
You can then continue to renumber the second block and so on until all blocks are renumbered.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 375).
Invert
Piping Input menu: Global > Invert
Block Operations toolbar: Invert
Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the 3D
Graphics panel.
If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in the Elements
dialog box.
2. Click the Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The delta dimensions (DX, DY, DZ) of the elements are reversed. In most cases, the node
sequence (From and To nodes) remains the same, but the order and direction of the
elements are reversed.
Notice that only the node numbers are changed in the 3D Graphics pane.
3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new delta dimension assignments.
For example:
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 375).
Change Sequence
Piping Input menu: Global > Change Sequence
3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.
To move the selected block after a given element, click Follow.
To move the selected block before a given element, click Precede.
The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.
4. From the Elements dialog box, position the cursor in the line where you want the selected
block to be placed. Alternatively, you can select elements in the 3D Graphics pane and then
click on the element where you want to move them.
The selected block of elements displays in the new order.
The 3D graphics model does not change. This command only affects the
Elements dialog box display contents. Remember that this command provides you with the
capability of organizing "like" types of elements together.
To re-store the order of the Elements dialog box to the original list, use
the Undo button.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 375).
Options Menu
Performs actions associated with the display of the model.
Range
Piping Input menu: Options > Range
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Restraints
Piping Input menu: Options > Restraints
Plot Tools toolbar: Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. Click the arrow on the icon to
indicate what size you want the restraints to display on your model, as well as whether or not the
software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
Anchors
Piping Input menu: Options > Anchors
Plot Tools toolbar: Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Displacements
Piping Input menu: Options > Displacements
Plot Tools toolbar: Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off. This option also controls the display of
displacements on CNode restraints.
When Displacements is turned on, the software displays:
A directional arrow for the resultant linear displacement vector.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for the resultant
rotational displacement vector.
A pair of shorter directional arrows and curved arrows (following the right-hand rule) for
Fixed rotational displacement.
For displacement on a CNode restraint, the values display the CNode number:
You can change the default arrow color in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor or by using Plot Properties . For more information, see Displacements
(Component Color) (on page 77) and Display Options Toolbar (on page 347).
Hangers
Piping Input menu: Options >Hangers
Nozzle Flexibility
Piping Input menu: Options > NozzleFlexibility
Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzles
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.
Flange Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Flange Check
Plot Tools toolbar: Flanges
Turns flange checking on or off.
Nozzle Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Nozzle Check
Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzle Limits
Turns nozzle checking on or off.
Forces
Piping Input menu: Options > Forces
Legends toolbar: Forces
Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
When Forces are turned on, the software displays:
A directional arrow for a force.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for a moment.
Uniform Loads
Piping Input menu: Options > Uniform Loads
Legends toolbar: Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
Piping Input menu: Options > Wind/Wave
Legends toolbar: Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to see
the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Compass
Piping Input menu: Options > Compass
Node Numbers
Piping Input menu: Options > Node Numbers
Plot Tools toolbar: Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off.
You can also press the N key to toggle node number display.
When node numbers are turned on, the software always displays the number in front of the pipe:
Length
Piping Input menu: Options > Length
Tees
Piping Input menu: Options > Tees
Plot Tools toolbar: Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.
Emphasizes the display of elements such as restraints, anchors, displacements, and expansion
joints by changing pipe element display to lines.
Diameters
Piping Input menu: Options > Diameters
Wall Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Wall Thicknesses
Corrosion
Piping Input menu: Options > Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to see
the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes
Piping Input menu: Options > Piping Codes
Legends toolbar: Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Material
Piping Input menu: Options > Material
Legends toolbar: Materials
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the material
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors
to meet your needs.
Pipe Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Pipe Density
Legends toolbar: Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the pipe
density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.
Fluid Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Fluid Density
Refractory Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Refractory Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Thickness
Legends toolbar: Insulation
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Density
Cladding Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Piping Input menu: Options > Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Temperatures
Piping Input menu: Options > Temperatures
Pressures
Piping Input menu: Options > Pressures
View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.
Toolbars
Piping Input menu: View > Toolbars
Displays or hides the toolbars
You can also drag a toolbar to change the location of each toolbar.
To customize toolbar contents, right-click a toolbar, and then select Customize . You can
also customize toolbars by pressing Shift and dragging buttons to new positions.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
New - Starts a new piping job. You can also click File > New on the main menu. CAESAR II
opens the New Job Name Specification dialog box.
Open - Opens a different piping input job. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save - Saves the selected piping input job. You are prompted for the file name.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the
Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a box
diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 378). During
rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may disappear
or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual conversion depends
on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is complete, the model returns to
its original state.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding down
the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active by
holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse. This provides
the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either side.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or down
holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom. Alternatively,
press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the model while in
another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Walkthrough - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. This
command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information, see
Walking Through the Model (on page 386).
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the model
to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or remove
elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette, or a two-line plot. Restraints and other
element information items display.
Translucent Objects - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other
element information items display. You can select Translucent Objects with any of the
other display options (Shaded View, Hidden Line Wire Frame, Wire Frame, Silhouette,
Center Line View). Select a different type of operator to deactivate Translucent Objects.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Plot Properties - Opens the Plot Settings dialog box where you can adjust properties for
the current model.
You can also open the Plot Settings dialog box by right-clicking in the graphic
view and selecting Properties > Display Options .
Markups Toolbar
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics
(on page 378).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers are
not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at
a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If cutting
the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom command to
expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Restraints - Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Restraints.
Anchors - Turns the display of anchors on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Anchors (on page 334).
Hangers - Turns the display of hangers on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Hangers (on page 336).
Nozzles - Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off on the current model.
Nozzle Limits - Turns nozzle checking on or off on the current model. You can also specify
the size the nozzle limit that displays on the model by clicking the arrow on the icon and
choosing a size.
Expansion Joints & Rigids - Turns the display of expansion joints or rigid elements on or
off on the current model.
Compass - Turns the display of the orientation compass on or off on the current model. The
compass indicates the X, Y and Z axis direction of the model.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You
can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors by
selecting the down arrow from the Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools toolbar in
piping input. Select Names Only from the options to display only the node names on the
model, and not the node numbers.
Lengths - Turns the display of element lengths on or off on the model. Alternatively, press
L.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when
you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This
command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U. For more information, see
Range (on page 333).
Find Node - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can
enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From
node number, the software searches for the first available element that starts with that node
number. If you enter only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending
with that node number. When the software locates the element it highlights the element and
fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element
within the model.
Legends Toolbar
The Legends toolbar lets you quickly view legends for areas of the model input. You can access
this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
following functions.
Materials- Opens the Materials legend, where you can make changes to the color display
settings for materials on the model.
Piping Codes - Opens the Piping Codes legend, where you can view and make changes to
the color display settings for piping codes on the model.
Insulation - Opens the Insulation legend, where you can view and make changes to the
color display settings for insulation on the model.
Diameter - Opens the Pipe Diameters legend, where you can view pipe diameter
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for pipes on the model.
Wall Thickness - Opens the Wall Thickness legend, where you can view wall thickness
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for wall thicknesses on the
model.
Forces - Opens the Forces/Moments legend, where you can view the forces and moments
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for forces and
moments on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the
various forces and moments.
Uniform Loads - Opens the Uniform Loads legend, where you can view the uniform loads
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for uniform loads on
the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
uniform loads.
Wind/Wave - Opens the Wind/Wave Loads legend, where you can view the the wind or
wave loads applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for loads
on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
wind or wave loads.
Show Temps- Opens the Temperatures legend, where you can view the temperatures of
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for temperatures.
Show Pressures- Opens the Pressures legend, where you can view the pressures on
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for pressures.
Corrosion - Opens the Corrosion legend, where you can view the elements that have
corrosion specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing corrosion.
Pipe Density- Opens the Pipe Density legend, where you can view the elements with pipe
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing pipe density.
Fluid Density- Opens the Fluid Density legend, where you can view the elements with fluid
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing fluid density.
Insulation Density- Opens the Insulation Density legend, where you can view the elements
with insulation density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing
insulation density.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the x-axis on the model.
Move Geometry {Y-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the y -axis on the model.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the z-axis on the model.
Start/Run (Error Checker) - Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the
first step of analysis. When the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog
box displays the results. For more information, see Error Checking (on page 514).
Batch Run - Error checks the model in a non-interactive way. This process halts only for
fatal errors. It uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Edit Static Load Cases - Displays the Static Analysis dialog box. For more information on
static analysis, see Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on page 536).
View Static Results - Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open
job. The Static Output Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a
static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor (on page 572).
Dynamic Analysis - Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis
Workflow (on page 635).
Continue - Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a
new element if there is no next element.
Duplicate Element - Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly
continue building the model. Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For
more information on duplicating groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page
327).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
List Input - Displays the model in a spreadsheet view at the bottom of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box. From this view, you can quickly review and enter input data. Additionally,
you can rotate the 3D model along the various axes and duplicate input values from the List
Input view.
Archive - Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to
type the password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without
this password; however, they can be opened and reviewed. For more information, see
Archive Dialog Box (on page 230).
Insert - Inserts an element. For more information, see Insert Element Dialog Box.
Break - Divides an element into two or more individual elements. For more information, see
Break (on page 243).
Global Coordinates - Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each
discontiguous system segment. For more information, see Global (on page 236).
Close Loop - Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the
model.
Increment Node - Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal
increment set in Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new
elements. You can override this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For
more information, see Auto Node Number Increment (on page 71).
Distance - Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you
select on the model.
Valve Flange Database - Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This
command displays the Valve and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box. For
more information, see Valve (on page 246).
Expansion Joint Modeler - Creates expansion joints and displays the Expansion Joint
Database <data file> and Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes. For more information,
see Expansion Joint (on page 250).
Title - Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored
with the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and
so on. These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Criteria - Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model. For more
information, see Hanger Design Control Data (on page 259).
Bend SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors
(SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes. You can access this
scratchpad by selecting Analysis > SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad
option on the Classic Piping input or on the 3D model.
Special Execution Options - Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
These parameters remain set for that particular job.
Undo - Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by
pressing Ctrl-Z. You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the
amount of available memory.
Redo - Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is
limited by the amount of available memory.
Rotate- Rotates elements defined in the block. For more information, see Rotate (on page
326).
Duplicate- Duplicates elements in a block. For more information, see Duplicate (on page
327).
Renumber - Rearranges the node numbers in the block. For more information, see Nodes
(on page 328).
Invert- Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The
Invert command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the
node numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
For more information, see Invert (on page 330).
Bend - Puts a bend at the To node of every element that you have selected on
the model. Select an element(s) on the model and click Bend to view the Bends
tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the
down arrow to change the icon function to delete all bends or toggle between the
select and delete functions.
Rigids - Replaces the element(s) that you selected with a rigid. Select an
element(s) on the model and click Rigids to view the Rigids tab on the Auxiliary
Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the down arrow to change
the icon function to delete all rigid elements or toggle between the select and
delete functions.
Reducer - Select an element(s) on the model and click Reducer to view the
Reducers tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job.
Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all reducers or toggle
between the select and delete functions (Toggle).
SIFs/Tees - Inserts a SIF or Tee at the end of the selected elements on the
model.
Hangers - Adds a hanger to each of the selected elements on the model. Click
the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all hangers or toggle
between the select and delete functions.
Wind/Wave - Adds wind or wave details to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Uniform Loads - Adds a uniform load to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Node Names - Adds a node name to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Flange - Adds a flange to either end or both ends of the selected elements on the
model. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all flanges or
toggle between the select and delete functions.
Node Number Edit Window- Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box. For more
information, see Node Numbers (on page 107).
Mini-Delta Box - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box. For more information, see Deltas
(on page 109).
Mini-Pipe Size Box - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box. For more information, see
Pipe Sizes (on page 112).
Mini-Temps and Pressures Box - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
For more information, see Temperatures (on page 116).
Mini-Material Box - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box. For more information, see
Materials (on page 199).
Mini-Elastic Properties Box - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Material Elastic Properties (on page 221).
Mini-Densities Box - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box. For more information, see
Densities (on page 223).
Mini-Aux Screens Box - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box. For more information,
see Auxiliary Element Data (on page 1058).
CADWorx Model - Opens a CADWorx model for use with this model. If you have already
opened a CADWorx model, click the down arrow on the icon to select Load CWx Model.
For more information, see Open CADWorx Model (on page 228).
S3D/SPR Model - Opens the Load an S3D/SPR Model (on page 388) dialog box. If you
have already opened a S3D or SPR model, click the down arrow on the icon to select other
options, including the Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model, Dim S3D/SPR Model, S3D/SPR
Visibility Options. These options only display when you have a S3D/SPR model already
open. For more information, see S3D/SPR Model View (on page 388) and S3D/SPR
Visibility Options (on page 393).
Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used wizards in piping input. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Include Piping Files - Opens the Include Piping Files dialog box, which lets you include
other piping models into the current piping model. For more information, see Include Piping
Input Files (on page 299).
Include Structural Files - Opens the Include Structural Files dialog box, , which lets you
include structural models into the current job. For more information, see Including
Structural Input Files (on page 300).
APCF - Opens the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box, which provides an
interactive, customizable way to import Piping Component Files (PCFs) into the CAESAR II
piping environment. For more information, see Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page
300).
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the X axis.
Move Geometry (Y-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Y axis.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Z axis.
Reset
Piping Input menu: View > Reset
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset Plot
Resets the view to the default settings.
Front View
Piping Input menu: View > Front View
Standard Views toolbar: Front
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Piping Input menu: View > Back View
Standard Views toolbar: Back
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top View
Piping Input menu: View > Top View
Standard Views toolbar: Top
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Piping Input menu: View > Bottom View
Standard Views toolbar: Bottom
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Left-side View
Standard Views toolbar: Left
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
Right-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Right-side View
Standard Views toolbar: Right
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.
4 View
Piping Input menu: View > 4 View
Plot Tools toolbar: 4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.
Mini-windows
Piping Input menu: Tools > Mini-windows
Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to
provide specific types of data.
Fixed Format
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.
e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values must be
12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should be 697
(1+58x12) characters long.
f. The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its location in a
CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1,
and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.
g. A value must occupy a 12 character field. When a value has fewer than 12 characters,
you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12 characters in length. If
there is no displacement value, a 12 character blank field must be reserved for it.
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.
Warning Messages
There are three kinds of warning messages:
1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not exist in
the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots in the
model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible for you to
input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does
not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.
Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending
node in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.
Summary Report
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations.
The reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a
CAESAR II Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
6. The number of displacement nodes that do not have displacements.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model.
8. The number of displacement nodes that are replacing values in the model.
9. The number of displacement nodes that are new in the model.
Similar in operation to the warning messages, the summary report can help you identify potential
problems in a displacement file. However, you should remember the following points:
1. Because every displacement data line in a displacement file has a node number, the total
number of nodes processed is equal to the total number of displacement data lines in the
file.
2. Each displacement data line should have a unique node number. However, if the same
node number appears in many data lines, it would be counted many times. In this case, the
displacement values in the last data line are used in the model, overwriting the previous
values.
3. If no node number appears in a displacement data line, CAESAR II indicates the
corresponding data line number and stops the import process.
4. If there is a node in a displacement file that is not in the model, or cannot find a slot in the
model, or does not have a displacement, the displacement file or the model should be
checked carefully to understand the reasons behind it.
5. If a displacement node exists both in the model and the displacement file, the displacement
values from the file are used to overwrite the ones in the model, and this node is counted as
a replacement node.
6. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import should be equal to the
number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import, plus the number of new
displacement nodes.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model should be
equal to the number of replacement nodes, plus the number of new displacement nodes.
For more details about warning messages and the summary report, see Imposed Loads.
6. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, click Done.
The first two figures show displacement files Notepad for disp and csv formats. The third
and fourth figures show displacement files in Microsoft Excel.
For a detailed description of both file formats, see Displacement File Formats (on page 363).
3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping
Input dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays
according to the configuration defaults. These defaults include:
A rendered view - restraints shown
XYZ compass - isometric view
Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other relevant
items are added.
The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available
option to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in
the form of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message
changes to Ready.
When you hover the cursor over a button, the name of the button and a short description of the
functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot utility. You
can access commands by clicking buttons, by selecting menu items, or by using hot keys.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Translucent - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. Click
the down arrow to display node numbers for a specific element, such as for only restraints
or only anchors. Select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not
the node numbers.
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the
model to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or
remove elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
You can turn off the display of node numbers (for restraints, hangers, and anchors)
for a clearer view. The size of boundary condition symbols (such as restraints, anchors, and
hangers) is relative to the pipe size outer diameter. You can change the size of these symbols
clicking the black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting a size from the list.
You can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, and so
on by clicking Change Display Options . For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics
(on page 378).
Reset - Returns the model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration. Any
elements hidden by the Range command are restored.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or
down holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom.
Alternatively, press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the
model while in another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you
specify. Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a
box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow
keys on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start
a bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 378). During
rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may
disappear or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual
conversion depends on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is
complete, the model returns to its original state.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding
down the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active
by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse.
Walk Through - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application.
This command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information,
see Walking Through the Model (on page 386).
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click menu. You must also
right-click directly on the element selected to access the Element context menu.
1. Select the element command that you want to perform.
The software completes the action and moves the cursor to the next logical box on the
piping input.
b. Select more than one element on the model and right-click to see the block operations
available from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click element context
menu.
2. Select one of the following options:
Rotate
Duplicate
Delete
Renumber
Invert
Change Sequence
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.
Invert
Change Sequence
Status
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better
identify the location of the highlighted element within the model. For more
information, see Find (on page 235).
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 333).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.
For more information, see Line Numbers (on page 281).
3. Type a new value in the Edit box and press ENTER or click anywhere in the dialog box.
The software updates all elements that have the same property value, represented in the
Legend dialog box, on the 3D model, and in the List dialog box.
Currently, the software does not include global update functionality for the
following piping input properties:
Materials
Piping Codes
Forces
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave Data
Displacements
Pipe Density
Configuring 3D Graphics
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions.
When you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu to display the CAESAR II Configuration
Editor dialog box.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.
These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the
graphics according to these settings.
If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an
XML data file (job- name.XML) in the current data folder. After starting another input session,
CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes
the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics
operator.
Option Description
Colors Select any color item in the list, then click to display a Windows color selection
tool. Select the new color. Click Reset All to return all of the settings to CAESAR II
defaults, as defined in configuration,.
Fonts Selecting any font item in the list, then click to display the standard Windows
font selection tool. Set the options to meet your requirements and click OK.
Option Description
Show Bounding Box Determines if rotations using the mouse include an outline box
surrounding the model.
Hide Overlapped Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.
Text
Restore Previous Determines whether the software remembers your last command
Operator (operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified
command.
Restore Previous Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed
View view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.
Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure.
You can make changes to some piping input properties from the Legends dialog box. The
software updates all elements that have the same property value in the model. For more
information, see Updating Properties from the 3D Model (on page 378).
Command Description
Diameters Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this
option to see the diameter variations throughout the system or to verify
that diameter changes have been made. Alternatively, press D. A color
key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Wall Thickness Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color.
Use this option to see the wall thickness variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Thickness Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the cladding thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Refractory Thickness Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the refractory thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation thickness or cladding
thickness by selecting that option from the list.
Material Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this
option to see the material variations throughout the system or to verify
that changes have been made. Alternatively, press M. A color key
displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use
this option to see the piping code variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made.
Pipe Density Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use
this option to see the pipe density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the pipe
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use
this option to see the fluid density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the fluid
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Insulation Density Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color.
Use this option to see the insulation density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to cladding density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Density Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color.
Use this option to see the cladding density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a
different color. Use this option to see the variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, cladding density, or
refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color.
Use this option to see the refractory density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or insulation density by selecting that option from the list.
The Legend dialog box can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any of
orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the
view.
Uniform Loads - Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use
this option to see the uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key displays the uniform loads defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the
data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force
vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave - Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color.
Use this option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes
have been made. A color key displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of
the data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data
defined display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
You can display predefined displacements by pressing F3. You can display forces/moment
vectors by pressing F5.
Select Element displays element data. When this command is active, hovering the cursor
over a pipe element displays the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data.
Clicking an element highlights the element and updates the information on the dialog box.
Click in the empty space of the graphics view to unhighlight the element. The dialog box still
contains the information from the last element that you selected.
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics
(on page 378).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator. (For
example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation. Clicking the
various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of
providing the ability to move in a perfectly straight line.
In addition, Walk Through also provides you with the added functionality of determining the
walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first
click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect
walk through's operation:
Shift - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
Ctrl - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
Alt - Enables you to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key,
automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward.
To exit from this command, click any other command.
Moving Elements
The Move Geometry commands, located in the Edit Mode toolbar, let you select and move
nodes or elements along a specified axis. Select the node or element, and then press Tab or
click to select the x-, y-, or z-axis option (located next to the Move Geometry option in the
toolbar). The software defaults to the X-Axis.
For example, to move a restraint along a corresponding pipe centerline, select Move Geometry
and specify the direction of the axis for the line. Or, if your model includes an expansion loop,
select Move Geometry to change the length or depth of the loop in the direction of the specified
axis.
After you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator. (For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
To move elements on the 3D model
1. Click Move Geometry to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points.
On bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis, press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode
toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry is updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number, the
movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.
Click S3D/SPR Model in the Reference CAD Models toolbar in the Classic Piping Input
and select one of the following drop-down menu options:
Load S3D/SPR Model
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model
Dim S3D/SPR Model
S3D/SPR Visibility Options
Top Face Marker - Moves the top face (for example, the face that is perpendicular to
top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).
Base Markers - Allows you to re-size the bounding box by selecting any one of three
markers and dragging the mouse.
Base Marker 1 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3.
Base Marker 2 - Moves these two faces simultaneously.
Base Marker 3 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 1.
Centroid Marker - Sits at the center of the bounding box volume and moves the whole
bounding box from one position to another.
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes,
depending on how you manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics
markers. The Starting Point boxes are view-only boxes that are for informational purposes
only.
7. Click Load File.
The software loads all components that are inside the bounding box into your model. A
component that originates within the bounding box and extends beyond the boundaries of
the bounding box displays in its entirety. A component that lies completely outside of the
bounding box is totally excluded from the view.
You can load a partial or a full VUE or HSF model. From the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box,
you can specify to rotate the model upon import into CAESAR II, if needed. You can also specify
a bounding box area, which indicates a section of the model that you want to load into CAESAR
II.
Select a File
Select a Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review VUE or a HOOPS Stream File (HSF) file from your
hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your graphics file.
Full Load
Select to load the entire S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE file or HSF.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Partial Load
Select if you want to load a specified portion of the S3D or SPR model from the selected
VUE file or HSF. This option allows you to use the bounding box to specify the section of the
graphic model to load into your CAESAR II model.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Re-Import
Select to re-import the VUE file or HSF.
Model Rotation
Specifies the degree to which the software rotates a graphics model before loading it into
the current CAESAR II model.
The software rotates the model to the specified angle from its original state. In
other words, if you return to the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box and select a new angle of
rotation, the software rotates based on the original angle in which the model was loaded.
Starting Point X
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.
Starting Point Y
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.
Starting Point Z
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.
To Edit S3D/SPR Visibility Options for a loaded VUE file or HSF model:
1. Select S3D/SPR Visibility Options from the S3D/SPR Model drop-down list in the
piping input.
The S3D/SPR Visibility Options dialog box displays.
2. Select a Visibility percentage from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of
components in a S3D or SPR model.
The Visibility percentage indicates the percentage of light allowed to pass through the
object. For example, a low percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly
invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check box(es) to display the elements for a given category or
select the top check box to display all the categories.
The graphic on the loaded model display based on the specified visibility values.
4. Click the Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D/SPR model graphic.
5. Click the refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D/SPR model graphic and display the
revised visibility settings.
In This Section
Structural Steel Model Basics ........................................................395
Structural Steel Graphics................................................................400
CAESAR II Structural Input ............................................................401
Structural Steel Input Examples .....................................................405
Insert Menu .....................................................................................430
Commands Menu ...........................................................................430
Structural Databases ......................................................................468
Start the Structural Steel Modeler from the CAESAR II main menu by opening a structural file,
and then choosing Input > Structural Steel. The software opens the CAESAR II Structural
Input dialog box.
Because many structures have a considerable degree of repeatability, there are various forms,
options, and deviations for these commands to help you generate large structural models. The
method of single element generation is well suited to the needs of most pipers.
Create new lines by selecting a keyword command from the Edit menu or from the toolbar. The
most typically used commands are as follows:
EDim (on page 442)
Defines structural elements.
Fix (on page 433)
Defines structural anchors (ALL) or restraints.
Load (on page 448)
Defines concentrated forces.
Unif (on page 445)
Defines uniform loads.
Secid (on page 453)
Defines cross-section properties.
From the Edit menu, you can complete other frequently used functions, including:
Edit > Undo
Reverse the last action.
Edit > Copy Card
Copies an existing command. You must first select the command to copy.
Edit > Paste Card
Pastes a command in the model at the location specified from the Insert menu.
Edit > Delete Card
Deletes an existing command. You must first select the command to delete.
Certain commands set parameters that the software uses for all future element generations:
Default (on page 465)
Sets the default Section ID and Material ID.
Angle (on page 444)
Sets the default element orientation.
Beams (on page 458), Braces (on page 460), and Columns (on page 463)
Sets the default end connection type.
Before you start working with structural models in CAESAR II, you must specify the database for
upon which the software bases the model.
Structural models may be run alone (singularly), or may be included in piping jobs.
7. Click Batch Run to begin error checking the model. After you resolve and eliminate any
warnings and errors, you can run the entire model successfully.
The software includes the structural elements in the model for the flexibility calculations.
These elements appear as any other piping element, except that CAESAR II does not
calculate stresses for structural elements.
You can use stand-alone AISC Code Check software to verify that forces and
moments on standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowable stress limits as
defined by the American Institute of Steel Construction.
From the model, you can show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass, node
numbers, and element lengths.In addition, you can change the size of restraints relative to the
structural elements.
The graphics view displays in the right pane when you define enough information in
the Card Stack pane. For example, if you specify the method as Method 2 - Node/Element
Specifications in the Structural Steel Wizard, and you have only specified the Nodes in the
list of commands, the software does not display anything in the graphical view because there is
not yet a model to show. However, after you define a single element (Elem) between two points
in space, the software displays the corresponding element in the graphical view. When using
Method 1 - Element Definitions (EDIM), which is similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II
Classic Piping Input, the corresponding graphic element displays after you specify the EDim
command parameters.
You can resize or disable the Card Stack pane to allow the graphical view to fill the entire
screen. Additionally, you can dock the Card Stack pane on or off of the main window. After you
dock the pane, you can remove it completely from the view or close it. To show or hide the Card
Stack pane, click .
The CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box has a Change Display Option that lets you
change the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information, see
Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 378).
Loads, such as uniform or wind, are not available in graphics mode in the Structural
Steel Modeler.
You can also flip the coordinate system automatically between displaying the Y-axis up (or Y-up)
to the Z-axis up (or Z-up) in the Structural Steel Modeler. The software modifies all relevant data
match with the new coordinate system. Click Vertical to insert the VERTICAL command
into the command list, and then select Y or Z-from the axis parameter options.
The Card Stack pane is sub-divided into two columns. The first column displays commands and
parameters. Click the arrow to the left of any command to view the parameter data in the second
column of the pane.
To add a command to the model, select the command from either the Commands menu or the
Commands toolbar. For more information, see Commands Menu (on page 430).
Click + to expand command and view the parameters available. Type or select the values in the
second column. Add all the commands to the structural model, and then click Save to
generate the structural model.
Card Stack, List Options, and Errors tabs at the bottom of the Card Stack pane display mode,
keyword and error information for the model. Click Auto Hide to collapse the tabs to the left
side of the window and expand the graphical view. Click Close X to hide the tabs.
The Errors tab does not display when there are no errors in the model.
Use the Input Card Toolbar functions to copy, paste, or delete commandsd from the structural
model.
Define a cross-section
Use the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify the cross-
sections in the model.
1. Click Select Section ID.
The Section ID Selection dialog box appears.
The software defaults the Section ID to 1, but you can type a new ID.
2. Expand the hierarchy as needed, select a cross section and click OK.
You can also type a cross section name in the NAME box. For more information,
see Structural Databases (on page 468) for cross section names in the CAESAR II
databases.
3. Optionally, select User Defined? to create a custom cross section. Type values for Area,
Ixx (moment of inertia about the strong axis), Iyy (moment of inertia about the weak axis), J
(torsion) (torsional resistivity constant), BoxH (overall height) and BoxW (overall width).
A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe
stress program are:
Fx= -39.0 lbs.
Fy= -1975.0 lbs.
Fz= 1350.0 lbs.
2. Enter a job name (for example, SUPP), click the Structural Input option, and browse to
select the data directory. Then, click OK.
6. Specify the cross section by typing in the name exactly as it appears (including exact
capitalization and trailing zeros) or by clicking Select Section ID and selecting the name
from the list.
For this example, enter the Section ID 1 name as W16X26.
7. Click Add Another Section to create other cross sections. Enter Section ID 2 as MC8X22.8
and Section ID 3 as L6X4X0.5000. Repeat this until you have three sections specified in this
example, then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
8. Select Method 1 - Element Definitions Method Selection (the default setting) to use the
Element Dimension (EDim) option to define individual elements that span between two node
points. Then, click Finish. This input works similarly to piping input, where elements are
defined by their end points and delta X, Y, Z distances between those end points.
The Method 2 - Node/Element Specifications option uses commands to define an array of
nodes in space and commands to add elements bounded by these nodes.
The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
Notice that the first element is at node 5 to node 10 and runs 12 feet in the Y direction and
has a section number of 1 (the default section).
Press TAB to move quickly from one Card Stack box to the next.
3. When you complete the first element, click EDim and repeat the entry process to add
the next four elements.
Use the Input Card Toolbar functions to copy, paste, or delete a card from the
Structural Modeler. Alternatively, you can copy or delete a card element by selecting Edit
> Copy Card or Edit > Delete Card.
After you complete the element entry, the software displays the current model.
Select Reset View to return the model to a default view each time the model
refreshes. When activated, this function appears highlighted. You can use Reset View to
zoom in and out on the model to make changes, and then quickly return to your default
view.
5. Click Loads to enter the loads on this support. You can use a previous CAESAR II
analysis for these loads.
6. Enter the loads at Node 20 [(FX, FY, FZ)=(-39, -1975, 1350)].
7. Add comments to the model by first setting where CAESAR II inserts comments from the
Insert menu option. You can specify for comments to appear before or after the currently
selected element, or at the end of the model elements list. Click Comment to add
comments to the model.
After you insert a comment, you must click the down arrow to expand the
comment element and add the comment text. The following example shows the completed
model with new comments inserted.
8. Click File > Save to check and save the model. Then, click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model by itself.
9. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
10. With the SUPP file still open as the current model, click Analysis > Statics on the toolbar.
Remember to replace the Weight load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied
loads).
11. Click Run the Analysis.
CAESAR II performs the structural steel analysis, just as a piping analysis.
The output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The
results from the analysis of the SUPP model show the displacements at Node 20.
These displacements are excessive for a support, which is to be assumed rigid in another
analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39 lb. / 10.125 in. = 3.85 lb./in
Ky = 1975 lb. / 0.4228 in. = 4671 lb./in.
Kz = 1350 lb. / 0.8444 in. = 1599 lb./in.
Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:
Import the structural input file into the Structural Steel Modeler
1. Click File > Open from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Change File of type to Structural (*.str) and navigate to the file you created,
SUPP2.str. Then, click Open.
3. Click Input > Structural Steel from the CAESAR II main menu.
The software opens the structural model for SUPP2.str.
4. After you have confirmed that the model is correct, click File > Save, and click Yes to save
the model.
5. Select all the check boxes in the Model Generation Status dialog box, and click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model with a
piping model.
6. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
PIPE DATA
From 5 to 10 DX= 6.417 ft.
PIPE
Dia = 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
GENERAL
T1= 850 F Mat= (186)A335 P5
Insul Thk= .000 in.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
RESTRAINTS
Node 5 ANC
ALLOWABLE STRESSES
B31.3 (2008)
----------------------------------------------------------
From 10 to 15 DY= -8.000 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 15 to 20 DY= -13.833 ft
----------------------------------------------------------
From 20 to 25 DY= -8.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
----------------------------------------------------------
From 25 to 30 DX= 10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 30 +Y
----------------------------------------------------------
From 30 To 35 DX= 30.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 35 +Y
----------------------------------------------------------
From 35 To 40 DX= 10.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
----------------------------------------------------------
From 40 To 45 DZ= -3.750 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 45 To 50 DZ= -4.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
REDUCER
Diam2= 36.000 in. Wall2= .375 in.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 50 To 55 DZ= -20.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 36.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 55 To 60 DZ= -20.000 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 60 To 65 DZ= -10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 65 ANC
----------------------------------------------------------
From 15 To 115 DX= -2.500 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 115 X Cnode 215
Node 115 Z Cnode 215
----------------------------------------------------------
From 20 To 120 DX= -2.500 ft.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 120 X Cnode 240
In this piping input example, there are two weightless, rigid elements at nodes 15 to 115 and 20
to 120 that run out from the pipe centerline to the connecting points of the structure.
The two restraint sets at the end of the data115 and 120are pipe nodes and their
CNodes215 and 240are structural steel nodes in SUPP2.
4. After the software plots the pipe and structure relative to one another, exit the Piping Input
(on page 29) dialog box and run the error check.
The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The execution
files that the software writes also include the structural data.
5. Run the analysis using the default load cases.
The following shows the restraint report for Load Case 1, W+T1 (OPE):
The loads on the anchor at 5 are excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support
structure as shown are not satisfactory.
In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe.
The pipe is thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler
nozzle.
The pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the
structure in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements result in higher
loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied
more closely.
You could add vertical springs at 30 and 35, which might help, along with a repositioning of the
structural supports vertically. For example, the support at node 120 should be moved down so
that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line of the pipe
between nodes 25 and 40.
6. Click Next in the Material Selection dialog box to use default material properties.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page.
7. Specify the two cross sections, Section ID 1 as W12X65 and Section ID 2 as W10X22, and
then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
Select Method 1 - Element Definitions (the default setting) to use the element dimension
(Edim) method of input. Then, click Finish.
The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
8. Use the interactive input processor to input the following commands.
You can also import these commands by inputting them in a text editor and then
importing the .str file into the model. For more information, see Structural Steel Example #2
(on page 414).
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
VERTICAL=Y
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283
SECID 1 W12X65
SECID 2 W10X22
; Preceding entries completed by opening dialog
; Columns have strong axis in Z (Default is X)
ANGLE=90
; Generate all columns
EDIM FROM=5 TO=10 BY=5 LAST=20 DY=12-
EDIM 25 30 BY=5 LAST=40 DY=12-
EDIM 45 50 BY=5 LAST=60 DY=12-
EDIM 65 70 BY=5 LAST=80 DY=12-
; Beam orientation is standard
ANGLE=0
; Set the default Section ID to 2
DEF SECID=2
; Beams are pinned, both ends are free to rotate
BEAM FREE FBNDSTR FBNDWEAK FTORS TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK TTORS
; Define most beams
EDIM 10 30 5 LAST=35 DZ=-14-
EDIM 30 50 5 LAST=60 DX=-10-
EDIM 50 70 5 LAST=80 DZ=14-
EDIM 70 10 5 LAST=20 DX=10-
; Node 1000 will be fixed in rotation
BEAM FIX FAXIAL FSHRSTR FSHRWEAK TAXIAL TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK TSHRSTR
TSHRWEAK TTORS
; Add midpoint 1000 on top beam
EDIM 20 1000 DZ=-7-
EDIM 40 1000 DZ=7-
; Define anchors at the bottom of each column
FIX 5 65 BY=20 ALL
; Set representative loads
LOAD 1000 FX=0000 FY=10000 FZ=10000
9. After you enter all of the model data, the SUPP3 structural model appears as follows:
10. When you are satisfied that the model has been entered properly, click File > Save to check
and save the model.
CAESAR II checks the input. If no fatal errors are found, the software writes the CAESAR II
Execution files. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. For
the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.
11. Click OK, and then close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler Input dialog box.
12. Return to the CAESAR II Main menu.
From this point, structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from
a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.
3. Click Run the Analysis , and then click OK.
The software displays the Static Analysis dialog box.
4. Select the F1 load case in the Load Cases Analyzed box and Displacements and Global
Element Forces in the Standard Reports.
5. Click Add and then Finish to generate the reports.
The Displacements and Global Element Forces reports for the F1 load case displays as
follows.
Notice that the structure is more stiff in the X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater,
due to the orientation of the columns. The Global Element Forces (which displays forces and
moments) report is particularly interesting because all of the beams have pinned ends. Most of
the beams carry no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is
due to rotations at the column ends, and not translations.
By adding cross-braces you can eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of
the load. The 1000 end node of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment
because it is not a pinned end connection. The 1000 end node is just a point at midspan for the
application of the load.
Insert Menu
Use the Insert menu to specify where to place a command from the Command menu in the
Card Stock pane.
At End of Model
Places a new card at the end of the model (that is, at the bottom of the Card Stack).
Commands Menu
Use the Commands Menu to add cards in the Card Stack pane. The cards define parameters
used in the structural model.
Node
Node or Commands > Node defines the coordinates of a point in global X, Y, and Z space
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
node number
Specifies the node number.
x, y, z
Specifies the global coordinates.
NFill
NFill or Commands > NFill defines evenly spaced nodes between two end points and
places the following card in the Card Stack:
3. Click Nfill .
The NFILL card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NFILL properties.
6. Click Save if you are finished.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
from
Specifies the from node number.
to
Specifies the to node number.
by
Specifies the increment in the range.
NGen
NGen or Commands > NGen duplicates patterns of nodes and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
The first and last node in the base node pattern must exist before you can use NGen. Other
nodes not previously defined in the base node pattern are evenly spaced by a defined increment
between the first and last node. Subsequent nodal patterns start from the base pattern. DX, DY,
and DZ offsets define nodes duplicated from the base pattern of nodes.
Duplicate node
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NGEN card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 430).
3. Click NGen .
The NGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NGEN properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
from
Specifies the first node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
to
Specifies the last node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
inc
Specifies a value for the increment you want to use in the base node pattern between the first
node and the last node. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
last
Specifies the number of times to duplicate the base node pattern. If you do not enter a value,
single pattern duplication occurs.
nodeInc
Specifies a value for the increment that you want to use in the base node pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern and so forth.
dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
Example
The nodes from 1100 to 2000 with an increment of 100 are duplicated twice. Each new pattern
is offset by 10 ft. in the Z-direction. The new nodes created are from 2100 to 3000 and also from
3100 to 4000.
Fix
Fix or Commands > Fix defines the restraint boundary conditions at the structural member
end points and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
from
Specifies the first node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and
by.
to
Specifies the last node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and
by.
by
Specifies the increment in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and
by.
all
Specifies that all six degrees of freedom (DOF) are Free or Fixed.
This parameter is the equivalent of an anchor.
all stiffness
Specifies the same stiffness value for all six degrees of freedom (DOF).
x
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the x direction.
x stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the x direction.
y
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the y direction.
y stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the y direction.
z
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the z direction.
z stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the z direction.
rx
Specifies the value for the rotation in the x direction.
rx stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the x direction.
ry
Specifies the value for the rotation in the y direction.
ry stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the y direction.
rz
Specifies the value for the rotation in the z direction.
rz stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the z direction.
Example
1. FIX 1 ALL. Fix all degrees of freedom at node #1.
2. FIX 5 X1000 Y1000 Z1000. Fix X, Y and Z degrees of freedom at node #5, and use 1,000
lb./in. springs.
3. FIX 100 TO 110. ALL Fix rigidly all degrees of freedom for the nodes from 100 to 110. The
increment between 100 and 110 defaults to 1. Eleven nodes have their fixities defined here.
4. FIX 105 TO 125 BY 5 X1000,1000,1000 Fix X, Y, and Z degrees of freedom for the nodes:
105, 110, 115, 120, and 125, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs.
5. FIX (1) to (10) ALL Fix all degrees of freedom for the first 10 nodes in the node list.
Elem
Elem or Commands > Elem defines a single element between two nodes and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:
You can use a section identifier and a material identifier for the element. If you omit the section
and/or material IDs the program uses the current default.
from
Specifies the from node number.
to
Specifies the to node number.
secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.
matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.
EFill
EFill generates a consecutive string of elements and places the following card in the Card
Stack pane:
You can use the EFill command at any time, none of the elements generated need to
exist prior to adding the EFill command.
3. Click EFill .
The EFILL card is added to the card stack.
4. Click to expand the EFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EFILL properties.
6. Click Save to finish adding cards to the Card Stack.
The stack is saved and the Error Checker checks your model for errors
from
Specifies the from node number on the first element generated.
to
Specifies the to node number on the first element generated.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element generated.
secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.
matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.
insecid
Specifies the increment to use to get from the Section ID for the first element to the Section ID
for the second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
incMatId
Specifies the increment to get from the Material ID for the first element to the Material ID for the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
Example
Elements are generated between each pair of nodes between nodes 1200 and 2000. The
increment between From nodes and To nodes is 100. Nine elements are created in this
example.
Elem was not necessary here. Create all nine elements using EFill and by substituting node
1100 in place of node 1200 in the from field.
EGen
EGen or Commands EGen duplicates patterns of elements and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
Duplicate elements
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EGEN card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 430).
3. Click EGen .
The EGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the EGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EGEN properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element in the base pattern.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element in the base pattern.
inc
Specifies the increment to use to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern
to the from node on the second element in base pattern. If you do not enter a value, the default
is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element in the base pattern. The software generates multiple
copies from the base pattern of elements.
genInc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element in the base pat\-tern to
the from node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern.
genIncTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node on the first element in the base pattern to
the to node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern. If you do not enter a value, the
value of genInc is used.
genLast
Specifies the to node on the last element in the last pattern to be duplicated from the base
pattern.
secId
Specifies the Section ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 465).
matId
Specifies the Material ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 465).
inSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use between patterns. For example, the first pattern of
elements generated from the base pattern of elements has a Section ID of SECID + INCSECID.
If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
incMatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to use between patterns. If you do not enter a value, the
default is 0.
Example
Building on the Example for EFill (on page 438). The base element pattern from 1100 to 2000 is
reproduced two additional times, from 2100 to 3000 and from 3100 to 4000. Each element has
nodal increments of 100. The increment between the Base Element and the Next Element is
1000 and the last node in the last pattern is 4000. The cross members are created using the
base pattern from 1100 to 2100 and reproducing it in nodal increments of 100 until node 4000 is
reached.
EDim
EDim or Commands > EDim defines elements using the dimensions of the element instead
of references to nodes and places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
Any existing elements encountered are redefined. If you are defining a single element, do not
enter values for inc, incto, and last.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element to be defined.
to
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
secID
Specifies the Section ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
matID
Specifies the Material ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
incSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use to get from the Section ID of the first element to the
Section ID of the second element.
incmatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to get from the Material ID of the first element to the
Material ID of the second element.
Example
1. EDIM 5 to 10 DY = 12-3 SECID=2. Column 12-3 high from 5 to 10.
2. EDIM 5,10 DY=12-3,2. Same column
3. EDIM 2 TO 3 LAST=8 DX=13-3. Defining beams 13-3 long and elements 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6,
6-7, and 7-8. INC defaults to 1.
Angle
Angle or Commands > Angle defines the default element strong axis orientation and places
the following card in in the Card Stack pane:
Define structural columns when the strong axis is not parallel to the global X-axis
Use Angle with a structural column when the strong axis of the column is not parallel to the
global X-axis. When the strong axis of the column is parallel to the global Z-axis, redefine the
default orientation to ANGLE=90. Define the column elements then use ANGLE again to reset
the default orientation to its original value of ANGLE=0.0.
angle
Specifies a value for the default Strong Axis Orientation Angle to use for all subsequent
defined elements.
Unif
Unif or Commands > Unif defines a constant uniform load that acts over the full length of
the member and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Uniform loads can have special meanings when used in CAESAR II Piping runs.
If you are defining a uniform load that acts on a single element only, do not enter values
for inc, incTo, and last.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element this uniform load is to act on.
ux, uy, uz
Specifies the magnitude of the uniform load in the global X, Y, and Z directions. Unless used in
a piping analysis using G loads, use uniform loads in units of force per unit length of member.
When used in a piping analysis with G loads the uniform loads are in units of gravitational
acceleration, for example, uy=-1 would define a uniform load identical to the member weight
load.
Examples
1. UNIF 1 TO 2 UY=-2.3 On the element from 1 to 2 a uniform load with a magnitude of 2.3
lbs. per inch acts in the -Y direction.
2. UNIF 1, 2, UY -2, 3 Same
3. UNIF 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 UX=0.03, -1, 0.03 There are uniform loads acting on elements 100-200, 102-
203,...,300-500 with a small horizontal component and a -1 load in the Y. It looks like you
have G load input for the piping problem.
5. UNIF (1) to (30) UY=-2.3 The first thirty elements in the element list have a uniform load of -
2.3 pounds per inch acting in the -Y direction.
Orient
Orient or Commands > Orient defines the element strong axis orientation and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:
from
Specifies the from node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for from.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for to.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element to have its orientation angle defined.
angle
Specifies the rotation in degrees from the default position to the actual position of the member
strong axis.
Examples
1. ORIENT 1 TO 2 ANGLE=90. The strong axis for the element from 1 to 2 is 90 away from
the default position.
2. ORIENT 5 TO 10 INC=5 LAST=30 ANGLE=90. The vertical column elements: 5-10, 10-15,
15-20, 20-25, and 25-30 have their strong axes 90 away from the default position. Their
new strong axis is along the Z axis. With their new orientation, the columns are better suited
to take X direction forces.
3. ORIENT 1 TO (20) ANGLE=90. The first twenty elements in the element list have their
strong axes 90 away from the default position.
Load
Load or Commands > Load defines concentrated forces and moments that act at structural
member end points. It places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
from
Specifies the from node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and
by.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and
by.
by
Specifies the increment in the range.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and
by.
fx, fy, fz
Specifies the magnitude of concentrated forces in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
mx, my, mz
Specifies the magnitude of the moments in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Examples
1. LOAD 305 FY-1000. Have a minus 1,000 lb. Y direction load acting at the structural node
#305.
2. LOAD 10 TO 18 BY=1 FX=707, FZ=707. Have skewed loads in the horizontal plane acting
at each of the nodes 10, 11,...,17, 18. You do not have to use by here, the default is 1.
3. LOAD (15) to (25) FY=-383. A load of 383 pounds acts in the -Y direction on the 15th
through the 25th nodes in the Node list.
Wind Loads
Wind or Commands > Wind defines the magnitude of the wind shape factor for the
structural elements and places a card in the Card Stack pane:
from
Specifies the from node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node of the last element the wind load is to act on.
shape
Specifies a value for the magnitude of the wind shape factor. For structural steel members this
value is usually 2.0. For elements not exposed to the wind, disable wind loading on the structure
by resetting this value to 0. This value populates to all subsequently defined elements. If you do
not enter a value, the default is 2.0.
Examples
1. WIND 1 TO 2 SHAPE=2.0. The element from 1 to 2 has a shape factor with a magnitude of
2.0 applied. This value is applied to all the following elements.
2. WIND 1, 2, SHAPE 2.0. Same
3. WIND 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 SHAPE=1.8 There is a wind shape factor of 1.8 on elements 100-200, 102-
203,...,300-500.
GLoads
GLoad or Commands > GLoad processes all specified uniform loads as G loads instead of
force/length loads and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Specify GLoads
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the GLOADS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 430).
3. Click GLoad .
The GLOADS card is added to the card stack.
4. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
MatId
MatId or Commands > MatId specifies material properties that correspond to a Material ID
number and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
You must have at least one valid material specification in the input file. For more information,
see Material Properties (on page 222).
matId
Specifies a Material ID number. This number is usually 1, and numbered sequentially for
additional materials.
You can change the value assigned by the model input file.
ym
Specifies a value for Youngs Modulus of Elasticity. The default value is 30,000,000 (30x106) psi
for A-36 structural steel.
pois
Specifies a value for Poissons Ratio. The default value is 0.3 for A-36 structural steel.
g
Specifies a value for the shear modulus. The default value is 11,000,000 (11x106) psi for A-36
structural steel and is typically about one-third the value of Young's Modulus.
ys
Specifies a value for the yield strength. The default value is 36,000 (36x103) psi for A-36
structural steel. This property is currently not used.
dens
Specifies a value for the material density. The default value is 0.283 for A-36 structural steel.
Alpha [x]
Specifies from one to nine values for the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Enter values for Alpha after entering a value for dens.
SecId
SecId or Commands > SecId assigns member cross-section properties to the Section ID
numbers and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
section Id
Specifies a user-defined Section ID for this set of cross-section properties. Section IDs usually
start at 1 and increase incrementally by one, but you can assign values in any order.
name
Specifies an American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) shape name. For a user-defined
shape, type USER. You must enter the AISC names exactly as shown in the AISC handbook
with the exceptions:
Enter fractions as decimals. For example, type LX6X3-1/2X1/2 as L6X3.5X0.5
Omit all leading or trailing zeros.
You can select the section name from the window after clicking the Select Section ID
button.
User-Defined
Specifies a user-defined shape. You must enter values for the additional parameters to define a
user-defined cross-section.
area
Specifies the cross-section area (in length2 units).
lxx
Specifies the strong axis moment of inertia (in length 4 units).
lyy
Specifies the weak axis moment of inertia (in length4 units).
torsion
Specifies the torsional resistivity constant (in length4 units).
boxH
Specifies the height (along the weak axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
boxW
Specifies the width (along the strong axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
For example, use Free to describe the element ends in a structure that has pinned-only
beam-to-column connections.
You can also use Beams , Braces , and Columns to set the free end
connection defaults for certain types of members. For more information, see Beams (on page
458), Braces (on page 460), and Columns (on page 463).
After you define each element and set the defaults, the program automatically adds a
card to the Card Stack and adds values to FREE parameters. Use this to help keep track of the
connections and nodes that define the element.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies a value for the to node on the last element this FREE command is to apply to. You
can omit last, inc, and incTo if the FREE command is only to apply to a single element.
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
Examples
1. A small WF shape has a pinned connection to a large I-beam. The weak axis bending of the
WF shape is not transmitted to the web of the I-beam. If the element defining the WF shape
uses nodes 1040 to 1045 then the FREE card for this element has the following format:
FREE 1040 TO 1045 fbndweak, tbndweak
2. The westward side of a building has a row of beams on the ground floor that are attached
rigidly to columns at the other end. The beams are identified by the pattern of nodes: 610-
710, 620-720, 630-730, ..., 690-790. There are eight beams in this group. The 600 end is
pinned. The FREE cards for this group have the following format:
FREE 610 TO 710 INC=10 LAST=790 ftors, fbndstr, fbndweak
Beams
Beams or Commands > Beams defines default end connection types for members identified
by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
A beam is any member whose center line lies completely along either the global X or global Z
axis. After you use Beams to define the element end connections, any element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and
Columns to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of
their center line. For more information, see Braces (on page 460), and Columns (on page 463).
mode
Defines the beams end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the
beam are fixed.
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
Examples
1. A group of beams that has both ends pinned must use the Free command. The BEAMS
card for this group has the following format:
Beams FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end beams must be returned to end connection default values. The BEAMS card for
this group has the following format:
Beams FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
Braces
Braces or Commands > Braces defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:
A brace is any member whose center line does not completely lie along any of the global axes.
After you use Braces to define element end connections, any brace element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Add Braces
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BRACES card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 430).
3. Click Braces .
The BRACES command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the BRACES card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BRACES properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the
brace are fixed.
mode
Defines the braces end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the
brace are fixed.
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
Examples
1. A group of braces that has both ends pinned to adjoining columns must use the Free
command. The BRACES card for this group has the following format:
Braces FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end braces must be returned to end connection default values. The BRACES card
for this group has the following format:
Braces FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix appears on the line following Braces then all end connections for the brace are
fixed.
Columns
Columns or Commands > Columns defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:
A column is any member whose centerline is completely vertical. After you use Columns to
define the element end connections, any element subsequently defined inherits those end
connection freedoms.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and
Columns to define default end connections types for members identified by the orientation of
their center line. For more information, see Beams (on page 458) and Braces (on page 460).
Add columns
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COLUMNS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 430).
3. Click Columns .
The Columns command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the COLUMNS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the COLUMNS properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the
column are fixed.
mode
Defines the columns end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the column are
fixed.
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
Examples
1. A group of corner columns that are pinned at their to ends must use the Free command.
The COLUMNS card for this group has the following format:
Columns FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end columns must be returned to end connection default values. The COLUMNS
card for this group has the following format:
Columns FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix is all that appears on the line following Columns, then all end connections for
the column are fixed.
As a general rule an element cannot undergo rigid body motion. Therefore, an element cannot
have both ttors and ftors released at the same time. Additionally beams typically have moment
releases only at their ends, not at intermediate nodes used to apply loads or connect bracing.
Default
Default or Commands > Default specifies the default values of the Section ID and the
Material ID and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
If you create an element without a Section ID or Material ID, the default values defined here are
used.
3. Click Default .
The DEFAULT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the DEFAULT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the DEFAULT properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
Comment
Comment or Commands > Comment adds a comment card to the Card Stack pane:
Add a comment
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COMMENT card in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 430).
3. Click Comment .
The COMMENT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the COMMENT card.
5. Type the information to add.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
Vertical
Vertical or Commands > Vertical specifies the axis orientation of a new or existing model
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
The axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder, (for example in wind and wave loads),
the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output
Processor is specified only by the orientation in the input file. For more information, see
Select a Vertical Axis (on page 403).
Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, changing this command
does not change the orientation of the structural input file. It rotates the model into the new
coordinate system.
When you include the structural files in a piping model, the axis orientations of the structural
files do not have to match the orientation of the piping model. The software translates the
orientation.
2. Click Vertical .
Unit
Unit displays the units file you specified in the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel
Wizard in the Card Stack pane:
You cannot change the units from the Card Stack pane. The structural file uses the units file
specified in the wizard as the unit of measure.
You do not have to choose the same file selected in configuration setup. For more
information, see Select a units file (on page 402).
List Options
List Options displays node and coordinate data, specifies node ranges, and selects reports.
Click ALL to display a copy of each report.
View reports
1. Click the List Options tab located at the bottom of the Card Stock.
The List Options pane appears.
2. Select the report you want to see.
The selected report appears in the Report pane.
Structural Databases
The CAESAR II Structural databases contain over 20 different properties for each cross-
section. For the finite element solution, only six of these items are employed:
Area
Strong axis moment of inertia
Weak axis moment of inertia
Torsional resistivity constant
Member section height
Member section depth
There are seven different structural databases included in CAESAR II
AISC 1977
AISC 1989
German 1991
Australian 1990
South African 1992
Korean 1990
UK 1993
W4X13
M5X18.9 M4X13
S3X5.7
D2.5X2X0.1875
B2.5X2X0.1875
WT7X155.
ST1.5X2.85
TFB125X65 TFB100X45
PFC150X75
EL25X25X3
UL65X50X5
IPEO600
T120 T140
W125X125 W100X100
UK 1993 Database
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Underground Pipe Modeler
Main window menu: Input > Underground
Takes an unburied layout and buries it. The modeler performs the following functions:
Allows the direct input of soil properties. The modeler contains the equations for buried pipe
stiffnesses. These equations are used to calculate the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe
basis and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint.
Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints using a zone
concept. Where transverse bearing is a concern near bends, tees, and entry/exit points, soil
restraints are located in close proximity.
Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are
spaced far apart.
Allows the direct entry of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a pipe-length basis. Input
parameters include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate
loads. You can specify stiffnesses separately or in conjunction with CAESAR IIs
automatically generated soil stiffnesses.
The Buried Pipe Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II input data file that
describes the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this input, the
software creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input
file typically contains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first
file that serves as the pattern is called the original job. The second file that contains the element
mesh refinement and the buried pipe restraints is called the buried job. CAESAR II names the
buried file by appending the letter B to the name of the original job.
The original job must already exist. During the process of creating the buried model,
the modeler removes any restraints in the buried section. Any additional restraints in the buried
section can be entered in the resulting buried model. The buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by
the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the buried job that is eventually run to
compute displacements and stresses.
Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above-ground
displacements. Buried pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in
directions, such as those found in bends and tees. In areas far removed from bends and tees,
the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element, that is, the distance between a
single FROM and a TO node, is dependent upon which of these deformation patterns is to be
modeled. Because there is no continuous support model, the software must locate additional
point supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. These additional point supports
can also be user-defined. For a given stiffness per unit length, one of the following must be
added:
Several closely spaced, low stiffness supports
A limited number of distant and high stiffness supports
Where the deformation is lateral, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces
from the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is called the "lateral
bearing length" and can be calculated using the following equation:
Lb = 0.75() [4EI/Ktr] 0.25
Where:
CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local
load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The
intermediate lengths in a piping system are called Zone 2 lengths, and the axial displacement
lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths. To properly transmit axial loads, Zone
3 element lengths are computed using 100 x Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping.
The Zone 2 mesh consists of four elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length
of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is
50 x Do long at the Zone 3 end. CAESAR II views a typical piping system element breakdown or
mesh distribution as shown below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as buried
so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.
CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe
framing into an elbow. You must tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the
piping system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone
1or lateral bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:
Data Conversion
CAESAR II converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy
the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these
zones. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius
elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the
immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding 1 to the
elements FROM node number. The software checks a node number to make sure that is
unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the continuous
support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.
See also
Buried Pipe Modeler Window (on page 490)
Soil Models (on page 495)
The first two columns of the data input grid contain element node numbers for each piping
element included in the original system. The next three columns allow you to describe the
sections of the piping system that are buried and to define any required fine mesh areas.
A finer mesh area is necessary for buried areas that will need to undergo lateral
displacements.
The remaining eight columns are used to define soil stiffnesses and ultimate loads.
From Node
Displays the node number for the starting end of the element
To Node
Displays the node number for the end of the piping element.
5 10 0
10 15 0
15 20 1
20 25 1
25 30 1
30 35 2
35 40 2
The pipe from nodes 5 through 15 is not buried. From nodes 15 through 30, you will specify
your own stiffnesses (using columns 6 through 13 of the data input area). From nodes 35
through 40, the software will use the property values indicated in the corresponding soil
model number to generate stiffnesses.
Element ends undergo lateral displacements wherever there is a bend at the end of the element.
In this case, the software automatically places a fine mesh along the element entering the bend
and along the element leaving the bend. At all other locations, you must tell the software where
the fine meshes must go. These locations include:
1 - Element ends that frame into intersections.
2 - Element ends that enter or exit from the soil.
3 - Element ends where there is any change in direction not defined by a bend.
Follow the rule that too many mesh elements will never hurt the solution, whereas too
few may produce incorrect results. Thus, always check the appropriate box if you are uncertain.
Consider the following example:
CAESAR II places a fine mesh at the 5 end of the element because the pipe enters the soil at 5
and there are probably some displacements there. The software automatically places fine
meshes at element ends where there are bends, so checking the FROM END MESH/TO END
MESH boxes is not needed on the 10-15 element. A fine mesh is also placed at each element
end that frames into the intersection at 20. Finally, a fine mesh is placed at the terminal points
35 and 30.
If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for one-
-the stiffness value that is not entered defaults to the stiffness value that is entered.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif and User-Defined Downward Stif (on page 494) are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load and Ultimate Downward Load (on page 495) are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.
If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for one.
The other stiffness defaults to the entered value.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif (on page 494) and User-Defined Downward Stif are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load (on page 494) and Ultimate Downward Load are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.
Soil Models
Only use the following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses
and ultimate loads when you do not have better available data or methods suited.
The soil restraint modeling algorithms used by the software are based on the following:
CAESAR II Basic Model
Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines, L.C. Peng, published in 1978 in
Pipeline Industry. For more information, see CAESAR II Basic Model (on page 496).
American Lifelines Alliance
"Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from the Guidelines for the Design of Buried
Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). For more information,
see American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model (on page 497).
Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a
yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero. After the ultimate load on the soil
is reached, there is no further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The
axial and transverse ultimate loads must be calculated to analyze buried pipe. Many researchers
differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the
variance in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often
unwarranted.
The software allows the explicit entry of these data if it is necessary to your specific
project.
After the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in each direction can be
determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that
the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The calculated
ultimate loads and stiffnesses are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.
See also
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 501)
The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. Defining a value for TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal
strain is used to compute and print the theoretical virtual anchor length. These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax = D[ (2sH) + (pt) + (f)(D/4) ]
Where:
D = Friction coefficient, typical values are:
0.4 for silt
0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su/600
s= Soil density
H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
p= Pipe density
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
f= Fluid density
D = Pipe diameter
Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils)
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)
Ftr = 0.5s(H+D)2[tan(45 + /2)]2OCM
If Su is given (that is, the soil is clay), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.
Where:
= Angle of internal friction, typical values are:
27-45 for sand
26-35 for silt
0 for clay
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface
= internal friction angle of soil
Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.
Axial
Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
D = pipe OD
= adhesion factor (for clays only)
Pipe Coating f
Concrete 1.0
Polyethylene 0.6
Lateral
Pu = maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that
can be transmitted to pipe)
Nch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
Nqh = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for =0)
Factor j x a b c d e
*CAESAR II limits the height/diameter (H/D) ratio to a maximum of 20 for angles at 40 to 45 degrees. The software
calculates any values specified that result in a ratio that is greater than 20 as equal to 20.
**The American Lifelines Alliance standard lists the horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (N qh) as a negative
value for both 40 and 45 degree angles. This results in negative yield load values. CAESAR II calculates these values as
a positive value, as shown in the previous table.
Vertical Uplift
Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit
length that can be transmitted to pipe)
Ncv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
Vertical Bearing
Qd - maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe.
Nc, Nq, N = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors
However, the calculated value must be limited to a maximum multiple for the pipe outer diameter
(D). Typical values are between 0.1 and 0.15.
4.33E-2 1.200E-3
Clay
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2 1.606E-3
Very Loose Sand <= <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.08E-2 1.686E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.48E-2 1.797E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.66E-2 1.847E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.95E-2 1.928E-3
Very Dense Sand >= >=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.33E-2 1.200E-3
Clay <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2 1.606E-3
Very Loose Sand <= <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.08E-2 1.686E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.48E-2 1.797E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.66E-2 1.847E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.95E-2 1.928E-3
Very Dense Sand >= >=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
2.73E-2 7.572E-4
Clay
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
3.62E-2 1.005E-3
Very Loose Sand <= <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
3.80E-2 1.055E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.05E-2 1.123E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.17E-2 1.155E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.35E-2 1.206E-3
Very Dense Sand >= >=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
F - COATING FACTOR
Specifies the coating dependent factor that relates the internal friction angle of the soil to the
friction angle at the soil-pipe interface. This option displays only if you select American Lifeline
Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values for external pipe coatings are:
Concrete - 1.0
Coal Tar - 0.9
Rough Steel - 0.8
Smooth Steel - 0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy - 0.6
Polyethelyne - 0.6
FRICT. ANGLE
Specifies the internal friction angle of the soil. Typical values are:
Clay - 0
Silt - 26-25
Sand - 27-45
For the American Lifelines Alliance soil model, this entry must be between 20- and 45-
degrees.
For the CAESAR II basic soil model, this entry is used in the soil restraint equations to
generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses.
FRICTION COEFFICIENT
Specifies the coefficient of friction between pipe and soil. If the undrained shear strength (on
page 507) is entered, the friction coefficient may be left blank. The friction coefficient is
calculated using the following equation:
Friction Coeffecient = Su/0.4167E + 1
Typical friction coefficient values are:
Silt - 0.4
Sand - 0.5
Gravel - 0.6
Clay - 0.6 or Su/ 0.4167E + 1
This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
SOIL DENSITY
Specifies the weight of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This value is used in the soil restraint
equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. This option displays only when
you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
TEMPERATURE CHANGE
Specifies the installed to operating pipe temperature difference.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.
The original job serves as the basis for the buried pipe model. It must already
exist and need only contain the basic geometry of the piping system. The modeler will
remove any existing restraints in the buried portion.
3. Click Soil Models on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar.
4. In the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box, select a Soil Model Type.
The software populates the dialog box with soil data properties specific to the soil model you
select.
5. Enter the necessary soil data and click OK to exit the dialog box.
To enter additional soil models, click Add New Soil Model.
The software saves the soil data in a file with the extension SOI.
6. In columns 1-5 of the buried element data input area, describe the sections of the piping
system that are buried and define any required fine mesh areas and click Save .
User-defined soil data can be entered in columns 6-13.
7. On the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar, click Convert to convert the original model into
the buried model. This step produces a detailed description of the conversion.
By default, the software appends the name of the job with the letter B. For example, if the
original job is named UndergroundPipe, the software saves the second input file with the
name UndergroundPipe B. If the default name is not appropriate, click File > Change
Buried Pipe Job Name and rename the buried job.
8. Click File > Exit to return the CAESAR II main window. From here, you can use Input >
Piping to review and edit the buried model, add any additional underground restraints (such
as thrust block) to the buried model, and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design.
For more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 509).
The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.
Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs)
mark the soil entry and exit points.
Using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 501), Soil Model Number 2 properties for a
sandy soil is defined.
Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing
is indicated at the entry and exit points.
Clicking Convert on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar begins the conversion to a buried
model.
The original unburied model is shown along with the buried model below. Restraints have been
added around the elbows and along the straight runs.
Bi-linear restraints have been added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the
distance between nodes.
Static Analysis
In This Section
Static Analysis Overview ............................................................... 514
Working with Load Cases .............................................................. 520
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box .............................. 536
Error Checking
You must successfully complete the error checking portion of the piping input before you can
perform static analysis. When error checking completes, the software creates the required
analysis data files. Any changes that you make to the model are not reflected in the analysis
unless you rerun the error checking. If the piping input has changed, CAESAR II does not allow
an analysis to take place until you successfully run the error checker.
Error Check
Saves the input and starts the error checking procedure. You can access the Error Check
command only from the Classic Piping Input or CAESAR II Structural Input dialog boxes.
Batch Run
Checks the input data, analyzes the system, and presents the results without any additional
actions from you.
The software assumes that the load cases associated with the current job do
not need to change, and that the default account number (if Accounting is active) is correct.
These criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis.
During error checking, the software reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts you to any possible
errors, inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display in a grid as errors, warnings,
or notes.
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box
Displays the total numbers of errors, warnings, or notes for the current job. You must resolve all
errors for the software to run the analysis. Warnings and notes are for reference and do not
prevent analysis.
Double-click the row number of the message, and the software takes you to the element in the
piping input that pertains to the error, warning, or note. Click the tabs at the bottom of the
window to alternate between the Classic Piping Input and the Errors and Warnings dialog
boxes.
Double-click the column headers to sort the messages by Message Type, Message Number,
or Element/Node Number. Click File > Print to print the messages.
Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Analysis dialog
box.
Load
Case Designation Comments
1 W+T1+P1+H+0.67C Hot operating. The 0.67scale factor takes credit only for 2/3
S (OPE) of the cold spring.
Load
Case Designation Comments
18
CAESAR II permits the specification of up to 999 load cases for analysis. Copy the
model to a new file to specify the additional load cases if more cases are required.
Standard load cases for situations where you have weight, temperature, and pressure:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
L3 L1-L2 (EXP)*
* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Cases tab for the expansion case.
Some of the piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and
some do not. For more information, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the
equations used by the various piping codes to obtain code stress and allowable stress.
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from
the operating case. Because of this, the expansion case represents the change in the piping
system due to the effect of temperature, but in the presence of other loads. This is important
because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases can be different if there are
nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, and so on) or boundary conditions
(such as friction).
Standard load cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe. This case
is weight and pressure alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case.
Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress requirements, as well as to
calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by
combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads.
Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between
the operating and sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress
requirements. Generally, when you specify only one temperature and one pressure, the
recommended cases look similar to the following:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
Load cases 2 through 7 include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted
uniform load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case
results for occasional restraint loads and occasional displacements. Load cases 10 through 15
signify the segregated occasional loads. These are called occasional load cases, but you do not
need a code stress check here because these are only part of the final solution for code
compliance. Because of this, you can select the Suppress option for the Output Status. Also,
these combination load cases all use the Algebraic Combination Method on the Load Cases
tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used for code compliance. Add the segregated occasional
results to the sustained case results and use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value
Combination Method. Both scalar and absolute will give the same code stress results although
the displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Because you do not use any results
except the stresses for combination cases, it does not matter which combination method you
use.
Sometimes you want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. A factor
is often applied to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. You can accomplish this
when you type the Uniform Load data on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for the vertical
component, or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown below. Using the
previous example, combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L8 W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L9 W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
Sometimes you need to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading. You
can do this from the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Set up the static seismic load cases
as shown in the first example, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases
together using the SRSS Combination Method. Add these results to the sustained case.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the SRSS combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
Change the operating load cases that include seismic loads to OCC for piping codes
that do not perform a sustained code stress check. Use these cases for code compliance. The
combination cases are not needed in such cases.
The first load case, traditionally called restrained weight, consists of only deadweight (W). For
this analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the vertical direction at every location where
a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis is the deadweight that must
be carried by the support in the hot condition.
For the second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated
hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case, traditionally called free thermal,
includes the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined, and any
displacements, W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with
the previously calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. After
the hangers are sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports
along with their pre-loads cold loads designated by load component, H. Load component H can
appear in the load cases for hanger design if you have predefined any springs. In this case, it
would represent the pre-defined operating loads.
CAESAR II then continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set
of recommended load cases for a single operating load case spring hanger design is as follows:
These hanger sizing load Cases 1 and 2 generally supply no information to the output reports
other than the data found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, and 5 match the recommended load
cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and one pressure defined. The displacement
combination numbers in Case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures
and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring
hanger design load case.
Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load cases. If the actual cold
loads for selected springs are to be calculated, one additional load case, WNC+H, would appear
before Case 3. If the hanger design criteria of the piping system is set so that the proposed
springs must accommodate more than one operating condition, other load cases must appear
before Case 3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design operating load case for each
additional operating load case used to design springs. See Load Cases with Hanger Design (on
page 528) for more information on these options.
L5 L3-L4 (EXP) **
*HS is the hanger stiffness specified in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
When you use only predefined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases.
However, the letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. Other hanger
load cases are required when you use multiple load case design. In such instances, let
CAESAR II recommend the load cases. You can then add or edit the non-hanger design load
cases as necessary.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+D1+D4+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) *
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) *
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
It is likely that you will want to perform a fatigue analysis because of the large number of
displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on
the first piping input under the Allowable Stress area on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Add the following cases to the previous example. Enter the number of cycles for each pitch
condition for fatigue stress type (FAT).
The 21000000 represents 21 million load cycles during the life of the piping system. Use the
number of cycles that you would expect to occur during the life of such a storm for large
displacements, such as those that occur during a 1-year, 30-year, or 100-year event. Multiply
this number by the number storms likely to happen during the lifetime of the piping system.
L1 W+T1+D1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Include the thermal displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping codes
with no expansion stress computation.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+D3+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 W+P2 (SUS)
You can specify up to four different wind load profiles. Omit any of them to exclude the data from
the analysis. CAESAR II supports thirteen wind codes. For more information, see Wind Loads
Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 549).
ASCE 7 IS 875
BS 6399-2 UBC
IBC
Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II activates
the Wave Loads tab so that you can define the extra wave load data.
You can specify up to four different wave load profiles. Current data and wave data can be
specified and included together. Omit either of them to exclude the data from the analysis.
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. For more information, see
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 568).
CAESAR II uses the root solution from this equation, the system-wide deflections and rotations,
with the element stiffnesses to determine the global (X, Y, Z) forces and moments at the end of
each element. The software translates these forces and moments into a local coordinate system
for the element from which it calculates the code-defined stresses. Forces and moments on
anchors, restraints, and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and
moments entering the node. Algebraic combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process
where appropriateat the displacement, force and moment, or stress level.
After the software completes the setup for the solution, it repeats the calculation of the
displacements and rotations for each of the basic load cases. During this step, the software
displays the Incore Solver dialog box.
This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. The upper-left portion of the dialog
box reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the
matrix that holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a
relative indication of the job size. This area also lists the current load case and the total number
of basic load cases the software has to analyze and solve. The iteration count, as well as the
current case number, shows how much work the software has completed. Load cases with
nonlinear restraints can require several solutions or iterations before the software confirms the
changing assumptions about the restraint configuration, such as resting or lifting off, active or
inactive, and so on.
In the lower-left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs that indicate where
the program is in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By
checking the data in this first box, you have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results.
The right side of the Incore Solver dialog box also provides information regarding the status of
nonlinear restraints and hangers in the job. For example, the software displays messages noting
the number of restraints that have yet to converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no
load here. You can step through nonlinear restraint status on an individual basis by pressing the
F2 through F4 keys.
After the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, the software post-processes the
results to calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all
results for the algebraic combinations (for example L1-L2). CAESAR II stores the total system
results in a file with the suffix _P (for example, TUTOR._P).
The _A (or input file), the _P (or output file), and the OTL (Output Time Link file) are
all that are required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files can be deleted
without any impact on the completed work.
During this post-processing, the Status frame lists the element for which the forces and stresses
are being calculated. After the software calculates the last stresses of an element, the output
processor dialog box displays. Use this dialog box to review the graphic and tabular results of
the analysis. For more information on interactive processing of output results, see Dynamic
Input and Analysis.
Controlling Results
CAESAR II allows you to specify whether the software retains any or all of the load case results
for review in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor through two options: Output Status (on
page 543) and Output Type (on page 543). This helps ensure that the results you find most
meaningful are the ones the software displays.
Tabs
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 537)
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 549)
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 568)
See Also
Working with Load Cases (on page 520)
Building Static Load Cases (on page 521)
Options
Add a load case
Inserts a blank line following the selected load case line in the list. If you do not select a row,
the software adds the load case at the end of the list.
You can also:
Right-click > Insert Before to insert a blank line before the selected load case line in the
list.
Right-click > Insert After to insert a blank line following the selected load case line in
the list.
Delete a load case
Deletes one or more selected load case lines from the load case grid. SHIFT-click to select
multiple continuous rows. CTRL-click to select multiple non-continuous rows.
You can also right-click > Delete.
Group Edit
Edits groups of load cases. For more information, see Editing Multiple Load Cases (on page
521).
To return to the load case grid, click List.
Filter
Provides options to filter load cases. Click for the required column and select the filter
options.
Copy
Copies one or more selected rows to the clipboard.
You can also right-click > Copy or press CTRL-C.
You can reorder the columns in the list, but you cannot copy, change the column order, and
then try to paste in the new order. If you reorder columns, you must copy again in the new
column order, and then paste.
You can copy non-continuous rows. The software pastes the rows as continuous rows.
If you filter the load cases, you can copy one or more rows, but you cannot paste until you
clear the filter.
When you define a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case, you must enter the number of
anticipated Load Cycles for that load case or the software prompts you before analysis.
Definition
Shows the current load cases offered for analysis. You can build load cases by dragging
components from the Loads Defined in Input list and dropping them on the Definition box or
by typing in the values.
Click the Definition box to edit the load case definition. You can only enter the load components
as they are listed in the Loads Defined in Input list. The options you select in the piping input
determine what load case values appear in this list.
For more information, see Building Static Load Cases (on page 521).
Stress Type
Displays the stress types. The stress type applies to the load cases. It defines how the element
stresses and allowables are computed. The available stress types are:
OPE
Operating case. For B31.1 and B31.3 (and similar codes) this case is not a code compliance
case. The software does not report allowable stresses.
SUS
Sustained case.
EXP
Expansion case.
OCC
Occasional case.
FAT
Fatigue case.
You must also specify the number of Load Cycles (on page 542) for load cases
with a FAT stress type.
HGR
Spring hanger design case. These are load cases that CAESAR II uses internally to design
and select spring hangers. Results are not available for these cases.
HYD
Hydro test case. Select hanger status. For a hydrotest case, the default hanger status is
rigid or locked.
CRP
Creep case. Code standards such as EN-13480 define a creep stress range for operating
conditions, which is defined by the life of the material. In CAESAR II, CRP is a scalar
combination of one SUS case and one EXP case. The software sets Output Type (on page
543) to Stress.
CAESAR II computes CRP stresses according to EN-13480. If you specify additional load
multipliers, the software applies these as additional scale factors. Other codes also use the
EN-13480 method. For more information, see Creep Loading (on page 933).
Alternate SUS/OCC
Indicates that the load case is an alternate sustained (SUS) or alternate occasional (OCC) load
case. Alternate SUS/OCC load cases are associated with preceding operating (OPE) load
cases.
Due to changes in the B31.3 code for the 2014 edition, the primary stress in each position of the
piping system must be evaluated. These alternate SUS/OCC load cases use the restraint status
from the previous OPE load case to evaluate the stresses induced by primary loads.
When you create a load case that follows an OPE load case and select a Stress Type of SUS
or OCC, the software activates the Alternate SUS/OCC check box, which you can select to
indicate that the case is an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case.
CAESAR II displays the number of the related OPE load case when you select the Alternate
SUS/OCC check box.
For more information, see Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional (OCC)
Load Cases (on page 541).
You now can associate a related alternate Sustained (SUS) or alternate occasional (OCC) load
case that uses the restraint status from the previous Operating (OPE) load case by selecting the
Alternate SUS/OCC check box in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. CAESAR II uses
the stiffness values from the OPE case to create the alternate SUS or OCC load case. In
addition, the software disables all load case options that are not applicable on the alternate SUS
or OCC load case.
Use this functionality in systems where supports are active in some conditions and inactive in
others (such as pipes lifting off supports). In these situations, the changing distribution of
sustained loads may influence the difference in strains. The software bases the displacement
strain range on the algebraic difference between the calculated positions of the pipe that define
the range. In addition to the displacement strain, each calculated position includes the sustained
loads present in the condition under evaluation.
The load case generates primary stress corresponding to the restraint configuration for the
previous operating (OPE) load case. However, the alternate sustained (SUS) or alternate
occasional (OCC) load case is not a valid structural representation of the system. When using
the alternate SUS or alternate OCC cases, keep the following in mind:
These alternate cases determine the stress and the consideration of this stress state in
determining the expansion stress range.
Do not use the restraint loads from an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case as it is not
a true structural representation of the system. CAESAR II does not general restraint reports
for alternate SUS and alternate OCC load cases.
Do not use an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case when performing dynamic
analysis. Instead, use the corresponding operating case to get the support configuration.
Use one of the two new load case templates (.tpl files) when recommending load cases.
These templates include support for alternate SUS and alternate OCC load cases. for more
information, see Load Case Template (on page 62).
For more information on loading conditions and support scenarios that result in the greatest
sustained load (SL) for each operating condition, see Appendix S, Example S302 in the B31.3
code standard.
Load Cycles
Indicates the anticipated number of applications of this load on the system for load cases using
the Expansion (EXP) or Fatigue (FAT) stress types. The software uses this value to determine
the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material or the cyclic reduction factor for an
Expansion case. For static cases, the software calculates stresses at full range. For dynamic
cases, the software calculates stresses at half range, which is the amplitude of the full stress
range.
For load cases with an Expansion (EXP) stress type, you can enter a value of 1 in the Load
Cycles field (for B31.1 jobs) to indicate that the stress range is caused by noncyclic movements.
In this situation, the software replaces the allowable stress range value (Sa) with a special
noncyclic allowable calculation, as per the B31.1 code standard. The software continues to
calculate the displacement stress range (Se) as defined by the applicable piping code.
Output Status
Controls the disposition of the load case results. The available options are Keep or Suppress.
Use Keep when the load case is producing results that you want to review. The default for
all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is Keep.
Use Suppress for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate
construction cases. Load cases used for hanger design, that is, the weight load case and
hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR, must be designated as Suppress.
For example, a wind only load case could be designated as Suppress because it was built only
to be used in subsequent combinations and has no value as a standalone load case. For all load
cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are
converted as Keep.
Output Type
Designates the type of results available for load cases that have a Keep status. Use this field to
help minimize clutter on the output and to ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The
available options are:
Disp/Force/Stress
Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a
good choice for operating cases where you are designing to a code which does a code
check on operating stresses, because the load case is of interest for interference checking
(displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).
Disp/Force
Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This is a good choice for
OPE cases where you are designing for those codes which do not do a code check on OPE
stresses.
Disp/Stress
Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress
Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a good choice for the
Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint loads at one
operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). FR combination loads cases
developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this force/stress type.
Disp
Provides displacements only.
Force
Provides restraint loads, global, and local forces only.
Stress
Provides stresses only. This is a good choice for a sustained plus occasional load case (with
Abs combination method), because this is an artificial construct used for code stress
checking purposes. ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of
CAESAR II are converted with this stress type.
Combination Method
Specifies the combination method to use for combination cases only. Load cases to combine
are designated as L1, L2, and so on. Select the combination method from the list.
Load case results are multiplied by any associated scale factors before performing
the combination and comparison.
The available methods are:
Algebraic
Indicates a signed algebraic combination of displacement and force level. This method
combines the displacement vectors and the force vectors algebraically and then calculates
the stresses from the combined forces. Displacements are the algebraic combination of the
displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the force vectors. Stresses
are not combined. Stresses are calculated from the algebraically combined forces. The
Algebraic method would typically be used to calculate EXP code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination
method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR
methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new combination cases automatically
default to this method, unless you change them.
Algebraic combinations can be built only from basic load cases. Basic load cases are non-
combination load cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination method.
Scalar
Indicates a signed combination of displacement, force, and stress level. This method
combines the displacement vectors, force vectors, and stress scalars. Displacements are
the algebraic combination of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination
of the force vectors. Stresses are the scalar combination of the stress scalars.
The combination of displacements and forces are the same for ALG and Scalar methods.
The combinations of stress levels are different between ALG and Scalar methods because
the stresses are calculated from the combined forces in the ALG method and summed in the
Scalar method. .
For example:
Load Case 1: bending stress = 100 psi, due to X-moment
Load Case 2: bending stress - 100 psi, due to Z-moment
Algebraic (vectorial) sum = square root of (100*100 + 100*100) = 141.4 psi
Scalar sum = 100 + 100 = 200 psi
Scalar is typically used to sum (SUS + OCC) code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method.
Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are
converted to the Scalar method.
SRSS
Indicates a combination of the square root of the sum of the squares of quantities, such as
the displacements of the forces or the stresses. Displacements are the square root of the
sum of the squares of the displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces
are the square root of the sum of the squares of the forces of all cases included in the
combination. Stresses are the square root of the sum of the squares of the stresses of all
cases included in the combination. This method is typically used to combine seismic
directional components.
ABS
Indicates a combination of the absolute values of quantities, such as the displacements, the
forces, or the stresses. Displacements are the sum of the absolute value of the
displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the sum of the absolute
value of the forces of all cases included in the combination. Stresses are the sum of the
absolute value of the stresses of all cases included in the combination. This method is
typically used to combine SUS cases with OCC cases for occasional stress code check.
For flange checks that use the ABS load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
The axial force and torsion, which is the absolute sum of these values from all load
cases included the combination.
The bending moment, which is the sum of resultant bending moments from all load
cases included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in
the combination.
MAX
Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force, and
the maximum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the maximum absolute values of all the load
cases included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the maximum absolute
values of all the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having
the maximum absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination. This method
is typically used to report the greatest restraint loads from among a selected set of load
cases.
For flange checks that use the MAX load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
The axial force and torsion, which is the maximum magnitude of these values from all
load cases included the combination.
The bending moment, which is the maximum resultant bending moment from all load
cases included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in
the combination.
MIN
Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and the
minimum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the minimum absolute values of all the load
cases included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the minimum absolute
values of all the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having
the minimum absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination.
SIGNMAX
Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force, and
the maximum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the
comparison. Displacements are the maximum signed values of all the displacements from
each case included in the combination. Forces are the maximum signed values of all the
forces from each case included in the combination. Stresses are the maximum signed
values of all the stresses from each case included in the combination. This method is
typically used in conjunction with SignMin to report the envelope of restrain loads from
among a selected set of load cases.
SIGNMIN
Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and the
minimum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the comparison.
Displacements are the minimum signed values of all the displacements from each case
included in the combination. Forces are the minimum signed values of all the forces from
each case included in the combination. Stresses are the minimum signed values of all the
stresses from each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in
conjunction with SignMax to report the envelope of restraint loads from among a selected
set of load cases.
Snubbers Active
Indicates whether snubbers are active. Select the check box to indicate that snubbers are
considered to be rigid restraints for the load case. By default, Occassional (OCC) load cases
activate this option while other types of load cases clear this option.
Hanger Stiffness
Specifies the hanger stiffness for the load case. The three options are: As Designed, Rigid,
and Ignore.
As Designed
Causes the software to consider the actual spring hanger stiffnesses. Use this option for
most real (non-hanger design) load cases.
Rigid
Causes the software to model the spring hangers as rigid restraints. Use this option for
restrained weight cases and hydrotest cases if the spring hangers are pinned.
Ignore
Causes the software to remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the model. Use this
option for hanger travel cases, unless you want to include the stiffness of the selected spring
in the operating for hanger travel case and iterate to a solution. In that case, select As
Designed. You must also adjust the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) to
match the reported hanger cold load.
User-defined hangers are not made rigid during restrained weight cases.
Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli to determine
results on a per-load-case basis.
EC
Cold elastic modulus.
EH1
Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1.
EH2 - EH9
Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T2 through T9.
SUS Case Sh
Designates the use of a hot allowable stress (Sh) to determine the results on a per-load case
basis. Use this option for sustained (SUS) and occasional (OCC) load cases.
Sh_min
Minimum of Sh1 through Sh9.
Sh1 - Sh9
Hot allowable stresses corresponding to T1 through T9.
The SUS Case Sh option applies only to B31.3 2010 Edition codes and later.
Friction Multiplier
Specifies the multiplier of friction factors used in this particular load case. The friction factor (Mu)
used at each restraint is this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Set this value to
zero to deactivate friction for this load case.
Structural Classification
Specifies the classification of buildings and structures based on the type of occupancy.
ASCE 7-2005 Table 1-1, classification is as follows:
1 - Category I
Failure represents low hazard.
2 - Category II
All structures except 1, 3, and 4.
3 - Category III
Primary occupancy more than 300 people.
4 - Category IV\
Essential facilities (Hospitals, and so forth)
1, 2, 3 and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are
equivalent to categories I, II, III and IV defined in ASCE 7.
Importance Factor
Specifies the importance factor (I). This value is used to calculate the velocity pressure for
wind load calculations. The importance factor depends on the structural classification and
whether or not the region is prone to hurricanes, as shown below.
For ASCE 7 2010, CAESAR II sets the importance factor to 1, as the code standard no
longer addresses this factor.
For ASCE 7 2005, set the importance factor as per the code standard in Table 6-1.
1, 2, 3, and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are
equivalent to categories I, II, III and IV, defined in ASCE 7.
Structure Natural Frequency
Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust effect factor for
dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.
Crest Distance
Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment.
Distance from Crest to Site
Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the building site.
Hill Type
Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0
No Hill
1
2D Ridge
2
2D Escarpment
3
3D Axisymmetric Hill
Choose the terrain category with due regard to the permanence of the obstructions
that constitute the surface roughness. In particular, vegetation in tropical cyclonic regions cannot
be relied upon to maintain surface roughness during wind events.
Lee Effect Multiplier (Mlee)
Specifies the Lee Effect Multiplier. The default value is 1.0. Paragraph 4.4.3 discusses the
issue of the lee effect multiplier. In the case of New Zealand, reference is made to the New
Zealand site map. For all other sites, it shall be taken as 1.0.
Hill Shape Factor (Mh)
Specifies the appropriate hill shape factor, which can be obtained from Table 4.4 of the
code. Please refer to paragraph 4.4.2 which gives precise details for the derivation of the hill
shape factor.
Upwind Slope
(H/2Lu) Mh
0.05 1.8
0.10 1.16
0.20 1.32
0.30 1.48
Distance to Coastline
Specifies the distance the vessel is located from the coast in kilometers. This distance
affects the corrected wind speed (Ve). The BS-6399-2 factors in Table 4 modify the wind
velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is determined by the
distance from the coast, whether located in the country or a town, and the effective height
(He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by internally.
Size Effect Factor - Ca
Specifies the size effect factor Ca. This value is normally taken from Figure 4 of BS-6399-2.
This factor generally ranges from 0.53 to a maximum value of 1.0. The size effect factor is a
function of the diagonal dimension a, the effective height, the site in the town or country and
the distance to the sea.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Kb
Specifies the 'Building-type factor Kb' taken from Table 1 of BS6399. Choose from one of
five values: 8, 4, 2, 1 or 0.5. CAESAR II sets the default to 2, but any other value may be
chosen. Please note the following limitations of Kb based on the vessel height:
8 23 m (75.4 ft)
4 75 m (246 ft)
Designing towers over 75 meters in height is unlikely and you would need to consider many
other things.
BS 6399 Table 1. Building-type Factor Kb
2 Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls
1 Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g. office
buildings of open plan or with partitioning)
0.5 Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with additional
masonry subdivision walls (for example, apartment buildings), building of masonry
construction and timber-framed housing
Q Explanation
0.632 NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual
maximum value. (Sp = 0.749)
0.227 NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for
the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f = 1.0, giving Sp
= Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)
0.0083 NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence
interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)
0.00574 NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for
loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years. This is back-
calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is ?f = 1.4
and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4))
0.001 NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean
recurrence interval of 10,000 years. (Sp = 1.263)
Seasonal Factor - Ss
BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: "...For permanent buildings and buildings exposed for
continuous periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used for Ss..." PV Elite
uses 1.0 as the default value for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is not
recommended, or should only be used with solid research.
Directional Factor - Sd
Taken from Table 3 of BS6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about its central axis, the
default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be reduced other
than for exceptional circumstances. For other values, please consult Table 3. The values in
that table range between 0.73 and 1.00.
Pipe Surface Type
Specifies the pipe surface condition. The three options are: 1 Smooth, 2 Rough, and 3 Very
Rough.
Total Wind Height
Specifies the total height of the building or structure, which CAESAR II uses in wind force
equations. For piping systems, consider using the maximum height of the piping system.
Refer to the particular wind code standard for more information on this value.
Category Description
2 Plain (or slightly uneven) ground with few, and separated, obstacles
Using Category I produces a higher wind load than Category II and so forth.
Dimension Class
Class Description
Frequency
Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust effect factor for
dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.
Total Wind Height
Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the percentage of critical damping
and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load calculations.
1 Lakes or flat and horizontal areas with negligible vegetation and without
obstacles
2 Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees,
buildings) with separations of at least 20 obstacle heights
4 Area in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and
their average height exceeds 15 m
Category Value
The value typed here must be between 1 and 6. The zone the vessel is in is determined
from a map of India showing the various wind zones.
Optionally, you can define the basic wind speed directly in the Basic Wind Speed box. If
the wind speed is specified, it overrides the value of wind speed and zone based on the
table above.
Risk Factor (K1)
Assuming the mean probable design life as 100 years, the corresponding risk coefficient
values for various wind zones are:
Zone K1
Zone 1 1.05
Zone 2 1.06
Zone 3 1.07
Zone 4 1.07
Zone 5 1.08
Zone 6 1.08
Terrain Category
Terrain in which specific equipment is assessed as one of the following categories:
Category 1
Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and in which the average height of
any object surrounding the equipment is less than 1.5 m. This category includes
open sea - coasts and flat treeless plains.
Category 2
Open terrain with well scattered obstructions having height generally between 1.5 to
10 m. This includes airfields, open parklands and undeveloped sparsely built up
outskirts of towns and suburbs. This category is commonly used for design purpose.
Category 3
Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of buildings and
structures up to 10 m in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns, and
industrial areas full or partially developed.
Category 4
Terrain with numerous tall, closely spaced obstructions. This includes large city
centers, generally with obstructions above 25 m, and well developed industrial
complexes.
Equipment Class
Equipment and structures are classified into following classes depending upon their size.
Class A
Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) less than 20 m.
Class B
Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) between 20 and 50 m.
Class C
Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) greater than 50 m.
Topography Factor
The topography factor ranges between 1.0 and 1.36. This factor takes care of local
topographic features such as hills, valleys, cliffs, ridges and so on, which can significantly
affect wind speed in their vicinity. The effect of topography is to accelerate wind near
summits of hills or crests of cliffs and decelerate the wind in valleys or near the foot of cliffs.
Effect of topography is significant if upwind slope is greater than about 3 degrees. Below 3
degrees, the value of K3 can be taken as 1.0. For slopes above 3 degrees, the value of K3
ranges between 1.0 and 1.36.
Class Description
Terrain Category
Defined in Table I.1, based on the type of soil and roughness.
Category Description
1 7 25 40
where:
b is the diameter or the horizontal dimension of the structure, including the roughness of
the wall; to determine the product bVD, this diameter is the one that is located at two
thirds of the total height, from the level of the land, in m
d' is the dimension that exceeds from the roughness, such as ribs or "spoilers", in m
VD is the velocity of the wind of design (4.6), in m/s, and it is valued for the two thirds of
the total height
For intermediate values of H/b and d'/b lineal interpolation is permitted.
Strouhal Number (St)
The Strouhal number is unitless; 0.2 for circular sections and 0.14 for rectangular sections.
Barometric Height (Omega)
Indicates the barometric pressure in mm Hg, as shown below:
0 760
500 720
1000 675
1500 635
2000 600
2500 565
3000 530
3500 495
Ambient Temperature
Indicates the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius.
Frequency
Specifies the fundamental frequency time interval, in Hz.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following
because the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Importance Factor (Iw)
Specifies the NBC importance factor. This value is the importance factor for wind taken from
the table below. This is table 4.1.7.1 on page 4-17 of Division B of NBC 2005.
ULS SLS
Exposure Constant
Based on the profile of mean wind speed, the Exposure Constant varies considerably with
the general roughness of the terrain over which the wind has been blowing before it reaches
the building. These exposures are applicable only under the dynamic (detailed) method,
whereas the terms open and rough were used for the static (simplified) method.
Exposure A - (Open or Standard Exposure)
Indicates open-level terrain with only scattered buildings, trees, or other
obstructions, open water or shorelines. Reference wind speeds are based on
Exposure A.
Exposure B - (Rough Exposure)
Indicates rough terrain, such as large cities with several and dense high-rise
buildings, which persists in the upwind direction for at least 20 times the building
height. Prior to NBC 2010, referred to winds that persist in the upward direction for
1.0 km or 10 times the building height, whichever is larger.
Exposure C - (NBC 2005 only)
Rough terrain, such as large cities with several and dense high-rise buildings, which
persists in the upwind direction for at least 1.0 km or 10 times the building height,
whichever is larger.
Roughness Factor
Specifies the Roughness Factor:
1
Round, moderately smooth
2
Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
3
Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
Surface Velocity
Specifies the current speed at the free surface elevation, excluding the wave. This value is
superseded by the entries in a depth versus speed table.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the current. The current direction may
differ from the direction of any accompanying wave.
Wave Theory
Specifies the wave theory by which to model any wave effects. The available theories are:
Stream Function
Dean's stream function theory.
Stream Function, Modified
Dean's stream function theory modified to include a shear current. This shear
current is assumed to vary linearly from the surface speed to the bottom speed.
Therefore, this option only works with the Linear current profile.
STOKE'S 5th
Stoke's 5th order wave theory.
STOKE'S 5th, Modified
Stoke's 5th order wave theory modified to address particle data above the mean sea
level.
AIRY
Basic linear wave theory.
AIRY, Modified
Basic linear wave theory modified to address particle data above the mean sea
level.
Water Depth
Specifies the water depth at this location.
Wave Height
Specifies the wave height (the crest to trough distance).
Wave Period
Specifies the wave period. That is, the time it takes for successive crests to pass a fixed
reference point.
Typical ranges for this factor are 0.85 to 0.95 for tropical storms and 0.95 to 1.0 for extra-tropical
storms. For particular recommendations for Gulf of Mexico and other U.S. waters, refer to
Sections 2.3.4d.1 and 2.3.4f.1 of API RP 2A-WSD.
Phase Angle
Specifies the wave phase angle to use to calculate the wave loadings at either:
every element
model origin.
Kinematic Viscosity
Specifies the kinematic viscosity of the fluid. Typical values for seawater are:
Density
Specifies the density of the sea water. A typical value for salt water is 0.037 (lb/cu.in.) or
0.00103 (kg/cu.cm.)
When a report is open, you can double-click the column headings to sort the report by
ascending or descending value order. Column order can be re-arranged by dragging columns to
another location. You can also adjust the column size or hide the column altogether. All changes
are for the current report in the current viewing session. To make permanent changes to the
report, use the Report Template Editor (on page 598).
You can print or save individual reports to a text file or to Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel by
selecting Send Report To or Send All To from the right-click menu.
While the report is active, you can adjust the display properties available from the View menu,
change the background color, and turn on horizontal and vertical grid lines. Grid lines can help
in generating better print results.
Click View > Change Page Break to adjust the page configuration for an active report. You can
also scale the report to fit on one page, or adjust it to fit on a specified number of pages by using
the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.
Filter Reports
One of the most powerful features of the Static Output Processor is the ability to filter your
output reports. Filtering lets you customize output to just the information you want to see.
Select Filters from the Static Output Processor menu to set filters on your output reports.
Certain filters can apply to output reports globally (meaning any kind of report you generate from
the Output Processor) or specific to a report type (such as only to restraint reports).
1 Report-Specific Filters
2 Global Filters
Report-Specific Filters
Apply report-specific filters when you want the software to filter only reports that are related to
the filter setting. For example, if you wanted to generate a report to see all the allowable
stresses in a piping system that are greater than 80 percent, set the Percent box on the
Stresses tab to >80. Then, when you generate any of the stress-related reports in the Output
Processor, the software filters the data to show only those stresses greater than 80 percent.
Global Filters
Apply global filters to node number or line number ranges for the software to filter all reports that
include the node or line numbers specified. For example, if you filter on node numbers from 10
to 100, then for any report you generate in the Output Processor, the software filters and
shows only the data that is applicable to nodes 10 to 100.
Filters do not apply to the summary information that appears at the top of a report.
The software shows the filters applied near the top of the output report, as shown below.
To filter reports
1. Select Filters on the Output Processor menu.
2. Choose any global filter options. Global filters apply to all reports generated in the Output
Processor. For more information on the global filters, see Filter Options Tab (on page 576)
and Filters Dialog Box (on page 576).
a. To apply a global filter based on node numbers, type the From node and To node
numbers.
b. To select other global options for filters, click the Filter Options tab.
3. Choose report-specific filter details on each of the class tabs. Each tab contains related
fields with a drop box and an edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value in
which to compare.
Each of the drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:
Operator Description
== Equal
\= Not Equal
From Node
Enter both a From and To node number and the software filters based on nodes in the
specified range display. In other words, only one of the node pair has to fall within the
specified range. If you enter just a From node number, then the software displays the From
node and all nodes greater than it. The software filters and displays all node pairings that
have at least one node (To or From) in the filter setting for the node range.
To Node
Enter both a From and To node number and the software filters based on nodes in the
specified range display. If you enter just a To node number, then the software displays the
To node and all nodes less than it. The software filters and displays all node pairings that
have at least one node (To or From) in the filter setting for the node range.
Filter Options
Select the appropriate filter option for values: Absolute Value or Signed Value. The
software defaults to filtering by the magnitude, regardless of the sign or direction. You can
filter by a specific direction of load or displacement. This feature is particularly useful when
looking for lifting off the supports in directional restraints (such as +Y).
Combinations (Fields or Classes)
Select the appropriate filter option for field or class combinations. Fields refer to the
particular data inputs (boxes) in each tab class. Classes refers to the major types of output,
for example Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses. Classes have separate tabs
in the Filters dialog box. For example, DX and RZ are fields in the Displacements class,
FX and MZ are fields in the Restraints class, and Code Stress and Bending Stress are
fields in the Stresses class.
Reset Filter
Select to reset the filter settings for the currently-active tab.
Reset All Filters
Select to reset all the filter settings for all of the filters, including the options and the report-
specific filter classes.
Displacements Tab
Specifies filter criteria for all reports relating to displacements. Use the operator boxes to specify
comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, to look at any place in the model where the pipe is lifting off of the support, set the
Displacements filter class to a positive value of greater than one inch in the Y-axis direction
(DY) to show which pipes have lifted off of the support vertically by more than an inch.
When you run the Displacements output report, the software shows only those pipes in your
model that have been displaced by more than an inch. You can also set the Filter Options
Classes to AND, and then generate the Restraints Summary Extended report to show all
restraints with a displacement off of the pipe of one inch or more.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box (on page 576) and Filter
Reports (on page 574).
The software does not apply report-specific filter criteria to custom reports that use
combination classes.
Restraints Tab
Specifies filter criteria for all reports relating to restraints. Use the operator boxes to specify
comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Restraints filter class to show all restraints with forces greater than
10,000 lbs on the y-axis (FY), then the software shows only restraints that have FY values
greater than 10,0000 lbs on the Restraints, Local Restraints, or Restraints Summary output
reports.
You can also select one of the Include radio buttons to filter and include all restraints in your
results, include all restraints that do not have CNodes (None with CNodes), or include all
restraints with only CNodes (Only with CNodes).
For example, you can select to include None with CNodes, if you want to filter out internal load
on a CNoded restraint. This lets you see the total dead weight of a pipe model.
Select Bi-Linear for buried pipe models that also go above ground. In most cases, you do not
need to select this filter option.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box (on page ) and Filter
Reports (on page ).
The software does not apply report-specific filter criteria to custom reports that use
combination classes.
Forces Tab
Specifies filter criteria that the software applies to all reports relating to force. Use the operator
boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Forces filter class to all forces in the Y-axis direction greater than
10,000 pounds, the software shows only y-axis forces (FY) greater than 10,000 pounds on the
Local Element Forces and Global Element Forces output reports.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box and Filter Reports (on
page 574).
The software does not apply report-specific filter criteria to custom reports that use
combination classes. This filter applies only to internal forces and moments.
Stresses Tab
Specifies filter criteria for the various stress output reports (Stresses, Stresses Extended, and
Stress Summary). You can set up filter criteria based on Axial, Bending, Torsion, Hoop, Max
3D, Code and Allowable stress factors in combination with the magnitude. In addition, you can
filter stress data on the reports based on SIFs (in- and out-of-plane), and based on a percentage
of stress. Use the operator boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Stresses filter class Percent box to >70, the software filters the
stress-related reports to show only elements having greater than a 70 percent stress.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box (on page 576) and Filter
Reports (on page 574).
The software does not apply report-specific filter criteria to custom reports that use
combination classes.
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report,
use the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To
Printer and then Finish.
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
dialog displays where you select the file name. To change the file name for a new
report, select File-Save As.
Typically, the set of output reports to print out for documentation purposes is:
Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and
hanger table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case
may be highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.
The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act "ON" something.
The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each
element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment report
shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each restraint.
When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents are read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the
report to MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address
details and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which you
can set up in "header.doc".
Standard Reports
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report
options that can be selected for review.
Most standard reports have short and long versions, designated by the word
Extended. The extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a
landscape option when printed.
Displacements
Shows the nodal translations and rotations at each of the nodes. These values
represent the solution vector for each load case. For more information, see
Displacements (on page 582).
Restraints
Shows the loads imposed on the system supports for each load case. For more
information, see Restraints (on page 583).
Restraint Summary
Combines the restraint reports for any number of (user selected) load cases. This
provides a concise summary of the loads on the restraints, across load cases. For more
information, see Restraint Summary (on page 585).
Global Element Forces
Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the element. These
forces and moments are aligned with the global coordinate system, and represent the
element free-body diagram. For more information, see Global Element Forces (on page
588).
Local Element Forces
Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the element. These
forces and moments are aligned with the local element coordinate system, and
represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Local Element
Forces (on page 588).
Stresses
Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. This report also
includes codes SIFs, code allowables, and the "code" stress when applicable. For more
information, Stresses (on page 589).
Cumulative Damage
Lists the combined fatigue stresses for all selected fatigue load cases and compares it
to the corresponding allowable for each node of each element. Note that this report is
only available for those jobs that include fatigue cases. For more information, see
Cumulative Usage Report (on page 592).
Displacements
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 574).
Restraints
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report
generated for each load case selected.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 574).
This system consists of two small horizontal lines anchored at both ends. The last element of
each line is skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial
restraint, as illustrated in the following figure:
The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. At node 140,
this report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are
the global component loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint
load, acting in-line with the pipe can be found by performing the SRSS of these component
loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the restraint acting axially with the pipe.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Global Coordinate System
The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the
element coordinate system can be tedious. As an alternative, generate a restraint report where
all of the loads are aligned with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the
same small job displays in the table below.
In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, see Technical Discussions (on page 898). (These
two values are shown in the tables in bold.)
At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system
loads, reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads,
reports only the resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in
bold.)
Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected
load cases together on one report.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 574).
Data for each load case reported is a result of calculation (and can also be viewed on a Local
Restraints report). The Limits shown in the report are the values from the input. Similarly, the
Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are the loads on the
nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then
the entire line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed in
black and white.)
The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison
method, and the unity check value for the Unity Check method.
Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There
are two methods and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg
Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq) and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3
Method (NC-3658.3).
The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding
moments and stresses or equivalent pressure for each node where the flange evaluation was
requested. This is an elemental type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the
element. Because of this, some lines in the report with no corresponding output are blank.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 574).
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 574).
Stresses
SIFs and code stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are
compared to the allowable stress at each node as a percentage. Stresses are not computed at
nodes on rigid elements or on structural steel elements.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 574).
Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented in summary format for all selected load cases.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 574).
Topics
Load Case Report .......................................................................... 593
Hanger Table with Text ................................................................. 594
Input Echo ...................................................................................... 595
Miscellaneous Data ....................................................................... 595
Warnings ........................................................................................ 596
Input Echo
The Input Echo option displays the Input Listing Options dialog box and allows you to select
which portions of the input are reported in this output format. All basic element data (geometry),
operating conditions, material properties, boundary conditions, and report formatting are
available:
Select what you want to print or view, and then click OK.
Miscellaneous Data
The Miscellaneous Data report displays SIF and Flexibility data for Bends and Tees, Allowable
Stress Summary, Reducers report, Nozzles Flexibility data, Pipe Properties report with weights
and minimum calculated wall thickness for each element, Thermal Expansion Coefficients for
each element as used during analysis, Center-of-Gravity report (C.G.), Bill of Materials (B.O.M.),
Wind, and Wave input data.
Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.
The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational
buttons. You can add any report to the view by clicking Add. You can delete any report by
clicking Remove. You can arrange the order of the reports by highlighting the report and then
moving it up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down.
You can send a report to the screen or to a printer by selecting the appropriate radio button in
the upper section of the Output Viewer Wizard dialog box. After clicking Finish, the reports are
automatically sent to the specified device in the order displayed in the Report Order window.
To generate a table of contents, select Generate Table of Contents (TOC).
The Table of Contents does not display if Send to Screen is selected, regardless if
the Generate Table of Contents (TOC) check box was selected or cleared.
The Report Template Editor dialog box consists of two sections: the template editor to the left
and the preview grid to the right.
The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorers folder view.
There are 11 major categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general
report editing, and several output fields; Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment
Nozzle Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.
The Template Name category allows you to specify the report name, enter a brief description of
the report, and select the report type. The report name followed by the template description
displays on the preview grid if the Include Report Name option is checked under the Template
Settings category.
There are three report types available:
Individual
Generates output reports, one per selected load case, in a format similar to the standard
Displacements or Restraints reports.
Summary
Generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a summary, in a
format similar to the standard Restraint Summary report.
Code Compliance
Generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a single report,
similar to the standard Code Compliance report.
Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by you. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit your needs.
The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body
text, formatting, and alignment. You can also set the font face, size, and color for the header and
the report body. You can include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job
Title or Filters Description) by selecting and clearing the check box next to the corresponding
item. Report Line Spacing changes the spacing between lines of text. The Summary Line
check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the summary line with
MAX values for each field or column per node. Select the Node Number/Name check box (used
with Summary-type reports) to repeat the Node information on each Loadcase line. If you clear
this option, then the node will appear on the separate line above the data for load cases. These
two options may help with later data manipulations when sending the reports to a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet
Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, the
Displacements category contains three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational
(RX, RY, and RZ) fields, Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code stresses among other
stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the Column Order this field will
be placed in. When nothing or a zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the
current report.
Each field contains the following information:
Column Number Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.
Font Specifies the text font face, size and color for this field whenever
special formatting is required. Set the generic font settings for the
entire report at the Template Settings > Body category.
Align Values Controls left, right, or center alignment of the values in the
column.
Field Caption Customize the name of the field as it appears on the report. This
may be useful to customize the display of the output
displacements in the report to reflect the plant
North/South/East/West directions or vertical and horizontal
notations instead of generic X, Y, Z.
Column Width Controls the size of the column in terms of the number of
displayed characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in
the Preview Grid adjusts the Column Width value. Type 0 to
close the column and remove it from the report. Type -1 to size
the column to the predefined default size.
Units Based Indicates whether to enable the automatic control of the displayed
Precision number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected
display units. This value is used together with the Units
Conversion Label value. The Precision value is ignored in this
case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.
When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for
this field displays in the Help box at the bottom of the editor window.
The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. You
can drag the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports. Double-
clicking the column header sorts that columns values in ascending or descending order. The
dragged column number or sorted order value will automatically be saved in the Column
Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree. Click the column header once to
highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to view.
The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines. The entire report is available after
you select the appropriate load cases and custom report name on the Static Output Processor
dialog box and click View Report.
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom
report template can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As...
dialog box prompts you to enter the new template name, a brief description, and the report type.
Click Preview Report to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Click the same button
again to add the grid lines for editing.
Available Commands
The Static Output Processor window menus and toolbars provide commands to review,
create, and modify reports. The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars navigate and display report
information in graphics mode.
Topics
View Menu ..................................................................................... 601
Options Menu ................................................................................ 606
Plot Options Menu ......................................................................... 614
Plot View Menu .............................................................................. 625
Element Viewer Dialog Box ........................................................... 627
View Menu
Activates and disables toolbars.
Topics
Standard Toolbar ........................................................................... 601
Displacements Toolbar .................................................................. 602
Grow Toolbar ................................................................................. 603
Restraints Toolbar ......................................................................... 603
Stresses Toolbar ............................................................................ 603
Reports Navigation Toolbar ........................................................... 604
Custom Reports Toolbar ............................................................... 605
Standard Toolbar
Open
Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save
Saves the selected reports to a text file. You are prompted for the file name. A table of
contents for all currently selected reports is added to the end of the text file.
Load Case Name
Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or the User-Defined Load Case
Names for output reports. The selected name also displays in the Load Cases Analyzed
list box in the Static Output Processor window. You enter user-defined load case names in
the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor on the Load Cases tab. For more information, see
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 537).
Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports. Select the
format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog box.
Title Lines
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. For more information, see Title Lines (on page
613).
Return to Input
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 105).
View Animation
Shows animation of the displacement solution. For more information, see View Animations
(on page 610).
Graphical Output
Superimposes analytical results onto a plot of the system model. For more information, see
Graphical Output (on page 610).
Print
Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is printed.
Using Microsoft Word
Send the report directly to Microsoft Word. For more information, see Using Microsoft Word
(on page 606).
Using Microsoft Excel
Sends output reports directly to Excel. For more information, see Using Microsoft Excel (on
page 607).
On Screen
Displays the selected reports in a window on the computer screen. For more information,
see On Screen (on page 606).
Displacements Toolbar
Maximum Displacements
Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or Z displacements on the currently displayed
model.
The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the camera
viewpoint is repositioned preserving the optical distance to the model. This brings the
displaced node to the center of the view.
a. The software starts with the highest value for the given direction. After you press Enter,
the remaining values are placed in a similar manner until all values become zero.
b. Click Maximum Displacements again to clear the view of the displayed values and
highlighting.
Click Show > Displacement > Maximum Displacement >X, Y, or Z to access this
command from the menu. If Show Element Viewer Grid is selected, then the viewer
displays the Displacements report for the selected load case and highlights the column and
row to represent the displacement direction and current node.
Grow Toolbar
Deflected Shape
Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the current plot for the selected load
case. Click the down arrow to display an additional menu with the selected feature checked
and the Adjust Deflection Scale option.
Adjust Deflection Scale
Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor. You may not be able to see the deflected
shape if the value is too small. If you enter a scale value that is too large, the model may be
discontinued. Select Show > Displacement > Scale to access this command from the
menu.
Grow
Displays the expansion of a selected pipe due to the addition of heat.
Restraints Toolbar
Output Restraints Symbols
Adds restraint symbols to the plot. Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the direction of
the arrow indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping
geometry.
Stresses Toolbar
Overstress
Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load case. Nodes with a
calculated code stress to allowable stress ratio of 100% or more display in red. The
remaining nodes or elements display in the color selected for the lowest percent ratio. This
feature is useful to quickly observe the overstressed areas in the model.
Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check
was done (such as where there are allowable stresses available).
Overstressed nodes display in red in the Event Viewer dialog box (if it is enabled).
The model is still fully functional. You can zoom, pan, or rotate it.
Maximum Code Stress
Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order.
Preview Report
Removes the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Clicking the button again adds the grid lines.
Options Menu
Specifies common settings that are available on all reports such as how node numbers display
and title information.
Topics
On Screen ...................................................................................... 606
Set Report Font ............................................................................. 606
Using Microsoft Word .................................................................... 606
Using Microsoft Excel .................................................................... 607
New Custom Report Template ...................................................... 607
Edit Custom Report Template ....................................................... 608
Delete Custom Report Template ................................................... 608
Reset Default Custom Report Templates ...................................... 609
Import Custom Report ................................................................... 609
Export Custom Report ................................................................... 609
View Animations ............................................................................ 610
Graphical Output ............................................................................ 610
Title Lines ...................................................................................... 613
Load Case Name ........................................................................... 613
Node Name.................................................................................... 613
Return to Input ............................................................................... 613
On Screen
Displays the selected reports on the monitor. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed
interactively in text format. After selecting the combination of one or more active load cases with
any combination of report options, select Options > View Reports > On Screen. Each report is
presented one at a time for inspection. You can scroll through the reports vertically and
horizontally. You can also click On Screen on the toolbar.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
Your report appears in the Custom Reports list.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
- OR -
Click Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name to save your edit to a
new custom report leaving the original report unchanged.
View Animations
Displays the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, select Options > View Animations. The following screen appears:
The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the
commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume
Motion produces 3D graphics. Select the load case from the drop down list. Animations may be
sped up, slowed down, or stopped using the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables you to save animated plots as HTML files by selecting File > Save As
Animation. After saving these files, you can view them on any computer outside of CAESAR II.
The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred
along with the HTML file for proper display.
Graphical Output
To support a graphics mode, the Static Output Processor window provides 3D/HOOPS
Graphics toolbars that contain commands to zoom, orbit, and pan, as well as provide the ability
to switch views and modes.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbar commands include the display of displaced shapes,
highlighting and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the model.
Another advantage provided by 3D/HOOPS graphics is the graphical representation of stresses
by value and by percentage use color.
A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions, accessed from the 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars
or the Show menu, are broken into submenus:
Displacements
Restraints
Forces/Moments
Stresses
Line numbers and elements display in a tree view. Elements are named by their beginning and
ending node numbers.
Reset Settings
Returns settings for all line numbers and their elements to their default values. Use the drop
down to select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or Reset All.
You can also right-click on a line and select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or
Reset All to only reset the selected line number.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to those pipe run line
numbers or elements that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all line
numbers and elements in the tree view. You can search for a name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers and elements on or off. Clear a line number to reduce
visibility to 0% for the line number and its elements. Clear an element to reduce visibility to
0% for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, node numbers do not display when the element
opacity is 0%. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on
page 338).
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of line numbers and elements. 100% indicates that the element is
opaque. 0% indicates that the element is invisible. Specify the value of a line number to
change opacity for the line number and its elements. Specify the value of an element to
change opacity for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, the node number opacity matches the element
opacity. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on page
338).
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for a line number and its
elements.
Name
Displays the name of line number and elements. Click on a line number to change its name.
Title Lines
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. You can enter a two-line title or description for a
report. The title can be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive;
or the title can be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device.
The title line allows for 28 characters per line.
Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports. Select the
format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog box.
Return to Input
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 105).
Topics
Range ............................................................................................ 615
Restraints ....................................................................................... 616
Anchors .......................................................................................... 616
Displacements ............................................................................... 616
Hangers ......................................................................................... 618
Nozzle Flexibility ............................................................................ 618
Flange Check ................................................................................. 618
Nozzle Check ................................................................................. 618
Forces ............................................................................................ 619
Uniform Loads ............................................................................... 619
Wind/Wave .................................................................................... 620
Compass ........................................................................................ 620
Node Numbers............................................................................... 620
Length ............................................................................................ 621
Tees ............................................................................................... 621
Expansion Joints & Rigids ............................................................. 621
Diameters ...................................................................................... 622
Wall Thickness............................................................................... 622
Corrosion ....................................................................................... 622
Piping Codes ................................................................................. 622
Material .......................................................................................... 622
Pipe Density................................................................................... 623
Fluid Density .................................................................................. 623
Refractory Thickness ..................................................................... 623
Refractory Density ......................................................................... 623
Insulation Thickness ...................................................................... 623
Insulation Density .......................................................................... 624
Cladding Thickness ....................................................................... 624
Cladding Density............................................................................ 624
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt ................................................................... 624
Temperatures ................................................................................ 624
Pressures ....................................................................................... 624
Range
Piping Input menu: Options > Range
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Restraints
Piping Input menu: Options > Restraints
Plot Tools toolbar: Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. Click the arrow on the icon to
indicate what size you want the restraints to display on your model, as well as whether or not the
software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
Anchors
Piping Input menu: Options > Anchors
Plot Tools toolbar: Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Displacements
Piping Input menu: Options > Displacements
Plot Tools toolbar: Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off. This option also controls the display of
displacements on CNode restraints.
When Displacements is turned on, the software displays:
A directional arrow for the resultant linear displacement vector.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for the resultant
rotational displacement vector.
A pair of shorter directional arrows and curved arrows (following the right-hand rule) for
Fixed rotational displacement.
For displacement on a CNode restraint, the values display the CNode number:
You can change the default arrow color in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor or by using Plot Properties . For more information, see Displacements
(Component Color) (on page 77) and Display Options Toolbar (on page 347).
Hangers
Piping Input menu: Options >Hangers
Nozzle Flexibility
Piping Input menu: Options > NozzleFlexibility
Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzles
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.
Flange Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Flange Check
Plot Tools toolbar: Flanges
Turns flange checking on or off.
Nozzle Check
Piping Input menu: Options > Nozzle Check
Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzle Limits
Turns nozzle checking on or off.
Forces
Piping Input menu: Options > Forces
Legends toolbar: Forces
Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
When Forces are turned on, the software displays:
A directional arrow for a force.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for a moment.
Uniform Loads
Piping Input menu: Options > Uniform Loads
Legends toolbar: Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
Piping Input menu: Options > Wind/Wave
Legends toolbar: Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to see
the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Compass
Piping Input menu: Options > Compass
Node Numbers
Piping Input menu: Options > Node Numbers
Plot Tools toolbar: Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off.
You can also press the N key to toggle node number display.
When node numbers are turned on, the software always displays the number in front of the pipe:
Length
Piping Input menu: Options > Length
Tees
Piping Input menu: Options > Tees
Plot Tools toolbar: Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.
Diameters
Piping Input menu: Options > Diameters
Wall Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Wall Thicknesses
Corrosion
Piping Input menu: Options > Corrosion
Piping Codes
Piping Input menu: Options > Piping Codes
Legends toolbar: Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Material
Piping Input menu: Options > Material
Legends toolbar: Materials
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the material
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors
to meet your needs.
Pipe Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Pipe Density
Legends toolbar: Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the pipe
density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.
Fluid Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Fluid Density
Refractory Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Refractory Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Thickness
Legends toolbar: Insulation
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Density
Cladding Thickness
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Density
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Piping Input menu: Options > Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Temperatures
Piping Input menu: Options > Temperatures
Pressures
Piping Input menu: Options > Pressures
Topics
Reset ............................................................................................. 625
Front View ...................................................................................... 625
Back View ...................................................................................... 625
Top View ........................................................................................ 625
Bottom View ................................................................................... 626
Left-side View ................................................................................ 626
Right-side View .............................................................................. 626
Southeast ISO View....................................................................... 626
Southwest ISO View ...................................................................... 626
Northeast ISO View ....................................................................... 626
Northwest ISO View....................................................................... 626
4 View ............................................................................................ 627
Reset
Piping Input menu: View > Reset
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset Plot
Resets the view to the default settings.
Front View
Piping Input menu: View > Front View
Standard Views toolbar: Front
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Piping Input menu: View > Back View
Standard Views toolbar: Back
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top View
Piping Input menu: View > Top View
Standard Views toolbar: Top
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Piping Input menu: View > Bottom View
Standard Views toolbar: Bottom
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Left-side View
Standard Views toolbar: Left
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
Right-side View
Piping Input menu: View > Right-side View
Standard Views toolbar: Right
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.
4 View
Piping Input menu: View > 4 View
Plot Tools toolbar: 4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Dynamic Analysis
In This Section
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems ................................................ 628
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis .................................... 634
Dynamic Analysis Workflow .......................................................... 635
The Dynamic Analysis Window ..................................................... 636
Excitation Frequencies Tab ........................................................... 639
Harmonic Forces Tab .................................................................... 641
Harmonic Displacements Tab ....................................................... 645
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab ......................................... 648
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab....................................... 653
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab ................................................ 668
Lumped Masses Tab ..................................................................... 673
Snubbers Tab ................................................................................ 675
Control Parameters Tab ................................................................ 677
Advanced Tab................................................................................ 707
Directive Builder ............................................................................. 711
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .............................................................. 712
DLF/Spectrum Generator .............................................................. 713
Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................... 723
Analysis Results ............................................................................ 733
The methods include modal natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis, response
spectrum analysis, and time history analysis.
Modal natural frequency analysis measures the tendency of a piping system to respond to
dynamic loads. The modal natural frequencies of a system typically should not be too close to
equipment operating frequencies. As a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause
less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides calculation of modal natural
frequencies and animated plots of the associated mode shapes.
Harmonic analysis addresses dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature, such as fluid pulsation in
reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as
concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads, a phase angle can also be used. Any number of
forcing frequencies can be analyzed for equipment start-up and operating modes. Harmonic
responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have
the same form as a static analysis: node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments,
restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement of 5.8 cm at a
node, then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation is from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at that
node. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
Response spectrum analysis allows an impulse-type transient event to be characterized by
response versus frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to
one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the
total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses,
are compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis
can be used in a wide variety of applications. For example, in uniform inertial loading, ground
motion associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration
response spectra. The assumption is that all supports move with the defined ground motion and
the piping system catches up to the supports. It is this inertial effect which loads the system.
The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, can vary between the three global
directions and can even change for different groups of supports (such as independent or uniform
support motion). Another example is based on single point loading. CAESAR II uses this
technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse-type transient loads. Relief valve loads, water
hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse
dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can
be predicted using the force spectrum method.
Time history analysis is one of the most accurate methods, because it uses numeric integration
of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load
duration. This method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution,
requires more resources (such as computer memory, calculation speed and time) than other
methods. Time history analysis is not appropriate when, for example, the spectrum method
offers sufficient accuracy.
Force versus time profiles for piping are usually one of three types: Random (on page 630),
Harmonic (see Newsletter Index -
http://www.coade.com/Mechanical%20Engineering%20News%20Index.shtml), or Impulse (on
page 632). Each profile has a preferred solution method. These profiles and the load types
identified with them are described below.
Random
With this type of profile, the load unpredictably changes direction or magnitude with time. Even
with the unpredictability, some load characteristics can predominate. Loads with random
force/time profiles are best solved using a spectrum method or a static equivalent.
The major types of loads with random time profiles are wind and earthquake.
Wind
Wind velocity causes forces due to the decrease of wind momentum as the air strikes the pipe
creating an equivalent pressure on the pipe. Wind loadings, even though they can have
predominant directions and average velocities over a given time, are subject to gusting, such as
sudden changes in direction and velocity. As the time period lengthens, the number of wind
changes also increases in an unpredictable manner, eventually encompassing nearly all
directions and a wide range of velocities.
Earthquake
Seismic (earthquake) loadings are caused by the introduction of random ground motion, such as
accelerations, velocities, and displacements and corresponding inertia loads (the mass of the
system times the acceleration) into a structure through the structure-to-ground anchorage.
Random ground motion is the sum of an infinite number of individual harmonic (cyclic) ground
motions. Two earthquakes can be similar in terms of predominant direction (for example, along
a fault), predominant harmonic frequencies (if some underlying cyclic motions tend to dominate),
and maximum ground motion, but their exact behavior at any given time can be quite different
and unpredictable.
Harmonic
With this type of profile, the load changes direction and/or magnitude following a harmonic
profile, ranging from its minimum to its maximum over a fixed time period. For example, the load
can be described by a function of the form:
F(t) = A + B cos( t + )
Where:
F(t) = force magnitude as a function of time
A = mean force
B = variation of maximum and minimum force from mean
= angular frequency (radian/sec)
= phase angle (radians)
t = time (sec)
Loads with harmonic force/time profiles are best solved using a harmonic method. The major
types of loads with harmonic time profiles are equipment vibration, acoustic vibration, and
pulsation.
Equipment Vibration
If rotating equipment attached to a pipe is slightly out-of-tolerance (for example, when a drive
shaft is out-of-round), it can impose a small cyclic displacement onto the pipe at the point of
attachment. This is the location where the displacement cycle most likely corresponds to the
operating cycle of the equipment. The displacement at the pipe connection can be imperceptibly
small, but could cause significant dynamic-loading problems. Loading versus time is easily
predicted after the operating cycle and variation from tolerance is known.
Acoustic Vibration
If fluid flow characteristics are changed within a pipe (for example, when flow conditions change
from laminar to turbulent as the fluid passes through an orifice), slight lateral vibrations may be
set up within the pipe. These vibrations often fit harmonic patterns, with predominant
frequencies somewhat predictable based upon the flow conditions. For example, Strouhals
equation predicts that the developed frequency (Hz) of vibration caused by flow through an
orifice will be somewhere between 0.2 V/D and 0.3 V/D, where V is the fluid velocity (ft./sec) and
D is the diameter of the orifice (ft). Wind flow around a pipe sets up lateral displacements as well
(a phenomenon known as vortex shedding), with an exciting frequency of approximately 0.18
V/D, where V is the wind velocity and D is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Pulsation
During the operation of a reciprocating pump or a compressor, the fluid is compressed by
pistons driven by a rotating shaft. This causes a cyclic change over time in the fluid pressure at
any specified location in the system. Unequal fluid pressures at opposing elbow pairs or
closures create an unbalanced pressure load in the system. Because the pressure balance
changes with the cycle of the compressor, the unbalanced force also changes. The frequency of
the force cycle is likely to be some multiple of that of the equipment operating cycle, because
multiple pistons cause a corresponding number of force variations during each shaft rotation.
The pressure variations continue to move along through the fluid. In a steady state flow
condition, unbalanced forces may be present simultaneously at any number of elbow pairs in the
system. Load magnitudes can vary. Load cycles may or may not be in phase with each other,
depending upon the pulse velocity, the distance of each elbow pair from the compressor, and
the length of the piping legs between the elbow pairs.
For example, if the pressure at elbow a is Pa(t) and the pressure at elbow b is Pb(t), then the
unbalanced force acting along the pipe between the two elbows is:
F(t) = (Pa(t) - Pb(t)) A
Where:
A = internal area of the pipe
Assuming that the pressure peak hits the elbow "a" at time t = 0, Pa(t) is:
Pa(t) = Pavg + 0.5 (dP) cos t
Where:
Pavg = average pressure in the line
dP = alternating component of the pressure
= driving angular frequency of pulse
If the length of the pipe between the elbows is L, then the pressure pulse reaches elbow bts
after it has passed elbow a:
ts = L / c
Where:
c = speed of sound in the fluid
Therefore the expression for the pressure at elbow b is:
Pb(t) = Pavg + 0.5(dP) cos ( t - Q)
Where:
= ts
Combining these equations, the unbalanced pressure force acting on an elbow pair is:
F(t) = 0.5(dP)A * [ cos t - cos (t - L/c) ]
Under steady-state conditions, a similar situation exists at all elbow pairs throughout the piping
system.
Impulse
With this type of profile, the load magnitude ramps up from zero to some value, remains
relatively constant for a time, and then ramps down to zero again. For rapid ramping times, this
type of profile resembles a rectangle. Loads with impulse force/time profiles are best solved
using time history or force spectrum methods. Major types of loads with impulse time profiles are
relief valve, fluid hammer, and slug flow.
Relief Valve
When system pressure reaches a dangerous level, relief valves are set to open in order to vent
fluid and reduce the internal pressure. Venting through the valve causes a jet force to act on the
piping system. This force ramps up from zero to its full value over the opening time of the valve.
The relief valve remains open (and the jet force remains relatively constant) until sufficient fluid
is vented to relieve the over-pressure condition. The valve then closes, ramping down the jet
force over the closing time of the valve.
Fluid Hammer
When the flow of fluid through a system is suddenly halted through valve closure or a pump trip,
the fluid in the remainder of the system cannot be stopped instantaneously. As fluid continues to
flow into the area of stoppage (upstream of the valve or pump), the fluid compresses causing a
high pressure situation. On the other side of the restriction, the fluid moves away from the
stoppage point, creating a low pressure (vacuum) situation. Fluid at the next elbow or closure
along the pipeline is still at the original operating pressure, resulting in an unbalanced pressure
force acting on the valve seat or the elbow.
The fluid continues to flow, compressing (or decompressing) fluid further away from the point of
flow stoppage, causing the leading edge of the pressure pulse to move through the line. As the
pulse moves past the first elbow, the pressure is now equalized at each end of the pipe run,
leading to a balanced (that is, zero) pressure load on the first pipe leg. The unbalanced
pressure, by passing the elbow, has now shifted to the second leg. The unbalanced pressure
load continues to rise and fall in sequential legs as the pressure pulse travels back to the
source, or forward to the sink.
The ramp up time of the profile roughly coincides with the elapsed time from full flow to low flow,
such as the closing time of the valve or trip time of the pump. Because the leading edge of the
pressure pulse is not expected to change as the pulse travels through the system, the ramp-
down time is the same. The duration of the load from initiation through the beginning of the
down ramp is equal to the time required for the pressure pulse to travel the length of the pipe
leg.
Slug Flow
Most piping systems are designed to handle single-phase fluids (that is, fluids that are uniformly
liquid or gas). Under certain circumstances, the fluid may have multiple phases. For example,
slurry systems transport solid materials in liquids and gases may condense, creating pockets of
liquid in otherwise gaseous media. Systems carrying multi-phase fluids are susceptible to slug
flow.
In general, fluid changes direction in a piping system through the application of forces at elbows.
This force is equal to the change in momentum with respect to time, or
Fr = dp / dt = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]1/2
Where:
dp = change in momentum
dt = change in time
= fluid density
v = fluid velocity
A = internal area of pipe
= inclusion angle at elbow
With constant fluid density, this force is normally constant and is small enough that it can be
easily absorbed through tension in the pipe wall. The force is then passed on to adjacent elbows
with equal and opposite loads, zeroing the net load on the system. Therefore these types of
momentum loads are usually ignored in analysis. If the fluid velocity or density changes with
time, this momentum load will also change with time, leading to a dynamic load which may not
be canceled by the load at other elbows.
For example, consider a slug of liquid in a gas system. The steady state momentum load is
insignificant because the fluid density of a gas is effectively zero. The liquid suddenly slug hits
the elbow, increasing the momentum load by orders of magnitude. This load lasts only as long
as it takes for the slug to traverse the elbow, and then suddenly drops to near zero again with
the exact profile of the slug load depending upon the shape of the slug. The time duration of the
load depends upon the length of the slug divided by the velocity of the fluid.
Where:
F1 = v2 A(1 - cos )
Fr = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]
F2 = v2 A sin
Another nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic
analysis. By default, CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If
requested, CAESAR II can approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic
model by including spring stiffness normal to the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with
friction, the friction stiffness is added in the X and Z directions. You define the stiffness of these
springs as a function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II calculates
the friction stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static
case results, the friction coefficient, and the Stiffness Factor for Friction defined on the
Control Parameters tab. For example, if a normal force on the restraint from the static analysis
is 1000 lb and the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3, then the total friction load is 300 lb. If Stiffness
Factor for Friction is 500, then springs having a stiffness of SQRT(1000^2 +
300^2)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions
perpendicular to the line of action of the friction restraint. Converting friction damping into
stiffness is not mathematically legitimate, but serves as a good engineering approximation for
dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations.
Toolbar Commands
Analysis Specifies the type of analysis. Select Modal, Harmonic, Earthquake (spectrum),
Type Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), or Time History.
The window tabs change for each analysis.
Save Input and File > Save Input - Saves entered values to the CAESAR II file.
Check Input and File > Check Input - Opens the Dynamic Syntax Check dialog box
to check entered values for errors.
Run the Analysis and File > Run Analysis - Performs the error check and, if no
errors are found, performs the analysis the dynamic analysis for the selected
Analysis Type and the entered values. Analysis results are then available for review.
For more information, see Analysis Results (on page 733).
Add Entry and Edit > Add Entry - Adds a row to the table.
Delete Entry and Edit > Delete Entry - Deletes a row from the table.
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points - Specifies spectrum
data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions. For more
information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 712).
Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis - Calculates the
magnitudes of relieving thrust forces. For more information, see Relief Load Synthesis
(on page 723).
Cmt Changes the selected row in the table to a comment line. You can add comment lines
anywhere in the table.
Modal Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Modal is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic
Analysis window.
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 673)
Snubbers Tab (on page 675)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 677)
Advanced Tab (on page 707)
Modal analysis extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the modes of vibration of the pipe
system. No loads are specified.
Harmonic Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
Excitation Frequencies Tab (on page 639)
Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 641)
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 645)
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 673)
Snubbers Tab (on page 675)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 677)
Relief Loads
This method solves relief valve loading on a piping system through force spectrum analysis. The
force-time profile is estimated using relief load synthesis and then converted to a force multiplier
(dynamic load factor, or DLF) spectrum. The force is then applied in conjunction with this
spectrum.
Topics
Starting Frequency ........................................................................ 640
Ending Frequency.......................................................................... 640
Increment ....................................................................................... 640
Load Cycles ................................................................................... 641
Starting Frequency
Specifies the starting frequency for the analysis in Hertz (Hz). This is the frequency at which the
harmonic forces or displacements are applied.
Harmonic displacements and forces have the form:
A*cosine(t+ )
where A is the amplitude of the force or displacement, is the phase angle, and is the
frequency of the loading.
Real and imaginary solutions are developed for each frequency in the defined range, from which
any phased solution can be calculated. There must be a starting frequency for a frequency
range to be valid.
Ending Frequency
Specifies the ending frequency for a range of frequencies. Enter the frequency in Hertz (Hz).
The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each frequency between the Starting
Frequency (on page 640) and Ending Frequency according to the value specified for
Increment (on page 640). This is an optional value.
Increment
Specifies the frequency increment used to step from Starting Frequency (on page 640) to
Ending Frequency (on page 640). The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each
frequency along the specified increment. This is an optional value. If no value is entered, the
software uses a default increment of 1.0 Hz.
The frequencies for harmonic excitation are taken from each defined frequency range. Individual
frequencies for excitation are calculated using a "do loop" type of logic to determine the
frequencies in a specified frequency range:
X = STARTING FREQUENCY
5 CONTINUE
COMPUTE SOLUTION FOR FREQUENCY "X"
X = X + INCREMENT
IF( X .LT. ENDING FREQUENCY+0.001) GO TO 5
The sign of the frequency increment may be modified by the software to properly step from the
starting frequency to the ending frequency. The starting frequency, the ending frequency, or the
increment may be given as a fraction.
Example
Find harmonic solutions for the following group of turbine equipment speeds:
Warm up speed: 100 rpm
Speed increments to bring turbine online: 400, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200
rpm. Speeds are passed through very slowly while coming up to operating speed.
Operating speed: 3600 rpm
Convert rotations per minute to cycles per second (Hertz) by dividing by 60:
Warm up speed: 100/60
Speed increments: 400/60 to 3200/60 by increments of 400/60
Operating speed: 3600/60
A low frequency field vibration exists in the piping system at about 3 Hertz:
Approximate field-observed excitation frequency: 3 Hz
The response of the piping system when the dynamic load is applied at 3 Hz is almost zero. This
is true regardless of the magnitude of the dynamic load. The maximum varying pressure load
was applied, and there were still no appreciable dynamic displacements when the excitation
frequency was 3 Hz. Apply the dynamic load over a range of frequencies around 3 Hertz and
see if any dynamic response can be observed.
Group of field-observed frequencies: "Guessed"
Excitation frequency: 3 Hz
Defined by the input below are:
(2.5, 2.6, 2.7, ..., 3.3, 3.4, 3.5) Hz.
2.5 3.5 0.1
Load Cycles
Specifies the number of load cycles. If the harmonic load case is also subjected to fatigue
loading, enter the number of expected cycles. This is an optional value.
The load cycle value is the anticipated number of applications of the load on the system. This
value is used to determine the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material.
For static cases, the full range of calculated stresses is considered. For dynamic
cases, half the range (that is, the amplitude) of calculated stresses is considered.
Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0 phase at nodes 10 and 105:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
1500 X 0 10
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at
each applied frequency.
Topics
Force .............................................................................................. 643
Direction ......................................................................................... 643
Phase ............................................................................................. 643
Start Node ...................................................................................... 643
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 644
Increment ....................................................................................... 644
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the harmonic force to be applied.
The form of the harmonic forcing function is:
F(t) = A*cosine(t-)
where "F(t)" is the force as a function of time. "A" is the maximum amplitude of the dynamic
force. "" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "" is the phase angle
(in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the force. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or direction
vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for
direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the force in degrees.
Harmonic loading can start with its maximum load at time equal to zero, or the harmonic load
can start with its maximum at any time between zero and 2*/ seconds. The phase angle f is
the method used to specify this time shift in the dynamic load waveform. The phase angle is
calculated from the time shift using the equation:
(degrees) = 180t/
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
The phase angle is usually entered as either zero or 90. Use the phase specification when
defining eccentric loads on rotating equipment.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.
Start Node
Specifies the starting node number in the model at which the force is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the ending node number in the model through which the force is applied. Used as a
part of a "range of nodes" force loading with Start Node and Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
that is incremented between the start and stop nodes is loaded with the value of Force. This
value is optional.
Example 1
A pressure pulse traveling in the line causes the line to shake at about 2 hertz. The magnitude
of the pressure loading is estimated to be about 460 lb. The pressure wave travels from 95 to
100. The harmonic force to model this load is shown as follows. The magnitude is divided by 2
because the total variation in the dynamic load is a function of the cosine, which varies from -1
to 1. To find the true response magnitudes from a positive-only harmonic load pulse, a static
solution with 460/2 lb. acting in the +X direction is superimposed on the static 460/2 lb. solution
to provide the constant shifting of the load axis. There is a negative load at node 95 due to the
negative sign on the cosine. The pressure pulse is always positive and a negative load never
exists. The superposition of the 460/2 static solution assures that the dynamic load (and
probably the resulting displacements) is always positive.
460 LB pressure load at 2 Hertz
460/2 X 0 95
Example 2
A pump is shaking in the X-Y plane. The pump axis is along the global Z axis. The magnitude of
the dynamic load is calculated to be 750 lb. from the manufacturer-provided masses and
eccentricities. Apply this rotating equipment load on the inline pump at node 350. The X and Y
loads are 90 degrees out of phase with one another. When the X load is at its maximum the Y
load is zero, and when the Y load is at its maximum the X load is zero.
Estimated eccentric load on inline pump DOH-V33203001
750 X 0 350
750 Y 90 350
Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0 phase at nodes 10 and 105:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
1500 X 0 10
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
Topics
Displacement ................................................................................. 646
Direction ......................................................................................... 646
Phase ............................................................................................. 646
Start Node ...................................................................................... 647
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 647
Increment ....................................................................................... 647
Displacement
Specifies the magnitude of the displacement to be applied.
The form of the harmonic displacement function is:
D(t)=(A)*cosine(t-)
where "D(t)" is the displacement as a function of time, "A" is the maximum amplitude of the
dynamic displacement. "" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "" is
the phase angle (in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the displacement. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or
direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The
format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the displacement in degrees.
Harmonic displacement can start with its maximum displacement at time equal to zero, or the
harmonic displacements can start with its maximum displacements at any time between zero
and t + 2 / seconds. The phase angle is the method used to specify this time shift in the
dynamic load waveform. The phase angle can be calculated from the time shift using the
equation:
(degrees) = 180t /
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.0.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node in the model at which the displacement is applied.
If the node is a supported node, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to act at the support
point. If the node is not supported, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to describe the
exact motion of the pipe at that point. This differentiation only becomes important when the node
is supported by a flexible restraint. For example, node 55 is supported in the Y direction by a
restraint having a stiffness of 5,000 lb./in. A harmonic displacement is also specified at node 55
in the Y direction. In this case, the harmonic displacement does not describe the displacement
that is attached to 55. Instead, the displacement creates a load in the Y direction at 55 equal to
the harmonic displacement times 5,000 lb./in.
If Start Node has a value but Stop Node and Increment do not, then the start node must exist
in the piping system. If all three have values, then the range of nodes identified in the range
must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model through which the displacement is
applied. Used as a part of a "range of nodes" displacement loading with Start Node and
Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
incremented between the start and stop nodes is displaced with the value of Displacement.
This value is optional.
Example 1
A large ethylene compressor shakes the node exiting the compressor flange a field-measured 8
mils in the Y direction, and 3 mils in the Z direction. The dynamic displacements are assumed to
be simultaneous with no phase shift. This is because the load causing the displacements is
believed to be from the compressor plunger moving in the X, or axial, direction. The
displacements are skewed because the piping configuration entering the compressor is itself
skewed.
Harmonic Displacements at Compressor Flange
Example 2
Applying estimated eccentric forces to the pump described in the harmonic force example (on
page 644) did not produce the displacements witnessed in the field. Field personnel have
measured the dynamic displacements in the vertical (Y) and transverse (Z) directions at the
pump piping connections. The centerline of the pump, at the intersection of the horizontal
suction and vertical discharge is node 15. The magnitude of the Z displacement is measured at
12 mil. The magnitude of the Y displacement is measured at 3 mils. It is assumed that the
vibration is due to the rotation of the pump shaft, and so the Z and Y loads will be taken to be 90
degrees out of phase.
Harmonic displacements modeling pump vibration on the inline pump DOH-V33203001:
Z magnitude of the load - zero deg. phase shift
0.012 Z 0 15
Y magnitude of the load - 90 deg. phase shift
0.003 Y 90 15
Spectrum Definitions
One analysis may have multiple spectrum types and definitions. Predefined spectra are included
in the spectrum definition list. Any combination of these predefined spectra can be used as is,
deleted, or used with any other defined spectra.
You can include the basic spectrum data definitions in the comments for each ASCII spectrum
file. Select Cmt to create a comment line. For more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data
(on page 712) and Examples (on page 651).
When using a file created by DLF/Spectrum Generator , you must specify the type of data
which contained in the file, because the file only contains a table of data points. This data is
always frequency versus force-multiplier with linear interpolation. A typical definition is in this
format:
The data in this file may also be read in directly using Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .
In this case, omit the "#" from the spectrum declaration. For more information, see Enter/Edit
Spectrum Data (on page 712).
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra. The
profile must be given a name, time versus force data definitions, and interpolation methods.
Response spectra data must also be defined directly or from a file. The profile data may be
entered with actual forces or normalized to 1.0, depending on how the force sets are defined.
One force-time profile should be defined for each independent point load on the piping system.
The load case consists of one or more force profiles. Multiple force profiles can create a
staggered loading on the system.
Topics
Name ............................................................................................. 649
Range Type ................................................................................... 650
Ordinate Type ................................................................................ 651
Range Interpol ............................................................................... 651
Ordinate Interpol ............................................................................ 651
Examples ....................................................................................... 651
Name
Specifies the name of the spectrum. Names should reflect the spectrum and its intended use.
This name is used when defining the load cases. The name can be any 24-character identifier
and is associated with a particular spectrum or load profile.
Do not include spaces in the name.
The following predefined spectra are delivered with the software. No additional definitions are
required when using these spectra.
El Centro
The El Centro California N-S component, taken from Biggs, "Introduction to Structural
Dynamics," applies to systems with 5-10 percent critical damping.
The spectrum name (or load profile) can be preceded by a (#) sign. The (#) sign instructs
CAESAR II to read the spectrum table from a file having the same name as the spectrum
with no extension. Several jobs in the current folder can then access this shock data.
If data is to be entered manually, click Enter/Edit Spectrum Data , then create new rows
and enter the appropriate Range Type and Ordinate Type values. For more information,
see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 712).
The complete definition of a shock includes its name, range type, ordinate type, range
interpolation method, ordinate interpolation method, and the shock data point table.
Everything but the shock data point table can be entered on the
Range Type
Specifies the type of values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY or PERIOD.
If the value is PERIOD, then the spectrum table data is in seconds. If the value is FREQUENCY,
then the data is in Hertz (cycles per second).
For Time History analysis only, select TIME. The spectrum table data is in milliseconds (ms).
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is
required.
Ordinate Type
Specifies the type of values on the ordinate (vertical) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY , VELOCITY, ACCELERATION, G-ACCELERATION, or FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
If the value is FREQUENCY, then the spectrum table data is in Hertz (cycles per second).If the
value is VELOCITY, then the data is in length per second. If the value is ACCELERATION, then
the data is in length per second squared. If the value is G-ACCELERATION, then the data are
in g's.
For Time History analysis only, select FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is
required.
Range Interpol
Specifies how the values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 651) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Ordinate Interpol
Specifies how the values on the ordinate (vertical) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 651) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Examples
Example 1
The analysis requires that the El Centro shock be applied in the X and Z directions using a
factor of 1.0, and in the Y direction using a factor of 0.667.
No spectrum definition is required for this shock. El Centro is a predefined spectrum. All of its
shock data resides in the CAESAR II shock database.
Example 2
The analysis requires the use of the Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60 shock loads. At a maximum
acceleration value of 0.25 gs, analysis is to be performed using 1.0 times the horizontal and
vertical components of the shock as specified in Reg. Guide 1.60.
There is no spectrum definition required for either of these two shock loads. The Reg. Guide
1.60 shock spectra are predefined. You must only specify the maximum acceleration (ZPA) of
0.25 gs on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 677), and must use the Reg. Guide spectra
corresponding to the anticipated system damping. Lower damping values mean more
conservative results.
Example 3
The analysis requires a shock spectrum that is given by the client and developed for the site. A
plot of the spectrum appears as follows. The horizontal axis is period and the vertical axis is
acceleration. Because of the variation of the numbers along each axis, a logarithmic
interpolation for each axis is used. Because the shock name is not preceded by a (#) sign, the
spectrum is not predefined, and you must manually enter the points for this spectrum. The
spectrum definition input for pointing to this file is:
Example 4
All analysis on a particular project requires the use of the spectrum table shown as follows. The
data points of the spectrum are entered into an ASCII file named BENCH1 in the current folder.
The file can be created using any standard editor. The spectrum definition input for pointing to
this file is:
Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the case is assigned a
direction and factor.
Directives
Displays the Directive Builder (on page 711) dialog box.
Add New Load Case
Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case
Deletes the current load case.
TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1
Complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond
one, and as the time history phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading.
For more information, see Examples (on page 663).
Topics
Spectrum/Time History Profile ....................................................... 655
Factor ............................................................................................. 655
Dir. ................................................................................................. 655
Start Node ...................................................................................... 657
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 657
Increment ....................................................................................... 657
Anchor Movement.......................................................................... 657
Force Set # .................................................................................... 658
Force Sets Tab .............................................................................. 658
Examples ....................................................................................... 663
Factor
Specifies a value for the spectrum shock table multiplier. This value is usually 1.0.
Dir.
Specifies the applied direction of the spectrum/DLF shock load. Select X, Y, or Z. You can also
enter direction cosines, such as (.707, 0, .707), or direction vectors, such as (1,0,1).
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system.
The component of an independent support shock applies only to a group of support points. For
example, different shock spectra are generated for rack level piping and for ground level piping.
The rack supports are subject to one shock excitation, influenced by the racks response to the
earthquake. The ground level supports are subject to a different shock excitation, not influenced
by the rack. One node range is used to define the rack support shock contributions and another
is used to define the ground support shock contributions.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If no value is entered, the load is
applied at the start node.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node for in a group
of restraints that is loaded by this spectrum for Independent Support Motion analysis (ISM). The
spectrum is applied to all restraint nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in
steps of Increment. The range of nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If
no value is entered, the load is applied at the start node.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Anchor Movement
Specifies the absolute displacement of the restraints included in this spectrum shock case for
independent support motion analysis (ISM). This displacement is applied to all restrained nodes
in the node group, and is used to calculate the pseudostatic load components representing the
relative displacement of the individual restraint sets. If no value is entered, and if the defined
shock for this row does not encompass the entire system, this value is calculated by the
software. The value is taken from the lowest frequency entry of the response spectrum: the
specified displacement, velocity/frequency (for velocity spectra), or acceleration/frequency2 (for
acceleration spectra). Frequency is angular frequency.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Force Set #
Specifies the force set number corresponding to a set entered in the Force Sets tab if the
spectrum/load profile name describes a force-type spectrum (instead of displacement, velocity,
or acceleration). For more information, see Force Sets Tab (on page 658). If no value is entered,
Factor and Dir. must also have no values.
This option is not available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses
because there is no implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, the loading for
earthquakes is uniform over the entire structure and proportional to the pipe mass. For relief
valves and other point loadings, the load is not uniformly distributed and is not proportional to
the mass. A water hammer load is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of
the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses
require more information than the more common earthquake simulations: the load magnitude,
direction, and location. Forces that occur together are grouped into like-numbered force sets
and are manipulated in the analysis together. For example, the following shows two different
loading levels of the same type of load:
-3400 Y 35 1
-1250 Y 35 2
For a skewed load, force components belong to the same force set, because the components
always occur together:
-2134 Y 104 1
-2134 X 104 1
You can include any number of user comment lines by clicking Cmt. There can be any
number of line entries in the Force spectrum data.
If there are multiple force spectrum components in a single dynamic load case, carefully
select the combination method. The same rules that cover earthquake shocks and
components apply to force spectrum shocks and components
Topics
Force...............................................................................................659
Direction .........................................................................................660
Node ...............................................................................................660
Force Set # .....................................................................................660
Examples ........................................................................................660
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the impulse force (dynamic load) at the node. The sign of this value
is according to the CAESAR II global coordinate system
The total applied force is the product of this value, the selected force value from the
spectrum or load profile, and the factor entered for the load case.
Direction
Specifies the direction of the impulse force (dynamic load). Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node at which the impulse force (dynamic load) is applied. The node must exist in
the model.
Force Set #
Specifies the numeric value associated with this row (force set). Force sets are used to
construct the dynamic load cases. Values are arbitrary, but usually start at 1 and increment by
one.
Each impulse can be assigned to a different force set, which provides the most capability when
constructing load cases. Multiple rows with the same value form a single force set.
Examples
Example 1
Nodes 5, 10, and 15 define a cantilever pipe leg that is part of an offshore production platform.
The dynamic load as a function of time is equal to a half sine wave. The waveform is the same
for all three nodes, but the maximum dynamic load on node 5 is 5030 lb., on node 10 is 10,370
lb., and on node 15 is 30,537 lb. Three force sets are built for this problem. One has the
dynamic loads acting in the X direction. The second has the dynamic loads acting in the Z
direction. The third has the dynamic loads acting simultaneously in the X an Z directions. The
force spectrum input data is:
X DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 X 5 1
10370 X 10 1
30537 X 15 1
5030 Z 5 2
10370 Z 10 2
30537 Z 15 2
5030 X 5 3
5030 Z 5 3
10370 X 10 3
10370 Z 10 3
30537 X 15 3
30537 Z 15 3
Example 2
A relief valve at node 565 is being investigated for different reactor decompression conditions.
The maximum load for the first condition is 320 kips in the X direction. The maximum load for
the second decompression condition is 150 kips in the X direction. The third decompression
condition maximum load is 50 kips. Three different maximum force sets are defined:
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 1
320000 X 565 1
150000 X 565 2
50000 X 565 3
Example 3
A startup shock wave passes through a single elbow system. Nodes in the piping model are 5,
10, and 15 as shown:
As the wave starts off between 5 and 10 there is an initial dynamic axial load on the anchor at 5.
When the shock wave hits the elbow at 10, the axial load in the 5-10 elements balance the initial
imbalance at node 5, and there become an axial imbalance in the 10-15 element. This shock
load is modeled as two completely separate impacts on the piping system. The first is the
dynamic anchor load at 5. If 5 is a flexible anchor then this load may cause dynamic
displacements of the piping system and 5 will just be subject to the dynamic time history pulse
due to the shock. Assume the anchor at 5 is a flexible vessel nozzle. The second shock load is
the unbalanced dynamic pressure load in the 10-15 element that exists until the shock reaches
the node 15. Friction losses in the line reduce the shock magnitude as it travels down the line. In
the time the wave leaves the anchor at 5 until it encounters the bend at 10 there is a 50% drop
in the pulse strength as shown:
This pressure drop was calculated using a transient fluid simulator. Between nodes 10 and 15
the pulse strength drops even further as shown:
-5600 X 5 1
2800 Z 10 2
Examples
Example 1
Define a shock load case that excites the entire piping system with a vibration of one times the
El Centro earthquake in the X direction, one times the El Centro earthquake in the Z, and 0.667
times the El Centro earthquake in the Y direction.
ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO 0.667 Y
Example 2
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with the horizontal and vertical
components of the Reg. Guide 1.60 shock spectra for a 2 percent critically damped system. The
maximum ground acceleration is 0.22 gs.
The maximum ground acceleration is set on the Control Parameters tab and has no effect on
the shock load case definitions.
1.60H2 1 X
1.60V2 1 Y
1.60H2 1 Z
Example 3
Define a shock load case that is comprised of custom shocks BENCH1 and BENCH2. BENCH1
acts in the X and Z directions, and BENCH2 acts in the Y direction. The scale factor for all
shocks is 1.0.
BENCH1 1 X
BENCH2 1 Y
BENCH1 1 Z
One of the shock load cases excites the piping system along a line that is 45 degrees off of the
global axes in the horizontal plane. It is suspected that this direction of excitation yields the
worst possible results. Apply the custom shock BENCH1 in the horizontal direction and
BENCH2 in the vertical direction.
BENCH1 1 (1,0,1)
BENCH1 1 (-
1,0,1)
BENCH2 1 Y
Example 4
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with a vibration of two times the El
Centro earthquake in the X, Y, and Z directions. There should be two shock load cases. The first
should use an independent summation and the second a simultaneous summation.
The load cases are defined as shown. Remember that independent summation means MODAL
then SPATIAL, and simultaneous means SPATIAL then MODAL.
There are several ways to accomplish the same objective using parameters on other
tabs, such as the Control Parameters tab. Only the method using the explicit definition of the
load case combination method is shown in this example.
LOAD CASE 1 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS
MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
Example 5
Define a shock case that has the custom spectrum 1DIR acting only in the Z direction. Set the
stress type for the case to be operating and use modal summations before spatial summations.
Modal or spatial summations are not shown below because modal summation is the CAESAR II
default and is controlled by Spatial or Modal Combination First (on page 698) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Stress Types: OPE
1DIR 1 Z
Example 6
The support nodes 5, 25, 35, 45, and 56 are pipe shoes sitting on concrete foundations. The
support nodes 140, 145, 157, 160, and 180 are second level rack supports, that is, pipe shoes
sitting on structural steel beams in the second level of the rack. The ground level shock
spectrum name is GROUND04, and the second level rack spectrum name is RACKLEVEL2-04.
Set up the shock load case to define these independent support excitations and omit any
relative support movement.
GROUND04 1 X 5 56 1 0
GROUND04 1 Y 5 56 1 0
GROUND04 1 Z 5 56 1 0
Next, set up a shock load case, and define all combinations options explicitly. Use the same
shock components as defined above, except assume that the pseudostatic component is added
using the SRSS combination method. Also change the modal summation method to SRSS. This
is the recommended method. When the modal summation method is SRSS it does not matter
whether modal or spatial combinations are performed first. The order is only a factor when
closely spaced modes are considered in the grouping, 10 percent, and DSRSS methods.
MODAL(SRSS),PSEUDOSTATIC(SRSS),SPATIAL(SRSS)
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
GROUND04 1 X 5 56 1
GROUND04 1 Y 5 56 1
GROUND04 1 Z 5 56 1
Example 7
The last elbow in the relief valve piping is at node 295. The spectrum name: BLAST contains the
DLF response spectrum for relief valve firing. SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET #1
contains the load information and its point of application. Show the load case input that provides
the most conservative combination of modal results. Because there is only a single loading, no
consideration is given to spatial or directional combinations.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force Set #
ABSOLUTE MODAL SUMMATION, ONLY A SINGLE LOADING
COMPONENT AND SO NO CONSIDERATION GIVEN TO SPATIAL OR
DIRECTIONAL COMBINATIONS.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (ABS)
Click Directives to open the Directive Builder dialog box and select these values.
For more information, see Directive Builder (on page 711).
Use the same example above and combine the modes using the grouping method. This will
produce the most realistic solution.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (GROUP)
Additional Options
The following options are also available:
Editing Load Case
Select a load case to edit.
Stress Types
Select the stress type for the load case:
OPE
Stress from operating loads.
OCC
Stress from occasional short-term loads.
SUS
Stress from primary sustained loads.
EXP
Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
FAT
Stress from fatigue loads.
This option is not available for time history analysis.
Fatigue Cycles
Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT is selected
for Stress Types and is s not available for time history analysis.
Directives
Opens the Directive Builder (on page 711) dialog box, where you can control the
combination method parameters, using methods such as ABS and SRSS (square root of
the sum of the squares).
Add New Load Case
Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case
Deletes the current load case.
Topics
Load Case ...................................................................................... 669
Factor ............................................................................................. 669
Examples........................................................................................ 669
Load Case
Specifies the static or dynamic load case to be included in the combination case. Select a load
case from the list. Static load cases start with S, and dynamic load cases are start with D. Each
is then followed by a load case number of a static or shock analysis defined on the Load Cases
tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 653).
The following examples are valid values: S1, STATIC1, S3, STATIC3, D1, DYNAMICS1, S#1,
and D#1. Use any length up to 24 characters. For static load case definitions, the static case
must exist and have already been run (also, the S cant refer to a spring hanger design case).
For dynamic load case definitions, the dynamic load case number refers to the shock load case.
Factor
Specifies a multiplication factor to be applied to the results of the load case. The resulting
product is then used in the combination case. The default is 1.0.
Examples
Example 1
The static load cases are:
1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1 - L2 (EXP)
STATIC2 1.0
DYNAMIC1 1.0
or
S2 1
D1 1
Example 2
The static load cases are:
1 = W + P1 (For hanger design)
2 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 (For hanger design)
3 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 + H (OPE)
4 = W + P1 + H (SUS)
5 = L3 - L4 (EXP)
There is one dynamic load case. Create an occasional case that is the sum of the sustained and
the dynamic stresses using the SRSS combination method and the ABS combination method.
Additionally, combine the expansion static case and the dynamic case using the SRSS
combination method. This is a total of three combination load cases. The first two static hanger
design load cases cannot be used in a combination case.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
* SRSS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (SRSS)
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
* COMBINATION CASE 2:
* ABS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (ABS)
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
* COMBINATION CASE 3:
* SRSSCOMBINATION OF EXPANSION AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (SRSS)
STATIC5 1
DYNAMIC1 1
Stress type and combination are defined on the Directive Builder dialog box. For
more information, see Directive Builder (on page 711).
Example 3
The static load cases are:
1 = W+T1+P+D1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P+H (SUS)
3 = U1 (OCC) Static seismic simulation
4 = L1-L2 (EXP)
5 = L2+L3 (OCC) (SCALAR)
Create an SRSS combination of the static seismic case and both the sustained and operating
static cases:
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
STATIC2 1
STATIC3 1
* COMBINATION CASES 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
STATIC1 1
STATIC3 1
Example 4
The static load cases are:
1 = W+P1 (Hanger design restrained weight case)
2 = W+T1+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #1)
3 = W+T2+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #2)
4 = WNC+P1 (Hanger design actual cold loads)
5 = W+T1+H+P1+D1 (OPE)
6 = W+P1+H (SUS)
7 = L5-L6 (EXP)
Combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 1 results, 1/2 the shock case 2
results, and 1.333 times the shock case 3 results. The combination method is SRSS. For a
second combination case, combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 4
results, 1/2 the shock case 5 results, and 1.333 times the shock case 6 results.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
COMBINATION (SRSS)
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC1 1/2
DYNAMIC2 1/2
DYNAMIC3 1.333
or
COMBINATION (SRSS)
S6 1
D1 0.5
D2 0.5
D3 1.333
* COMBINATION CASE 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS)
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC4 0.5
DYNAMIC5 0.5
DYNAMIC6 1.333
Topics
Mass .............................................................................................. 673
Direction ......................................................................................... 673
Start Node ...................................................................................... 674
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 674
Increments ..................................................................................... 674
Mass
Specifies the magnitude of the concentrated mass (in current units) to be applied to the
specified node. A positive value is added to the calculated mass assigned to the node, a
negative value is subtracted from the calculated mass, and a zero value eliminates the mass.
Direction
Specifies the direction in which the mass acts. The values for translated mass are X, Y, Z, and
ALL (where ALL represents X, Y, and Z). The values for rotated mass are RX, RY, RZ, and
RALL (where RALL represents RX, RY, and RZ).
Rotational masses only apply when the consistent mass model is used. For more
information, see Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) (on page 706) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node at which this mass is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model to which the mass is applied. Used as
part of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command with Start Node and Increment. This value
is optional.
Increments
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Used as part
of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command. This value is optional and defaults to 1 if no value
is entered.
There can be any number of line entries on the Lumped Masses tab.
The zero mass capability is particularly useful when you are not interested in the modes for part
of the system. That part of the system is usually modeled only for its stiffness effect.
Example 1
450 is added to the assigned mass at node 40 in the X, Y, and Z directions.
450 ALL 40
Example 2
All nodes from 12 to 25 have all assigned mass removed in the X, Y, and Z directions. Some
nodes may not exist in this range but this is acceptable as long as at least one node in the range
exists in the system.
0.0 ALL 12 25 1
Example 3
375 is added in the X, Y, and Z directions for nodes 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, and 50, if they exist. All
assigned mass is removed for all nodes from 1 and 600 in the X and Y directions.
375 A 25 50 5
0.0 X 1 600 1
0.0 Y 1 600 1
Snubbers Tab
This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Add snubbers to the model. Snubbers are supports that only resist dynamic loading while
allowing static displacement, such as displacement from thermal growth. Snubbers must have
their stiffness defined. Snubbers are not rigid by default because they are typically not as stiff as
other types of restraints.
Snubbers may also be added in Input > Piping as part of the static model. In either
the static or dynamic analysis, a snubber is idealized as a stiffness rather than damping at a
point.
Topics
Stiffness ......................................................................................... 675
Direction ......................................................................................... 675
Node .............................................................................................. 675
CNode ............................................................................................ 675
Stiffness
Specifies the stiffness of the snubber. The value must be positive. If the snubber is rigid enter a
value of 1.0E12.
Direction
Specifies the direction for the line of action of the snubber. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node number where the snubber acts.
Connecting nodes for snubbers work in the same way as for restraints.
CNode
Specifies the second node number to which the other end of the snubber is connected. This
value is optional. If the snubber acts between the piping system and a fixed point in space, then
do not enter a value for CNode.
Connecting nodes for snubbers works in the same way as for restraints.
Example 1
Add a rigid snubber at node 150 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 150
Example 2
Add rigid snubbers at nodes 160, 165, and 170 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 160
1E12 Z 165
1E12 Z 170
Example 3
Add a rigid snubber between the structural steel node 1005 and the piping node 405 in the Z
direction.
1E12 Z 405 1005
Example 4
Add a 5,000 lb./in. snubber in the X and Y directions at the piping node 500. The X snubber
connects to the structural steel node 1050 and the Y snubber connects to the overhead line at
node 743.
* HORIZONTAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND STEEL
5000 X 500 1050.
* VERTICAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND OVER HEAD COOLING WATER
LINE
5000 Y 500 743
Table Notes:
X Required.
3 Max. No. of Eigenvalues and Frequency Cutoff work as a pair in terminating the eigen extraction.
6 Used if USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.60 or Uniform Building Code seismic spectra are specified in the shock
definition.
7 Used if independent support movement (USM) loads are present or if defined shock does not include all
supports in the system.
10 Used if more than one spectrum load is applied in the same direction.
For modal analysis, set the number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a
maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both.
Topics
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ...... 678
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status ........................... 689
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated.............................................. 690
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) ................................................................... 692
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) ........ 693
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) ....................................................... 694
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) ............................................... 694
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases
....................................................................................................... 695
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ....... 698
Spatial or Modal Combination First ............................................... 698
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) .................................... 699
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) .... 699
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) ...... 702
Include Missing Mass Components ............................................... 703
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) ... 705
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ......................... 705
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) .............................. 705
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT)......................................... 706
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues ..................... 706
Harmonic Analysis
The response of a system to a dynamically applied load is generally expressed through the
dynamic equation of motion:
Where:
M = system mass matrix
= acceleration vector, as a function of time
C = system damping matrix
= velocity vector, as a function of time
K = system stiffness matrix
x(t) = displacement vector, as a function of time
F(t) = applied load vector, as a function of time
The harmonic solver is most commonly used to analyze low frequency field vibrations due to
fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. This differential equation
cannot be solved explicitly, except in a few specific cases. Harmonic analysis looks at one of
these casesthe set of dynamic problems where the forces or displacements (such as
pulsation or vibration) acting on the piping system take sinusoidal forms. When damping is zero
under harmonic loading, the dynamic equation of the system can be reduced to
M (t) + K x(t) = F0 cos (w t + Q)
Where:
F0 = harmonic load vector
w = angular forcing frequency of harmonic load (radian/sec)
t = time
Q = phase angle (radians)
This differential equation is solved directly for the nodal displacements at any time. From there
the system reactions, forces and moments, and stresses are calculated.
The equation has a solution of the form
x (t) = A cos (w t + Q)
Where:
A = vector of maximum harmonic displacements of system
Because acceleration is the second derivative of displacement with respect to time,
(t) = -A w2 cos w t
Inserting these equations for displacement and acceleration back into the basic harmonic
equation of motion yields,
-M A 2 cos ( t + Q) + K A cos ( t + Q) = Fo cos ( t + Q)
Dividing both sides of this equation by cos ( t + Q),
-M A 2 + K A = Fo
Where:
= Undamped natural frequency of mode (rad/sec)
For practical problems, a is extremely small, and can be ignored. The definition of b reduces
to
= 2 Cc/
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, but two problems
exist. First, for multi-degree-of-freedom systems, there is not really a single b, but there
must be only a single b in order to get a solution of the harmonic equation. The second
problem is that the modal frequencies are not known prior to generation of the damping
matrix. Therefore the w used in the calculation of b is the forcing frequency of the load,
instead of the natural frequency of a mode. When the forcing frequency of the load is in the
vicinity of a modal frequency, this gives a good estimation of the true damping.
If multiple harmonic loads occur simultaneously and are not in phase, system response is
the sum of the responses due to the individual loads
x(t) = S Ai cos ( t + Qi)
Where:
Ai = displacement vector of system under load i
Qi = phase angle of load i
In this case, an absolute maximum solution cannot be found. Solutions for each load, and
the sum of these, must be found at various times in the load cycle. These combinations are
then reviewed in order to determine which one causes the worst load case. Alternatively,
CAESAR II can select the frequency/phase pairs which maximize the system displacement.
Damped harmonics always cause a phased response.
The biggest use by far of the harmonic solver is in analyzing low frequency field vibrations
resulting from either fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. The
approach typically used is described briefly below:
1. A potential dynamic problem is first identified in the field. Large cyclic vibrations or high
stresses (fatigue failure) are present in an existing piping system, raising questions of
whether this represents a dangerous situation. As many symptoms of the problem (such as
quantifiable displacements or overstress points) are identified as possible for future use in
refining the dynamic model.
2. A model of the piping system is built using CAESAR II. This should be done as accurately
as possible, because system and load characteristics affect the magnitude of the developed
response. In the area where the vibration occurs, you should accurately represent valve
operators, flange pairs, orifice plates, and other in-line equipment. You may also want to add
additional nodes in the area of the vibration.
3. Assume the cause of the load, and estimate the frequency, magnitude, point, and direction
of the load. This is difficult because dynamic loads can come from many sources. Dynamic
loads may be due to factors such as internal pressure pulses, external vibration, flow
shedding at intersections, and two-phase flow. In almost all cases, there is some frequency
content of the excitation that corresponds to (and therefore excites) a system mechanical
natural frequency. If the load is caused by equipment, then the forcing frequency is probably
some multiple of the operating frequency. If the load is due to acoustic flow problems, then
the forcing frequency can be estimated through the use of Strouhals equations (from fluid
dynamics). Use the best assumptions available to estimate the magnitudes and points of
application of the dynamic load.
4. Model the loading using harmonic forces or displacements, normally depending upon
whether the cause is assumed to be pulsation or vibration. Perform several harmonic
analyses, sweeping the frequencies through a range centered about the target frequency to
account for uncertainty. Examine the results of each of the analyses for signs of large
displacements, indicating harmonic resonance. If the resonance is present, compare the
results of the analysis to the known symptoms from the field. If they are not similar, or if
there is no resonance, this indicates that the dynamic model is not a good one. It must then
be improved, either in terms of a more accurate system (static) model, a better estimate of
the load, or a finer sweep through the frequency range. After the model has been refined,
repeat this step until the mathematical model behaves just like the actual piping system in
the field.
5. At this point, the model is a good representation of the piping system, the loads and the
relationship of the load characteristics to the system characteristics.
6. Evaluate the results of this run in order to determine whether they indicate a problem.
Because harmonic stresses are cyclic, they should be evaluated against the endurance limit
of the piping material. Displacements should be reviewed against interference limits or
esthetic guidelines.
7. If the situation is deemed to be a problem, its cause must be identified. The cause is
normally the excitation of a single mode of vibration. For example, the Dynamic Load Factor
for a single damped mode of vibration, with a harmonic load applied is
Where:
DLF = dynamic loading factor
Cc = ratio of system damping to "critical damping,"
where "critical damping" =
f = forcing frequency of applied harmonic load
n = natural frequency of mode of vibration
A modal extraction of the system is done; one or more of these modes should have a
natural frequency close to the forcing frequency of the applied load. The problem mode can
be further identified as having a shape very similar to the shape of the total system vibration.
This mode shape has been dynamically magnified far beyond the other modes and
predominates in the final vibrated shape.
8. The problem mode must be eliminated. You typically want to add a restraint at a high point
and in the direction of the mode shape. If this cannot be done, the mode may also be altered
by changing the mass distribution of the system. If no modification of the system is possible,
it may be possible to alter the forcing frequency of the load. If the dynamic load was
assumed to be due to internal acoustics, you should reroute the pipe to change the internal
flow conditions. This may resolve or amplify the problem, but in either case avoids
CAESAR IIs "good model" of the system. After modifying the system, the harmonic problem
is re-run using the single forcing frequency determined as a "good model." The stresses and
displacements are then re-evaluated.
9. If the dynamic problem has been adequately solved, the system is now re-analyzed
statically to determine the effects of any modifications on the static loading cases.
Adding restraint normally increases expansion stresses, while adding mass
increases sustained stresses.
Process output from a harmonic analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review displacement, restraint, force, or stress data either
graphically or in report form.
Animate the displacement pattern for each of the frequency load cases.
The results of harmonic dynamic loads cannot be combined using the Static/Dynamic
Combination option.
Spectrum Analysis
Spectrum analysis attempts to estimate the maximum response developed in a system during a
transient load. The results are a statistical summation of the maximum displacements, forces,
reactions, and stresses. The individual responses do not represent an actual physical loading
case because the maxima may all occur at different times. Spectrum analyses are especially
useful when the loading profile is random, or not exactly known, such as with seismic loads.
CAESAR II provides the ability to perform two types of spectrum analyses which may be
combined: seismic and force spectra. Seismic loadings may be evaluated either uniformly over
the entire system, or applied through individual support groups with corresponding anchor
movements. Force spectra analyses may be used to analyze impulse loadings, such as those
due to relief valve, fluid hammer, or slug flow.
Seismic response spectra resemble harmonic Dynamic Load Factor curves, because seismic
loads indicate strong harmonic tendencies. As the damping value increases, the system
response approaches ground motion. Seismic spectra also usually show strong evidence of
flexible, resonant, and rigid areas. Spectra may have multiple peaks due to filtering by the
building and/or piping system. Multiple peaks are usually enveloped in order to account for
uncertainties in the analysis. Seismic response spectra peaks are typically spread to account for
inaccuracies as well.
The idea behind the generation of the response spectra is that the modes of vibration of a
system respond to the load in the exact same manner as a single degree-of-freedom oscillator.
These spectra represent the normalized response spectra shapes for three soil types provided
in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). When used, they must be scaled by
the ZPA, which is the product of Z and I, where Z is the seismic zone coefficient and I is the
earthquake importance factor, from UBC Tables 23-I and 23-L. The ZPA can be specific using
the CAESAR II control parameter spreadsheet.
User defined spectra
User defined spectra may be entered with period or frequency as the range, and displacement,
velocity, or acceleration as the ordinate. These spectra may be read in from a text file or entered
directly into a spectrum table during dynamic input processing.
Independent Support Motion Applications
Earthquake ground motions are caused by the passing of acoustic shock waves through the
soil. These waves are usually hundreds of feet long. If supports having foundations in the soil
are grouped together within a several hundred foot radius, they typically see exactly the same
excitation from the earthquake. If all of the supports for a particular piping system are attached
directly to ground type supports, each support is excited by an essentially identical time
waveform. This type of excitation is known as uniform support excitation. Often pipe is
supported from rack, building, or vessel structures as well as from ground type supports. These
intermediate structures sometimes filter or accentuate the effect of the earthquake. In this
situation, the supports attached to the intermediate structure are not exposed to the same
excitation as those that are attached directly to ground foundations. To accurately model these
systems, different shocks must be applied to different parts of the piping system. This type of
excitation is known as independent support motion (ISM) excitation. While the different support
groups are exposed to different shocks, there are also relative movements between support
groups that dont exist for uniform support excitation. The movement of one support group
relative to another is termed pseudostatic displacement, or seismic anchor movements. For
uniform support excitation, there are spatial and modal response components available for
combination. For independent support excitation, there are spatial and modal response
components available for each different support group, plus pseudostatic components of the
earthquake that must also be added into the dynamic response.
The major difference when running ISM type earthquake loads comes while building the shock
load cases. In the uniform excitation case, the shock acts implicitly over all of the supports in the
system. In the ISM case different shocks act on different groups of supports. The Spectrum
Load Cases tab appears, with the following parameters:
Spectrum (name)
Factor
Dir (direction)
Start Node
Stop Node
Increment
Anchor Movement
Name, Factor, and Dir are all that is required for uniform support excitations. For ISM type
shocks, the group of nodes over which the shock acts must be specified as well, using Start
Node, Stop Node, and Increment. Anchor Movement is used to explicitly define the seismic
displacement of the restraint set. This displacement is used to calculate the pseudostatic load
components. If omitted, the software defaults to the displacement derived from the response
spectrum entry corresponding to the lowest frequency.
The term on the right hand side is a dynamic force acting on the piping system, such as F = Ma,
so the analogous equation to be solved for the force spectrum problem is:
Where:
F = the dynamic load (water hammer or relief valve)
Instead of the displacement, velocity, or acceleration spectrum used for the seismic problem, a
Dynamic Load Factor spectrum is used for a force spectrum problem. A DLF spectrum gives the
ratio of the maximum dynamic displacement divided by the maximum static displacement. The
earthquake response spectrum analysis method starts with the time history of an earthquake
excitation. The force spectrum analysis method is done in exactly the same way, except that the
analysis starts with the force versus time profile. Just as for the earthquake, this time history
loading is applied to a shake table of single degree-of-freedom bodies. A response spectrum
(DLF versus natural frequency) is generated by dividing the maximum oscillator displacements
by the static displacements expected under the same load. An alternate means of generating a
response spectrum for an impulse load is to numerically integrate the dynamic equation of
motion for oscillators of various frequencies under the applied load. Use Tools > DLF Spectrum
Generator.
Process output from a spectrum analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and
shock load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the individual mode shapes extracted for the spectrum analysis.
Time History
Time history analysis is a more accurate, more computationally intensive analytical method than
response spectrum analysis. It is best suited to impulse loadings or other transient loadings
where the profile is known. This method of analysis involves the actual solution of the dynamic
equation of motion throughout the duration of the applied load and subsequent system vibration,
providing a true simulation of the system response.
As noted in Harmonic Analysis (on page 679), the dynamic equation of motion for a system is
This differential equation cannot be solved explicitly, but may be integrated using numeric
techniques by slicing the duration of the load into many small time steps. Assuming that the
change in acceleration between time slices is linear, the system accelerations, velocities,
displacements, and corresponding reactions, internal forces, and stresses are calculated at
successive time steps.
Because the total response of a system is equivalent to the sum of the responses of its
individual modes of vibration, the above equation can be simplified assuming that the damping
matrix C is orthogonal. Use the transformation x = FX, to be expressed in modal coordinates:
Where:
The load profiles are linked with force sets (indicating magnitude, direction, and location of the
applied load) in the shock case. The magnitude of the applied load is determined by the product
of the profile force, the force set magnitude, and the scale in the shock case.
You can enter only forces, not moments or restraint displacements, in the time history load
profile. Model moments using force couples, and simulate restraint displacements by entering
forces equal to the displacement multiplied by the restraint stiffness in the direction of the
displacement.
Process output from a Time History analysis in three ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, and restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. CAESAR IIs implementation of time history analysis provides two types of results.
One results case contains the maximum individual components (such as axial stress, X-
displacement, and MZ reaction) of the system response, along with the time at which it
occurred. Several results cases represent the actual system response at specific times.
Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and transient
load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the shock displacement for the transient load cases. During animation, the
displacements, forces, moments, stresses, and other data associated with individual
elements are displayed at every time step and for the dynamic load alone, or for any of the
static/dynamic combinations.
Animate the individual mode shapes included in the time history response.
This parameter is used, in combination with Frequency Cutoff (HZ), to limit the maximum
number of modes of vibration to be extracted during the dynamic analysis. If this parameter is
entered as 0, the number of modes extracted is limited only by the frequency cutoff and the
number of degrees-of-freedom in the system model.
Example
A system has the following natural frequencies:
1 0.6
2 3.0
3 6.1
4 10.7
5 20.3
6 29.0
7 35.4
8 40.7
9 55.6
The modes extracted for different values of Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated and
Frequency Cutoff are:
0 33 7
0 50 9
3 33 3
9 60 9
If you are more interested in providing an accurate representation of the system displacements,
request the extraction of a few modes, allowing a rapid calculation time. However, if an accurate
estimate of the forces and stresses in the system is the objective, calculation time grows as it
becomes necessary to extract far more modes. This is particularly true when solving a fluid
hammer problem in the presence of axial restraints. Often modes with natural frequencies of up
to 300 Hz are large contributors to the solution.
To determine how many modes are sufficient, extract a certain number of modes and review the
results. Repeat the analysis by extracting five to ten additional modes and comparing the new
results to the old. If there are significant changes between the results, repeat the analysis again,
adding five to ten more modes. This iterative process continues until the results taper off,
becoming asymptotic.
This procedure has two drawbacks. First is the time involved in making the multiple analyses
and the time involved in extracting the potentially large number of modes. The second
drawback, occurring with spectrum analysis, is less obvious. A degree of conservatism is
introduced when combining the contributions of the higher order modes. Possible spectral mode
summation methods include methods that combine modal results as same-sign (positive)
values: SRSS, ABSOLUTE, and GROUP. Theory states that the rigid modes act in phase with
each other, and should be combined algebraically, permitting the response of some rigid modes
to cancel the effect of other rigid modes. This is what occurs in a time history analysis. Because
of this conservatism, it is possible to get results which exceed twice the applied load, despite the
fact that the Dynamic Load Factor (DLF) of an impulse load cannot be greater than 2.0.
4. Conservative Cutoff (Too many rigid modes combined using non-conservative summation
methods)
When the analysis type is SPECTRUM, MODES, or TIMEHIST, either this parameter or Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 690) must have a value.
Spectrum Analysis
For a spectrum analysis with the GROUP Modal Combination Method (as defined by USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the frequency spacing defining each modal group,
that is, the percentage of the base frequency between the lowest and highest frequency of the
group. Regulatory Guide 1.92 specifies the group spacing criteria as 10%, or 0.1. This is the
default value in CAESAR II. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 699).
Spectrum Analysis
For a time history analysis, this parameter specifies the total length of time over which the
dynamic response is simulated. The load duration divided by the time step size from Closely
Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 693) gives the total number of
integration steps making up the solution. CAESAR II limits the number of time steps to 5000 or
as permitted by available memory and system size. The duration should be at least equal to the
maximum duration of the applied load plus the period of the first extracted mode. This allows
simulation of the system response throughout the imposition of the external load, plus one full
cycle of the resulting free vibration. After this point, the response dies out according to the
damping value used. For example, if the applied load is expected to last 150 milliseconds and
the lowest extracted frequency is 3 Hz, set the load duration to a minimum of 0.150 plus 1/3, or
0.483 seconds.
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping Cc and the constants
and are given as:
Where:
= undamped natural frequency of mode (radians/sec)
For many practical problems, is extremely small, and so may be ignored, reducing the
relationships to:
=0
= 2 Cc /
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, with the exception
that a single is calculated for the multi-degree-of-freedom system, and the used is that of the
load forcing frequency. When the forcing frequency is in the vicinity of a modal frequency, this
gives an accurate estimate of the true damping value.
At least one output case, in addition to the automatically generated maxima case, must be
requested. More than one is not necessary, because the worst case results are reflected in the
maxima case and individual results at every time step are available through the ELEMENT
command when animating time history results.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) describes the requirements for
combining spatial components when performing seismic response spectra analysis for
nuclear power plants.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this option has no
effect on time history results.
Grouping Method
This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The grouping method attempts to
eliminate the drawbacks of the Absolute and SRSS methods. It assumes that modes are
completely correlated with any modes with similar closely spaced frequencies, and are
completely uncorrelated with those modes with widely different frequencies. The total system
response is calculated as
Where:
R = total system response of the element
N = number of significant modes considered in the modal response combination
Rk = the peak value of the response of the element due to the k th mode
P = number of groups of closely-spaced modes (where modes are considered to be closely-
spaced if their frequencies are within 10% of the base mode in the group), excluding
individual separated modes. No mode can be in more than one group.
i = number of first mode in group q
j = number of last mode in group q
Rlq = response of mode l in group q
Rmq = response of mode m in group q
The responses of any modes which have frequencies within 10% of each other are added
together absolutely, and the results of each of these groups are combined with the remaining
individual modal results using the SRSS method.
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be
changed by using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 693)
parameter.
Where:
Ri, Rj = the peak value of the response of the element due to the ith and jth mode,
respectively, where mode i and j are any frequencies within 10% of the each other,
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be
changed by using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 693)
parameter.
Where:
Rs = the peak value of the response of the element due to mode s
eks = intermodal correlation coefficient = [ 1 + {( k' - s') /(k' k + s' s)}2 ]-1
k' = k [ 1 - k2 ]1/2
s' = s [ 1 - s2 ]1/2
k' = k + 2 / ( td k )
s' = s + 2 / ( td s )
k = frequency of mode k, rad/sec
s = frequency of mode s, rad/sec
k = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode k, dimensionless
s = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode s, dimensionless
td = duration of earthquake, sec
The load duration (td) and the damping ratio () can be specified by using the Load
Duration (DSRSS) (sec) (on page 694) and Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) (on page 694)
parameters.
This method is based upon the statistical assumption that all modal responses are completely
independent, with the maxima following a relatively uniform distribution throughout the duration
of the applied load. This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very
close frequencies, because those modes will usually experience their maximum DLF at
approximately the same time during the load profile.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this modal
combination method has no effect on time history results.
Absolute Method
This method defines the total system response as the sum of the absolute values of the
individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method with
all correlation coefficients equal to 1.0, or the grouping method, with all modes being closely
spaced. The total system response is calculated as:
This method gives the most conservative result, because it assumes that the all maximum
modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is
usually overly-conservative, because modes with different natural frequencies will probably
experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load profile.
% Active Massx
% Active MassY
% Active Massz
Where:
Me = vector (by degree-of-freedom) of sum (over all extracted modes) of effective modal
masses
M = vector corresponding to main diagonal of system mass matrix
The maximum possible percentage of active mass that is theoretically possible is 100%, with 90-
95% usually indicating that a sufficient number of modes have been extracted to provide a good
dynamic model.
Examples
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fex = Fe[i]
Fx = F[i]
Summed over i = 2 to n, by 6 (Y - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fey = Fe[i]
Fy = F[i]
Summed over i = 3 to n, by 6 (Z - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fez = Fe[i]
Fz = F[i]
Where:
FeX,FeY,FeZ = effective force (allocated to extracted modes) acting along the global X-, Y-,
and Z-axes, respectively
Fr = vector of effective forces (allocated to extracted modes)
FX,FY,FZ = total system forces acting along the global X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively
F = vector of total system forces
The maximum possible percentage which is theoretically possible for this value is also 100%. In
practice it may be higher, indicating an uneven distribution of the load and mass in the system
model. There is nothing inherently wrong with an analysis where the included force exceeds
100%. If the missing mass correction is included, the modal loadings are adjusted to
automatically conform to the applied loading. The percentage of included force can often be
brought under 100% by extracting a few more modes. At other times, the situation can be
remedied by improving the dynamic model through a finer element mesh, or, more importantly,
equalizing the mass point spacing in the vicinity of the load.
The Sturm sequence check fails where there are two identical frequencies at the last frequency
extracted. For example, consider a system with the following natural frequencies:
If you only ask for the first four natural frequencies, a Sturm sequence failure occurs because
there are five frequencies that exist in the range between 0.0 and 4.5667 + p (where p is
0.0041). To correct this problem, you can:
Increase the frequency cutoff by the number of frequencies not found. (This number is
reported by the Sturm sequence check.)
Increase the value of Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 692) by some small amount, if the
frequency cutoff terminated the eigensolution. This usually allows the lost modes to fall into
the solution frequency range.
Fix the subspace size at 10 and rerun the job. Increasing the number of approximation
vectors improves the possibility that at least one of them contains some component of the
missing modes, allowing the vector to properly converge.
Advanced Tab
This tab is available when Modal, Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads (spectrum), Water
Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
The values on this tab rarely need to be changed.
Topics
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues.............. 707
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance ............................................................... 708
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ............................................ 708
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) ......................................................... 708
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used) ................... 709
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed) ............................. 709
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization ........................ 710
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ........................ 710
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) ............................................... 710
Frequency Array Spaces ............................................................... 710
Directive Builder
Click Directives on the Spectrum Load Cases or Static/Dynamic Combinations tabs to open
the Directive Builder dialog box and select parameters for the current load case. These
parameters are load-case-specific changes to the global parameters set for all dynamic analysis
load cases. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 653)
and Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 668).
For most analyses, the global parameters apply and you do not need to specify the
parameters on this dialog box.
Add Row
Adds a new row after the selected row.
Delete Row
Deletes the selected row.
Read From File
Reads data from an ASCII text file.
Range
Specifies a spectrum range value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Ordinate
Specifies a spectrum ordinate value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Valid formats are:
Exponents, such as 0.3003E+03, 0.3423E-03, or 0.3003E3.
Explicit multiplication or division, such as 4032.3/386, or 1.0323*12.
DLF/Spectrum Generator
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator converts spectrum time
waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor (DLF) curve. DLF data is
automatically referenced in the Spectrum Definitions tab. For more information, see
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 648).
The DLF curve can also be saved to a file and later referenced by CAESAR II as a FORCE
response spectrum curve.
Spectrum Name
Displays the name of the selected value of Spectrum Type. You can type a different name.
For UBC, ASCE7, IBC, and CFE Diseno por Sismo:
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that is generated here. A suffix
of H and V is added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. After it has
been properly entered, these names are listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be
used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
Spectrum Type
Specifies the name of the spectrum. The data from this spectrum is used to generate the DLF
curve.
UBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the 1997 Uniform
Building Code.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on UBC Figure 16-3 shown below.
Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum is to 50% of ICa across the entire period range.
Importance Factor
Specifies the seismic importance factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum
accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock spectrum. Values
range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.
For this code, the vertical shock spectrum is also multiplied by the importance factor.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
Specifies the zero period acceleration, Ca, for the site as defined in Table 16-Q. The value is
based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and ranges from 0.06 to 0.66.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
Specifies the ground acceleration at higher periods (lower frequencies), Cv, for the site as
defined in Table 16-R. The value is based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and
ranges from 0.06 to 1.92.
ASCE7
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the ASCE 7 standard.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on ASCE 7. Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (ASCE 7-2010)
is shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5.
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 9.5.2.7.1) across the entire period range.
Neither I nor R affects the vertical spectrum.
Importance Factor
Specifies the occupancy importance factor, based on the function of the structure. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum.
ASCE 7
The occupancy importance factor is I, as defined in Table 11.5. Values range from 1.0
to 1.5 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC
The occupancy importance factor is IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in
Table 1604.5. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5.
Site Coefficient Fa
Specifies the acceleration-based site coefficient Fa. This value adjusts the mapped short period
acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (Ss). Values range from 0.8 to 2.5.
ASCE 7
Fa is listed in Table 11.4-1.
IBC
Fa is listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1).
Site Coefficient Fv
Specifies the velocity-based site coefficient Fv. This value adjusts the mapped one-second
period acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped one-second period
maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Values range from 0.8 to 3.5.
ASCE 7
Fv is listed in Table 11.4-2.
IBC
Fv is listed in Table 1615.1.2(2).
Response Modification R
Specifies the response modification coefficient, R. This coefficient reflects system ductility. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are divided by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures. A value of 3.5 for piping is
common.
ASCE 7
R is defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC
R is defined in Table 1617.6 and used according to equation 16-53.
IBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the International
Building Code, 2000.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on IBC 2000, Fig. 1615.1.4 shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
IBC generally uses the same spectrum data parameters as ASCE7 (on page 715).
For group A structures, the values of the spectral ordinates a o and c are multiplied by
1.5.
Seismic Zone
Specifies the seismic zone. Select A, B, C, or D. The zones are described in Manual de Diseno
por Sismo for Mexico. The map on page 1.3.29 shows the seismic zones.
Soil Type
Specifies the soil type.
I - Hard Soil
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b 0 = 700 m/s or
modulus of rigidity 85000.
II - Medium Soil
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of
propagation which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc > Bc Tc.
III - Soft Soil
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of
propagation which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc < Bc Tc.
Structural Group
Specifies the structural group based on the degree of safety. Select A - High Safety, B -
Intermediate Safety, or C - Low Safety.
Towers and tanks are examples of group A structures requiring a high degree of
safety in their design
Increase Factor
Specifies a value for the increased factor of safety, as required by some facilities. The default
value is 1.0. This value directly multiplies the spectrum values. This value is traditionally 1.118
and should always be greater than or equal to 1.0.
Opening Time
Specifies the opening time of the relief value in milliseconds.
Number of Points
Specifies the number of points to be generated for the spectrum table. Fifteen to twenty points
are usually sufficient. These points are distributed in a cubic relationship starting at zero hertz.
Time
Specifies time waveform values in milliseconds for the points to be modeled.
Force
Specifies forces corresponding to the points on the force/time curve.
The absolute magnitude of the force is not important, but the form of the time history
loading is important. The actual maximum value of the dynamic load is taken from the force
pattern defined on the Force Sets Tab (on page 658). There can be any number of line entries in
the excitation frequency data.
Generate Spectrum
Displays the Spectrum Table Values dialog box with the force spectrum values based on
entered spectrum data.
This command is available for all values of Spectrum Type except User Defined Time History
Waveform.
Save To File
Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file. For seismic spectra, two files are
saved: horizontal (with H appended to the file name) and vertical (with V appended to
the file name). Use this command if you want to reuse the spectrum values in other
analyses. Click OK if you only want to use the values in the current analysis.
OK
Loads the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Cancel
Closes the window without loading the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Line Temperature
Specifies the stagnation condition temperature of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas
temperature upstream of the relief valve.
Pressure (abs)
Specifies the stagnation pressure of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas pressure
upstream of the relief valve. This value is the absolute pressure.
Stagnation properties can vary considerably from line properties if the gas flow
velocity in the line is high.
Methane 1.226
Propane 1.127
ID Manifold Piping
Specifies the insider diameter of the manifold if the relief exit piping runs into a manifold. Do not
enter a value if there is not a manifold.
ID Supply Header
Specifies the inside diameter of the supply header.
Topics
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas) ........................................... 728
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface....................................... 728
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit ........................................................... 729
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening .................................. 729
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing .................................... 729
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit ............... 730
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas Conditions/Subsonic
Velocity Gas Conditions ................................................................ 730
If the vent stack is hard piped to the relief valve piping, then this intermediate thrust is balanced
by tensile loads in the pipe and can be ignored.
Thrust load acts directly on valve opening. Only the valve pipe/vent stack
interface thrust acts in this
configuration.
The entire formulation for the thrust gas properties is based on an ideal gas equation of state. If
the pressures and temperatures displayed above for the gas being vented are outside of the
range where the ideal gas laws apply, then some alternate source should be sought for the
calculation of the thrust loads of the system. In addition, all three of these points should be
sufficiently clear of the gas saturation line. When the exit gas conditions become saturated, the
magnitude of the thrust load can be reduced significantly. In this case, consult the manufacturer.
If the L dimensions are significant (by several feet), then unbalanced thrust loads
acting between the elbow-elbow pairs are very similar to a water hammer load. Water hammer
pulses travel at the speed of sound in the fluid, while the fluid/atmosphere interface pulses travel
at the velocity of the flowing fluid. These unbalanced loads can cause significant piping
displacements in much shorter pipe runs. The magnitude of these loads is equivalent to the
calculated thrust and the duration may be found from the calculated fluid velocity and distance
between each elbow-elbow pair.
Analysis Results
Each type of dynamic analysis has its own procedure for producing results, but all start in the
same way:
1. Save and check the dynamic input.
2. Run the analysis.
3. The account number is requested (if accounting is active).
4. The ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented).
5. The element and system stiffness matrices are assembled.
6. Load vectors are created where appropriate.
7. The system mass matrix is generated.
From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Processing (on page 736).
Topics
Modal ............................................................................................. 733
Harmonic ....................................................................................... 734
Spectrum ....................................................................................... 735
Time History................................................................................... 735
Modal
After dynamic initialization and basic equation assembly are completed, CAESAR II opens the
Dynamic Eigensolver, which calculates natural frequencies and modes of vibration.
Each natural frequency appears as it is calculated, along with the lapsed time of the analysis.
The processor searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until
the frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff
and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The amount of time to calculate or
find these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the
cutoff settings.
Eigensolution may be canceled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes
calculated up to that point. After the last frequency is calculated, the software uses the Sturm
Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check fails, you can return to the
dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check failures are usually
satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can
review natural frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node
shapes in and animated format.
Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis.
These analyses are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At
the completion of each solution, the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the
phase angle associated with it are listed. The root results for each frequency, and the system
deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond
this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, the software
presents the frequencies. You can then select the frequencies and phase angles needed for
further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those
frequencies.
Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into:
Calculating the systems natural frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors
Pulling the corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculating the
system response for each mode of vibration
Combining the modal responses and directional components of the shock.
The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as in modal analysis.
After natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses
are calculated and combined on the modal level. After all the results are collected, the Dynamic
Output Processor appears. You can review spectral results, natural frequencies, and animated
mode shapes.
Time History
Modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration
of the system are calculated. The dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric
integration techniques for each mode at a number of successive time steps. The modal results
are then summed, yielding system responses at each time step.
The Dynamic Output Processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination)
with the maximum loads developed throughout the load application. You can also request snap-
shot cases at different load levels.
Spectrum/Modal
Harmonic
Time History
Window Commands
Open
Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file; Modal/Spectrum
results are stored in *._s files, while Time History results are stored in *._t files.
Save
Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.
Print
Prints the selected reports. To print a hard copy of the reports click File > Print. To send
reports to a file rather than the printer, click File > Save, and then type in or select the name
of the file. To change the file name for a new report, select File > Save As.
View Animation
Allows you to view animated motion. Modem and spectrum results allow animation of the
mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system
response to the force-time profile.
Input
Displays the Piping Input window.
Open a Job
Opens a different job for output review.
To review an output from a different job, click Open and browse for the output file.
Modal and Spectrum results are stored in *._s files. Time History results are stored
in *._t files.
Click Edit 2-line Report Title and the following dialog box appears.
These two lines will be added to the top of each report page. Enter the report title, and click OK.
Now click Edit Load Case Labels and the following dialog box appears.
Here you can change the names of the load cases as they appear in the reports. Click OK to
close, and then click Done.
Here you can scroll through the various load cases. Click OK to close.
View Reports
Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. Scroll through the reports where
necessary. See Report Types (on page 741) for a list of available reports.
Print
Prints the selected report(s).
Report Types
Two types of reports are available from the Dynamic Output window: reports that are
associated with specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column), and
reports that are not associated with specific load cases (the General Results in the right
column).
For modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank.
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history
displacement solution. The report options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments, and
stresses.
Displacements
Provides the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. The summing methodology for
Spectral analysis results in all positive displacements. For time history analysis, the results
include the appllicable sign.
The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated because the
application of the dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values
are positive. The direction of the displacement is indeterminate. For example, there is a
tendency for the system to oscillate because of the potential energy stored after undergoing
some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the movement of
the earth.
Restraints
Provides the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown below.
NODE FX
5 716
649
2X(1)
The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the
dynamic event. The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the
load. The third line for each node tells the mode and loading that was responsible for the
maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes.
The mode identification line is broken down as follows:
2 X (1)
For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal
component (of the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction
component (either the first support motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis, or
the first force set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report
enables you to know if there is a problem. If there is a problem, it enables you to identify which
mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem.
If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudo-static (seismic anchor movement)
contribution of the loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the
component shows up as an (M), it indicates a missing mass contribution. A typical restraint
report is shown below.
Local Forces
Provides elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c
coordinate system is defined below.
For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:
a is along the element axis (for example, perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is a XY, unless a is vertical and then b is along the X axis
c is a Xb.
For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the bend
c is a Xb.
For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the intersection
c is a Xb.
Global Forces
Contains information identical to information provided for Local Forces (on page 743), except
that it is oriented along the global X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report is shown below.
Stresses
Contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses, as well as in-plane and out-
of-plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode and modal maximum data. A
typical report is shown below.
Forces/Stresses
Summarizes the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This report contains
maximum responses, the calculated stress, and the calculated stress allowable.
Cumulative Usage
Shows on an element-by-element basis the impact of each load case on the total fatigue
allowable and the cumulative impact of all simultaneously-selected load cases. This report is
available only for one or more fatigue stress types. Only one report is generated, regardless of
the number of selected fatigue load cases. If the total usage factor exceeds 1.0; it implies fatigue
failure under that loading condition.
Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second. The period
is reported in seconds.
Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set
to 1.0, and all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.
Dynamic Input
Lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.
Mass Model
Shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should
show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values must be
investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long,
straight runs of pipe.
The mass lumping report, shown below is very uniform in distribution, and should produce a
good dynamic solution. CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.
Input Echo
The Input Echo option displays the Input Listing Options dialog box and allows you to select
which portions of the input are reported in this output format. All basic element data (geometry),
operating conditions, material properties, boundary conditions, and report formatting are
available:
Select what you want to print or view, and then click OK.
Harmonic
Time History
The first time a CAESAR II file is created, the HTML file is opened with your default internet
browser. The software displays a message requesting permission to download a control from
Tech Soft 3D. Click Yes to allow the download, after which the image displays. After the model
appears, right-click the model to view the available options such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or
different render modes. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
You can click View Animation to view graphic animation of the displacement
solution.
Static animation graphics has all the standard model projection and motion toolbar commands.
The load case can be selected from the drop-down list. The title consists of the load case name
followed by the file name, and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.
The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls
the speed of the movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.
We recommend you use the Deflected Shape command button on the 3D/HOOPS
Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to
3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
window by clicking View Animation . The system displays in its default isometric state.
The animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier that allow single line
and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases
corresponding to the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title
shows the currently selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from
the Action menu.
Animated graphics for each analyzed load case can be saved to an HTML file for later
presentation.
If the Element Info dialog box is active, the highlighted element information is updated to
correspond to the current time step.
You can enable the node numbers; however, we recommend node numbering be disabled
when using animation. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for
every position in the system. This creates a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the
animation.
SECTION 12
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > Generate Stress Isometrics
In This Section
Add input feature information ........................................................ 758
Add output feature information ...................................................... 759
Add custom annotations for nodal features ................................... 759
Add custom annotations for elemental features ............................ 760
Set project information ................................................................... 760
Configure annotation preferences ................................................. 761
Configure isometric drawing split points ........................................ 761
Create a drawing using the default style ....................................... 763
Create a drawing using an existing style ....................................... 764
Create a drawing using a new style ............................................... 765
Create and save an annotation template....................................... 767
Apply a Template ........................................................................... 767
Stress Isometric Tutorials .............................................................. 768
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
4. Click the Feature list to select an input feature.
The software shows the nodes associated to the feature or the model parameters within the
Feature list.
5. Select check boxes in the Select column to view the feature information on the associated
node in the 3D model. Select the check box again to clear the selection.
6. Similarly, you can select other input features in the Feature list to view nodes or elements
associated to the selected features.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected input information.
The software makes the nodes and model parameters available for selection only when you
use the input feature to analyze the model.
The software displays the model parameters, such as Diameter, Insulation Thickness, and
Wall Thickness, in the drawing only when there is a change in these parameters.
To select all the nodes in the list, select first check box, press SHIFT, and then select the
last check box in the list.
To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display,
area and then press DELETE.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
The Input tab is active by default.
4. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used to analyze the model. Output
features are available for selection only if you have analyzed the piping model. If you have
not analyzed the model, click Generate Output from the Output tab.
5. Click Load Cases to select a load case.
The results generated for the load case are listed in the Results box.
6. Select the result type you want, and then select the nodes to include the information for
annotation.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected output
information.
The Node number, Node Name, and Description columns display information entered in
CAESAR II and cannot be edited.
The Load Cases list displays load cases created for static analysis only.
To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display
area, and then press DELETE.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Elemental Annotations tab to view a list of model elements.
5. To add a comment for an element, click the associated cell in the User Annotations
column, and then type your comment.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Project Attributes tab.
5. Type values for each attribute in the Attribute Value column.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Settings tab to view the list of features.
5. Click TextBox Shape list associated to a feature, and then select a text box shape for the
feature.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotation preferences.
The text box shapes you select for different features are visible only in the drawing.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Split tab.
5. In the Split column, select the nodes at which to start new isometric drawings.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box.
4. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to create drawings.
The Drawings dialog box displays a list of drawings created for the piping model.
5. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
The drawings created using the default style are saved in the same folder as the piping
model.
The unit system used in creating the pipe model is used in the drawing, by default.
You cannot make any changes to the default drawing style.
1A drawing style is a set a parameters that you define to represent your piping system drawing.
These parameters typically include drawing format, drawing size, drawing frame, units, and
options to display other information like materials list, weld list, and so on.
The Status Message dialog box shows the number of files and drawings created for the
model, and reports the errors generated during creation of the drawing.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing on the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box.
4. Select Use Existing Style, and then click OK to open the Select Existing Style dialog box.
5. To select an isometric directory2 for your project, click Browse, and then select the root
directory.
6. To select an isometric project3, click Browse, and then select a project.
2 An isometric directory is the root folder for files associated to a style. An isometric directory
can contain many projects.
3 You create isometric projects in an isometric directory. Isometric projects contain different
drawing styles.
7. To select an isometric style, click Browse, and then select the style you want to apply.
When you select the directory, project, and style, the software activates the Create Drawing
option.
8. Click Create Drawing to open the Drawings dialog box.
9. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
You must follow the standard folder structure to save the project file and the styles.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box.
4. Select Create New Style, and then click OK to open the Isometric Style Configuration
dialog box.
5. To the right of Create New Isometric Directory, click Browse to select an empty folder, or
create a new folder.
6. Under Create New Isometric Directory, click Create to generate the required folder
structure and files.
7. To select a drawing frame4, click Browse and select a drawing frame in the Open Drawing
Frame Template dialog box.
8. Similarly, to specify a folder to save your drawings in Drawing Path, click Browse and
select a folder.
9. Select Units to select a unit system for your drawing.
10. Select Drawing Size to select a size for the drawing.
11. Click Create Drawing to save the style you created and generate drawing files.
12. On the Drawings dialog box, select the files you want to view, and then click View to open
the drawings in your default viewer.
4 Drawing frames are the backing sheets used to create your drawing. By default, different types
of drawing frames are generated when you create a new style.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select Edit Stress Annotations in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane.
4. Select the Input tab.
5. From the Feature list, select an input feature that you want to include in your template.
6. To select all the nodes or elements, press SHIFT, and then select the first and the last
check box of the list.
7. Similarly, select all the nodes and elements of other input features that you want to include
in your template.
8. To define annotation preferences for your template, click the Settings tab and select text
box shapes for the input features.
9. Select StressIso > Save Template to open the Save Annotation Template dialog box.
10. On the Save Annotation Template dialog box, type a file name and then click Save to save
the template.
Apply a Template
You can apply an existing template to a new piping model. All the selections made while
creating a template are applied to the new model along with the annotation preferences. You
can apply a template to a piping model only if a stress Iso file associated to the model does not
already exist. To apply an annotation template to a new model.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Apply Template to open the Open Annotation Template dialog box.
4. Select the template file to use, and then click Open to apply the template.
5. To clear all annotations, select StressIso > Reset Annotation.
6. To save the applied annotations, select StressIso > Save Annotation.
Topics
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style 768
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features ........... 771
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure annotations preferences 774
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template ..................... 777
Topics
Open an existing CAESAR II file ................................................... 769
Create a drawing using the default style ....................................... 770
5. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the file in the C2Isogen
module.
Topics
Add annotations for input features ................................................. 771
Add annotations for output features .............................................. 772
4. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
5. Select Edit Stress Annotations from the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane. By default, the pane opens the Input tab.
6. The Feature list displays all the input features available in CAESAR II. Depending on the
feature you select, the software displays a list of nodes associated to the feature.
Click the check boxes in the Select column if you want to include the information associated
to the node or element in your drawing. For example, select Node Numbers in the Feature
list, and then select nodes 110 and 115. Annotations for the selected node numbers are
added to the model and are visible in the display area.
2. The Load Cases list displays a list of load cases used in the analysis. The Results box lists
results generated for each load case. You can view a list of nodes or elements for each
result set, and then select nodes and elements that you want to annotate. Let us consider
Load Case 3, and then select elements 75-80 and 110-115 for Stress. You can now view
the annotations for the selected elements in the display area.
Topics
Adding custom annotations ........................................................... 774
Configuring annotation preferences .............................................. 775
1. Similarly, select Elemental Annotations tab to view the list of elements in the model and
add your remarks in the User Annotation cell associated to the element you want to
annotate. Here we add a note for element 75-80.
2. Click the User Annotations cell associated to element 75-80 and type This is a
custom annotation for element 75-80.
The custom annotations you add are not shown in the display area and can be viewed only
in the drawing.
2. Let us select Circle for Node Numbers, No Box for Output Stress Data, and Filleted
Rectangle for Nodal Annotations and Elemental Annotations.
You cannot view these changes in the display area, the changes you made are updated
when you create a drawing.
Topics
Create a template .......................................................................... 777
Apply a template ............................................................................ 779
Create a template
This tutorial shows you how to create and save a stress Iso annotation template. For this
tutorial, open RELIEF.C2 from the CAESAR II Examples folder.
To create a template:
1. Select Edit Stress Annotations on the Isometric Tools toobar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane.
You can only include the input features in a template. Select all the nodes listed
for that feature to include an input feature in a template.
2. Click the Feature list. Select a feature, and then select all the nodes listed for the feature.
For example, select all the nodes listed for the Restraint/Hanger Types feature.
3. Similarly, select all the nodes or elements of other input features that you want to include.
4. Select Settings tab to specify a text box shape for the input feature you selected in the
earlier part of this tutorial. Let us select Filleted Rectangle for the Restraint/hanger types
feature.
5. Select StressIso > Save Template to save your selections as a template. A template file
with .ist extension is saved in the model folder.
Apply a template
After you create and save a template, you can apply this template to your piping models. When
you select all the nodes of a feature to create a template, that input feature gets selected when
you apply the template to a new piping model. You can clear the selections if you do not want to
display all the nodes or elements of the input feature included in a template.
This part of the tutorial shows you how to apply a saved template to a piping model. You can
apply a template to a piping model only if the model is not already annotated and the stress Iso
file (.iso) associated to the model does not exist.
To apply a template to a new model:
1. Open CAESAR II.
2. Select File > Open.
3. In the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side to open the Examples
folder.
4. Select JACKET.C2 from the file list, and then click Open.
5. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
6. Select StressIso > Apply Annotation, and then select a template file.
7. Select StressIso > Annotation to view the selections you made while creating the template
in the display area.
The previous figure shows that all the nodes listed under Restraint/Hanger types are selected
in the new model.
NEMA SM23
Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. For more information, NEMA SM23
(Steam Turbines) (on page 863).
API 610
Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. For more information, see API 610 (Centrifugal
Pumps) (on page 870).
API 617
Evaluates piping loads on compressors. For more information, see API 617 (Centrifugal
Compressors) (on page 879).
API 661
Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. For more information, see API 661
(Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) (on page 886).
HEI Standard
Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters. For more information, see HEI Standard (on
page 892).
API 560
Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. For more information, see API 560 (Fired Heaters
for General Refinery Services) (on page 895).
In This Section
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ..................................... 782
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ............................................... 787
WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses .................. 795
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ............................................. 826
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) ........................ 845
Expansion Joint Rating .................................................................. 850
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ...................................................... 855
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)...................................................... 863
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ......................................................... 870
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ............................................... 879
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ......................................... 886
HEI Standard .................................................................................. 892
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ................. 895
Enter the necessary problem-specific data in the input fields, and then click Run Analysis to
run the analysis. After processing is complete, stress intensification factors are reported for a
range of different configuration values on the Output tab, as shown below.
Topics
Intersection Type ........................................................................... 784
Piping Code ID ............................................................................... 784
Header Pipe Outside Diameter ...................................................... 785
Header Pipe Wall Thickness ......................................................... 785
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter ...................................................... 785
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness .......................................................... 785
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection ....................................... 786
Pad Thickness ............................................................................... 786
Intersection Crotch Radius ............................................................ 786
Intersection Crotch Thickness ....................................................... 786
Extrusion Crotch Radius ................................................................ 786
Weld Type ...................................................................................... 787
Ferritic Material .............................................................................. 787
Use Notes 6, 9, 10 ......................................................................... 787
Meets 3673.2b Notes 10, 11 ......................................................... 787
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 787
Intersection Type
Specifies the intersection type to be reviewed. After you click Run Analysis , the software
generates tables that show the relationship between the SIFs for the entered piping code, WRC
329, ASME III (NC and ND), and Schneider recommendations. You can choose from the
following:
Reinforced Fabricated Tee
Unreinforced Fabricated Tee
Welding Tee
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Extruded Welding Tee
Bonney Forge Sweepolet
Bonney Forge Latrolet
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolet
Piping Code ID
Specifies the piping code ID. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1
3 - B31.3
4 - B31.4
5 - B31.5
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
10 - B31.9
11 - B31.4 Chapter XI
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2
13 - ASME Sect.III, Class 3
14 - Navy 505 (1984)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
19 - Swedish Method 2, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
20 - B31.1 (1967)
21 - Stoomwezen
22 - RCC-M C
23 - RCC-M D
24 - CODETI
25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
26 - FDBR
27 - BS 7159
28 - UKOOA
29 - IGE/TD/12
30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
32 - EN-13480
33 - GPTC/Z380
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
36 - ISO-14692
37 - HPGSL
38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the pad on the reinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the thickness of a pad is limited to a thickness less
than 1.5 times the nominal thickness of the fitting. This factor does not apply in BS806 or Z6662,
and is 2.5 in the Swedish piping code.
This option displays only for reinforced fabricated tees.
Weld Type
Specifies the weld type.
As Welded
This is an unfinished weld.
Finished/Ground Flush
The weld is ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF is 1.0.
Ferritic Material
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed on
the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select ASME NC
and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Use Notes 6, 9, 10
Meets 3673.2b Notes 10, 11
Design Temperature
Specifies the system highest temperature. This value is required for piping codes ASME NC
and ASME ND to calculate material properties.
The Bend Stress Intensification Factors window consists of two input tabs--the Bend tab (on
page 789) and the Trunnion tab (on page 792).
In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs
for a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for the trunnion-related input fields
on the Trunnion tab.
Bend Tab
Topics
Piping Code ID ............................................................................... 789
Pipe Outside Diameter................................................................... 790
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe ................................................... 790
Wall Thickness of Bend ................................................................. 790
Bend Radius .................................................................................. 791
Bend Angle (Degrees) ................................................................... 791
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA) ........ 791
Number of Cuts .............................................................................. 791
Seam Welded ................................................................................ 791
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA) .......................... 792
Elastic Modulus .............................................................................. 792
Pressure Stiffening ........................................................................ 792
Piping Code ID
Identifies the piping code. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1
3 - B31.3
4 - B31.4
5 - B31.5
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
10 - B31.9
11 - B31.4 Chapter XI
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2
13 - ASME Sect.III, Class 3
14 - Navy 505 (1984)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
19 - Swedish Method 2, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
20 - B31.1 (1967)
21 - Stoomwezen
22 - RCC-M C
23 - RCC-M D
24 - CODETI
25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
26 - FDBR
27 - BS 7159
28 - UKOOA
29 - IGE/TD/12
30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
32 - EN-13480
33 - GPTC/Z380
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
36 - ISO-14692
37 - HPGSL
38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
h = (Tn)(R) / (ry)
Bend Radius
Specify the radius of the bend. The distance from the arc center to the centerline of the bend
curvature.
Number of Cuts
Specifies the number of cuts in the miter bend.
If only a single cut is entered, then the bend is always considered to be a widely spaced mitered
bend. For multi-cut miters, CASEAR II uses the radius and the number of cuts to determine if
the miter is closely or widely spaced.
Seam Welded
Indicates when straight pipes are seam welded and affects the SIF calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication. This option is only available when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Elastic Modulus
Identifies the cold modulus of elasticity. Used with the pressure stiffening calculation. This is an
optional entry.
Pressure Stiffening
Controls the pressure stiffening effects on elbows. Pressure stiffening has its most significant
effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment (compressors). Including
pressure stiffening where it is not included by default draws more of the system moment to the
nozzle adjacent to the bend.
This option is controlled using the CAESAR II setup file but is most commonly left to the default
condition. The default is different for each piping code because some codes mention pressure
stiffening explicitly, while others do not. Available options are:
Yes
Include pressure stiffening.
No
Remove pressure stiffening.
Default
Follow the piping code default.
Trunnion Tab
There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits
come directly from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano.
t/T 0.2 and t/T 2.0
D/T 20 and D/T 60
d/D 0.3 and d/D 0.8
Where:
t = Wall thickness of the trunnion
T = Wall thickness of the bend
d = Outside diameter of the trunnion
D = Outside diameter of the bend
To review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter
values for the trunnion-related input fields on the Trunnion tab.
Topics
Outside Diameter ........................................................................... 793
Wall Thickness............................................................................... 793
Stress Concentration Factor .......................................................... 793
Stress Concentrations and Intensification ..................................... 793
Outside Diameter
Specifies the staunchion outside diameter. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend. If you define Staunchion OD, you must also
define Wall Thickness.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs is from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2)is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.
Wall Thickness
Designates the staunchion wall thickness. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs are from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.
The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the stress concentration factor. This factor is
the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (or an elbow) and the nominal local
computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only exist in a very small volume of
material, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part.
Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or
other anomalies, the peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius
is provided which is at least t/2, and where (t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak
stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds, sockets, and where no transition
radius is provided, the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.
If you enter a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the
elbow), and you do not enter a stress concentration factor, CAESAR II assumes a stress
concentration factor of 2.0.
The module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job Explorer lists
each analysis contained in the job, sorted by analysis type: WRC-107 (537) or WRC-
297/PD5500. The items in the list are created by combining the item description and the item
number, which can be subsequently changed in the data input window. The Loads pane, which
contains a data input grid, displays the selected analysis type.
The following commands are available on the WRC 107/297 toolbar.
Starts the analysis and displays the results in the WRC 107/297 window.
Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to
Microsoft Word.
To add a new analysis to the job, click the corresponding analysis type, WRC 107 (537) or WRC
297 (PD5500), on the toolbar. You can remove an analysis from the job by selecting it in the
Job Explorer, and then clicking Delete Selected Items on the toolbar. To display an
analysis in the Loads pane, select it from the list in the Job Explorer.
The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the Analysis and Drawing tabs
on the right side of the Loads pane. The data that displays on both of these tabs automatically
updates after each change in the Loads pane, even if they are hidden.
The following example shows a sample analysis report.
Nozzle curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover typical applications of nozzles in vessels or
piping. If any of the interpolation parameters fall outside the limits of the available curves,
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
Topics
WRC Bulletin 107(537) .................................................................. 797
WRC Bulletin 297 .......................................................................... 817
WRC 107 Module Geometry for a Sphere WRC 107 Axis Convention for a Cylinder
The WRC 107/537 convention system has the benefit of being independent of the
orientation of the vessel. All loads and moments are defined locally with respect to the
vessel and the nozzle.
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:
P - Radial load
VC - Circumferential shear load
VL - Longitudinal shear load
MC - Circumferential moment
ML - Longitudinal moment
MT - Torsional moment
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a spherical vessel:
P - Radial load
V1 - Shear load from points B to A
V2 - Shear load from points D to C
M1 - Moment from points A to B
M2 - Moment from points D to C
MT - Torsional moment
WRC 107 is commonly used to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a
reinforcing pad. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be
estimated by considering a solid plug with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the
reinforcing pad, subjected to the same nozzle loading.
Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle-vessel
junction, always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not
exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types. Refer to the WRC 107
bulletin directory for this information.
Using WRC 107 is not recommended when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in
the WRC 107 data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the
figure numbers for the curves accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. Check
these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to become familiar with the accuracy of the
stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or past
the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.
P is the design pressure of the system. Pm is the general membrane stress due to internal
pressure removed from discontinuities and can be estimated for the vessel wall from the
expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop component.
The allowable for Pm is kSmh, where Smh is the allowable stress intensity. The value of k can be
taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code, which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for
sustained plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads. Pl is the local membrane stress at
the junction due to the sustained piping loads. Pb is the local bending stress (and is zero at the
nozzle to vessel connections according to Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code). Q is the
secondary stress due to thermal expansion piping loads or the bending stress due to internal
pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allowable stress intensity for the second stress
combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code. Smh is the hot stress
intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q are calculated by WRC 107.
The third combination defines the range of the stress intensity, and its allowable is limited to
1.5(Smc+Smh).
A summation is provided automatically following the WRC 107 analysis and displays on the
Drawing window within the main WRC 107/297 window. The calculation provides a comparison
of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding Pass/Fail ruling.
Failed items display in red.
Home/Nozzle Tab
Topics
Item Number .................................................................................. 801
Description ..................................................................................... 801
Analysis Type ................................................................................ 801
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 801
Nozzle Node .................................................................................. 801
Attachment Type............................................................................ 801
Fill Type ......................................................................................... 802
Wall Thickness............................................................................... 802
Corrosion Allowance ...................................................................... 802
Nozzle Material .............................................................................. 802
Nozzle SCF Option ........................................................................ 803
Reinforcing Pad ............................................................................. 803
Item Number
Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers
that start at one and increase sequentially.
Description
Enter an alphanumeric description for the nozzle or attachment. The description can be up
to 15 characters long. The description is used in results output and in any error displays.
Analysis Type
Select WRC 107/537 to indicate the nozzle-vessel junction analysis type.
Design Temperature
Enter the operating temperature of the vessel. The temperature is used to determine the
allowable stress of the material from the material database. If the temperature is changed,
the allowable stress of the material at operating temperature changes accordingly.
Nozzle Node
Enter the nozzle node number used in your piping model. This entry is required to access
calculated loads from the static output.
Attachment Type
Select the type of attachment. Select Round for a typical pipe nozzle. Select Square for an
attachment such as square vessel support lug. Select Rectangle for an attachment such as
rectangular vessel support lug. See WRC Bulletin 107 for examples. Each selection displays
additional fields below it that are specific to the attachment type.
If the attachment in question is a pipe nozzle then select Round. WRC 107 also analyzes
other load bearing attachments such as a square or rectangle. An example of a rectangular
attachment is a vessel support lug. Illustrations of these attachments can be seen in WRC
Bulletin 107.
Diameter Basis
Select the type of diameter to use for the nozzle. Select ID for the inside diameter. Select
OD for the outside diameter.
Diameter
Enter the diameter of the nozzle, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent
with the selection in Diameter Basis (on page 802).
Fill Type
Select Hollow for a hollow attachment and select Solid for a solid attachment. Round-
hollow attachments are converted to round-solid attachments for the cylinder-to-cylinder
analysis. Round-hollow attachments are analyzed on spherical vessels. Rectangular
attachments on spherical shells cannot be analyzed using this method.
Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the nozzle wall at the shell-to-nozzle junction, in the displayed units.
Include any allowances for mill tolerance. For example, for a 12.5% mill tolerance, multiply
the nozzle wall thickness by 0.875 and enter that value. WRC 107/537 analysis uses the
wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside
diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Nozzle Material
Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code.
c. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material.
Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material
specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in
the material database with a matching name.
Reinforcing Pad
Select True when the nozzle has a pad. Select False if there is no pad.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. For WRC 107/537 analysis, the vessel thickness
includes the pad thickness.
Appendix B of the WRC 107 bulletin. Enter the fillet radius value in Fillet Radius
Between Vessel and Pad. A value of 0 sets Kn and Kb to 1.0.
Kn/Kb - The software uses the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb in a fatigue
analysis. Enter the Kn and Kb values in Nozzle Kn and Nozzle Kb.
Vessel Tab
Topics
Vessel Node .................................................................................. 804
Vessel Type ................................................................................... 804
Diameter Basis .............................................................................. 804
Diameter ........................................................................................ 804
Wall Thickness............................................................................... 804
Corrosion Allowance ...................................................................... 804
Vessel Material .............................................................................. 805
Vessel Node
Enter the node number that corresponds to the vessel node in your model. Since the
vessel(s) may or may not be modeled in the analysis, this value is optional and is recorded
for your reference only.
Vessel Type
Select the type of vessel, either Cylindrical or Spherical.
Diameter Basis
Select the type of diameter to use for the vessel. Select ID for the inside diameter and OD
for the outside diameter.
Diameter
Enter the diameter of the pressure vessel in the displayed units. The diameter should be
consistent with the selection in Diameter Basis (on page 804).
Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pressure vessel wall, in the displayed units. This thickness is
measured at the intersection of the nozzle and the vessel.
You can type the wall thickness as an equation to account for mill tolerance. For
example, if the mill tolerance is 12.5%, type "<vessel wall thickness value> * 0.875".
The software modifies this value if a value for Corrosion Allowance is defined.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside
diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Vessel Material
Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code.
Loads Tab
Topics
Internal Pressure ........................................................................... 805
Occasional Pressure...................................................................... 805
Include Pressure Thrust ................................................................ 806
Convention System........................................................................ 806
Loads ............................................................................................. 808
Z-Axis Vertical ................................................................................ 812
Internal Pressure
Enter the system internal design pressure (P). WRC 107/537 only analyzes internal
pressure and the value must be positive. The pressure stress equations used are:
Longitudinal Stress = Pressure * ri2 / (ro2 - ri2)
Hoop Stress = 2.0 * Longitudinal Stress
For the spherical case, the membrane stress due to internal pressure uses the Lam
equation to calculate the stress at both the upper and lower surfaces of the vessel at the
edge of the attachment.
Occasional Pressure
Enter the difference between the peak pressure of the system and Internal Pressure (on
page 805) (the system design pressure). The value must be positive. The value is added to
the system design pressure to calculate the primary membrane stress due to occasional
loads.
This value is only available when WRC 107/537 is selected for Analysis Type on the
Home/Nozzle tab.
For more information on pressure thrust, see the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
http://www.coade.com/Uploads/mechanical-engineering-news/jul01.pdf.
Convention System
Select WRC 107 to define local forces and moments according to WRC 107 conventions. Select
Global to define local forces and moments in global coordinates. The selected convention is
applied to the vessel, the nozzle, and the loads.
For both conventions, enter values for Sustained Loads, Expansion Loads, and Occasional
Loads. The software compares stress intensities to allowable stresses based on the value for
Vessel Material selected on the Vessel tab. When you switch convention systems, the software
converts loads from one system to the other.
WRC 107/537 Load Conventions
Global Load and Direction Conventions
P - Radial load
VC - Circumferential shear load
VL - Longitudinal shear load
MC - Circumferential moment
ML - Longitudinal moment
MT - Torsional moment
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a spherical vessel:
P - Radial load
V1 - Shear load from points B to A
V2 - Shear load from points D to C
M1 - Moment from points A to B
M2 - Moment from points D to C
MT - Torsional moment
The direction of a
spherical vessel is from
points B to A
The software uses these direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments from the
global convention into the traditional WRC107 convention.
Loads
Enter the forces and moments acting on the nozzle or attachment. A stress summation is
performed and stress intensities are checked based on the different load cases.
The type of loads and the available load sets depend on the Convention System selection
(WRC 107 or Global).
Load Sets
When WRC 107 is selected for Analysis Type, you can enter values in the following load
sets:
Sustained Loads - (SUS) Primary loads, typically weight + pressure + forces.
Expansion Loads - (EXP) Secondary thermal expansion loads.
Occasional Loads - (OCC) Irregularly occurring loads such as wind loads, seismic
loads, and water hammer.
The software plots one set of loads at a time and only that set can have values.
For example, to calculate Expansion Loads, values for Sustained Loads and Occasional
Loads must be cleared.
Types of Loads
When WRC 107 is selected for Convention System, the following forces and moments are
entered:
Radial Load P (on page 809)
Longitudinal Shear VL (on page 810)
Circumferential Shear VC (on page 810)
Torsional Moment MT (on page 811)
Circumferential Moment MC (on page 811)
Longitudinal Moment ML (on page 812)
When Global is selected for Convention System, forces and moments are entered as X, Y,
and Z vector components with respect to the global coordinate system: Global Force Fx,
Global Force Fy, Global Force Fz, Global Moment Mx, Global Moment My, and Global
Moment Mz.
Radial Load P
Enter the radial load P on the nozzle or attachment. Positive load tries to "push" the nozzle
while a negative load tries to "pull" the nozzle. The software does not account for the effect
of pressure thrust when loads are entered in the WRC convention, so add the appropriate
portion of thrust load with the radial load. Use the conventions below.
Longitudinal Shear VL
Enter the longitudinal shear load VL. If the vessel is spherical then enter the shear load V1
from B to A. Use the conventions below.
Circumferential Shear VC
Enter the circumferential shear load VC. If the vessel is spherical then enter the shear load
V2 from D to C. Use the conventions below.
Torsional Moment MT
Enter the torsional moment MT. Use the conventions below.
Circumferential Moment MC
Enter the circumferential moment MC. If the vessel is spherical then enter the moment M1
about the B-axis. Use the conventions below.
Longitudinal Moment ML
Enter the longitudinal moment ML. If the vessel is spherical then enter the moment M2
about the C-axis. Use the conventions below.
Z-Axis Vertical
Select True if the Z-axis is vertical for the Global convention system.
Options Tab
Topics
WRC-107 Version .......................................................................... 812
Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2.................................... 813
Compute Pressure Stress per WRC-368 (No Ext Loads) ............. 813
Base Hoop Stress On .................................................................... 813
WRC-107 Version
Select a version of the WRC 107/537 bulletin. Select August 1965, March 1979, or March
1979 Use B1 and B2.
March 1979 Use B1 and B2 is likely to be the most accurate option. It typically
produces slightly higher stresses than the other versions. These stresses more closely
match theoretical results. The stress computation method was also adjusted to compute B1
and B2 maximum stresses that do not lie on the stress points A, B, C, or D. This is referred
to as calculation of the off-angle maximums.
Peak stress intensity due to external loads is included in the analysis when values are
entered in Nozzle Kn and Nozzle Kb.
For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option or enter values in Nozzle Kn and
Nozzle Kb.
The software does not perform the complete fatigue analysis of Section VIII Div.2
Appendix 4 and 5 rules. Instead, the value of peak stress intensity is reported for fatigue
effect comparison. For more information, see the June 2000 COADE newsletter
http://www.coade.com/Uploads/mechanical-engineering-news/jul01.pdf.
Using WRC 368 with WRC 107/297 is not accurate for calculating the combined stress
from pressure and external loads. So, this option is only available when the attachment
type is round and when no external loads are specified.
For more information on WRC 368 and pressure thrust, see Modeling of Internal
Pressure and Thrust Loads on Nozzles Using WRC-368 in the July 2001 COADE
Newsletter http://www.coade.com/Uploads/mechanical-engineering-news/jul01.pdf.
Displays properties for the selected material. You can modify some properties. Doing so only
changes the properties locally. It does not modify the database.
Properties available in this dialog box vary depending on the command used.
Material Name
Displays the ASME code material specification for the selected item.
Enter the yield stress for the material at the operating temperature. You can find these
values in the ASME Code, Section 2 Part D; they are not stored in the material database. If
the yield stress at operating temperature is significantly different than the yield stress at
ambient temperature, and if some of the items in the model make use of yield stress, such
as vessel legs, then you should carefully check and enter this value.
When you select a material from the material database, the software looks up the material's
operating yield stress in the yield stress database and automatically fills in this value. If there
are duplicate entries in the yield stress database, then the software displays a message.
You can then select from among the duplicates.
Enter the allowable stress for the element material at operating temperature. The operating
temperature for most vessels is defined to be the same as the design metal temperature for
the internal pressure. You can find this value in the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table
1A, 1B, and 3.
If you enter a valid material name in Material Input, the software searches its database and
determines the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature, and populates this
field.
The software also determines the allowable stress when you select a material
name from the Material Selection window.
Enter the allowable stress for the element material at ambient temperature. The ambient
temperature for most vessels will be 70 F, 100 F, or 30 C. You can find this value in the
ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
The software also determines the allowable stress when you select a material
name from the Material Selection window.
Enter the nominal density of the material. The software uses this value to calculate
component weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is 0.2830 lbs/in 3.
Enter the external pressure curve or chart name to calculate the B value for all external
pressure and buckling calculations. It is important that you enter the name correctly. If you
enter a valid material name in the Material Input field, the software searches its database
and determines the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature.
UCS-66 Curve
Select one of the following:
Curve A - D - UCS-66 curves
Not a Carbon Steel
By default, the material database selects the non-normalized curve. Select Is the
Material Normalized? or click Normalized to use the normalized curve for ASME material.
Adjust the curve if you are using normalized material produced to fine grain practice.
The thermal expansion reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of
data set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TE-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many
materials have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is
supplied in the ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as
zero. If this happens, you will need to enter in an appropriate value. Thermal expansion
coefficients are important especially if you are analyzing a heat exchanger.
Opens the Yield Stress Record dialog box, which displays yield stress details of the
selected material.
Click to use the ASME normalized curve for the material. For more information, see UCS-66
Curve.
Select one of the following:
Curve A - D - UCS-66 curves
Impact Tested - AM 218.1 impact test exemption curve
Not a Carbon Steel
By default, the material database selects the non-normalized curve. Select Is the
Material Normalized? or click Normalized to use the normalized curve for ASME material.
Adjust the curve if you are using normalized material produced to fine grain practice.
The following is from Section VIII Division 1, Figure UCS-66, ed. 2011a Addenda:
a. Material Curve A
i. All carbon and all low alloy steel plates, structural shapes, and bars not listed in
Curves B, C, and D below.
ii. SA-216 Grades WCB and WCC if normalized and tempered, or water-quenched
and tempered; SA-217 Grade WC6 if normalized and tempered, or water-quenched
and tempered.
b. Material Curve B
i. SA-216 Grade WCA if normalized and tempered or water-quenched and tempered
SA-216 Grades WCB and WCC for thicknesses not exceeding 2 in. (50 mm), if
produced to fine grain practice and water-quenched and tempered.
SA-217 Grade WC9 if normalized and tempered
SA 285 Grades A and B
SA 414 Grade A
SA-515 Grade 60
SA-516 Grades 65 and 70 if not normalized
SA-612 if not normalized
SA/EN Grade B if not normalized
SA/EN 10028-2 Grades P235GH, P265GH, and P295GH as rolled
SA/AS 1548 Grades PT430NR and PT460NR
ii. Except for cast steels, all materials of Curve A if produced to fine grain practice and
normalized which are not listed in Curves C and D below;
iii. All pipe, fittings, forgings, and tubing not listed for Curves C and D below;
iv. Parts permitted under UG-11 shall be included in Curve B even when fabricated
from plate that otherwise would be assigned to a different curve.
c. Material Curve C
i. SA 182 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
SA 302 Grades C and D
SA 336 Grades F21 and F22 if normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and
tempered
SA 387 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and
tempered
SA 442 Grades 55 <= 1 in. if not to fine grain practice and normalized
SA 516 Grades 55 and 60 if not normalized
SA 533 Grades B and C SA 662 Grade A
ii. All materials listed in 2(a) and 2(c) or Curve B if produced to fine grain practice and
normalized, normalized and tempered, or liquid-quenched and tempered as
permitted in the material specification, and not listed for Curve D below.
d. Material Curve D
SA 203
SA 508 Grade 1
SA 516 if normalized, or quenched and tempered
SA 524 Classes 1 and 2
SA 537 Classes 1, 2, and 3
SA 612 if normalized
SA 662 if normalized
SA 738 Grade A
SA 738 Grade A with Cb and V deliberately added in accordance with the provisions of
the material specification, not colder than -20F (-29C)
SA 738 Grade B not colder than -20F (-29C)
SA/AS 1548 Grades PT430N and PT460N
SA/EN 10028-2 Grades P235GH, P265GH, and P295GH if normalized
SA/EN 10028-3 Grade P275NH
Impact Test Exempted
If you are using an impact-tested material when no MDMT calculations are required, select
Impact Tested Material.
The following material properties apply when the calculation is performed per PD 5500 Annex G.
Maximum Thickness
Enter the thickness limit for which the stresses apply.
Enter the nominal density of the material. The software uses this value to calculate component
weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is 0.2830 lbs/in 3.
Material Factor
Enter the S value per PD:5500 to determine whether the material is carbon or stainless
steel.
CAESAR II also uses, through Input > Piping, the nozzle flexibility calculations
described in WRC 297. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on page 105).
After you provide the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four
locations on the vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle.
Stresses are calculated on both the outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress
components are resolved into stress intensities at these 16 points around the connection. For
more information on the allowable limits for these stresses and output processing, see WRC
Bulletin 107(537) (on page 797).
Home Tab
Topics
Item Number .................................................................................. 818
Description ..................................................................................... 818
PD5500 Annex G ........................................................................... 818
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 820
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 821
Item Number
Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers
that start at one and increase sequentially.
Description
Enter an alphanumeric description for the nozzle or attachment. The description can be up
to 15 characters long. The description is used in results output and in any error displays.
PD5500 Annex G
Enter True to perform analysis according to British Standard Published Document 5500
Annex G instead of Welding Research Council Bulletin 297. The software computes
stresses in cylindrical or spherical vessels with or without reinforcing pads. Only round
hollow nozzle geometries are computed.
When PD5500 Annex G is True, the program automatically converts loads into
the coordinate systems used by each method.
When PD5500 Annex G is True, you can modify values such as:
Stress concentration factor at the attachment edge
Stress concentration factor at the pad edge
Nozzle projection
At the attachment edge (nozzle neck), this factor normally has a maximum value of 2.25.
At the edge of the pad, this factor is normally 2.0.
The example in Annex W does not compute the membrane stress at the attachment
edge. You must check the membrane stress before entering a value for Vessel Wall
Thickness.
According to Annex G, the membrane stress at the attachment edge contains intensified
stresses due to the presence of the hole.
This value is only available when Print the Membrane Stress (on page 819) is True.
The example in Annex W does not compute the membrane stress at the attachment
edge. You must check the membrane stress before entering a value for Vessel Wall
Thickness.
According to Annex G, the membrane stress at the attachment edge contains intensified
stresses due to the presence of the hole.
The example in Annex W does not compute the membrane stress at the attachment
edge. You must check the membrane stress before entering a value for Vessel Wall
Thickness.
According to Annex G, the membrane stress at the attachment edge contains intensified
stresses due to the presence of the hole.
If you would like to check the membrane stress at the attachment edge, see Print the
Membrane Stress and Factor for Membrane (Attachment Edge).
Attachment on Sphere
Enter True if the nozzle is located within the spherical portion of an elliptical or torispherical
head or is in a spherical head. The software accesses the Annex G curves used to calculate
factors for nozzles connected to spheres.
If you enter this data manually, enter the spherical diameter. This is especially
important for nozzles located in elliptical heads.
Design Temperature
Enter the operating temperature of the vessel. The temperature is used to determine the
allowable stress of the material from the material database. If the temperature is changed,
the allowable stress of the material at operating temperature changes accordingly.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure of the pressure vessel, in the displayed units. Use a design
pressure applicable to the following pressure stress equations:
Longitudinal Stress = Pressure * Inside Radius2/(Outside Radius2 -
Inside Radius2)
The design pressure is used to calculate membrane stresses on the nozzle and vessel
wall and axial pressure thrust.
For a spherical vessel, the same longitudinal stress equation is used for membrane
stress due to internal pressure.
Vessel Tab
Topics
Vessel Diameter Basis (WRC 297) ............................................... 821
Vessel Diameter (WRC 297) ......................................................... 821
Wall Thickness............................................................................... 821
Corrosion Allowance ...................................................................... 822
Vessel Material .............................................................................. 822
Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pressure vessel wall, in the displayed units. This thickness is
measured at the intersection of the nozzle and the vessel.
You can type the wall thickness as an equation to account for mill tolerance. For
example, if the mill tolerance is 12.5%, type "<vessel wall thickness value> * 0.875".
The software modifies this value if there is a defined value for Corrosion Allowance.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside
diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Vessel Material
Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code.
Nozzle/Attachment Tab
Topics
Reinforcing Pad ............................................................................. 822
Pad Material ................................................................................... 823
Attachment Type............................................................................ 823
Wall Thickness (WRC 297 Nozzle) ............................................... 824
Corrosion Allowance (WRC 297 Nozzle)....................................... 824
Nozzle Material .............................................................................. 824
Reinforcing Pad
Enter True if there is a reinforcing pad between the vessel and the nozzle, and then enter
the pad values in Thickness and Diameter.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. WRC 297 does not directly analyze the
reinforcing pad. Instead, the vessel thickness includes the pad thickness. This is analyzed in
a consistent manner with the WRC 107 pad method.
Diameter
Enter the reinforcing pad diameter along the surface of the vessel. This value is used when
the software calculates stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad.
Pad Material
Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code.
Attachment Type
Select the type of attachment. For WRC 297 analysis, Round is the only option. For PD
5500 Annex G analysis, select Round, Square, or Rectangular.
Nozzle Diameter
Enter the diameter of the nozzle, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent
with the selection in Diameter Basis for Nozzle.
Nozzle Material
Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code.
c. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material.
Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material
specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in
the material database with a matching name.
Loads Tab
Topics
Include Pressure Thrust ................................................................ 825
Use Pressure Stress Indices (Div. 2 AD 560.7) ............................ 825
Radial Load (P) .............................................................................. 825
Circumferential Shear (VC) ........................................................... 826
Longitudinal Shear (VL) ................................................................. 826
Torsional Moment (MT) ................................................................. 826
Circumferential Moment (MC) ....................................................... 826
Longitudinal Moment (ML) ............................................................. 826
This option is only available for ASME material when PD5500 Annex G (on page 818)
on the Home tab is False.
A negative axial pressure thrust is subtracted from P.
For more information on pressure thrust, see the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
http://www.coade.com/Uploads/mechanical-engineering-news/jul01.pdf.
This option is only available for ASME material when PD5500 Annex G on the Home
tab is False.
The calculation of the pressure stress on the nozzle does not use these indices. The
software multiplies the pressure stress on the nozzle by a factor of 1.2.
In WRC 107, positive loads try to "push" the nozzle while negative loads try to "pull" the
nozzle.
In PD 5500, positive loads try to "pull" the nozzle while negative loads try to "push" the
nozzle.
Axial force does not include the effect of pressure thrust. For more information, see Add
Axial Pressure Thrust?.
Flanges attempts to improve upon the solution of this difficult analysis problem. Equations
model the flexibility of the annular flange plate and its ability to rotate under moment, axial force,
and pressure. The results compare favorably with three-dimensional finite element analysis of
the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside diameter of
the flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance
between the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter. In other words, that
(G-ID) < (BC-G), where, G is the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of
the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt circle.
The following trends apply:
Thinner flanges have a greater the tendency to leak.
Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.
Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.
Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
To begin working with the flange stress and leakage calculations, specify a new job name in the
New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you
create or open a job, you can enter input data and then define, analyze, and review your data.
The software opens the Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations window.
Input for the flange stress and leakage calculations is divided into four input tabs:
Flange (on page 828) - Describes flange geometry.
Bolts and Gasket (on page 832) - Defines data for the bolts and gasket.
Material Data (on page 840) - Defines material and stress-related data.
Loads (on page 842) - Describes the imposed loads.
Flange Tab
The following options are used to describe flange geometry.
Topics
Flange Type ................................................................................... 828
Flange Class .................................................................................. 828
Flange Grade ................................................................................. 829
Flange Outside Diameter (A) ......................................................... 829
Flange Inside Diameter (B) ............................................................ 829
Flange Thickness (t) ...................................................................... 830
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt ......................................................... 830
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID ...................................................... 830
Small End Hub Thickness ............................................................. 831
Large End Hub Thickness ............................................................. 831
Hub Length .................................................................................... 831
Flange Type
Specifies the flange type. Selecting a flange type is required only if an ASME stress calculation
for the flange is needed. If you are performing only a leakage check, you can omit this entry.
Flange Class
Identifies the ANSI B16.5 or API 605 flange rating, (class).
B16.5 valid classes are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, 2500
API 605 valid classes are 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, 900
B16.5 specifications govern up to, and including 24-inch pipe; API 605 specifications govern
nominal pipe sizes 26- though 60-inch.
The flange rating entry is used to access the B16.5 or API pressure/temperature rating table.
Minimum and maximum allowed ratings for all different materials available in the tables are
stored. Minimum and maximum computed allowed equivalent pressures, and safety factors are
found from this data. API 605 does not have minimum and maximum data. The minimum and
maximum data is the same when the nominal English pipe size is greater than 24-inches.
Flange Grade
Specifies the grade of the attached flange. The grade of the attached flange is a value such as
1.1, 1.2, or 2.1. It can be found in the ANSI Standard B16.5 code for flanges and fittings. The
flange grade is used in conjunction with the flange class and design temperature to look up the
allowable pressure rating for the ANSI flange.
If the grade is 1.10, then type 1.101. If you are designing a custom flange and do not want the
printout for the allowable pressure, then type 0.
Hub Length
Defines the hub length. This value is referred to as h in the ASME code. For flange geometries
without hubs, this length can be entered as zero, or left blank.
This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange
ANSI B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by
pressing Ctrl+F from any data input field in the Flange tab.
When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, enter the hub length as
the leg of the weld, and include the thickness of the weld in the large end.
When analyzing a flange with no hub, such as a ring flange or a lap joint flange, enter a zero or
leave the field blank for the Hub Length, Small End Hub Thickness, and Large End Hub
Thickness. When designing a loose, ring-type flange that has a fillet weld at the back, enter the
size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub.
Topics
Bolt Circle Diameter ....................................................................... 832
Number of Bolts ............................................................................. 832
Bolt Diameter ................................................................................. 832
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress .......................................................... 832
Gasket Outer Diameter .................................................................. 833
Gasket Inner Diameter................................................................... 833
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness ................................................. 833
Effective Gasket Modulus .............................................................. 833
Leak Pressure Ratio ...................................................................... 834
Gasket Seating Stress ................................................................... 836
Nubbin Width or Ring..................................................................... 837
Facing Sketch ................................................................................ 838
Facing Column............................................................................... 838
Bolt Diameter
Specifies the nominal diameter of the bolts. Standard bolt diameters for ANSI B16.5 and API
605 flanges are contained in the flange database and are accessed by the software whenever
press Ctrl+F.
Where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt.
This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening
the bolts. This computed value is printed in the output from the Flanges output. Compare this
value to the bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). The rule-of-
thumb tightening stress is frequently larger than the ASME required stress. When the ASME
required stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field, a comparison of the
leakage safety factors can be made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque can
be determined. You are strongly encouraged to adjust these numbers to get a feel for the
relationship between all of the factors involved.
the initial tightening modulus for spiral wound metal gaskets. Typical values used for spiral
wound metal gaskets are:
High End: 437500.0
Low End: 347000.0
Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The
higher the modulus the greater the tendency for the software to predict leakage. Errors on the
high side when estimating this value will lead to a more conservative design.
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum 2.75 3700.
soft copper or brass 3.00 4500.
iron or soft steel 3.25 5500.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.50 6500.
Stainless steels and nickel 3.75 7600.
alloys
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum 3.25 5500.
soft copper or brass 3.50 6500.
iron or soft steel 3.75 7600.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.
Stainless steels and nickel 4.25 10100.
alloys
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum 2.75 3700.
soft copper or brass 3.00 4500.
iron or soft steel 3.25 5500.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.50 6500.
Stainless steels and nickel 3.75 7600.
alloys
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum 3.25 5500.
soft copper or brass 3.50 6500.
iron or soft steel 3.75 7600.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.
Stainless steels and nickel 4.25 10100.
alloys
Facing Sketch
Specifies the facing sketch number according to the following correlations, according to Table 2-
5-2 of the ASME code.
This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter,
G.
Facing Column
Specifies the facing column number according to the following correlations:
Vegetable fiber 2
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum 2
soft copper or brass 2
iron or soft steel 2
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 2
Stainless steels and nickel alloys 2
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum 2
soft copper or brass 2
iron or soft steel 2
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 2
Stainless steels and nickel alloys 2
Topics
Flange Material .............................................................................. 840
Bolt Material ................................................................................... 840
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 840
Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature ..................................... 840
Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ................................... 841
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design ......................................... 841
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient ....................................... 841
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature ......................................... 841
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ....................................... 841
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier ............................................ 842
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier ..................................................... 842
Flange Material
Displays the material database for flanges, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Bolt Material
Displays the material database for bolting, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Design Temperature
Specifies the flange design temperature. This value is required for ASME stress calculations,
and for ANSI B16.5/API rating table look-ups.
The design temperature is not used in the flexibility model of the flange.
Loads Tab
The following options are used to describe the imposed loads.
Topics
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 842
Axial Force ..................................................................................... 842
Bending Moment............................................................................ 842
Disable Leakage Calculations ....................................................... 842
Disable Stress Calculations ........................................................... 843
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check ............................................................ 843
Design Pressure
Indicates the internal line pressure (lbs./sq.in.) in gage. This pressure is used in the flexibility
model of the flange in the ASME stress calculations and is the B16.5/API rating.
Axial Force
Defines the externally applied axial force applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. The
software does not include the effect of shear forces in the flexibility model.
Bending Moment
Specifies the external moment applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. If you have two
bending moments, SRSS them and enter the result here.
Flange Rating
This is an optional input. It has been a common practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5
and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these rating
tables are based on allowable stresses and are not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage
predictions that resulted are a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, not the
flexibility, or modulus of elasticity, of the flange. To give you a comparison to the old practice,
the minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API are stored and are used to
print minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that are predicted from this method. An
example of the output that you get upon entering the flange rating is shown below:
EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL -
Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85
ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00
According to the older method, this shows that leakage occurred if a carbon steel flange is used,
and leakage does not occur if an alloy flange is used. Both flanges have essentially the same
flexibility tendency to leak.
The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress
calculations:
Flange Type
Flange Outside Diameter
Design Temperature
Small End Hub Thickness
Large End Hub Thickness
Hub Length
Flange Allowables
Bolt Allowables
Gasket Seating Stress
Optional Allowable Multipliers
Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
Specify the Flange Type (on page 828) on the Flange (on page 828) tab. To acquire material
allowables from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library, use the Flange Material (on page
840) list on the Material Data (on page 840) tab.
An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:
CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560
Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060
Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000
Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500
Number of Bolts 32.000
Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)
Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063
Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375
Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750
Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000
Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000
Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000
Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000
The following inputs are required only if you wish to perform stress
calcs as per Sect VIII Div. 1
Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000
Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500
Design TemperatureF 650.000
Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690
Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440
Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620
Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000
Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000
Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000
Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000
Nubbin Width (in.)
Facing Sketch 1.000
Facing Column 2.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
The software opens the Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) window. The
window consists of two input tabs--Data (on page 848) and Measurements (on page 849).
After the data is entered, click Run Analysis to begin the computations. A typical output
report is shown below:
Data Tab
Most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field
measurements.
Topics
Pipe Nominal Diameter .................................................................. 848
Pipe Wall Thickness ...................................................................... 848
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 848
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 848
Material Specified Minimum Yield ................................................. 848
Flaw Length ................................................................................... 848
Measurement Increment ................................................................ 848
Factor of Safety (FS) ..................................................................... 849
Design Factor (S) ........................................................................... 849
Design Pressure
Specifies the design pressure. This value is the maximum pressure reported in the output
section, although the maximum allowed pressure may be less than the input design pressure.
Flaw Length
Indicates the length of flaw or anomaly. This value is a measured quantity, usually taken in a
straight line.
Measurement Increment
Specify the measurement increment in this cell. This value defines how often along the flaw
length depth or thickness measurements are made.
The number of measurements should be calculated by ( flaw length / measurement increment )
+1
Measurements Tab
You can enter a maximum of twenty pit measurements on the Measurements input screen.
First, you must define the measurements. Select Pits if the measurements are in pit depths.
Select Thicknesses if the measurements are remaining wall thicknesses.
Pit depths are required for the computations. If remaining thicknesses are specified,
the pit depths are computed from wall thickness - remaining thickness.
In the individual cells, enter the measurement obtained along the flaw length. The values are
based on the selection of Pits or Thicknesses.
ex + ey + eq < erated
The software opens the EJMA Expansion Joint window. The window consists of three input
screens--Geometry (on page 853), Displacements and Rotations (on page 854), and Allowables
(on page 855).
After the necessary data is entered, click Run Analysis to begin the computations. After
processing completes, a report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are
shown on a new tab called Output.
The units used for the coordinate and displacement values are the length units
defined in the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.
Geometry
Topics
Node Number for "From" End ........................................................ 854
Node Number for "To" End ............................................................ 854
Number of Convolutions ................................................................ 854
Flexible Joint Length ...................................................................... 854
Effective Diameter ......................................................................... 854
Z Axis Up ....................................................................................... 854
Coordinates ................................................................................... 854
Number of Convolutions
Defines the number of convolutions in the expansion joint.
Effective Diameter
Specifies the diameter of the circle whose area is equal to the effective area of the expansion
joint. The effective ID can be estimated using the following equation:
1.13 * sqrt (Effective Area)
You can find the effective area of the joint in the manufacturer's catalog.
Z Axis Up
Indicates that the z-axis is upward in your CAESAR II input file.
Coordinates
Defines the spatial coordinate at the appropriate end of the expansion joint
Allowables
Specifies the allowed expansion joint movement (translation or rotation) on a per convolution
basis and for the entire bellows. Enter values using the following units of measure:
Axial inches
Lateral inches
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you
create or open a job, you can enter input data and then define, analyze, and review your data.
The software displays the AISC window, which consists of two input screens:Global Input (on
page 858) and Local Member Data (on page 860).
Output Reports
You can direct the output reports to the screen or to a printer. The output report begins with a
one page summary describing the current global data and units, as shown below.
The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last
column of the report contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the
governing AISC equation. A sample member output reports are shown below. The report is
applicable to jobs where sidesway is allowed.
Global Input
The following options are used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated.
Topics
Structural Code .............................................................................. 858
Allowable Stress Increase Factor .................................................. 858
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ...................................... 858
Youngs Modulus ........................................................................... 859
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 859
Bending Coefficient........................................................................ 859
Form Factor Qa ............................................................................. 859
Allow Sidesway .............................................................................. 859
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . . ....................... 859
Minimum Desired Unity Check ...................................................... 860
Maximum Desired Unity Check ..................................................... 860
Structural Code
Identifies the code and year, typically matching the database in use. Slight variations in the
computations depend on which code year is selected. Single angles can only be checked if
AISC 1989 is selected.
Youngs Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi.
Bending Coefficient
Specifies the bending coefficient (Cb). Use 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in
Formula 1.6-1a or when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than
the moment at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be:
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2
but not more than 2.3, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends.
Form Factor Qa
Defines the allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the
actual area.
Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for
the effective area.
Allow Sidesway
Controls the ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation). This affects
the computation of several of the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for
frames braced against sidesway, moments at each end of the member are required. Sidesway
is allowed.
Topics
Member Start Node ....................................................................... 860
Member End Node......................................................................... 860
Member Type ................................................................................. 861
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz ....................... 861
Unsupported Axial Length ............................................................. 861
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) ....................................... 861
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) ............................... 861
Double Angle Spacing ................................................................... 861
Young's Modulus ........................................................................... 862
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 862
Axial Member Force....................................................................... 862
In-Plane Bending Moment ............................................................. 862
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment ...................................................... 862
In-Plane Small Bending Moment................................................. 862
In-Plane Large Bending Moment ................................................ 862
Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment.......................................... 862
Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment ......................................... 863
Member Type
Specifies the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire
the member geometric properties from the database. For properties to be obtained, the label
you enter must match exactly the label in the database.
Because many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long
legs back to back), and the double angles (short legs back to back), require an angle type to tell
them apart. Enter a D double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to
back. Enter a B for double angles with short legs back to back.
Young's Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi. This value of Youngs modulus overrides the Young's Modulus
(on page 859) value specified on the Global Input tab.
For cumulative equipment allowables, NEMA SM23 states that "the combined resultants of the
forces and moments of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline
of the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of Dc, where Dc is the diameter of an
opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment
connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown below:
SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved
at the discharge nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the
respective components of the moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle.
Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.
The software opens the NEMA SM23 window. Aside from the description, there is only one input
tab for the NEMA turbine. The Nema Input tab enables iterative addition of an arbitrary number
of nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click Add Nozzle.
NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50, reverse the sign of the forces that
act on the piping:
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39
Output Reports
The first page of the output is the input echo. The second page, as well as some of the
remaining pages, display the individual nozzle calculations. The last page displays the
summation calculations. The example below shows a sample input echo report.
The actual number of output pages varies and depends on the number of nozzles
defined in the input.
The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The
highest summation load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, **FAILED** would
have displayed, in red, under the STATUS column opposite to the load combination that was
excessive. The following two examples show sample NEMA output nozzle calculations and
NEMA output summation calculations, respectively.
Topics
Z-Axis Vertical ................................................................................ 867
Cos X & Y ...................................................................................... 867
Nozzle Number .............................................................................. 867
Nozzle Type ................................................................................... 867
Nozzle Diameter ............................................................................ 867
DX .................................................................................................. 868
DY .................................................................................................. 868
DZ .................................................................................................. 868
Global Force FX ............................................................................. 868
Global Force FY............................................................................. 869
Global Force FZ ............................................................................. 869
Global Moment MX ........................................................................ 869
Global Moment MY ........................................................................ 869
Global Moment MZ ........................................................................ 869
Select Load Jobs and Load Case .................................................. 869
Z-Axis Vertical
Controls the plane in which the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane. If you select this option, the software places the
Z-axis in the vertical plane, and the X- and Y-axes are in the horizontal plane.
Cos X & Y
Specifies the direction cosines (X, Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL
is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are as follows:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0
Nozzle Number
Identifies the node number that describes the nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive number
only.
Nozzle Type
Identifies the nozzle type. This is used only for informational purposes in the output report.
Nozzle Diameter
Specifies the nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
DX
Specifies the X-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the X-
distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the X-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
DY
Specifies the Y-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the Y-
distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the Y-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
DZ
Specifies the Z-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the Z-
distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the Z-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
Global Force FX
Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Force FY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Force FZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MX
Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Errors/Warnings Tab
The software displays the Errors/Warnings tab when the equipment jobs that you are analyzing
have issues. The software prompts you to the warnings found and asks you if you want to
continue the analysis. In some cases, no action is needed. In other situations, you can review
the error messages and correct issues in the input before re-analyzing the job.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you
create or open a job, you can enter input data and then define, analyze, and review your data.
The software displays the API 610 dialog box, which consists of three data input tabs: Input
Data (on page 874), Suction Nozzle (on page 877), and Discharge Nozzle (on page 878).
After you input all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Report tab (on page 869). If any errors occur in the analysis, the software displays the
Error/Warnings tab (on page 869).
The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an overhung
end-suction process pump in English units. The three CAESAR II input tabs are shown.
Topics
Centerline Direction Cosine X ....................................................... 875
Centerline Direction Cosine Z ........................................................ 875
Basepoint Node Number ............................................................... 875
Suction Nozzle Node Number ....................................................... 876
Suction Nozzle Nominal Diameter ................................................. 876
Suction Nozzle Type ...................................................................... 876
Discharge ....................................................................................... 876
Discharge Nozzle Nominal Diameter............................................. 876
Discharge Nozzle Type ................................................................. 876
Factor for Table 4 Allowables ........................................................ 876
Discharge
Identifies the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter only a
positive number.
Topics
DX .................................................................................................. 877
DY .................................................................................................. 877
DZ .................................................................................................. 877
Forces on Nozzle ........................................................................... 878
Moments on Nozzle ....................................................................... 878
DX
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
through the center of the two pedestals.
DY
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X, Y, and Z distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
through the center of the two pedestals.
DZ
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X, Y, and Z distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
through the center of the two pedestals.
Forces on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction
nozzle.
Enter the forces in their global orientation. For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the
nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive
direction is from discharge to suction nozzle.
Moments on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction
nozzle.
Topics
DX .................................................................................................. 878
DY .................................................................................................. 878
DZ .................................................................................................. 879
Forces on Nozzle ........................................................................... 879
Moments on Nozzle ....................................................................... 879
DX
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z- distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are
not used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
through the center of the two pedestals.
DY
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
through the center of the two pedestals.
DZ
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
through the center of the two pedestals.
Forces on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge
nozzle.
Enter the forces in their global orientation. For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the
nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive
direction is from discharge to suction nozzle.
Moments on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the
discharge nozzle.
After you input all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Report tab (on page 869). If any errors occur in the analysis, the software displays the
Error/Warnings tab (on page 869).
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the suction nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive
number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the suction nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #1 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the extraction nozzle #1 pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the discharge nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #2 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the extraction nozzle #2 pipe nominal diameter.
Equipment Centerline
Indicates the direction cosines (X,Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL
is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0
Topics
X Distance to Suction .................................................................... 882
Y Distance to Suction .................................................................... 882
Z Distance to Suction..................................................................... 882
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 882
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 882
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 882
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................. 882
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle .............................................. 883
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................. 883
X Distance to Suction
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Y Distance to Suction
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Z Distance to Suction
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Topics
X Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 883
Y Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 883
Z Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 883
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 883
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 883
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 883
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ......................................... 884
Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ......................................... 884
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 884
X Distance to Discharge
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Y Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Z Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 884
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 884
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 884
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 884
Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 885
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 885
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 885
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 885
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 885
Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 885
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 885
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 886
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 886
Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle ......................................... 886
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 886
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 886
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 886
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 886
bundled air cooled heat exchangers. The following figures from API 661 illustrate the type of
open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.
There are two requirements that must be met for API 661 compliance:
7.1.10.1 - Each nozzle, in its design corroded condition, must be capable of withstanding the
simultaneous application of the moments and forces defined in the Typical Construction of a
Tube Bundle with Plug Headers figure in the API 661 code standard.
7.1.10.2 - The design of each fixed or floating header, the design of the connections of fixed
headers to side frames, and the design of other support members should ensure that the
simultaneous application (sum) of all nozzle loadings on a single header does not cause any
damage. The components of the nozzle loadings on a single header should not exceed the
following values:
Mx 6100 Nm (4500 ftlbf)
My 8130 Nm (6000 ftlbf)
Mz 4070 Nm (3000 ftlbf)
Fx 10,010 N (2250 lbf)
Fy 20,020 (4500 lbf)
Fz `6,680 (3750 lbf)
To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you
create or open a job, you can enter input data and then define, analyze, and review your data.
The software opens the API 661 dialog box, which allows you to specify project-specific
information, such as a description of the equipment, and details about the Input Data (on page
888), Inlet Nozzle (on page 890), and Outlet Nozzle (on page 891).
After you input all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Report tab (on page 869). If any errors occur in the analysis, the software displays the
Error/Warnings tab (on page 869).
Topics
Inlet Nozzle Node Number ............................................................ 889
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter ...................................................... 889
Outlet Nozzle Node Number .......................................................... 889
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter ................................................... 889
Figure 6 Force and Moment Multiplier ........................................... 889
Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier ......................................... 889
Tube Bundle Direction ................................................................... 889
Z-Axis Vertical ................................................................................ 889
Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that this equipment uses the Z-axis as the vertical reference for the model.
Topics
DY (Nozzle Orientation) ................................................................. 890
Global Force FX ............................................................................. 890
Global Force FY............................................................................. 890
Global Force FZ ............................................................................. 890
Global Moment MX ........................................................................ 890
Global Moment MY ........................................................................ 890
Global Moment MZ ........................................................................ 890
DY (Nozzle Orientation)
Designates the Y-dimension of the suction nozzle to the header center. This dimension must be
positive. Refer to Figure 5 in API 661. In the figure, the number 6 arrowhead points to the
approximate center of the header location.
Global Force FX
Specifies the X-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Force FY
Specifies the Y-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle. This component can be
considered a radial load.
Global Force FZ
Specifies the Z-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Moment MX
Specifies the X-moment that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Moment MY
Specifies the Y-moment that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Moment MZ
Specifies the Z-moment that the piping system exerts on the Inlet nozzle.
Topics
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Face .......................... 891
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle .................................................. 891
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle .................................................. 891
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle ................................................... 891
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................... 891
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................... 891
Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle ............................................ 891
HEI Standard
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > HEI Standard
Main window menu: Analysis > 5 - HEI Standard
Evaluates the allowable loads on shell type Heat Exchange Institute (HEI) standard nozzles. To
begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse
to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you
create or open a job, you can enter input data and then define, analyze, and review your data.
The software opens the HEI STD dialog box, in which you can enter the necessary input data.
The following example shows sample input for the HEI module:
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force.
Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods used to compute these
allowable loads. The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method,
where the allowable loads have been linearized to show the relationship between the maximum
permitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment vector. If this relationship is plotted
(using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be drawn
between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a
triangle with the axes. For any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the
location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the
loads falls outside the triangle.
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the
location of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal
pressure has been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the
nozzle thrust has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II
automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if Add Pressure
Thrust is selected on the HEI Nozzle (on page 893) tab.
After you enter all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Report tab (on page 869). If any errors occur in the analysis, the software displays the
Error/Warnings tab (on page 869).
HEI Nozzle
The following options are used to enter input data for shell type heat exchanger nozzles.
Topics
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 893
Nozzle Outside Diameter ............................................................... 893
Shell Outside Diameter .................................................................. 893
Shell Thickness.............................................................................. 893
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 893
Material Allowable Stress .............................................................. 894
Maximum Radial Force .................................................................. 894
Maximum Longitudinal Moment..................................................... 894
Add Pressure Thrust Force ........................................................... 894
Design Pressure
Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.
Shell Thickness
Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.
After you input all the equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Report tab (on page 869). If any errors occur in the analysis, the software displays the
Error/Warnings tab (on page 869).
When you run the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the
allowables as published in API 560.
Topics
Nozzle Type ................................................................................... 896
Node Number ................................................................................ 896
Nominal Diameter .......................................................................... 896
Axial Force ..................................................................................... 896
Horizontal Shear Force .................................................................. 896
Vertical Shear Force ...................................................................... 896
Torsional Moment .......................................................................... 897
Horizontal Moment......................................................................... 897
Vertical Moment ............................................................................. 897
Nozzle Type
Specifies the type of nozzle you are analyzing.Options include a straight tube nozzle or a nozzle
designed for a manifold.
Node Number
Identifies the node number for the nozzle tube that is being analyzed. Because there are many
tubes in a fired heater, analyze the most highly-loaded tubes.
Nominal Diameter
Indicates the nominal diameter of the nozzle tube. You must select a Nozzle Type before
selecting a Nominal Diameter value.
Axial Force
Specifies the axial force acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the FX value from the appropriate load case.
Torsional Moment
Indicates the torsional moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MX value from the appropriate load case.
Horizontal Moment
Indicates the horizontal moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the
tube direction is X, then enter the MZ value from the appropriate load case.
Vertical Moment
Indicates the vertical moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MY value from the appropriate load case.
Technical Discussions
In This Section
Rigid Element Application .............................................................. 898
In-Line Flange Evaluation .............................................................. 900
Cold Spring .................................................................................... 901
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 904
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ................................................................ 906
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ............................................................ 910
Modeling Friction Effects ............................................................... 912
Nonlinear Code Compliance .......................................................... 914
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints ............................... 914
Static Seismic Inertial Loads ......................................................... 917
Wind Loads .................................................................................... 918
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ................................. 920
Creep Loading ............................................................................... 933
Evaluating Vessel Stresses ........................................................... 935
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction ............................................ 940
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II ............................................... 944
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping ............................................... 957
Code Compliance Considerations ................................................. 977
Local Coordinates .......................................................................... 1013
Rigid Weight
Specifies a value for the weight of the rigid element. The rigid material weight is the weight of
the rigid excluding insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid. If left blank, then the weight of the
rigid defaults to 0. A rigid element with zero weight is often used as a construction element, used
to move a centerline load to the shell wall, or used to model the effective stiffness and thermal
growth of a piece of equipment.
If left blank or 0, then the software does not add the additional weight due either to
insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid.
developed during an Occasional Load Case to be Mfd, effectively the doubling flange
capacity for Occasional loadings.
Sy = Yield strength of flange material at design temperature. CAESAR II allows evaluation
to be done using as many as 10 different temperatures; Sy/36,000; where Sy, is given in psi,
cannot be greater than 36,000 psi
C = Bolt circle diameter
Ab = Total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = Design pressure
CAESAR II calculates an Equivalent Stress S in the flange and compares it to Sy (or 2*Sy for
occasional load cases), in the following manner:
S = 36,000* Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) (non-Occ)
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) (Occ)
For systems of units that do not express stress in psi, the software converts the 36,000 values in
the above equations to the appropriate set of units.
You can do flange evaluations in Static Analysis only.
Cold Spring
Cold spring is a method where you introduce pipe strain in the installed state to modify the
resulting strain in the operating state. Adding this preload is commonly used to adjust (reduce)
equipment load in the operating state. In CAESAR II, you can indicate a cold spring into your
static load cases by using the CS variable in the load case definition.
A cut short (also called a cold pull) describes an intentional gap in the pipe assembly requiring
an initial tensile load to close the final joint. A cut long (also called a cold push) describes an
intentional overlap in the pipe assembly requiring an initial compressive load to close the final
joint. This initial gap or overlap is modeled as a cut short material or a cut long material,
respectively. CAESAR II reduces the cut short to zero length and doubles the cut long in any
load case that includes the CS load in the load case definition.
This initial cold pull is difficult to implement with any accuracycertainly in systems operating in
the creep range where long term effect is difficult to control or even predict. Due to the difficulty
of properly installing a cold spring system, most piping codes recommend that, when evaluating
equipment loads, you model only two-thirds of the design cold spring for equipment load
calculations. B31.3 also places an upper bound of four-thirds of the design cold spring for
equipment load evaluation.
In simple, linear systems without intermediate restraints, you can calculate the cold spring
element length (ignoring equipment growth) by using the following equation:
Ci = xLi dT
Where:
Ci = length of cold spring in direction i; where i is X, Y, or Z (inches)
Li = total length of pipe subject to expansion in direction i (inches)
= mean thermal expansion coefficient of material between ambient and operating
temperature (in/in/F)
dT = change in temperature (F)
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE) W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS) W+P1 standard sustained case for code stress check
Load Case4 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
d. To check equipment operating loads considering actual cold spring variation (both two-
thirds and four-thirds checks here), use the following load cases. You can define
additional load cases for installed load variations.
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE) W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS) W+P1 standard sustained case for code stress check
Load Case 6 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+1.5 CS includes all of the design cold spring
W+P1+1.5 CS includes all of the design cold spring, but not the
Load Case 2 (OPE)
temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS) W+P1 standard sustained case for code stress check
Load Case 6 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
Expansion Joints
Checking the expansion joint box on the element enables definition of an expansion joint for that
element. Expansion joints can be modeled as a single element across the flexible length of the
joint or as a zero length element at the midpoint of the expansion joint. Expansion joints
elements have a zero length if the Delta fields on the Pipe Element spreadsheet are left blank or
zero.
When an expansion joint has a defined length, CAESAR II builds the expansion joint as a beam
element using the element length with the entered expansion joint stiffnesses.
Four stiffness values define the expansion joint:
Axial
Transverse
Torsion
Bending
Typically, expansion joint manufacturers do not supply torsional stiffness data. If the
manufacturer does not supply the data, enter a large torsional stiffness value, and verify that the
resulting load on the bellows is not excessive. When the piping system is tight, and the diameter
large, the magnitude of the large torsional stiffness can significantly affect the magnitude of the
torsion carried by the joints. For example, a stiffness of 100,000 in.lb./deg. and 1E12 in.lb./deg.
can produce considerably different torsional load results. Conservatively speaking, the tendency
is to use the larger stiffness except that the torsional stiffness value is probably closer to the
100,000 in.lb./deg. In instances where a large torsional stiffness value is important, you can get
a stiffness estimate from the manufacturer, or use the equation below to derive an estimate. Use
this equation to conservatively estimate torsional loads on the bellows and surrounding
equipment.
Where
= 3.14159
Re = Expansion joint effective radius
t = Bellows thickness
E = Elastic Modulus
= Poissons Ratio
L = Flexible bellows length
When the expansion joint has a zero length, none of the expansion joint stiffnesses
are related. You must be sure that you enter a value in all of the Stiffness fields.
Effective ID
The pressure area used to set the pressure thrust force on an expansion joint is provided by the
expansion joint manufacturer either as an effective area or effective inside diameter (ID). If the
pressure thrust load is to be included in the analysis, the Effective ID must be provided in the
expansion joint model definition. Any load case that includes a pressure term (for example,
+P1) will include a thrust force on either end of the expansion joint based on this effective
ID.
Operating case #9
Installed Weight (if requested)
If you use the Class 1 branch flexibilities, intersection models in the analysis become stiffer
when the reduced geometry requirements do not apply, and become more flexible when the
reduced geometry requirements do apply. Stiffer intersections typically carry more loads and
thus have higher stresses lowering the stress in other parts of the system that have been
unloaded. More flexible intersections typically carry less load and thus have lower stresses. This
causes higher stresses in other parts of the system that have "picked up" the extra load.
The branch flexibility rules used in CAESAR II are taken from ASME III, Subsection NB, (Class
1), 1992 Edition, Issued December 31, 1992, from Code Sections NB-3686.4 and NB-3686.5.
When the reduced branch rules apply, use the following equations for the local stiffnesses:
TRANSLATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = RIGID
LONGITUDINAL = RIGID
ROTATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = (kx)d/EI
LONGITUDINAL = (kz)d/EI
Where:
RIGID = 1.0E12 lb./in. or 1.0E12 in.lb./deg.
d = Branch Diameter
E = Youngs Modulus
I = Cross Section Moment of Inertia
D = Header Diameter
T = Header Thickness
Tb = Branch Fitting Thickness
kx = 0.1(D/T)1.5[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
kz = 0.2(D/T)[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
For more information, see WRC 329 Section 4.9 Flexibility Factors. A brief quote from this
section follows:
"The significance of "k" depends upon the specifics of the piping system. Qualitatively, if "k" is
small compared to the length of the piping system, including the effect of elbows and their k-
factors, then the inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have only minor effects on the
calculated moments. Conversely, if "k" is large compared to the piping system length, then the
inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have major effects. The largest effect will be to
greatly reduce the magnitude of the calculated moments acting on the branch connection. To
illustrate the potential significance of "ks" for branch connections, we use the equation [above]
to calculate "k" for a branch connection with D=30 in., d=12.75 in., and T=t=0.375 in.:
k = 0.1(80)1.5(0.425)0.5 * (1.0) = 46.6
This compares to the more typical rigid-joint interpretation that k=1, rather than k=46.6 !"
Further discussion in section 4.9 illustrates additional problems that can arise by overestimating
the stiffness at branch connections. Problems arise by believing "mistakenly" that the stress at
the intersection is too high. Further reference should be made to this section in WRC 329.
Branch automatic flexibility generation can be used where the user has only defined the branch
element in the model, that is has left the header piping out of the analysis. In this case there will
be no "offset" equal to one-half of the header diameter applied to the branch end. A "partial
intersection" is one where either the header pipe is not modeled, is modeled with a single
element, or is part of a geometric intersection where the header pipes are not colinear. In the
case where there is no header pipe going to the intersection, there will be no modification to the
model for the class 1 branch flexibilities. When at least a single header pipe is recognized, the
local flexibility directions are defined by the branch alone and in accordance with the CAESAR II
defaults for circumferential and longitudinal directions for the branch and header. You must build
full intersection models at all times, not only when employing the class 1 branch flexibility. In
most cases, building full intersection models eliminates problems caused by the assumptions
necessary when a partial intersection is described.
In the equations in NB-3686.5 for tn, the thickness of the branch pipe is used in all cases.
When branches are skewed with respect to the header pipe, and where the two header pipes
are colinear, the local Class 1 flexibilities are still taken to be the longitudinal and circumferential
directions that are tangent to the header surface at its intersection with the branch.
Class 1 branch flexibilities can be formed at both ends of a single pipe element.
The offsets necessary to form the class 1 intersections are automatically generated
by CAESAR II. There is no extra input required by you to have CAESAR II build these
intersections.
If there are already user-defined offsets at an intersection end, the computed offset to get from
the header centerline to its surface along the centerline of the branch is added to the already
entered user offset.
Automatic offsets are generated providing that the distance from the header centerline to the
header surface along the branch centerline is less than or equal to 98% of the total pipe straight
length.
When an element with a bend designation is part of an intersection model, the offset and
flexibility calculations are not performed.
computer, and therefore incorporates directly the effects of non-linear restraints. This is done by
considering each load case independently. The restraint configuration is determined for each
load case by the program as it runs, based upon the actual loads that are considered present.
Some users have asserted that there are actually two sustained load cases. In fact, there has
been a B31.3 code interpretation that indicates that the sustained stress may also be checked
with the operating restraint configuration. Calculating the sustained stresses using the operating
restraint status raises several other issues; what modulus of elasticity should be used, and
which sustained stresses should be used for occasional cases.
It is our assertion that there is only one sustained case (otherwise, it is not "sustained"). There
can be, however, multiple sustained stress distributions. The two most obvious are those
associated with the cold (installed) and hot (operating) configurations. However, there are also
numerous in-betweens, as the piping system load steps from cold to hot. Whether the "true"
sustained load case occurs during the installed or operating case is a matter of the frame of
reference. If an engineer first sees a system in its cold condition, and watches it expand to its
operating condition, it appears that the first case (because weight and pressure primary loads
are present) is the sustained case, and the changes he viewed are thermal effects (due to
heat up) secondary loads due to displacements. If a second engineer first sees the same
system in the operating case and watches it cool down to the cold case, he may believe that the
first case he saw (the operating case) is the sustained case, and changes experienced from hot
to cold are the thermal expansion effects (the thermal stress ranges are the same in both
cases). Consider the further implications of cryogenic systems where changes from installed to
operating are the same as those experienced by hot systems when going from operating to
installed. After elastic shakedown has occurred, the question becomes clouded even further due
to the presence of thermally induced pre-stresses in the pipe during both the cold and hot
conditions. We feel either the operating or installed case (or some other one in-between) could
justifiably be selected for analysis as the sustained case, as long as the program is consistent.
We selected the installed case (less the effect of cold spring) as our reference sustained case,
because thermal effects can be completely omitted from the solution (as intended by the code).
This best represents the support configuration when the sustained loads are initially applied. If
the pipe lifts off of a support when going from installed to operating, we view this as a thermal
effect which is consistent with the piping codes view of thermal effects as the variation of stress
distribution as the piping system goes from cold to hot, and is explicitly corroborated by one
code, an earlier edition of the French petrochemical code, which states that weight stress
distributions due to thermal growth of the pipe should be considered as expansion stresses). For
example, we feel that a change in a rigid support load from 2,000 lbs to zero should be treated
no differently than would be a variable spring load changing from 6,000 lbs to 4,000 lbs (or
another rigid support load going 2,000 lbs to 1 lb). In the former case, if the pipe became
"overstressed", it would yield, and sag back to the support, relieving the stress. This process is
identical to the way that all other expansion stresses are relieved in a piping system.
We are confident that our interpretation is correct. However, we understand that our users may
not always agree with us that is why CAESAR II provides the greatest ability to custom tailor
the analysis to your individual specifications. If you want, you can analyze a hot sustained case
by adding two load cases to those normally recommended by CAESAR II. This is done by
assuming that the pipe expands first, and then the sustained loads are applied (this is of course
an idealized concept, but the stresses can only be segregated by segregating the applied loads,
so the sustained loads can only be applied either before, or after, the expansion loads).
Following are the default load cases, as well as those required for a "hot sustained."
Default New
L4: L1-L2(EXP)
L5: L1-L3(SUS)
In the new load case list, the second case still represents the cold sustained, while the fourth
case represents the expansion case (note that L1-L2, or W+P1+T1-W-P1, equals T1, with non-
linear effects taken into account). The third case represents the thermal growth of the
weightless, non-pressurized pipe, against the non-linear restraints.
The fifth case (L1-L3, or W+P1+T1-T1, equals W+P1) represents the application of weight and
pressure to that expanded case, or the "hot sustained" case. Note that when the piping system
is analyzed as above, the actual effects of the non-linear restraints are considered (they are not
arbitrarily removed from the model), and the laws of superposition still hold.
An alternative school of thought believes that a "hot sustained" is only valid if: (1) the sustained,
primary loads are applied, (2) all springs are showing their Hot Load settings, and (3) any
supports that lift off (or otherwise become non-active) have been removed from the model. An
analysis such as this is achievable by setting the Keep/Discard status of the Restrained Weight
case (the first hanger design load case) to Keep, thus permitting the results of that case to be
viewable as for any other load case. The Restrained Weight case automatically removes
restraints that become non-active during the designated operating case, and apply the Hot Load
at each of the hanger locations.
CASE #
If you must model nonlinear effects in the system, the load case combinations are not so straight
forward. Friction, one-direction restraints, and double-acting restraints with gaps are the
nonlinear items which complicate modeling. For this example, we will use wind loading on a long
vertical run of pipe with a guide. Assume there is a 1-inch gap between the pipe and guide.
Under normal operation, the pipe moves -inch towards the stop leaving a gap of 1--inch on
either side of the pipe and a -inch gap on the other side. If you analyze the wind loads alone,
the pipe is allowed to move 1-inch from its center point in the guide to the guide stop. Because
occasional loads are usually analyzed with the system in operation, the pipe may be limited to a
-inch motion as the gap is closed in one direction, and 1--inch if the gap is closed in the
opposite direction. With nonlinear effects modeled in the system, the occasional deflections (and
stresses) are influenced by the operating position of the piping.
The following list of CAESAR II load cases takes this point into consideration. The load cases
displayed below are only for wind acting in one direction, that is, +X. Depending on the system,
the most critical loads could occur in any direction +/-X, +/-Z, or skewed in XZ. The intention of
the load case construction is to find the effect of the occasional load on the piping system in the
operating condition. The stress due to the moment change from the operating to the operating
plus wind case is added to the stress from the sustained case.
CASE #
Case 5 computes the isolated wind effect on the piping system in the operating condition. Case
6 adds the stresses from Case 5 to the sustained stresses from Case 2.
Dynamic (response spectrum) evaluation of earthquake loads are discussed later in this section,
in the dynamic analysis and output sections, and in the screen reference section.
The ASCE #7 method for determining earthquake coefficients is described below. After you
calculate the earthquake coefficients, enter the g-factors as uniform loads on the piping
spreadsheet.
Calculate the horizontal seismic design force using equation 13.3-1 from ASCE 7 (10):
Fp = [(0.4 ap SDS W p) / (Rp / Ip)] (1 + 2 z / h)
But, because W p is "component operating weight", Fp/W p = calculated (horizontal)
acceleration, aH, so;
aH = [(0.4 ap SDS) / ( Rp / Ip )] (1 + 2 z / h),
additionally;
aH 1.6 SDS Ip
and:
aH 0.3 SDS Ip
Where:
ap = Component amplification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 2.5 for "Piping"
SDS = Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4
Rp = Component response modification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 12.0 for "Piping in accordance with ASME B31... with joints made by welding or
brazing"; values range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
Ip = Component importance factor, from Section 13.1.3
= 1.5 for life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or
components that are required for continuous operation; 1.0 for all others
z = Height in structure at point of attachment
h = Average roof height of structure
Wind Loads
You can define your own wind pressure profile (Wind Pressure vs Elevation) or wind speed
(Wind Velocity vs Elevation) profile, or you can access wind load data from the following wind
codes:
ASCE 7 IBC
BS 6399-2 NBC
EN 1991-1-4
If you enter velocity versus elevation table data, then the program converts the velocity to a
dynamic pressure using the following equation:
P = 1/2 V2
Where V is the wind velocity and is the air density.
Enter the Wind Shape Factor on the piping input. For cylindrical elements, a value between 0.5
and 0.7 is used. A value of 0.65 is typical. The wind shape factor as entered is distributive. This
means that the shape factor entered in piping input is carried forward and applies for all
following elements until zeroed or changed.
There is no need to enter the same shape factor on each piping input segment. Zero or
disable the wind shape factor if the piping system runs inside of a building or similarly protective
structure.
Enter wind load parameters on the Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor
Dialog Box) (on page 549) tab of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor . You can enter up to
four different wind loads per analysis. These typically might be setup to model wind loads in the
+X, -X, +Z, and -Z directions.
Elevation
It is important to set the proper elevation of the piping system (height above ground) when
running a wind analysis. When a wind shape factor is specified in the input, CAESAR II prompts
you for the elevation (and horizontal coordinates) of this first node. By default, CAESAR II
assigns the "From" node of the first element an elevation of 0.0. You can also use the procedure
below to set the reference wind elevation of the piping system.
SWL
The still water level.
L
The wave length or horizontal distance between successive crests or troughs.
H
The wave height or vertical distance between the crest and trough.
D
The water depth or vertical distance from the bottom to the still water level.
The surface elevation measured from the still water level.
The most suitable wave theory is dependent on the wave height, the wave period, and the water
depth. Based on these parameters, the applicable wave theory can be determined from the
figure below (from API-RP2A, American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A).
Ocean Currents
In addition to the forces imposed by ocean waves, piping elements can also be subjected to
forces imposed by ocean currents. There are three different ocean current models in
CAESAR II: linear current, piece-wise, and power law profile.
The linear current profile assumes that the current velocity through the water column varies
linearly from the specified surface velocity (at the surface) to zero (at the bottom).
The piece-wise linear profile employs linear interpolation between specific user-defined
depth/velocity points.
The power law profile decays the surface velocity to the 1/7 power.
While waves produce unsteady flow where the particle velocities and accelerations at a point
constantly change, currents produce a steady, non-varying flow.
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
= Kinematic Viscosity of the Fluid 1.26e-5 ft2/sec for Sea Water
After you calculate K and Re use the charts to obtain Cd, Cm, and Cl. For more information, see
Mechanics of Wave Forces on Offshore Structures by T. Sarpkaya. Figures 3.21, 3.22, and 3.25
are example charts, which display below.
In order to determine these coefficients, the fluid particle velocity (at the location of interest)
must be determined. The appropriate wave theory is solved, and these particle velocities are
readily obtained.
Of the wave theories discussed, the modified Airy and Stokes 5th theories include a modification
of the depth-decay function. The standard theories use a depth-decay function equal to cosh(kz)
/ sinh(kd),
Where:
k - is the wave number, 2 /L
L - is the wave length
d - is the water depth
z - is the elevation in the water column where the data is to be determined
The modified theories include an additional term in the numerator of this depth-decay function.
The modified depth-decay function is equal to cosh(d) / sinh(kd),
Where:
- is equal to z / (d + h)
The term d represents the effective height of the point at which the particle velocity and
acceleration are to be computed. The use of this term keeps the effective height below the still
water level. This means that the velocity and acceleration computed are convergent for actual
heights above the still water level.
As previously stated, the drag, inertia, and lift coefficients are a function of the fluid velocity and
the diameter of the element in question. Note that the fluid particle velocities vary with both
depth and position in the wave train (as determined by the applied wave theory). Therefore,
these coefficients are in fact not constants. However, from a practical engineering point of view,
varying these coefficients as a function of location in the Fluid field is usually not implemented.
This practice can be justified when one considers the inaccuracies involved in specifying the
instantaneous wave height and period. According to Sarpkaya, these values are insufficient to
accurately predict wave forces, a consideration of the previous fluid particle history is necessary.
In light of these uncertainties, constant values for Cd, Cm, and Cl are recommended by API and
many other references.
The effects of marine growth must also be considered. Marine growth has the following effects
on the system loading: the increased pipe diameters increase the hydrodynamic loading; the
increased roughness causes an increase in Cd, and therefore the hydrodynamic loading; the
increase in mass and added mass cause reduced natural frequencies and increase the dynamic
amplification factor; it causes an increase in the structural weight; and possibly causes
hydrodynamic instabilities, such as vortex shedding.
Finally, Morrisons force equation is based the "small body" assumption. The term "small" refers
to the "diameter to wave length" ratio. If this ratio exceeds 0.2, the inertial force is no longer in
phase with the acceleration of the fluid particles and diffraction effects must be considered. In
such cases, the fluid loading as typically implemented by CAESAR II is no longer applicable.
Additional discussions on hydrodynamic loads and wave theories can be found in the references
at the end of this article.
The necessary hydrodynamic parameters are discussed in the following paragraphs and a
CAESAR II hydrodynamic loading dialog is shown in the figure below.
Current Data
Profile Type
Defines the interpolation method you want CAESAR II to use to determine the current
velocity as a function of depth. Available options for this entry are:
Power Law Profile
Determines the current velocity at depth D according to the equation:
Vd = Vs * [di / D]p
Where:
Vd - is the velocity at depth di
Vs - is the specified velocity at the surface
D - is the water depth
p - is the power, set to 1/7
Piece-wise Linear Profile
Performs a linear interpolation of a velocity verse depth table that you must provide, to
determine the current velocity at depth di. The table should start at the surface (a depth
of zero) and progress in increasing depth to the sea bed.
Linear Profile
Performs a linear interpolation to determine the current velocity at depth d i. However,
this method assumes the current velocity varies linearly from the specified surface
velocity to zero at the sea bed.
Current Speed
Defines the current speed at the surface. The units for this entry are (length/time) as
defined by the active units file at the time of input. This value should always be a
positive entry.
Current Direction Cosines
Defines the direction of fluid transport due to the current. These fields are unit-less and
follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Data
Wave Theory Indicator
Specifies which wave theory to use to compute the water particle velocities and
accelerations. The wave theories available are:
Standard Airy Wave
This is also known as linear wave theory. Discussion of this theory can be found in the
previously mentioned references.
Modified Airy Wave
This is a modification of the standard Airy theory which includes the free surface effects due
to the wave. The modification consists of determining a depth scaling factor equal to the
depth divided by the depth plus the surface elevation. Note that this scale factor varies as a
function of the location in the wave train.
Standard Stokes 5th Wave
This is a 5th order wave theory, also discussed in the previously mentioned references.
Modified Stokes 5th Wave
This is a modification of the standard Stokes 5th theory. The modification is the same as
applied to the Airy theory.
Stream Function Wave
This is Deans Stream Function theory, also discussed in the previously mentioned
references.
Modified Stream Function Wave
This is Deans Stream Function theory, modified to directly consider current in the wave
solution.
Stream Function Order
When the Stream Function theory is activated, the solution order must be defined. Typical
values for the stream function order range from 3 to 13, and must be an odd value (see API-
RP2A figure).
Water Depth
Defines the vertical distance (in units of length) from the still water level the surface to the
sea bed.
Wave Height
Defines the height of the incident wave. The height is the vertical distance in units of length
from the wave crest to the wave trough.
Wave Period
Defines the time span (in seconds) for two successive wave crests to pass a fixed point.
Wave Kinematic Factor
Because the two dimensional wave theories do not account for spreading, a reduction factor
is often used for the horizontal particle velocity and acceleration. Wave kinematic
measurements support values in the range of 0.85 to 0.95. Refer to the applicable offshore
codes before using this item.
Wave Direction Cosines
Define the direction of wave travel. These fields are unit-less and follow the standard
software global axis convention.
Wave Phase Angle
Defines the position of the wave relative to the starting node of the piping system. The
phase angle is a measure (in degrees) of position in the wave train, where 0 is the wave
crest, 180 is the wave trough, and 360 is the following crest. Because the wave propagates
over the piping structure, each point in the structure experiences all possible wave phase
angles. One analysis technique specifies the wave phase at the system origin, and then the
phase at each node point in the model is determined. From these exact phase locations, the
water particle data is computed from the wave theory.
Alternatively, a conservative engineering approach is to use the same phase angle usually
zero for all points in the model. This technique produces higher loads; however, the extra
conservatism is warranted when given the unknowns in specifying environmental data.
Seawater Data
Free Surface Elevation
Defines the height of the free surface from the global system origin. If the system origin is at
the free surface, this entry should be specified as zero. If the system origin is at the sea
bottom, this entry is equal to the water depth. By default, the first node in a CAESAR II
model is at an elevation of zero. You can change the elevation by pressing [Alt-+G].
Kinematic Viscosity
Defines the kinematic viscosity of water. This value is used to determine the Reynolds
number, which is subsequently used to determine the hydrodynamic coefficients Cd, Cm, and
Cl. Typical values of kinematic viscosity for sea water display below.
References
1. Mechanics of Wave Forces On Offshore Structures, Turgut Sarpkaya and Michael Isaacson,
Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1982, ISBN 0-442-25402-4.
2. Handbook of Ocean and Underwater Engineering, Myers, Holm, and McAllister, McGraw-
Hill Book Co., 1969, ISBN 07-044245 -2.
3. Fifth Order Gravity Wave Theory, Lars Skjelbreia and James Hendrickson, National
Engineering Science Co., Pasadena, California, 1960.
4. Planning and Design of Fixed Offshore Platforms, McClelland and Reifel, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1986, ISBN 0-442-25223-4.
5. Intercomparison of Near-Bottom Kinematics by Several Wave Theories and Field and
Laboratory Data, R. G. Dean and M. Perlin, Coastal Engineering, #9 (1986), p399-437.
Creep Loading
Creep is the slow, permanent deformation of a solid material under mechanical stresses. Creep
occurs at elevated temperatures during long-term exposure to high levels of constant stress
below the yield strength of the material. Power boiler piping is an example of the type of piping
subjected to creep loading.
Materials
At elevated temperatures, creep governs the allowable stress properties for a material.
Allowable values controlled by creep, also called time-dependent allowables, are a function of
duration of loads.
Default material allowables for ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1 are based on 100,000 hours.
Creep life varies for EN-13480 materials, as shown in the following examples. CAESAR II
includes creep life in the material name.
For material 1.0345S-16-100 (material number 406 in CAESAR II):
16 - Indicates a maximum thickness of 16 mm.
100 - Indicates the allowable is for a load duration of 100,000 hours, which is the default
value for CAESAR II.
For material 1.0345S-16-200 (material number 468 in CAESAR II):
16 - Indicates a maximum thickness of 16 mm.
The allowable is for a load duration of 200,000 hours.
If the material allowable corresponding to the load duration you need is not
available, then you can create a new custom material with the required data.
Calculations
The software calculates creep stresses according to EN-13480 equation 12.3.5-1:
5 = Pcdo/4en + 0.75iMA/Z + 0.75iMC/3Z fCR
where:
Pc = Calculation pressure (SUS)
MA = Resultant moment from weight and other sustained mechanical loadings (SUS)
MC = Resultant moment from thermal expansion and alternating loadings (EXP)
fCR = Hot allowable stress
In CAESAR II, creep stress (CRP) is a scalar combination of one sustained case (SUS) and one
expansion case (EXP). The first two terms of the equation are the sustained stress components
and the third term is the expansion stress component.
You do not need to specify additional load multipliers to implement creep according to the
equation, as shown in the following Load Case Editor example. If you specify additional load
multipliers, the software applies these as additional scale factors.
The software implements EN-13480 creep methodology for many of the other
supported piping codes.
SIF Methodology
CAESAR II considers the single-SIF and double-SIF methodologies for EN-13480 creep. For the
double-SIF method:
SbA = [(iiMi)2+(ioMo)2]1/2/Z. (due to primary loads from the sustained load case)
SbC is defined as SbA, except that it uses the range of resultant moments from the thermal
expansion load case.
5 = Pcdo/4en + SbA + SbC/3 < fCR
L10 L4+L8 Creep case between SUS L4, EXP CRP Scalar
range from L4 to L3
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm and Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kS mh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the
resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
5. Determine if there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types can be
repeated using a value of 1.2 for k.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII,
Division 2 2004 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, P b, is not
applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division
2 requirements. Using the same analogy, write the peak stress limit as:
Pl + Pb + Q + F < Sa
The preceding equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met
based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
"If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for
cyclic operation is required and it can be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135
has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design,
fabrication, testing and inspection of this division."
The expansion, operating, or both loads from the CAESAR II Restraint report (on
page 583) must satisfy the computed stress requirement:
Pl + Pb + Q (operating or expansion excluding pressure) < 2Sm.
To summarize:
1. Ensure proper nozzle reinforcement for pressure and assume pressure stresses are at their
maximum.
2. Compare primary stresses without pressure to Smh.
3. Compare stresses due to the sum of primary and secondary loads to 2Sm(avg); where Sm(avg)
is the average of the hot and cold allowable stress intensities S mh and Smc.
The displacement components can be expressed as linear combinations of the mode shapes:
x = Y = e Ye + r Yr = xe + xr
Where:
x = Total System Displacements
xe = System Displacements Due to Extracted Modes
xr = System Displacements Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
The dynamic load vector can be expressed in similar terms:
F = K Y = K e Ye + Kr Yr = Fe + Fr
Where:
F = Total System Load Vector
Fe = Load Vector Due to Extracted Modes
Fr = Load Vector Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
Normally, modal superposition analyses completely neglect the rigid response the displacement
Xr caused by the load Fr. This response, of the non-extracted modes, can be obtained from the
system displacement under a static loading Fr. Based upon the relation\-ships stated above, you
can estimate Fr as follows:
F = K e Ye + K r Yr
Multiplying both sides byeT and considering that eT r = 0:
eT F = eT K e Ye + eT K r Yr = eT K e Ye
Substituting e2 for eT K e and solving for Ye:
eT F = e2 Ye
Ye = eT e-2 F
The residual force can now be stated as
Fr = F - K e Ye = F - eT K e e-2 F
As seen earlier
T M 2 = I 2 = T K
Substituting eT Me e2 for eT K e:
Fr = F - eT M e e2 e-2 F = F - eT Me F
Therefore, CAESAR II calculates the residual response (and includes it as the missing mass
contribution) according to the following procedure:
1. The missing mass load is calculated for each individual shock load as:
Fr = F - eT M e F
The load vector F represents the product of:
the force set vector and the rigid DLF for force spectrum loading;
the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and directional vector for non-ISM seismic loads;
and the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and displacement matrix (under unit ISM
support displacement) for seismic anchor movement loads.
Note that the missing mass load will vary, depending upon the number of modes
extracted by the user and the cutoff frequency selected (or more specifically, the DLF or
acceleration corresponding to the cutoff frequency). "Rigid," for the purposes of
determining the rigid DLF, or the ZPA, may be designated by the user, through a setup
parameter, to be either the DLF/acceleration associated with the frequency of the last
extracted mode, or the true spectral DLF/ ZPA that corresponding to the largest entered
frequency of the input spectrum.
2. The missing mass load is applied to the structure as a static load. The static structural
response is then combined (according to the user-specified combination method) with the
dynamically amplified modal responses as if it was a modal response. Actually this static
response is the algebraic sum of the responses of all non-extracted modesrepresenting
in-phase response, as would be expected from rigid modes.
3. The Missing Mass Data report is compiled for all shock cases, whether missing mass is to
be included or not. The percent of mass active is calculated according to:
% Active Mass = 1 - ( Fr[i] / F [i])
summed over i = 1 to n, where n is the number of modes included
The maximum possible percent that is theoretically possible for this value is of course 100%;
however numerical inaccuracies may occasionally cause the value to be slightly higher. If the
missing mass correction factor is included, the percent of mass included in the correction is
shown in the report as well.
Because the CAESAR II procedure assumes that the missing mass correction represents the
contribution of rigid modes, and that the ZPA is based upon the spectral ordinate value at the
frequency of the last extracted mode, we recommend that you extract modes up to, but not far
beyond, a recognized "rigid" frequency. Choosing a cutoff frequency below the spectrums
resonant peak [point (1) below] provides a non-conservative result, because resonant responses
may be missed. Using a cutoff frequency higher than the peak (2), but still in the resonant range,
will yield conservative results, because the ZPA/rigid DLF will be overestimated. Extracting a
large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be conservative (4),
because all available modal combination methods (SRSS, GROUP, ABS, and so forth) give
conservative results versus the algebraic combination method which gives a more realistic
representation of the net response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum
shown below, an appropriate cutoff point for the modal extraction would be about 33 Hz (3).
CAESAR II provides two options for combining the missing mass correction with modal dynamic
results SRSS and Absolute. The Absolute Combination method provides the more
conservative result and is based upon the assumption that dynamic amplification is going to
occur simultaneously with the maximum ground acceleration or force load. Literature
(References 1, 2) states that the modal and the rigid portions of the response to typical dynamic
loads are actually statistically independent, so that the SRSS Combination method is a more
accurate representation of reality. Because the SRSS Combination method is most closely
aligned to reality, CAESAR II defaults to this missing mass combination method.
References
1. A. K. Gupta, Response Spectrum Method in Seismic Analysis and Design of Structures,
CRC Press, 1990
2. K. M. Vashi, "Computation of Seismic Response from Higher Frequency Modes," ASME 80-
C2/PVP-50, 1980
3. O. E. Hansteen and K. Bell, "On the Accuracy of Mode Superposition Analysis in Structural
Dynamics," Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Volume 7, John Wiley &
Sons, Ltd., 1979
Fatigue Basics
Piping and vessels have been known to suffer from sudden failure following years of successful
service. Research done during the 1940s and 1950s, primarily advanced by A. R. C. Markls
"Piping Flexibility Analysis," published in 1955, provided an explanation for this phenomenon, as
well as design criteria aimed at avoiding failures of this type. The explanation was that materials
were failing due to fatigue, a process leading to the propagation of cracks, and subsequent
fracture, following repeated cyclic loading.
Steels and other metals are made up of organized patterns of molecules, known as crystal
structures. However, these patterns are not maintained throughout the steel producing an ideal
homogeneous material, but are found in microscopic isolated island-like areas called grains.
Inside each grain a pattern of molecules is preserved. From one grain boundary to the next the
molecular pattern is the same, but the orientations differ. As a result, grain boundaries are high
energy borders. Plastic deformation begins within a grain that is subject to both a high stress
and oriented such that the stress causes a slippage between adjacent layers in the same
pattern. The incremental slippages, called dislocations, cause local cold-working. On the first
application of the stress, dislocations can move through many of the grains that are in the local
area of high stress. As the stress is repeated, more dislocations move through their respective
grains. Dislocation movement is impeded by the grain boundaries. After multiple stress
applications, the dislocations tend to accumulate at grain boundaries. Eventually they become
so dense that the grains "lock up" causing a loss of ductility and thus preventing further
dislocation movement. Subsequent applications of the stress cause the grain to tear, forming
cracks. Repeated stress applications cause the cracks to grow. Unless abated, the cracks
propagate with additional stress applications until sufficient cross sectional strength is lost to
cause a catastrophic failure of the material.
You can estimate the fatigue capacity of a material through the application of cyclic
tensile/compressive displacement loads with a uniaxial test machine. A plot of the cyclic stress
capacity of a material is called a fatigue or endurance curve. These curves are generated
through multiple cyclic tests at different stress levels. The number of cycles to failure usually
increases as the applied cyclic stress decreases, often until a threshold stress, known as the
endurance limit, is reached below which no fatigue failure occurs, regardless of the number of
applied cycles. An endurance curve for carbon and low alloy steels, taken from the ASME
Section VIII Division 2 Pressure Vessel Code displays below:
2. From either the Static or Dynamic Load Case Builders you must define, for every fatigue
load case, the number of anticipated cycles.
Also we have added a new FAT stress type.
3. Unless explicitly defined in the applicable code, CAESAR II calculates the fatigue stress the
same way it calculates the stress intensity.
IGE/TD/12 is the only piping code supported by CAESAR II that has
explicit instructions for calculating fatigue stresses. For more information on IGE/TD/12,
refer to IGE/TD/12 (on page 1009).
4. Allowable fatigue stresses are interpolated logarithmically from the fatigue curve based upon
the number of cycles designated for the load case. For static load cases, the calculated
stress is assumed to be a peak-to-peak cyclic value (for example, thermal expansion,
settlement, pressure, and so forth), so the allowable stress is extracted directly from the
fatigue curve. For harmonic and dynamic load cases, the calculated stress is assumed to be
a zero-to-peak cyclic value (for example, vibration, earthquake, and so forth), so the
extracted allowable is divided by two prior to use in the comparison.
5. The flip side of calculating the allowable fatigue stress for the designated number of cycles
is the calculation of the allowable number of cycles for the calculated stress level. You can
do this by logarithmically interpolating the "Cycles" axis of the fatigue curve based upon the
calculated stress value. Because static stresses are assumed to be peak-to-peak cyclic
values, the allowable number of cycles is interpolated directly from the fatigue curve.
Because harmonic and dynamic stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak cyclic values, the
allowable number of cycles is interpolated using twice the calculated stress value.
6. CAESAR II provides two reports for viewing the results of load cases for the FAT stress
type. The first of these is the standard Stress report that shows the calculated fatigue stress
and fatigue allowable at each node.
You can generate individual stress reports for each load case to show whether any of
the individual load cases in isolation fail the system
However, in those instances where there is more than one cyclic load case potentially
contributing to a fatigue failure, the Cumulative Usage report is appropriate. To generate this
report select all the FAT load cases that contribute to the overall system degradation. The
Cumulative Usage report lists for each node point the usage ratio actual cycle divided by
allowable cycles, and then sums these to obtain the total cumulative usage. A total greater than
1.0 indicates a potential fatigue failure.
experiences. Each horizontal line represents an operating range. At the each end of each
horizontal line, the temperatures and pressures defining the range are noted. At the center of
each horizontal line, the number of cycles for each range is defined.
Using this sketch of the operating ranges, the four fatigue load cases can be determined. Case
1: Cover the absolute extreme, from -20F and 0 psi to 500F and 1830 psi. This occurs 200
times. As a result of this case, the cycles for the ranges defined must be reduced by 200. The
first range (-20, 0 to 70, 0) is reduced to zero, and has no contribution to additional load cases.
The second range (70, 0 to 500, 1800) is reduced to 11,800 cycles. The third and fourth ranges
are similarly reduced to 199,800 cycles.
These same steps can be used to arrive at cases 2 through 4, reducing the number of
considered cycles at each step. This procedure is summarized in the table below.
Segment -20, 0 to 70, 0 70, 0 to 500, 1800 500, 1700 to 500, 500, 1800 to 500, 1830
1800
Case
After 3 0 0 12,000 0
After 4 0 0 0 0
This table is then used to set the load cases as cycles between the following load values:
Between -20F, 0 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (200 cycles)
Between 70F, 0 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (11,800 cycles)
Between 500F, 1770 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (188,000 cycles)
Between 500F, 1770 psig and 500F, 1800 psig (12,000 cycles)
Next enter the fatigue curve data for the material. This is done by clicking Fatigue Curves to
activate the Material Fatigue Curve dialog box. This dialog box can be used to enter the fatigue
curve for the materials.
For IGE/ TD/12, you only need to enter five sets of fatigue curves for fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W.
1. Enter up to eight Cycle versus Stress data points to define the curve. Interpolations are
made logarithmically.
2. Enter Cycle/Stress pairs in ascending cycle order.
3. Enter stress values as the allowable stress range, rather than the allowable Stress
Amplitude.
You can enter fatigue curve data from a text file, by clicking Read from file. This
displays a list of all \CAESAR\SYSTEM\*.FAT files.
The following fatigue curve files are delivered with CAESAR II. You can also construct additional
fatigue curve files. For more information on fatigue curve files, see Appendix A below:
5-110-1A.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS < 80 ksi
5-110-1B.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS = 115-130 ksi
5-110-2A.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve A
5-110-2B.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve B
5-110-2C.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve C
In this case for A106B low carbon steel operating at 500F, 5-110-1A.FAT is the appropriate
selection. This populates the fatigue curve data boxes in the dialog box:
The last four load cases represent the load set pairs defined earlier.
After you run the job the presence of a FAT stress type adds the Cumulative Usage
report to the list of available reports.
You can check the fatigue stress range against the fatigue curve allowable for each load case
by selecting it along with the Stresses report. A review of each load case confirms that all stress
levels passed.
However, this is not a true evaluation of the situation because it is not a case of either-or. The
piping system is subjected to all of these load cases throughout its expected design life, not just
one of them. Therefore, we must also review the Cumulative Usage report (on page 592),
which shows the total effect of all fatigue load cases, or any user-selected combination, on the
design life of the system. This report lists for each load case the expected number of cycles, the
allowable number of cycles (based upon the calculated stress), and the Usage Ratio (actual
cycles divided by allowable cycles). The Usage Ratios are then summed for all selected load
cases. If this sum exceeds 1.0, the system has exceeded its fatigue capabilities. In this case, it
is apparent that with the maximum cumulative usage ratio of 0.87 at node 115, this system is not
predicted to fail due to fatigue:
This produces the same types of reports as are available for the static analysis. They can be
processed as discussed earlier.
The only difference between the harmonic and static fatigue analyses is that for harmonic jobs
the calculated stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared
to only half of the stress value extracted from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the
Cumulative Usage report, the number of allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated
stress.
For other dynamic applications (response spectrum and time history), the stress type can be
identified as fatigue by selecting the stress type from the drop list for the Load Case or
Static/Dynamic Combination, and by entering the number of expected cycles in the provided
field.
Note that as with the harmonic analyses, the calculated stresses are assumed to be zero-to-
peak calculations so that they are compared to only half of the stress value extracted from the
fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the Cumulative Usage report, the number of allowable
cycles is based upon twice the calculated stress.
10000 38000.0
100000 20000.0
500000 13500.0
1000000 12500.0
0 0.0
*
You can create this text file by using any text editor. Lines beginning with an * are treated as
comment lines. It is good practice to use comment lines so that the data can be tied to a specific
material curve.
The first data line in the file the stress multiplier. This value is used to adjust the data values
from "zero to peak" to "peak to peak" or to convert the stress levels to psi. The entered values
are divided by this number. For example, if the stress values in the file represent the stress
amplitude, in psi, rather than a range, this "stress multiplier" should be 0.5. Following the stress
multiplier is the Fatigue Curve Data table. This table consists of eight lines, of two columns.
The first column is the Cycle column, and the second is the Stress column. For each value in
the cycle column, a corresponding stress value from the material fatigue curve is listed in the
stress column.
Fatigue curves intended for use with IGE/TD/12 are built slightly different. The first data line
contains three values: the stress multiplier, a modulus of elasticity correction, and a modulus of
elasticity multiplier (the correction factor is divided by this to convert to psi). After the files are
read in, the modulus of elasticity correction is inserted into the appropriate field on the Fatigue
Curve dialog. IGE/TD/12 fatigue files also include five sequential fatigue curves, Fatigue Class
D, E, F, G, and W, rather than one. You can use optional comment lines to separate the tables.
The comments help with the readability of the data file. You can best determine the format of the
IGE/TD/12 fatigue files by reviewing the contents of the TD12ST.FAT file.
In all tables, the number of cycles increases as you work down the table. If you do not have
enough data to use all eight lines, fill the unused lines with zeroes.
Where:
Sh = Hoop stress
Sa = Axial stress
Sq = Shear stress
"This should be used for establishing the range of stress, due regard being paid to the direction
and sign." For all other piping codes in CAESAR II, the fatigue stress is computed as the stress
intensity, as follows:
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (Default)
SI = Maximum of:
S1OT - S3OT
S1OB - S3OB
Max(S1IT,RPS) - Min(S3IT,RPS)
Max(S1IB,RPS) - Min(S3IB,RPS)
Where:
S1OT=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top
= (SLOT+HPSO)/2.0+(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2)1/2
Micro-Level Analysis
Stress analysis on the "Micro" level refers to the detailed evaluation of the individual materials
and boundary mechanisms comprising the composite material. In general, FRP pipe is
manufactured from laminates, which are constructed from elongated fibers of a commercial
grade of glass, E-glass, which are coated with a coupling agent or sizing prior to being
embedded in a thermosetting plastic material, typically epoxy or polyester resin.
This means, on the micro scale, that an analytical model must be created which simulates the
interface between these elements. Because the number and orientation of fibers is unknown at
any given location in a FRP sample, the simplest representation of the micro-model is that of a
single fiber, extending the length of the sample, embedded in a square profile of matrix.
Micro Level GRP Sample -- Single Fiber Embedded in Square Profile of Matrix
Plastic
2.75 x 103 .07 x 103 7.0 x 10-6
Matrix
The following failure modes of the composite must be similarly evaluated to:
failure of the fiber
failure of the coupling agent layer
failure of the matrix
failure of the fiber-coupling agent bond
You can evaluate stresses in the individual components through finite element analysis of the
strain continuity and equilibrium equations, based upon the assumption that there is a good
bond between the fiber and matrix, resulting in compatible strains between the two. For normal
stresses applied parallel to the glass fiber:
f = m = af / Ef = am / Em
af = am Ef / Em
Where:
f = Strain in the Fiber
= Strain in the Matrix
af = Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Fiber
Ef = Modulus of Elasticity of the Fiber
am = Axial Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Matrix
Em = Modulus of Elasticity of the Matrix
Due to the large ratio of the modulus of elasticity of the fiber to that of the matrix, it is apparent
that nearly all of the axial normal stress in the fiber-matrix composite is carried by the fiber.
Exact values are (Reference 6):
af = L / [ + (1-)Em/Ef]
am = L / [Ef/Em + (1-)]
Where:
L = nominal longitudinal stress across composite
= glass content by volume
The continuity equations for the glass-matrix composite seem less complex for normal stresses
perpendicular to the fibers, because the weak point of the material seems to be limited by the
glass-free cross-section, shown below:
For this reason, it would appear that the strength of the composite would be equal to that of the
matrix for stresses in this direction. In fact, its strength is less than that of the matrix due to
stress intensification in the matrix caused by the irregular stress distribution in the vicinity of the
stiffer glass. Because the elongation over distance D1 must be equal to that over the longer
distance D2, the strain, and thus the stress at location D1 must exceed that at D2 by the ratio
D2/D1. Maximum intensified transverse normal stresses in the composite are:
Where:
b = intensified normal stress transverse to the fiber, in the composite
= nominal transverse normal stress across composite
m = Poisson's ratio of the matrix
Because of the Poisson effect, this stress produces an additional 'am equal to the
following:
'am = Vmb
Shear stress can be allocated to the individual components again through the use of continuity
equations. It would appear that the stiffer glass would resist the bulk of the shear stresses.
However, unless the fibers are infinitely long, all shears must eventually pass through the matrix
in order to get from fiber to fiber. Shear stress between fiber and matrix can be estimated as
Where:
ab = intensified shear stress in composite
T = nominal shear stress across composite
Gm = shear modulus of elasticity in matrix
Gf = shear modulus of elasticity in fiber
Determination of the stresses in the fiber-matrix interface is more complex. The bonding agent
has an inappreciable thickness, and thus has an indeterminate stiffness for consideration in the
continuity equations. Also, the interface behaves significantly differently in shear, tension, and
compression, showing virtually no effects from the latter. The state of the stress in the interface
is best solved by omitting its contribution from the continuity equations, and simply considering
that it carries all stresses that must be transferred from fiber to matrix.
After the stresses have been apportioned, they must be evaluated against appropriate failure
criteria. The behavior of homogeneous, isotropic materials such as glass and plastic resin,
under a state of multiple stresses is better understood. Failure criterion for isotropic material
reduces the combined normal and shear stresses (a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) to a single stress, an
equivalent stress, that can be compared to the tensile stress present at failure in a material
under uniaxial loading, that is, the ultimate tensile stress, S ult.
Different theories, and different equivalent stress functions f(a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) have been
proposed, with possibly the most widely accepted being the Huber-von Mises-Hencky criterion,
which states that failure will occur when the equivalent stress reaches a critical value the
ultimate strength of the material:
eq = {1/2 [(a - b)2 + (b - c)2+ (c - a)2 + 6(ab2+ ac2+ bc2)} Sult
This theory does not fully cover all failure modes of the fiber in that it omits reference to direction
of stress, that is, tensile versus compressive. The fibers, being relatively long and thin,
predominantly demonstrate buckling as their failure mode when loaded in compression.
The equivalent stress failure criterion has been corroborated, with slightly non-conservative
results, by testing. Little is known about the failure mode of the adhesive interface, although
empirical evidence points to a failure criterion which is more of a linear relationship between the
normal and the square of the shear stresses. Failure testing of a composite material loaded only
in transverse normal and shear stresses are shown in the following figure. The kink in the curve
shows the transition from the matrix to the interface as the failure point.
Mini-Level Analysis
ab = ab / 2 GL
bc = bc / 2 GT
ac = ac / 2 GL
Where:
ij = strain along direction i on face j
ij, ab = stress (normal, shear) along direction i on face j
EL = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
VL = Poissons ratio of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
ET = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
VT = Poissons ratio of laminate layer in transverse direction
GL = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
GT = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
These relationships require that four modules of elasticity, EL, ET, GL, and GT, and two Poissons
ratios, VL and V, be evaluated for the continuum. Extensive research (References 4 - 10) has
been done to estimate these parameters. There is general consensus that the longitudinal terms
can be explicitly calculated; for cases where the fibers are significantly stiffer than the matrix,
they are:
EL = EF + EM(1 - )
GL = GM +/ [ 1 / (GF - GM) + (1 -) / (2GM)]
VL = VF + VM(1 - )
You cannot calculate parameters in the transverse direction. You can only calculate the upper
and lower bounds. Correlations with empirical results have yielded approximations (Reference 5
and 6):
ET = [EM(1+0.85f2) / {(1-VM2)[(1-f)1.25 + f(EM/EF)/(1-VM2)]}
GT = GM (1 + 0.6) / [(1 - )1.25 + (GM/GF)]
VT = VL (EL / ET)
Use of these parameters permits the development of the homogeneous material models that
facilitate the calculation of longitudinal and transverse stresses acting on a laminate layer. The
resulting stresses can be allocated to the individual fibers and matrix using relationships
developed during the micro analysis.
Macro-Level Analysis
Where:
ExLAM = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate
tLAM = thickness of laminate
Ek = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate layer k
Cik = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to longitudinal laminate axis
Cjk = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to transverse laminate axis
tk = thickness of laminate layer k
After composite properties are determined, the component stiffness parameters can be
determined as though it were made of homogeneous material that is, based on component
cross-sectional and composite material properties.
Normal and shear stresses can be determined from 1) forces and moments acting on the cross-
sections, and 2) the cross-sectional properties themselves. These relationships can be written
as:
aa = Faa / Aaa Mba / Sba Mca / Sca
bb = Fbb / Abb Mab / Sab Mcb / Scb
cc = Fcc / Acc Mac / Sac Mbc / Sbc
ab = Fab / Aab Mbb / Rab
BS 7159
BS 7159 uses methods and formulas familiar to the world of steel piping stress analysis in order
to calculate stresses on the cross-section, with the assumption that FRP components have
material parameters based on continuum evaluation or test. All coincident loads, such as
thermal, weight, pressure, and axial extension due to pressure need be evaluated
simultaneously. Failure is based on the equivalent stress calculation method. Because one
normal stress (radial stress) is traditionally considered to be negligible in typical piping
configurations, this calculation reduces to the greater of (except when axial stresses are
compressive):
A slight difficulty arises when evaluating the calculated stress against an allowable, due to the
orthotropic nature of the FRP piping normally the laminate is designed in such a way to make
the pipe much stronger in the hoop, than in the longitudinal, direction, providing more than one
allowable stress. This difficulty is resolved by defining the allowable in terms of a design
strained, rather than stress, in effect adjusting the stress allowable in proportion to the strength
in each direction. In other words, the allowable stresses for the two equivalent stresses above
would be (ed ELAMX) and (ed ELAMH) respectively. In lieu of test data, system design strain is
selected from Tables 4.3 and 4.4 of the Code, based on expected chemical and temperature
conditions.
Actual stress equations as enumerated by BS 7159 display below:
1. Combined stress straights and bends:
C = (f 2+ 4S2)0.5 d ELAM
or
C = (X2 + 4S2)0.5 d ELAM
Where:
ELAM = modulus of elasticity of the laminate; in CAESAR II, the first equation uses the
modulus for the hoop direction and in the second equation, the modulus for the longitudinal
direction is used.
C = combined stress
= circumferential stress
= P + B
S = torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
X = longitudinal stress
= XP + XB
P = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + td) / 2 td
B = circumferential bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFi)2 + Mo SIFo)2] 0.5 for bends, = 0 for straights
MS = torsional moment on cross-section
Di = internal pipe diameter
td = design thickness of reference laminate
I = moment of inertia of pipe
m = pressure stress multiplier of component
P = internal pressure
Mi = in-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFi= circumferential stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
M = out-plane bending moment on cross-section
BS 7159 also dictates the means of calculating flexibility and stress intensification (k- and i-)
factors for bend and tee components, for use during the flexibility analysis.
BS 7159 imposes a number of limitations on its use, the most notable being: the limitation of a
system to a design pressure of 10 bar, the restriction to the use of designated design laminates,
and the limited applicability of the k- and i- factor calculations to pipe bends (that is, mean wall
thickness around the intrados must be 1.75 times the nominal thickness or less).
This code appears to be more sophisticated, yet easy to use. We recommend that its calculation
techniques be applied even to FRP systems outside its explicit scope, with the following
recommendations:
Pressure stiffening of bends should be based on actual design pressure, rather than
allowable design strain.
Design strain should be based on manufacturers test and experience data wherever
possible (with consideration for expected operating conditions).
Fitting k- and i- factors should be based on manufacturers test or analytic data, if available.
UKOOA
The UKOOA Specification is similar in many respects to the BS 7159 Code, except that it
simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more limitations and more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions.
Rather than explicitly calculating a combined stress, the specification defines an idealized
envelope of combinations of axial and hoop stresses that cause the equivalent stress to reach
failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(x / x-all)2 + (hoop / hoop-all)2 - [x hoop / (x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
x-all = allowable stress, axial
hoop-all = allowable stress, hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all (also known as sa(0:1)) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice sx-(a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure), as shown in the following figure.
An implicit modification to this requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of
safety (typically equal to 2/3) while other loads are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = allowable design pressure
f1 = factor of safety for 97.5% lower confidence limit, usually 0.85
f2 = system factor of safety, usually 0.67
f3 = ratio of residual allowable, after mechanical loads
= 1 - (2 ab) / (r f1 LTHS)
ab = axial bending stress due to mechanical loads
r = a(0:1)/a(2:1)
a(0:1) = long term axial tensile strength in absence of pressure load
a(2:1) = long term axial tensile strength under only pressure loading
LTHS = long term hydrostatic strength (hoop stress allowable)
LTHP = long term hydrostatic pressure allowable
This has been implemented in the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software as:
Where:
P = design pressure
D = pipe mean diameter
t = pipe wall thickness
K and i-factors for bends are to be taken from the BS 7159 Code, while no such factors are to
be used for tees.
The UKOOA Specification is limited in that shear stresses are ignored in the evaluation process;
no consideration is given to conditions where axial stresses are compressive; and most required
calculations are not explicitly detailed.
Selecting material (20) FRP (FIBER REIN PLASTIC) activates the CAESAR II orthotropic
material model and brings in the appropriate material parameters from the pre-selected
materials.
When the software uses the orthotropic material model, it changes two fields from their previous
isotropic values: Elastic Modulus (C) changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio
changes to Ea/Eh*Vh/a, as shown below.
These changes are necessary because orthotropic models require more material parameters
than isotropic models. For example, there is no longer a single modulus of elasticity for the
material, but now two: axial and hoop. There is no longer a single Poissons ratio, but again two:
Vh/a (Poissons ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced strain in the hoop
direction) and Va/h (Poissons ratio relating strain in the hoop direction due to stress-induced
strain in the axial direction). Also, unlike isotropic materials, the shear modulus does not follow
the relationship G = 1 / E (1-V), so that value must be explicitly input.
To minimize input, a few of these parameters can be combined due to their use in the software.
Generally, the only time that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction or the Poissons
ratios is used during flexibility analysis is when calculating piping elongation due to pressure
(note that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction is used when determining certain stress
allowables for the BS 7159 code):
dx = (x / Ea - Va/h * hoop / Eh) L
Where:
Va/h = Poissons ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced
strain in the hoop direction
This equation can be rearranged, to require only a single new parameter, as:
dx = (x - Va/h hoop * (Ea / Eh )) * L / Ea
In theory, that single parameter, Vh/a is identical to (Ea / Eh * Va/h) giving: dx = (x -
Vh/ahoop) * L / Ea
The shear modulus of the material is required in ordered to develop the stiffness matrix. In
CAESAR II, this value, expressed as a ratio of the axial modulus of elasticity, is brought in from
the pre-selected material, or can be changed on a problem-wise basis using the Special
Execution Parameter (on page 294) dialog box accessed by the Environment menu from the
piping spreadsheet (see figure). This dialog box also shows the coefficient of thermal expansion
(extracted from the vendor file or user entered) for the material, as well as the default laminate
type, as defined by the BS 7159 Code:
Type 1
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with an internal and an external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
Type 2
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with an internal and an
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Type 3
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with an internal and
an external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The latter is used during the calculation of flexibility and stress intensification factors for piping
bends.
You can enter bend and tee information by using the auxiliary spreadsheets.
You can also change bend radius and laminate type data on a bend by bend basis, as
shown in the corresponding figure.
Specify BS 7159 fabricated and molded tee types by defining CAESAR II tee types 1 and 3
respectively at intersection points. CAESAR II automatically calculates the appropriate flexibility
and stress intensification factors for these fittings as per code requirements.
Enter the required code data on the Allowables auxiliary spreadsheet. The software provides
fields for both codes, number 27 BS 7159 and number 28 UKOOA. After selecting BS 7159,
CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = Longitudinal Design Stress = d ELAMX
Kn1 through Kn9 = Cyclic Reduction Factor (as per BS 7159 paragraph 4.3.4)
Eh/Ea = Ratio of Hoop Modulus of Elasticity to Axial Modulus of Elasticity
After selecting UKOOA, CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = hoop design stress = f 1 * LTHS
R1 through R9 = ratio r = (a(0:1) / a(2:1))
f2 = system factor of safety (defaults to 0.67 if omitted)
K = temperature differential multiplier (same as BS 7159)
These parameters need only be entered a single time, unless they change at some point in the
system.
Performing the analysis is simpler than the system modeling. <Product> evaluates the operating
parameters and automatically builds the appropriate load cases. In this case, three are built:
Operating includes pipe and fluid weight, temperature, equipment displacements, and
pressure. This case is used to determine maximum code stress/strain, operational
equipment nozzle and restraint loads, hot displacements, and so forth.
Cold (same as above, except excluding temperature and equipment movements). This case
is used to determine cold equipment nozzle and restraint loads.
Expansion (cyclic stress range between the cold and hot case). This case may be used to
evaluate fatigue criteria as per paragraph 4.3.4 of the BS 7159 Code.
After analyzing the response of the system under these loads, CAESAR II displays a menu of
possible output reports. Reports may be designated by selecting a combination of load case and
results type (displacements, restraint loads, element forces and moments, and stresses). From
the stress report, you can determine at a glance whether the system passed or failed the stress
criteria.
For UKOOA, the piping is considered to be within allowable limits when the operating stress falls
within the idealized stress envelope this is illustrated by the shaded area in the following figure.
Conclusion
Pipe stress analysis software with worldwide acceptance is now available for evaluation of FRP
piping systems as per the requirements of the most sophisticated FRP piping codes. This
means that access to the same analytical methods and tools enjoyed by engineers using steel
pipe is available to users of FRP piping design.
References
1. Cross, Wilbur, An Authorized History of the ASME Boiler an Pressure Vessel Code, ASME,
1990
2. Olson, J. and Cramer, R., "Pipe Flexibility Analysis Using IBM 705 Computer Pro\-gram
MEC 21, Mare Island Report 277-59," 1959
3. Fiberglass Pipe Handbook, Composites Institute of the Society of the Plastics Indus\-try,
1989
4. Hashin, Z., "Analysis of Composite Materials a Survey," Journal of Applied Mechanics, Sept.
1983
5. Greaves, G., "Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Design," Ciba-Geigy Pipe Systems
6. Puck, A. and Schneider, W., "On Failure Mechanisms and Failure Criteria of Filament-
Wound Glass-Fibre/Resin Composites," Plastics and Polymers, Feb. 1969
7. Hashin, Z., "The Elastic Moduli of Heterogeneous Materials," Journal of Applied Mechanics,
March 1962
8. Hashin, Z. and Rosen, B. Walter, "The Elastic Moduli of Fibre Reinforced Materials," Journal
of Applied Mechanics, June 1964
9. Whitney, J. M. and Riley, M. B., "Elastic Properties of Fiber Reinforced Composite
Materials," AIAA Journal, Sept. 1966
10. Walpole, L. J., "Elastic Behavior of Composite Materials: Theoretical Foundations,"
Advances in Applied Mechanics, Volume 21, Academic Press, 1989
11. BS 7159: 1989 British Standard Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Glass
Reinforced Plastics GRP Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites.
12. UK Offshore Operators Association Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore., 1994
WRC 329
The only piping codes that cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 options, or the option to use
the ASME NC and ND rules for reduced intersections, are BS806 and the Swedish Power
Method 1. These codes do not use the effective section modulus, and any extrapolation of the
ASME methods into these codes is unwarranted.
There is a small difference between Use WRC329 and Reduced Intersection = WRC329. Use
Use WRC329 for all full and reduced intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced tees.
Use Reduced Intersection =WRC329 for reduced fittings that are not welding tees or
reinforced fabricated tees. A fitting is reduced when d/D is less than 0.975.
WRC 329 impact on use with B31.3, B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, or B31.1 (1967) codes
1. Include torsional stresses in all stress calculations (sustained and occasional).
2. Use a torsional SIF of (r/R) io.
3. Compute i(ib) use 0.6(R/T)2/3 [1+0.5(r/R)3](r/rp).
4. For i(ob) use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9 use 0.9(R/T)2/3 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
5. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
6. If the radius at the junction provided is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
WRC 329 impact on use with B31.1, B31.8, ASME III NC, ASME III ND, Navy 505, Z183, Z184,
or Swedish Method 2 codes
1. For ib use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9
use 0.9(R/T)2/3 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and
use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
2. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
3. If a radius at the provided junction is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
Bonney Forge Sweepolets tend to be a little more conservative because they are used for
fittings in the nuclear industry. Bonney Forge Sweepolet equations can generate SIFs less than
one because they are stronger than the girth butt weld used as the unity basis for the code fitting
SIFs. CAESAR II does not permit SIFs of less than 1.0. If you generate a Bonney Forge
Sweepolet SIF that is less than 1.0, the default value 1.0 is used.
The Bonney Forge SIF Data came from the technical flyer: "Bonney Forge Stress Intensification
Factors" Bulletin 789/Sl-1, Copyright 1976.
Although CAESAR II allows the specification of two element intersections, you cannot specify
two SIFs at a single node and get an increased SIF. For example, you cannot specify a socket
weld SIF and an intersection SIF at the same point.
Stress calculations for under-specified fittings
For two element joints use the largest diameter and the smallest wall thickness, when
discrepancies exist between the two adjoining pipes. For two element fittings modeled as socket
welds use the largest wall thickness. Both of these selections generate the largest SIFs and the
most conservative stress calculations for under-specified fittings.
The mismatch given for girth butt welds is the average mismatch and not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied.
If a fillet leg is given in conjunction with a socket weld SIF definition, then both socket weld types
result in the same SIF.
B31.3 sustained case SIF
The B31.3 sustained case SIF factor in the setup file affects all of the following codes: B31.4,
B31.8, B31.4 Chapter XI, Navy 505, Z662, and B31.1 (1967). The default value for the B31.3
SUS case SIF factor is 1.0.
Corrosion
Calculate the corroded effective section modulus by using (r2)te
Where:
r is the average cross sectional radius of the non-corroded pipe
(te) is the corroded thickness.
Select the thickness (te) based on the non-corroded thicknesses of the branch and
header, in other words, the lesser of Th and iTb. The resulting value has the corrosion
subtracted from it before the effective section modulus calculation is made.
Always use the corroded wall thickness to calculate the Maximum Shear Stress regardless of
the setting of the All Stress Cases Corroded option located in the setup file.
Using more than one Piping Code
If you use different piping codes in one job, the code that displays at the top of the Output
Stress report is the last code used during model input. SIFs, allowables, and code equations
are all computed in accordance with the code that varies with the input.
When there are multiple piping codes in the same piping job, and a piping code change occurs
at an intersection, if the intersection is completely defined with three pipes framing into the
intersection then the piping code used to generate the SIF equations will be that one associated
with the first header pipe framing into the intersection. If the intersection is only partially defined,
then the piping code will be selected from the first pipe framing into the intersection point.
B31.4 Z662
These codes tell you to add the longitudinal stresses due to weight, pressure, and other
sustained loadings so torsion is not added. Torsional shear stresses are not longitudinal
stresses. You can request that torsion is added into the sustained and occasional stress
equations by including the Add Torsion in SL Stress option in the setup file. The torsion stress
is still not intensified as it is in the power piping codes. This lack of intensification is considered
an oversight and is corrected in WRC 329. You can include this fix by running any of the above
codes and including the Use WRC330 option in the setup file.
B31.1 and the ASME Section III piping codes provide stress intensification factors for reduced
branch ends. None of the other piping codes provide these SIFs. The Reduced Intersection
option in the setup file enables other piping code users to access improved SIFs for reduced
fittings. You should review the notes associated with the B31.1 and the ASME Section III codes
that follow to verify that any other parameters or input associated with the reduced intersection
calculations are set as necessary.
Pressure Stiffening
If you request pressure stiffening for those codes that do not normally provide it, CAESAR II
applies pressure stiffening for all bends and for both miter types.
Code-Specific Notes
B31.1
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.1
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=No option in the setup file.
Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End
D2 - Diameter of the Small End
t2 - Thickness of the Small End
Alpha - the Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan[ (D1-D2) / (2*length of the sloped portion of the reducer*0.6) ]
Alpha is the slope of the (concentric) reducer transition in degrees. If unspecified,
CAESAR II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60 and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.
B31.3
Flanged end modifications using B31.3
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress (as selected)
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.33
B31.4 Chapter IX
Chapter IX presents the offshore requirements of the B31.4 (on page 985).
Calculate Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as stated in the standard B31.4
code.
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.60 or 0.72, see Table A402.3.5(a) of the B31.4 Code
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
SL = Sa + Sb or Sa - Sb, whichever results in greater stress value
Sa = Axial Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Sb = Bending Stress
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + St2]1/2
St = Torsional Stress
B31.5
B31.5 reducer default values
The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.
B31.8
Restrained Pipe (as defined in Section 833.1):
For Straight Pipe:
Both SL and SC < 0.9ST (OPE)
Both SL, and SC < 0.9ST (SUS)
SL < 0.9ST and Sc < ST (OCC)
and
* The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable.
For All Other Components
SL < 0.9ST (OPE, SUS, OCC)
Modifications to the flexibility factor and Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) using B31.8
Modifications to the flexibility factor and SIF of bends resulting from flanged ends are permitted
by the code.
Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as in the standard B31.8 Code.
Make all stress calculations using the non-corroded wall thickness for the hoop and longitudinal
stresses. Use the corroded thickness for the combined stress.
Calculate the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations, each with specific allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable displays in the stress report along with its specific
allowable. The stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh F1ST
Longitudinal Stress: |SL| 0.8S
Equivalent Stress: Se 0.9S
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) D / 2t
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.50 or 0.72 see Table A842.22 of B31.8
B31.9 Notes
Paragraph 919.4.1.b states that for analysis methods follow B31.1. For more information, refer
to B31.1.
Minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees using NC and ND
The minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees is 2.1.
CANADIAN Z662
Calculate pressure stiffening using Z662
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
Fac = Construction Design Factor
T = Temperature De-rating Factor
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.0)
L = Location Factor
CAESAR II assumes that Section 4.6.2 of the Z662 code establishes a requirement for the
allowable operating stress of 0.9 x S x T whenever the net axial stress is compressive in the
absence of bending stress, and an allowable operating stress of S x T when the net axial stress
is compressive in the presence of bending stress.
Section 4.6.2 requires the following:
1. The reduction of the axial expansion stress by the product of Poissons Ratio and the
pressure hoop stress.
2. The addition of the hoop stress to the axial stress.
The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is compressive,
implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the longitudinal pressure
thrust loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles these requirements, in the
operating load case, in the following manner:
1. If FAC is 1.0, the piping system is fully restrained in the axial direction as described in
Section 4.6.2.1, and the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh + E a (T2 - T1) - v Sh < 0.9 S x T
2. If FAC is 0.001, the piping system is buried, but the soil supports are modeled (rather than
just assumed to be fully rigid). This setting removes the longitudinal pressure stress from the
equation (as described above), and takes bending stresses into consideration, as required
by Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh +Fax/A + Sb - v Sh < S x T
3. If FAC is 0.0, the piping system is either not restrained, or is a freely spanning or above
ground portion of a restrained line, as described in Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the
longitudinal pressure stress is restored, so this formula only comes into effect if the net axial
stress including pressure is compressive, in which case the operating stress is calculated
as:
Sh +Slp + Fax/A + Sb < S x T
4. CAESAR II does not do an operating code stress check for those elements for which the net
axial stress is longitudinal.
5. CAESAR II does not check for buckling, as required by Section 4.6.2.2.2.
NAVY 505
Calculate pressure stiffening using Navy 505
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIF)s for intersections using Navy 505
In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are the same.
BS806
For BS806, the maximum hot stress case is considered to be the operating load case. Operating
load case allowables are only given as per BS806 when the creep rupture strength governs the
stress range allowable. See BS806 sect 4.11.2.
The CAESAR II equation modeling of the BS806 SIF curves for bends displays in the following
plots.
WRC329 recommendations
Swedish Method 1 cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 recommendations. WRC 329, if
requested, is ignored.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using Swedish codes
Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same.
Swedish Code item 9 is dealt with as a US tapered transition. Also, items 10 and 11 in the
Swedish table 9:2 correspond to items 8 and 9 in the CAESAR II nomenclature.
B31.1 (1967)
Calculate full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch using B31.1 (1967)
B31.1 (1967) uses ii = io for full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch, and for
reduced intersections uses ii = 0.75io + 0.25 for both the header and the branch.
Stoomwezen
Sc = The yield stress at room temperature is referred to as Re in the code.
Fac = A constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, refer
to Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Where:
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
SSL = Sustained Stress (PD/4t + 0.75i Mb/Z)
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file
CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends using CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bends, including
widely spaced miters.
Sr = Minimum of 1.25F1 + 0.25F2; Fr * Rs - F2; or Fr (1.25 R1 + 0.25 R2) The latter for higher
temperatures; above 425C for austenitic stainless steel, or above 370C for other
materials.
OCC Occasional Load Factor from the configuration file (defaults to 1.2)
RS = Permissible Extent of Stress for 7000 Cycles (from Code Table 10.2)
FDBR
FDBR is similar to Code-Specific Settings in most requirements. For more information, see
Code-Specific Settings.
BS 7159
BS 7159 for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe requires that you evaluate the operating
load case only. You must verify the following operating load case combined stress requirements
are met:
If Sx is tensile:
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
or
if Sx is compressive:
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
Circumferential Stress
for bends
for tees
Calculate the stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends using BS 7159
The stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends vary based on laminate type:
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
You can enter the laminate type in the Bend Type field, or set the type default on the
Special Execution Parameter dialog box.
UKOOA
The United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association (UKOOA) Specification and
Recommended Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore is similar in many respects to the
BS 7159, except that it simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions. Rather than explicitly calculating a combined
stress, the specification defines an idealized envelope of combinations of axial and hoop
stresses which cause the equivalent stress to reach failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(x / -all)2 + hoop / hoop-all)2 - [x hoop / (x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
x-all = Allowable Stress Axial
hoop-all = Allowable Stress Hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all also known as a(0:1) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice x a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure. An implicit modification to this
requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of safety typically equal to 2/3
while other stresses are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = Allowable Design Pressure
f1 = Factor of Safety for 97.5% Lower Confidence Limit Usually 0.85
f2 = System Factor of Safety Usually 0.67
f3 = Ratio of Residual Allowable After Mechanical Loads
= 1 - (2 sab) / (r f1 LTHS)
sab = Axial Bending Stress Due to Mechanical Loads
r = a(0:1) / a(2:1)
a(0:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength In Absence Of Pressure Load
a(2:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength Under Pressure Loading Only
LTHS = Long Term Hydrostatic Strength Hoop Stress Allowable
LTHP = Long Term Hydrostatic Pressure Allowable
This is implemented in the CAESAR II using the following equations:
Where:
P = Design Pressure
Dm = Pipe Mean Diameter
t = Pipe Wall Thickness
On the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, the product of f1 and LTHS is entered in the SH1, SH2,
SH3 fields; r is entered in the F1, F2, F3 fields; f2 is entered in the Eff field; and the temperature
reduction factor K (described for BS 7159 above) is entered in the Fac field if omitted, it defaults
to 1.0. K- and i-factors for bends and tees, and bending and pressure stresses are calculated
as described for the BS 7159.
IGE/TD/12
CAESAR II performs calculations as per the IGE/TD/12 Edition 2 code requirements. The
complexity of these requirements far exceeds what can be described here. We recommend that
you acquire a copy of this code from the International Institution of Gas Engineers & Managers.
Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, or section moduli
using DNV
DNV does not provide any guidance on calculating SIFs, flexibility factors, or section moduli. An
informal poll of DNV experts and users was taken and the decision was made to use the B31.1
Power Code. Make all stress calculations using the corroded wall thickness.
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) (D t) / 2t
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
ns = Hoop Stress Yielding Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMYS = Specified Minimum Yield Strength at Operating Temperature
nu = Hoop Stress Bursting Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMTS = Specified Minimum Tensile Strength at Operating Temperature
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress
n = Equivalent Stress Usage Factor; see Table C4 of the DNV Code
Se = [Sh2 + SL2 - ShSL + 3t2]1/2
t = Torsional Stress
EN-13480
Flexibility calculations using EN-13480
EN-13480 uses the hot modulus of elasticity in the flexibility calculations (Sect 12.1.7.2). The
expansion allowable stress is subsequently modified by the ratio of Eh/Ec.
EN-13480 creep
For more information, see Creep Loading (on page 933)
GPTC/Z380
The recommendations of this code apply only to above ground steel piping through 450F.
GPTC/Z380 and B31.8, prior to 2004, recommendations are similar in many ways. The
differences between GPTC/Z380 and B31.8 display below:
The longitudinal joint factors vary slightly between B31.8 Table 841.115a and GPTC/Z380
Table 192.113.
The design factor in B31.8 Table 841.114b provides more detail than GPTC/Z380 Table
192.11.
The allowable for the combined stress calculation in GPTC/Z380 Section 192.159-1.5e
includes a "0.75" factor, while B31.8 Section 833.4 does not.
GPTC/Z380 uses a single stress intensification factor (SIF) for both in-plane and out-of-
plane loads, while B31.8 distinguishes between in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs.
ISO-14692
ISO-14692 addresses the analysis of Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe. Qualification is based
on the comparison of actual stresses, hoop and axial, to a failure envelope. See BS 7159 (on
page 1006) for the CAESAR II approach for FRP pipe analysis.
HPGSL
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using HPGSL
HPGSL provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane stress
intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections.
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency Minimum Wall Thickness Only
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
JPI
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using JPI
JPI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency minimum wall thickness only
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default - 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
Local Coordinates
Many analytical models in engineering are based upon being able to define a real physical
object mathematically. This is accomplished by mapping the dimensions of the physical object
into a similar mathematical space. Mathematical space is usually assumed to be either two-
dimensional or three-dimensional. For piping analysis, the three dimensional space is
necessary, because almost all piping systems are three dimensional in nature.
Two typical three-dimensional mathematical systems are shown below in Figure 1. Both of these
systems are "Cartesian Coordinate Systems". Each axis in these systems is perpendicular to all
other axes.
Physically, using your right hand, what do the above equations mean? This question is best
answered by Figure 3.
The first method is to modify the configuration file in the current data directory. This can be
accomplished from the Main Menu, by selecting Tools>Configure Setup. After the
configuration dialog appears, select the Geometry tab, as shown in Figure 5. On this tab, click
the Z-axis Vertical check box, as shown in the following figure.
The second method to obtain a global coordinate system with the Z-axis vertical is to switch
coordinate systems from within the input for the specific job at hand. This can be accomplished
from the Special Execution Parameters dialog box of the piping input processor. This dialog
box is shown below in Figure 6.
Defining a Model
Using the CAESAR II default coordinate system (Y-axis vertical), and assuming the system
shown below in Figure 7, the corresponding element definitions are given in Figure 8.
CAESAR II determines the appropriate components in the global directions, based on the
current direction cosines, which default to those of the preceding element.
Rotating the model: by using the List processor or by clicking List Input . The List
processor presents the model in a spreadsheet, format, as shown in Figure 8. Options in this
processor allow you to rotate the model about any of the three global axes, or a specified
amount. For example, if the model shown in Figures 7 and 8 is rotated a negative -90
degrees about the global Y-axis, the result is as shown in Figure 10.
Duplicating the model: duplication can also be accomplished by using the List processor.
The entire model, or any sub-section of the model, can be duplicated.
Restraint loads and displacements are checked in the global coordinate system. This is
necessary because restraint loads and displacements are nodal quantities. Element loads and
stresses are most often evaluated in their local coordinate system. A good example illustrating
the use of a local (element) coordinate system is the free body diagram, of forces and moments.
The forces and moments in this free body diagram remain the same, regardless of the position
of the element in the global coordinate system. Note however, that each element has its own
local coordinate system. Furthermore, the local coordinate system of one element may be
different from the local coordinate system of a different element.
While the global coordinate system is typically referred to using the capital letters X, Y, and Z,
local coordinate systems use a variety of nomenclature. In almost all cases, local coordinate
systems use lower case letters. Typical local coordinate system axes are: xyz, abc, and uvw.
CAESAR II uses xyz to denote the local element coordinate system.
The local coordinate system for an element is related to the global coordinate system through a
rule. There may be a number of such rules, depending on the type of element. In CAESAR II,
the following rules are used to define the local coordinate systems of the piping elements in a
model.
The straight elements of the model and their local coordinate systems in Figure 7 are
reproduced below in Figure 11. Notice that each straight element has its own local coordinate
system, and each element is aligned differently in this model.
The local coordinate systems for the bend end points in Figure 11 are displayed below in Figure
12.
Output review involves checking various output reports to ensure the system responds within
certain limits. These checks include:
Checking that operating displacements make sense and are within any operational limits to
avoid ponding. Displacements, being nodal quantities, are reviewed in the global coordinate
system. There is no local coordinate system associated with nodes. For the model defined in
Figures 7 and 8, the operating displacements are shown in Figure 15 below.
This report shows the movements of all of the nodes in the model, in each of the six degrees
of freedom, in the global coordinate system.
Checking that the restraint loads for the structural load cases are reasonable. This includes
ensuring that the restraints can be designed to carry the computed load. Restraints being
nodal quantities are reviewed in the global coordinate system. There is no local coordinate
system associated with restraints. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, the operating /
sustained restraint summary is shown in Figure 16 below.
Checking the code cases for codes stress compliance. Typically the code stress is
compared to the allowable stress for each node on each element. Occasionally, when there
is an overstress condition, a review of axial, bending, and torsion stresses are necessary.
These stresses axial, bending, and torsion are local coordinate system terms, and therefore
relate to the elements local coordinate system. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, a
portion of the sustained stress report is shown in Figure 17 below.
When the equipment coordinate system aligns with the global coordinate system of the piping
model, the nozzle loads from the restraint report (node 50 in Figure 14) can be used in the
nozzle evaluation. However, when the equipment nozzle is skewed as it is in the case of node
50 in Figure 14, the application of the loads is more difficult. In this case, it is best to use the
loads from the elements force/moment report, in local coordinates. The only thing to remember
here is to flip the signs on all of the forces and moments, because the element force/moment
report shows the loads on the pipe element, not on the nozzle. For the element FROM node 40
to node 50, the local element force/moment report is shown in Figure 18 below.
Notice that the loads shown in Figure 19 are in the CAESAR II global coordinate system. This
can be easily verified by comparing these values to those in the restraint summary for the
operating load case as shown previously in Figure 16.
The global restraint forces at node 50, in global coordinates, for the operating case are:
FX = 323 MX = -953
FY = 4 MY = -9
FZ = -271 MZ = -548
Using this data as input to GlbtoLocal, the utility yields the forces on the restraint in the
elements local coordinate system. This is shown in Figure 21 below.
Compare the set of values labeled Rotated Displacements / Load Vector with the Local
Element Force / Moment report, as shown above. A change in sign is necessary because the
Restraint report shows loads acting on the restraint, while the Element report shows loads
acting on the element.
Miscellaneous Processors
This section discusses the processors that are available in CAESAR II.
In This Section
Material Database.......................................................................... 1034
Accounting ..................................................................................... 1042
Units File Operations ..................................................................... 1048
Batch Stream Processing .............................................................. 1052
CAESAR II Error Processing ......................................................... 1053
Material Database
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Materials
Main window menu: Tools > Materials
Defines the physical properties and code-dependent allowable stresses for more than 300
materials. You can edit and manage the delivered materials data, as well as create new
materials, using the Material Database Editor. To open the editor, click Tools > Materials or
click Materials on the toolbar.
Print - Prints the materials data for every material in the entire material database.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the
Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Clear Screen to Add - Saves the current editor window contents, and then clears
the screen so you can add a new material. For more information, see Add a new
material to the database (on page 1036).
Edit a Material - Allows you to edit a material item in the database. For more
information, see Edit a material in the database (on page 1037).
Delete a Material - Deletes the material from the database. For more information,
see Delete a material from the database (on page 1037).
Save Material - Saves the changes made to the current material item.
Print the Current Material - Prints only the materials data for the current material
item.
It is your responsibility to check material allowables and other physical property data for the
particular code being used. While Intergraph CAS makes every attempt to keep the material
database up-to-date, the codes are subject to change frequently, and the accuracy of the
database is not guaranteed.
The Material Database Editor does not modify the data in the material database delivered
with CAESAR II. Any changes that you make are saved to a secondary database, which, by
default, is named umat1.umd and is located in the \System directory. You can specify a
different secondary database using User Material Database File Name (on page 63) in the
Configuration Editor. This setup permits multiple user-supplied database files to be used
on a single system.
The Piping Code ID list corresponds to the piping code ID on the Piping Input dialog box.
To exit the dialog box without selecting a material press Esc or click Cancel.
Material Number
Enter a number for the material in the CAESAR II Material Database Editor. The Piping Input
module uses this number to reference the material. The number must be between 101 and 1000
inclusive and must not have been used for another material previously.
Material Name
Enter the material name as listed in the applicable code.
B31.8
Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at
temperatures lower than room temperature.
Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.
Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
Material Density
Enter the density of the material.
Eff, Cf, z
Enter the appropriate factor. This factor is required by the following piping codes:
Stoomwezen
Enter the cyclic reduction factor. This is referred to in the code as Cf.
Norwegian TBK-6
Enter the circumferential weld strength factor. This is referred to in the code as z.
BS 7159
Enter the ratio of the design stress (d) in the circumferential (hoop) direction to the
design stress in the longitudinal direction. Because design stress is defined in Sec. 4.3
of the code as:
and design strain should be the same for both directions, this entry is also the ratio of
the moduli of elasticity:
For Norwegian TBK-6 and BS 7159 piping codes, if the Eff, Cf, z field is left blank,
the software uses a default value of 1.0.
Poisson's Ratio
Enter the value to be used for Poissons ratio. This input is only required for metals.
FAC
Enter the applicable factor as determined by the following piping codes.
Stoomwezen
Enter 0.44 or 0.5. This value is used to compute the equilibrium stresses as discussed
in Section 5.2 of the code. You can use 0.5 for steel if the design and fabrication are
such that stress peaks are avoided.
Norwegian
Enter the material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature Rm. If you do not define
a value, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
Laminate Type
Enter the laminate type (as defined in the BS 7159 code) of the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe
used. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
Eh / Ea
Displays the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If omitted, the software
uses a default value of 2.0.
Temperature
Enter the temperature that corresponds to the database values you will add in the remaining
cells (shown below).
In the database delivered with the software, all temperatures are in 100F increments.
Some codes list physical property values in 50F increments; therefore, small
discrepancies may occur between CAESAR II and a given code because of the interpolation of
data.
Exp. Coeff.
Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion at the reference Temperature in the indicated units.
This value must be multiplied by 106 F prior to being entered. For example, for carbon steel at
400-deg F, B 31.3 Table C-3 gives an expansion coefficient of 6.82 in/in/F. Thus, you would
enter 6.82 in the database.
Allowable Stress
Enter the code allowable stress corresponding to the reference Temperature. These values
generally correspond to the SC and SH values on the allowable auxiliary screens.
Elastic Modulus
Enter the modulus of elasticity to the reference Temperature. If no entry is given for ambient
(70 F), the software uses the value defined for Cold Elastic Modulus (on page 1039).
Yield Stress
Enter the yield stress that corresponds to the reference Temperature.
Accounting
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Accounting
Main window menu: Tools > Accounting
Allows you to control all pricing factors for jobs. The total price of any job is computed from:
IF (C4 > 0.0) THEN
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) * C4 * numcases + C5
ELSE
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) + C5
ENDIF
You can enter C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 one time, and change them only when necessary.
Any of the constants may be zero, but at least one constant must be greater than zero.
CAESAR II Accounting is an optional module. If you do not need to keep
accounting records of your jobs, you can disregard this module.
You can generate accounting reports on a per-run basis and the software summarizes them on
a per-account basis. This module also lets you:
Generate reports for any requested combination of account numbers.
Define account numbers, which may contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Control account and software access using the optional password protection feature
(accessed by selecting the Type 2 accounting method).
Identify account numbers for each job using either of the following two methods:
Select the account number from a table of allowed account numbers. Otherwise, the
system defaults to the last valid account number input. The account manager sets up
and maintains the account number table.
Enter an account number, which can be any non-blank string, in a text box. There is no
default, but your entry must match one of the allowed account numbers previously input
by the account manager.
MMINUTE INTEGER*2 Minutes of the hour when the job was run
MSECOND INTEGER*2 Seconds of the minute when the job was run
The first record contains only a single integer value (ILAST), giving the last valid record number
in the accounting file. The number of job entries is equal to (ILAST-1). This first record may be
read:
READ(1,REC=1) ILAST
For information about the options available on a specific dialog box tab, see:
Activate Accounting Tab (on page 1045)
Pricing Factors Tab (on page 1046)
Account Numbers Tab (on page 1046)
Reports Tab (on page 1046)
Status Tab (on page 1048)
After the accounting system is initialized, the pricing factors are set, and account numbers
entered, you can initiate jobs with account tracking. The prompt for the account number appears
during analysis immediately after you initiate the accounting process.
Monetary Label
Specifies the monetary label. For example, type $ for US dollars.
Reports Tab
Generate accounting reports on a per-run basis and the software summarizes them on a per-
account basis. From the Reports tab, you can specify the accounts for which you're generating
reports, the date range of the reports, and whether you're generating a detailed or a summary
report.
Accounts
Specifies the accounts for which you are generating reports.
Select Specific Accounts to generate a report for a specific account or set of accounts.
Click Select Accounts, select the accounts from the list, and then click OK.
Select Entire Data File to generate a report that includes all accounts.
After you select the account information, you can specify a date range and the type of report you
want to generate, then select Generate Report.
Date Range
Controls the range of dates for the report you are generating.
Select Specific Date Range to specify a range of dates for which to generate a report.
Select Entire Data File to generate a report that includes all dates.
After you select the account information and the date range, you can specify the type of report
you want to generate, then select Generate Report.
Report
Controls the length of the report.
Select Summary to generate a shorter report. Accounting summary reports include
subtotals on a per-account basis, the number of jobs run for the account, and the time period
in which the account has been active.
Select Detailed to generate a full report.
Status Tab
Summarizes the number of accounts and pricing factors specified for the current accounting
system. The software displays the current accounting method, Type 1 (accounting without a
password required) or Type 2 (accounting with a password required) at the top.
The Status tab displays the total Number of defined account numbers, as well as the number
of account records run (i.e., how many times you've analyzed all of the defined accounts).
Create/Review Units
Creates a custom units file. Click Tools > Create/Review Units to display the CAESAR II -
Units Maintenance dialog box, which you can use to create a new units file or to review data in
an existing units file.
If the user-defined units for a given item exist in the list, then it is not necessary to
specify a conversion factor, as it is updated automatically. If a new set of units is required, such
as, for example, feet (instead of inches) in the Length category, either select the new unit name
(ft.) in the User Units list and select the new conversion factor in the Constant list or type a
new factor in the text box.
View/Edit File
Displays one of the following windows, depending on whether you are reviewing an existing
units file or creating a new one.
User File Review
Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with reviewing an existing
units file ( on page 1049). The contents of this window are read-only.
User File Maintenance
Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with creating a new units file
(on page 1050). The contents of this window are editable.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Change Model Units
When you click OK, the software closes the Help Facility window and opens the Additional
Error Information dialog box. You can use this dialog box to reference another error number,
which can be useful when one error definition references another. Clicking OK on the
Additional Error Information dialog box returns the software to the main CAESAR II window.
At any time, you can review fatal error information by clicking Diagnostics > Error
Review, entering the appropriate error number, and then clicking OK. The Help Facility window
opens and displays the corresponding fatal error description.
External Interfaces
External Interfaces allow data transfer between CAESAR II and other software applications. To
view a list of those software applications, click Tools > External Interfaces in the Main menu.
In most cases, data transfer is from a drawing or analysis package to CAESAR II. However, the
CAESAR II Neutral File transfers both to and from CAESAR II.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant provides a seamless, bi-directional interface between
CADWorx and CAESAR II without a translation procedure.
Most of the interfaces are CAD interfaces. The exceptions are LIQT, AFT IMPULSE,
PIPENET, Pipeplus, FlowMaster, the CAESAR II Data Matrix, and the CAESAR II
Neutral File.
CAD interfaces (CADPIPE, Intergraph Smart 3D PCF, Intergraph PDS, and PCF) are
intended to transfer piping geometry into CAESAR II. The resulting CAESAR II input must be
thoroughly checked, with loads, restraints, and other specifics added.
The CAESAR II Neutral File and the Intergraph CADWorx Plant interfaces are capable of
transferring 100% of the data that comprises the _A (input) file.
LIQT, AFT IMPULSE, PIPENET, PipePlus, and FlowMaster are transient analysis packages
for liquids in piping networks that calculate pressure imbalances as a function of time. The
CAESAR II interface converts this LIQT output from these packages to create force
response spectra for CAESAR II dynamic input.
The interfaces typically prompt you for a file name, transfer the data, and then prompt for
another file name. This cycle continues either until a blank file name is encountered or you
cancel the process.
Before beginning an interface to CAESAR II, follow the requirements of the CAESAR II
Neutral File interface. This enables all of the spreadsheet data to be transferred.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant is the Intergraph CAS piping design and drafting software for the
AutoCAD environment. Data may be completely and seamlessly transferred between CAESAR
II and Intergraph CADWorx Plant, without creating any neutral files or going through any
intermediate steps.
Several third-party CAD applications, such as AVEVAs PDMS and Jacobus PlantSpace,
also support this neutral file. If you prefer, instead of launching this interface from Tools >
External Interface, the processor can be run in "batch mode" from either a batch file or the
command line as shown below.
f:\ProgramDirectory\iecho f:\DataDirectory\NeutralFile.cii
where:
f:\ProgramDirectory and f:\DataDirectory must be changed as appropriate.
The CAESAR II neutral file, also referred to as the .CII file, is divided into sections which
organize the piping data in logical groupings. Section divisions are denoted in the neutral file by
the #$ character sequence found in columns 1 and 2. The token following the #$ character
sequence is a section identifier that is used by CAESAR II for data sequencing purposes, and to
aid you in reading the neutral file. For each item listed on the following pages, the necessary
FORTRAN format for the input/output is provided. The variables listed below are used in
dimensioning arrays.
N1Base memory allocation quantity used to set array sizes. For example, if N1=2,000,
your neutral file can handle up to 2,000 elements.
N21/2 N1
N31/3 N1
N41/4 N1
N51/5 N1
N6N1/13.33
When there is no auxiliary data of a particular type associated with the current
element use a pointer value of zero.
#$ RIGID
Defines the rigid data. The data for each rigid in the input file is listed here.
A single-element array (RIG) is used for each rigid. The RIG array is dimensioned (N3,1). The
single element of the array represents the rigid weight.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the value.
#$ EXPJT
Defines the expansion joint data. The data for each expansion joint in the input file is listed
here. The EXP array is dimensioned (N5,5).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next
line of the neutral file.
1. Axial stiffness
2. Transverse stiffness
3. Bending stiffness
4. Torsional stiffness
5. Effective inside bellows diameter
#$ RESTRANT
Defines the restraint data.
The data for each restraint auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here. The RES array is
dimensioned (N2,36).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following nine items on the
next two lines of the neutral file. These nine items are repeated four times for the four possible
restraints defined in the auxiliary data block.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each restraint specification. This means eight lines
total for each restraint auxiliary.
1. Restraint node number
2. Restraint type (see additional notes to follow)
3. Restraint stiffness
4. Restraint gap
5. Restraint friction coefficient
6. Restraint connecting node
7. X direction cosine
8. Y direction cosine
9. Z direction cosine
The restraint type is an integer value whose valid range is from 1 to 62. The 62 possible restraint
types include:
#$ DISPLMNT
Defines the displacement data. The data for each displacement auxiliary data block in the
input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
lines of the neutral file. The DIS array is dimensioned (N3,110).
This requires 10 lines in the neutral file for each displacement specification. This means 20 lines
total for each displacement auxiliary.
These 55 items are repeated twice for the two possible displacements defined on the auxiliary.
Unspecified displacement values (free-displacement degrees of freedom, for
example) are designated by using a value of 9999.99.
#$ FORCMNT
Defines the start of the force/moment data. The data for each force/moment auxiliary data
block in the input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
ten lines of the neutral file. The FOR array is dimensioned (N3,38).
This requires ten lines in the neutral file for each force/moment specification. This means 20
lines total for each force/moment auxiliary data block.
#$ UNIFORM
Defines the start of the uniform load data. The data for each uniform load in the input file is
listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 12 items on the next two
lines of the neutral file. The UNI array is dimensioned (N5,36). Currently three vectors of four
values each (three directions and a G-load flag) are used.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each uniform load auxiliary data block.
G-flag is 1 for the input values in G's and 0 for input values in force-per-length notation.
#$ WIND
Defines the start of the wind/wave data. The data for each wind/wave specification in the
input file is listed here. The WIND array is dimensioned (N5,6).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the set of values on the next line of the neutral
file. This requires a single line in the neutral file for each wind auxiliary.
The data items on each line are as follows:
1. Entry type (0.0 for Wind, 1.0 for Wave, 2.0 for Off)
2. Wind shape factor or wave drag coefficient
3. Wave added mass coefficient
4. Wave lift coefficient
5. Wave marine growth
6. Marine growth density
#$ OFFSETS
Defines the start of the element offset data. The data for each offset pipe in the input file is
listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following six items on the next line
of the neutral file. The OFF array is dimensioned (N5,6).
This requires a single line in the neutral file for each offset auxiliary.
1. Element FROM node offset in X direction
2. Element FROM node offset in Y direction
3. Element FROM node offset in Z direction
4. Element TO node offset in X direction
5. Element TO node offset in Y direction
6. Element TO node offset in Z direction
#$ ALLOWBLS
Defines the start of the allowable stress data. The data for each allowable spec in the input
file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 153 items on the next 26
lines of the neutral file. The ALL array is dimensioned (N5,153).
1. Cold allowable stress
2. Hot allowable for thermal case #1
3. Hot allowable for thermal case #2
4. Hot allowable for thermal case #3
5. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #1
6. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #2
7. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #3
8. Eff.
9. Sy
10. Fac
11. Pmax
12. Piping code id
13. Hot allowable for thermal case #4
14. Hot allowable for thermal case #5
15. Hot allowable for thermal case #6
16. Hot allowable for thermal case #7
17. Hot allowable for thermal case #8
18. Hot allowable for thermal case #9
19. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #4
20. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #5
21. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #6
22. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #7
23. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #8
24. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #9
Items 25 through 32 represent Cycles, and items 33 through 40 represent Stresses for eight BW
(butt-weld)/Class D Fatigue pairs.
Items 41 through 48 represent Cycles, and items 49 through 56 represent Stresses for eight FW
(fillet-weld)/Class E Fatigue pairs.
Items 57 through 64 represent Cycles, and items 65 through 72 represent Stresses for eight
Class F Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Items 73 through 80 represent Cycles, and items 81 through 88 represent Stresses for eight
Class G Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Items 89 through 96 represent Cycles, and items 97 through 104 represent Stresses for eight
Class W Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Item 105 Elastic Modulus correction
Item 106 has different meanings based on the active piping code: Allowed Cycles Maximum
(per B31.3); Restrained Piping (per B31.8); Material Composition/Type (per HPGSL and JPI).
Item 107 UTS ambient
Item 108 Allowable Sy/St value
Items 109 through 117 represent nine SY values at temperature.
Items 118 through 126 represent nine UTS values at temperature.
Items 127 through 153 are currently unused. Write the value of 0.000000.
Some of these items (notably 8-24) may have various meanings based on the active piping
code.
Piping code ISO-14692 has special mapping for the first 24 items.
#$ SIF&TEES
Defines the start of the SIF/TEE data. The data for each SIF/TEE specification in the input
file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 30 items, for each of the
two tees that can be specified on the dialog box. The SIF array is dimensioned (N4,60).
The software requires five lines in the neutral file for each SIF/TEE specified. This means you
must specify 10 lines total for each auxiliary element.
The information in parenthesis below gives information about each input value.
1. Node (the intersection node number)
2. Type (the intersection type code, if not specified this auxiliary this is only used to specify
SIFs)
3. In-Plane SIF (ii)*
4. Out-Plane SIF (io)*
5. Weld (d) (circumferential weld mismatch, used for butt welds and tapered transitions
6. Fillet (fillet leg length)
7. Pad Thk (thickness of the reinforcing pad)
8. Ftg Ro (fitting outside radius for branch connections)
9. Crotch R (crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee)
10. Weld ID (weld ID value)
11. B1 (code-specific value)
12. B2 (code-specific value)
13. In-Plane Index (Ii)*
14. Out-Plane Index (Io)*
15. Torsion SIF (it)*
16. Axial SIF (ia)*
17. Pressure SIF (ip)*
18. Pressure Index (Ip)*
19-22*
*Values 3, 4, 11, and 13-22 are for the IGE/TD/12 piping code.
23. (code-related "Note" options)
24. (code-related "Note" options)
25. Axial Index (Ia)
26. Torsion Index (It)
Some of these values may have different meanings based on the piping code you
have selected. For more information on piping input specifics, see SIFs & Tees (on page 129).
#$ REDUCERS
This subsection header defines the start of the REDUCER data. The data for each
REDUCER spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next
line of the neutral file. The RED array is dimensioned (N6,5).
This requires one line in the neutral file for each REDUCER specified.
1. Second diameter of the reducer
2. Second thickness of the reducer
3. Alpha angle of the reducer
4. R1 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code
5. R2 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code
These values are repeated for the second intersection specification.
#$ FLANGES
Defines the FLANGE data. The data for each FLANGE spec in the input file is listed here.
There are 72 data values used to describe a flange.
1. FROM/TO (0 = FROM, 1 = TO, 2= BOTH)
2. METHOD (0 = PEQ, 1 = ASME NC)
3. GASKET OR BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER, DEPENDING ON METHOD
4. BOLT AREA (ASME METHOD ONLY)
5. SYC (ASME METHOD ONLY)
6. SY1 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
7. SY2 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
8. SY3 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
9. SY4 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
10. SY5 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
11. SY6 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
12. SY7 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
13. SY8 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
14. SY9 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
15. 15-24 CLASS NAME, (40 CHAR MAX)
16. 25-48 24 TEMPERATURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD
ONLY)
17. 49-72 24 PRESSURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD ONLY)
These values are arranged in the neutral file on 12 lines using a format of (2X, 6G13.6) unless
otherwise specified:
Line 1: Flange items 1-5
Line 2: Flange items 6-11
Line 3: Flange items 12-14
Line 4: Class Name, using a format of (2X, A40)
Line 5: Flange items 25-30
Line 6: Flange items 31-36
Line 7: Flange items 37-42
Line 8: Flange items 43-48
Line 9: Flange items 49-54
Line 10: Flange items 55-60
Line 11: Flange items 61-66
Line 12: Flange items 67-72
All 12 lines must be written to the neutral file for each flange. Unused fields/values can be
represented by 0.00.
#$ EQUIPMNT
Defines the Equipment/Nozzle Check data. The data for each EQUIPMNT spec in the input
file is listed here. There are two sets of 17 data values that use a format of (2X, 6G13.6) as
shown below:
1. Node Number
2. Limiting load value FX
3. Limiting load value FY
4. Limiting load value FZ
5. Limiting load value MX
6. Limiting load value MY
7. Limiting load value MZ
8. Reference axis direction cosine CosX
9. Reference axis direction cosine CosY
10. Reference axis direction cosine CosZ
11. Flange rating
12. Interaction method: 0=absolute; 1=SRSS; 2=Unity Check;
Items 13-17 are spares represented by 0.00. These values are arranged in the neutral file on six
lines. All six lines must be written to the neutral file for each Nozzle/Equipment check. Unused
fields/values can be represented by 0.00.
CNVPDN
Defines the pipe density conversion
CNVIDN
Defines the insulation density conversion
CNVFDN
Defines the fluid density conversion
CNVTSF
Defines the translational stiffness conversion
CNVUNI
Defines the uniform load conversion
CNVWND
Defines the wind load conversion
CNVELE
Defines the elevation conversion
CNVCLN
Defines the compound length conversion
CNVDIA
Defines the diameter conversion
CNVTHK
Wall thickness conversion
Next, enter the following labels for units, one per line, in the format given in the label
descriptions. This requires 24 lines in the neutral file.
CCVNAME
Defines the name of the units used, such as English (CHARACTER*15)
CCVNOM
Sets On or Off, and tells PREPIP whether or not nominal diameters are allowed
(CHARACTER* 3)
CCVLEN
Defines the length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVFOR
Defines the force label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMAS
Defines the mass label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMIN
Defines the moment (input) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVMOU
Defines the moment (output) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVSTR
Defines the stress label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSC
Defines the temperature label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVTOF
Defines the temperature offset/label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVPRE
Defines the pressure label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVYM
Defines Youngs modulus label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVPDN
Defines the pipe density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVIDN
Defines the insulation density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVFDN
Defines the fluid density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSF
Defines the translational stiffness label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVRSF
Defines the rotational stiffness label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVUNI
Defines the uniform load label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVGLD
Defines the gravitational load label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVWND
Defines the wind load label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVELE
Defines the elevation label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVCLN
Defines the compound length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVDIA
Defines the diameter label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVTHK
Defines the wall thickness label (CHARACTER* 3)
Control Information
#$ CONTROL
Provides the section division header. The #$ and space are required, and the word
CONTROL is in all uppercase.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following variables on the next
line of the neutral file:
NUMELT
Defines the number of piping elements (spreadsheets) in the input file.
NUMNOZ
Defines the number of nozzles in the input file.
NOHGRS
Defines the number of spring hangers in the input file.
NONAM
Defines the number of Node Name data blocks in the input file.
NORED
Defines the number of reducers in the input file.
NUMFLG
Defines the number of flanges in the input file.
Write 13 items that contain the number of auxiliary data types used in the input file followed by
the vertical axis indicator. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13). These 13 values are:
The number of bend auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of rigid-element auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of expansion-joint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of restraint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of displacement auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of force/moment auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of uniform-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of wind-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of element-offset auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of allowable-stress auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of intersection auxiliary data blocks in the input file. IZUP flag. Equal to zero (0)
for the global -Y axis vertical; equal to 1 for the global -Z axis vertical.
The number of (nozzle) equipment limits data blocks in the input file.
Conversion Type
Select the type of file you want to convert using the Neutral File Generator. You can convert a
neutral file (.cii) to an CAESAR II input file (._a) or vice-versa.
Next, browse and select or type the name of the neutral file to be converted and click Convert.
The software prompts you when the conversion completes. Click OK and indicate whether you
want to perform another file conversion. When you are done converting files, click No and the
software exits from the dialog box.
ANCH
Provides a restraint flag. A value of 1 sets the From node to be restrained. A zero (0) value
is otherwise and is currently ignored.
BEND
Defines the bend indicator. A value of 1 sets a bend at the To node. A zero (0) value is no
bend.
BRAD
Defines the bend radius if not a long radius bend.
RIGID
Defines a rigid element flag. A value of 1 sets the element to rigid. A value of zero (0) value
sets the element to nonrigid.
All values in the matrix should be real floating point numbers. The format for each line of data
must be (12E13.6). This generic interface prompts for an arbitrary conversion constant for the
delta dimensions, and the diameter /thickness values to overcome any differences between the
assumed units of the neutral file and the CAESAR II defaults.
If you are developing a completely new interface, use the CAESAR II Neutral File (on page
1054).
7. Select Use System Units to convert the output data to the set of units currently defined in
the CAESAR II Configure/Setup.
8. Perform one of the following:
a. Click Quick XML Export to transfer the input data to the "filename_ INPUT.xml" file and
output data to the "filename_OUTPUT.xml" file (where filename is the name of the file
you selected to export).
CAESAR II prompts you and asks if you want to open the newly exported file. Click OK
to open the file or Cancel to exit the wizard.
You must have the appropriate application installed to open the file format or
the exported file does not open.
-OR-
b. Complete steps 9 through 14.
9. Click Browse in the Select the Data Export Output File box and navigate to the location of
the output data.
10. Specify the file name and required data output, and then click Save.
You can export files in the following formats: .mdb (Microsoft Office
2001/2002/Access Database), .accdb (Microsoft Office 2007/2010/Access Database), .txt
(Microsoft Excel compatible text), or .xml (Extensible Markup Language).
CAESAR II returns to the Input and Output Files page.
11. Click Next.
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Input Export Options page.
12. Select the input options you want to export and then click Next.
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Output Report Options page.
13. Select the static load cases for your results and the output report options that you want to
export.
Several built-in reports, queries, and other helpful options are provided in the
default Access file format, or you can develop custom reports and queries.
14. Click Finish.
CAESAR II prompts you to open the newly exported file.
15. Do one of the following:
a. Click OK to open the exported file.
-OR-
b. Click Cancel to close the wizard.
See Auxiliary Data Pointers for a list of database pointers to auxiliary data, which
also appear in this input options output table.
WL Factor WI_FACTOR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.BEND_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.BEND_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RIGID_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.RIGID_NUM.
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EXPJT_PTR = INPUT_EXPJT.EXPJT_PTR.
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.REST_PTR = INPUT_RESTRAINTS.REST_PTR.
Restraint Codes
There are 62 different restraints available in CAESAR II. When the restraint information is
exported to a format such as Microsoft Access, a restraint type code is exported. The following
is the key for those restraint codes.
1 ANC Anchor
13 +X Translational Directional
14 +Y Translational Directional
15 +Z Translational Directional
16 -X Translational Directional
17 -Y Translational Directional
18 -Z Translational Directional
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FORCMNT_PTR = INPUT_FORCMNT.FORCMNT_PTR
X axis load UX UX
Y axis load UY UY
Z axis load UZ UZ
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ULOAD_PTR = INPUT_UNIFORM.ULOAD_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.WLOAD_PTR = INPUT_WIND.WIND_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.OFFSETS_PTR = INPUT_OFFSETS.OFFSETS_PTR
Sy (yield stress) SY SY
Hot Sy HOT_SY
Hot SU HOT_SU
* These tags are child tags of CASE_NUM (can range from 1 through 9)
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ALLOW_PTR = INPUT_ALLOWBLS.ALLOW_PTR
B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.INT_PTR = INPUT_SIFTEES.SIF_PTR
WRC 297
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WRC297 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WRC297_NOZZLE
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297.NOZ_PTR
API 650
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_API650
Microsoft Excel Section Name: API650 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: API650_NOZZLE
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_API650.NOZ_PTR
PD 5500
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500
Microsoft Excel Section Name: BS5500 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: BS5500_NOZZLE
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500.NOZ_PTR
Custom
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_USERDEFINED
Microsoft Excel Section Name: USERDEFINED NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: USERDEFINED_NOZZLE
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_USERDEFINED.NOZ_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.HGR_PTR = INPUT_HANGERS.HGR_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RED_PTR = INPUT_REDUCERS.RED_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FLG_PTR = INPUT_FLANGES.FLG_PTR
NODE1 NODE1
FX1 FX1
FY1 FY1
FZ1 FZ1
MX1 MX1
MY1 MY1
MZ1 MZ1
COSX1 COSX1
COSY1 COSY1
COSZ1 COSZ1
RATING1 RATING1
METHOD1 METHOD1
NODE2 NODE2
FX2 FX2
FY2 FY2
FZ2 FZ2
MX2 MX2
MY2 MY2
MZ2 MZ2
COSX2 COSX2
COSY2 COSY2
COSZ2 COSZ2
RATING2 RATING2
METHOD2 METHOD2
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EQP_PTR = INPUT_EQUIPMENT.EQP_PTR
Translation X DX DX
Translation Y DY DY
Translation Z DZ DZ
Rotation X RX RX
Rotation Y RY RY
Rotation Z RZ RZ
Force X FX FX
Force Y FY FY
Force Z FZ FZ
Moment X MX MX
Moment Y MY MY
Moment Z MZ MZ
Force X FX FX
Force Y FY FY
Force Z FZ FZ
Moment X MX MX
Moment Y MY MY
Moment Z MZ MZ
METHOD METHOD
FX_LIMIT FX_LIMIT
FY_LIMIT FY_LIMIT
FZ_LIMIT FZ_LIMIT
MX_LIMIT MX_LIMIT
MY_LIMIT MY_LIMIT
MZ_LIMIT MZ_LIMIT
FRES_LIMIT FRES_LIMIT
MRES_LIMIT MRES_LIMIT
PASSFAIL PASSFAIL
Force X FX FX
Force Y FY FY
Force Z FZ FZ
Moment X MX MX
Moment Y MY MY
Moment Z MZ MZ
FRES FRES
MRES MRES
FX_PER FX_PER
FY_PER FY_PER
FZ_PER FZ_PER
MX_PER MX_PER
MY_PER MY_PER
MZ_PER MZ_PER
FRES_PER FRES_PER
MRES_PER MRES_PER
AFT IMPULSE
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the AFT Impulse software. CAESAR II reads the
output file generated by AFT Impulse, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for the dynamic
analysis in CAESAR II.
Filename
Specifies the name of the file for which you want to generate a dynamic load factor (DLF) file
(.frc). These .frc files contain the force data required to do a CAESAR II dynamic analysis
(Spectrum). Browse and select or type the full path and file name.
For more information, refer to your specific external interface.
AFT IMPULSE (on page 1114)
PIPENET (on page 1116)
LIQT (on page 1118)
Pipeplus (on page 1124)
FlowMaster (on page 1127)
Component List
The software creates this list from the .frc file and it contains all the components (such as bends,
tees, reducers, closed valves, etc.) for a given model. Click on each component to select it.
When you select a component, the software displays on the left, along with an empty edit field
where you can type the CAESAR II node number that corresponds to the component.
Click a second time on the component in the list to unselect it.
If you specify one or more components and corresponding node numbers, when you click OK
the software generates DLF tables (in text file format). These DLF files have a naming
convention, such as: P####.DLF, where P signifies PipeNet and #### are the node number
specified by the user.
After the software creates the appropriate DLF files, you can generate the CAESAR II Dynamic
Input file (._7) automatically. Browse for the appropriate static input file and click OK to generate
the Dynamic Input file.
Frequency Cut-Off
Indicates the maximum frequency that the software considers in dynamic analysis (and DLF
generation). The software defaults this value to 100 Hz.
PIPENET
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the Sunrise System's PIPENET package. The
PIPENET interface reads the output file generated by PIPENET, extracts the information
needed, and generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then
be used for the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
Filename
Specifies the name of the file for which you want to generate a dynamic load factor (DLF) file
(.frc). These .frc files contain the force data required to do a CAESAR II dynamic analysis
(Spectrum). Browse and select or type the full path and file name.
For more information, refer to your specific external interface.
AFT IMPULSE (on page 1114)
PIPENET (on page 1116)
LIQT (on page 1118)
Pipeplus (on page 1124)
FlowMaster (on page 1127)
Component List
The software creates this list from the .frc file and it contains all the components (such as bends,
tees, reducers, closed valves, etc.) for a given model. Click on each component to select it.
When you select a component, the software displays on the left, along with an empty edit field
where you can type the CAESAR II node number that corresponds to the component.
Click a second time on the component in the list to unselect it.
If you specify one or more components and corresponding node numbers, when you click OK
the software generates DLF tables (in text file format). These DLF files have a naming
convention, such as: P####.DLF, where P signifies PipeNet and #### are the node number
specified by the user.
After the software creates the appropriate DLF files, you can generate the CAESAR II Dynamic
Input file (._7) automatically. Browse for the appropriate static input file and click OK to generate
the Dynamic Input file.
Frequency Cut-Off
Indicates the maximum frequency that the software considers in dynamic analysis (and DLF
generation). The software defaults this value to 100 Hz.
LIQT
Reads the output file generated by LIQT, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The LIQT interface generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing
response spectra for input files. The spectra input files contain the dynamic pipe forces. These
time history loads are determined by the Stoner Associates, Inc. (SAI) LIQT package from
pressure transient loading. Then, the generated response spectrum files can be used for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
Example 1
Find the DLF response spectrum of the trapezoidal pulse loads shown in the following figure.
Solution: The response spectra generated from all four pulse loads are identical, as displayed
below.
The result shows that the DLF curve is independent of the magnitude of the pulse load.
Example 2
Find the response spectrum of the following trapezoidal pulse loads.
Solution: The plotted results displayed below shows that the longer the duration of the force,
the higher the DLF. The triangular pulse, which has a duration of zero, generates the lowest
DLF curve.
Filename
Specifies the name of the file for which you want to generate a dynamic load factor (DLF) file
(.frc). These .frc files contain the force data required to do a CAESAR II dynamic analysis
(Spectrum). Browse and select or type the full path and file name.
For more information, refer to your specific external interface.
AFT IMPULSE (on page 1114)
PIPENET (on page 1116)
LIQT (on page 1118)
Pipeplus (on page 1124)
FlowMaster (on page 1127)
Component List
The software creates this list from the .frc file and it contains all the components (such as bends,
tees, reducers, closed valves, etc.) for a given model. Click on each component to select it.
When you select a component, the software displays on the left, along with an empty edit field
where you can type the CAESAR II node number that corresponds to the component.
Click a second time on the component in the list to unselect it.
If you specify one or more components and corresponding node numbers, when you click OK
the software generates DLF tables (in text file format). These DLF files have a naming
convention, such as: P####.DLF, where P signifies PipeNet and #### are the node number
specified by the user.
After the software creates the appropriate DLF files, you can generate the CAESAR II Dynamic
Input file (._7) automatically. Browse for the appropriate static input file and click OK to generate
the Dynamic Input file.
Frequency Cut-Off
Indicates the maximum frequency that the software considers in dynamic analysis (and DLF
generation). The software defaults this value to 100 Hz.
Pipeplus
Reads a Pipeplus neutral file (.pnf suffix), and translates it into a CAESAR II model.
The log file name is the name of the neutral file with .LOG suffix. This file contains general
information about the translation process, including:
The number of lines in the neutral file
The number of CAESAR II elements that were created
Any warning or error messages
Node Association table that relates the Pipeplus node names to the corresponding
CAESAR II node numbers.
8. Compare the CAESAR II input model with the Pipeplus model.
a. View the CAESAR II model in the Classic Piping Input dialog box or in the 3D Graphics
pane.
b. View the Pipeplus view of this same model in the Pipeplus software.
An example of the Pipeplus model is shown below.
FlowMaster
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the FlowMaster package. The FlowMaster
interface reads the output file generated by FlowMaster, extracts the information needed, and
generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for
the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
Filename
Specifies the name of the file for which you want to generate a dynamic load factor (DLF) file
(.frc). These .frc files contain the force data required to do a CAESAR II dynamic analysis
(Spectrum). Browse and select or type the full path and file name.
For more information, refer to your specific external interface.
AFT IMPULSE (on page 1114)
PIPENET (on page 1116)
LIQT (on page 1118)
Pipeplus (on page 1124)
FlowMaster (on page 1127)
Component List
The software creates this list from the .frc file and it contains all the components (such as bends,
tees, reducers, closed valves, etc.) for a given model. Click on each component to select it.
When you select a component, the software displays on the left, along with an empty edit field
where you can type the CAESAR II node number that corresponds to the component.
Click a second time on the component in the list to unselect it.
If you specify one or more components and corresponding node numbers, when you click OK
the software generates DLF tables (in text file format). These DLF files have a naming
convention, such as: P####.DLF, where P signifies PipeNet and #### are the node number
specified by the user.
After the software creates the appropriate DLF files, you can generate the CAESAR II Dynamic
Input file (._7) automatically. Browse for the appropriate static input file and click OK to generate
the Dynamic Input file.
Frequency Cut-Off
Indicates the maximum frequency that the software considers in dynamic analysis (and DLF
generation). The software defaults this value to 100 Hz.
Intergraph PDS
Transfers piping system geometry from an Intergraph neutral file to a standard CAESAR II _A
binary input file. The geometry data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses,
connectivities, and node numbers. All nodal specific quantities, such as loads, displacements,
and so forth, must be manually added to the CAESAR II input file.
There are three basic steps necessary to generate a CAESAR II input file from an Intergraph
neutral file:
1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph PDS to create an Intergraph neutral file.
File Name
Specifies the full path and filename of the neutral file. When you open the software, this field
displays the current data path. You can manually add a file name to the end of this string, or
click Browse to search for a neutral file.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box from which you can search for the appropriate neutral
file. You can use the options at the bottom of the dialog box to switch between the neutral file
suffix types, such as .N or .NEU.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 324) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 324) to
zero.
Remove HA Elements
Controls whether HA elements are removed. Typically, HA (hanger-support direction) elements
should be removed. The support is placed on the pipe where the HA element joins it. Clear this
check box to keep HA elements in the stress model.
Condenses Flanges/Valves
Allows you to turn on or off the condensation of flange-valve-flange elements. By default, the
software condenses the sequence of elements into a single rigid element. If you deselect this
check box, the software does not condense the sequence of elements when using the standard
sort. If you specify to use the advanced sort, the software always condenses the elements.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
(End nodes replaced with center point, and TEE/CROSS element removed. Modifications also
performed on 3 & 4 way valves.)
(Far Weld Line Nodal coordinates changed to Tangent Intersection Point coordinates)
DATA FOR PROPERTY ARRAY WITH # ENTRIES = 5
LOCATIONS 1-11
LOCATIONS 1, 12-20
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 1
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 2
CADPIPE
Provides a one-way transfer of the geometry data from CADPIPE to CAESAR II. The geometry
data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and node numbers. All
nodal specific quantities, such as restraints, loads, and displacements, must be manually added
to the CAESAR II input file.
The CADPIPE external interface is set up so that several models can be transferred in a single
session. During data transfer, the interface first prompts you for the name of the CADPIPE
connectivity (.UDE ) neutral file. After you specify the file name, the data transfer process
begins. When that transfer is complete, the interface prompts you for another neutral file name.
This cycle continues until you cancel the data transfer process.
The neutral file read by the interface must be generated by the CADPIPE software. For more
information, refer to the CADPIPE product documentation.
The CADPIPE neutral file must be transferred to the current CAESAR II folder so that it is
available to the external interface.
The interface reads the CADPIPE neutral file, and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log
file of the data transfer process. Check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file
for consistency and any assumptions made by the interface.
The following paragraphs describe the layout of the data extracted from the CADPIPE neutral
file and how it is arranged for storage in the interface. The data storage is maintained in two
arrays. The first array contains geometry data for each pipe element; the second array contains
additional load and specification data.
In the first array, an entry is required for each piece of pipe in the system. "Pipe" refers to an
entity between two nodes, which can be a pipe or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry,
and all values must be specified.
Field 1- ELMT Enter the pipe element number, which can correspond to an entry in the
second array. This is also the pipe or element number in the model.
Values must be sequential from 1.
Field 2 - N1 Enter the From node number, which is the starting node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 3 - N2 Enter the To node number, which is the ending node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 4 - DX Enter the delta X dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the X direction.
Field 5 - DY Enter the delta Y dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Y direction. In CAESAR II, Y is vertical.
Field 6 - DZ Enter the delta Z dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Z direction.
Field 9 - ANCH Specify the location of the restraint (support). If there is a restraint on
N1, ANCH is 1. If there is a restraint on N2, then ANCH is 2. The type of
restraint can be obtained from the second array.
Field 10 - BND Specify whether there is a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is
1, there is a bend at N2. If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.
Field 11 - BRAD Specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. This value
is the required bend radius.
Records in the second array are only necessary when additional data is required. This means
there is always a record in the first array for pipe element #1, which could be the only entry in
the array. Any additional entries contain some type of change to data normally duplicated
forward by CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT Enter the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the
first array. This is also a pipe or element number in the model. Values
are sequential from 1.
Field 2 - TEMP1 Enter the operating temperature for load case 1. You can find this value
by scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum temperature.
Field 3 - PRESS1 Enter the operating pressure for load case 1. You can find this value by
scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum pressure.
Field 4 - RGDWGT Enter the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if you set
the RIGID flag in the first array.
Field 6 - RESTYP Specify the restraint (support) type indicator. Acceptable values are:
0 - anchor
1 - double acting X
2 - double acting Y
3 - double acting Z
4 - double acting RX
5 - double acting RY
6 - double acting RZ
Field 9 - RINFO3 Enter the restraint friction coefficient for the support.
Field 16 - FLDWGT Enter the weight density of the pipe contents (fluid).
Field 17 - TEENOD Enter the element node number where there is a tee.
General Notes
This file contains the status of the data conversion from the CADPIPE ISO system to the
CAESAR II stress analysis package. The data contained in this file is grouped into three
sections:
1. Entity information
2. Segment connectivity information
Section 1
Lists the entity information as read from the CADPIPE connectivity file. Each entity is
grouped into one of four possible element types, node numbers are assigned, and the
coordinate system is rotated to conform to the standard pipe stress coordinate system
(Y vertical).
Section 2
Details the interpretation and model building process.
Section 3
Lists the final transformed data which the interface system wrote as the CAESAR II
input file.
The following is a sample log file:
Section 1-Entity Information
---------------------------------------------------------
Element types are: 1 - Pipe 2 - Bend 3 - Intersection 4 - Rigid
Interpreted Entity information for: 14 Entities.
If the resulting CAESAR II geometry is inconsistent with the CADPIPE drawing, use the log file
to identify the problem:
1. Identify the problem area and locate the relevant elements in Section 3 of the log file.
2. Find the appropriate segment in Section 2 of the log file and verify that it contains the same
entities as shown in the CADPIPE connectivity file.
3. Verify that the information in Section 1 of the log file matches the interpreted data in Section
3.
Anomalies with the resulting CAESAR II geometry can usually be attributed to one of the
following causes:
An unexpected geometry condition was handed to the CAESAR II interface. The solution is
to update the interface for the current condition. Forward the .UDE file to Intergraph CAS
Support for analysis and subsequent interface modification.
An unknown item code was encountered during the data transfer, indicating that the
CADPIPE software has been updated and new item codes added. Because the interface
does not recognize the new items, it must be modified. Contact Intergraph CAS Support for
assistance.
OLET entities in the CADPIPE connectivity file do not contain a reference to the piping
element they intersect. As a result, the interface attempts to determine the associated pipe
using coordinate computation and 3D intersection calculations. Potentially, the procedure
can pass over the intersection point, and the branch containing the OLET plots at the origin
of the CAESAR II model. You can correct this in the CAESAR II input by breaking the
intersected pipe and assigning the OLET node number to the break point.
Some CADPIPE connectivity files that have been submitted to Intergraph CAS for analysis
have been found to contain errors consisting of either pipe doubling back on itself or piping
elements indicated as bends where there was no change in direction. Errors such as these
can be detected by the CAESAR II error checker when it is run prior to attempting the data
transfer.
Import PCF
Processes a single Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs, and then generates a
CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion information.
The goal of the conversion process is:
To create a CAESAR II model that is complete, ready to run, and contains no errors.
To provide a method for stress engineers to quickly and accurately collect data.
After the PCF is created from external software, it can be converted to a CAESAR II piping input
model file.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External Interfaces
menu operate the same.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. The PCF is
a flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.
A valid PCF has a .pcf file extension name.
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF Displays the conversion factor used to convert the user-
supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for
the attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).
VERT, EW, NS
These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points of the global
axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the Z-up
setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+"
or "-".
A, B, C
These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the support/pipe
installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to the
"direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A
and B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by
prefixing with + or -. See the figure below.
<MU=>
Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=>
Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
B
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as
shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the
applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 310) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
4. Click Convert selected PCF files into CAESAR II to initiate the conversion process.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the Message Area, which is
located in the lower right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.
Phantom components (PCF items marked as CONTINUATION or STATUS DOTTED or
MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE) are ignored during the conversion process.
Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Tees
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements but
instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the
three elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
DSN Setup
To use the CAESAR II data export facility, you need to set up a Data Source Name (DSN) on
the system. DSNs contain information regarding where the database resides on the computer
and how to communicate with it (for example, what driver to use). CAESAR II has capabilities to
export data to either an Access database or an Excel spreadsheet, though you only need to set
up a DSN for an Access database to allow use of this feature. The name of a DSN is fixed
(read-only) by ICAS.
The CAESAR II installation program is designed to set up DSNs automatically. However, in the
event that the DSNs are not set up, follow the procedure below.
4. Select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb, *.accdb), and click Finish.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the one below. You are prompted to select your
database.
The system returns you to the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box.
7. Click OK.
The C2_OUT_ACCESS has been added to list of available user DSNs.
File Sets
This chapter discusses two sets of files: the files that CAESAR II delivers to your computer
during installation, and the files that CAESAR II creates for a particular job.
In This Section
CAESAR II File Guide.................................................................... 1189
Required Program Files ................................................................. 1190
Required Error Data Files .............................................................. 1192
Required Data Sets ....................................................................... 1192
Required Printer/Listing Files ........................................................ 1196
Dynamics Files .............................................................................. 1198
Auxiliary Sets ................................................................................. 1198
Structural Data Files ...................................................................... 1199
Example Files ................................................................................ 1200
External Interface Files .................................................................. 1201
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data ............................................... 1202
\caesar\setupesl
\caesar\ssidrv
As the hard drive reaches its storage capacity, disk access can slow considerably.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you periodically use the File > Clean Up Files command to
perform general hard disk housekeeping tasks such as deleting scratch files and old job files.
ANAHLP01.EXE Help file for dynamic input and load case editor
ANAHLP02.EXE Help file for dynamic input and load case editor
Required Program
Description
Filename
MAT_FRP.INP
SIF&TD12.INP
Dynamics Files
Dynamics Filename Description
Auxiliary Sets
Auxillary Set Filename Description
Example Files
Example Filename Description
External Interface
Description
Filename
In the following list, an asterisk (*) after the file extension indicates that it should be saved to
archive input data. A double asterisk (**) indicates the file should be saved to archive output
data.
Not every file listed may be present for a given job. The presence of a file is dependent upon
what analysis has been run.
Scratch Files
._B - Nodal boundary condition file created by the piping error checker and used by the
analysis modules.
._C Element properties file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._N Nodal coordinate file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._R Job control information created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._E Element connectivity file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
Listing Files
.MSG Secondary output file with intermediate computation data.
Output Files
._M ** Intermediate output file that contains data generated by the piping error checker and
load case setup modules.
Update History
The lists on the following pages detail the functional updates made to CAESAR II by version
number. These lists correspond to the major releases of the software and do not reflect items
such as minor releases (such as Service Packs or Hot Fixes); re-publication of the User Guide,
or additional new modules released to aid customers between updates.
In This Appendix
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84) ........................................... 1206
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ..................................... 1206
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) ................................... 1207
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) ..................................... 1208
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ..................................... 1208
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ........................................ 1209
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) ...................................... 1210
CAESAR II Version 3.15 Features (9/91) ...................................... 1210
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) .................................... 1211
CAESAR II Version 3.17 Features (3/92) ...................................... 1212
CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features (9/92) ...................................... 1212
CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features (3/93) ...................................... 1214
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) .................................... 1215
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94) ..... 1216
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) ......... 1217
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) ...................................... 1219
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) ......... 1219
CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and Enhancements (1/98) ..... 1222
CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and Enhancements (1/99) ..... 1222
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and Enhancements (2/00) ..... 1222
CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and Enhancements (3/01) ..... 1223
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Changes and Enhancements (5/02) ..... 1224
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03) ... 1225
CAESAR II Version 5.00 Changes and Enhancements (11/05) ... 1225
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07) .... 1226
CAESAR II Version 5.20 Changes and Enhancements (4/09) ..... 1227
CAESAR II Version 5.30 Changes and Enhancements (11/10) ... 1228
CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and Enhancements (5/12) ..... 1229
CAESAR II Version 6.10 Changes and Enhancements (10/13) ... 1229
CAESAR II Version 7.00 Changes and Enhancements (10/14) ... 1231
CAESAR II Version 8.00 Changes and Enhancements (10/15).1233
ASCII Editor - Due to an overwhelming need and subsequent lack of easy to use system
editors, a stand alone ASCII editor is provided. This editor easily modifies files such as
AUTOEXE.BAT, CONFIG.SYS, and SETUP.CII.
2D XY Engineering Plotting Program - Stand alone plotting software that allows you to plot
engineering data such as CAESAR II spectrum files. This software plots any real data
arranged in columns.
Valve & Flange Database - The addition of a valve and flange database enables you to
define or select the specific rigid element to insert into the piping system. The database is
constructed to allow you to add or modify entries.
Dynamic Restart - The most time consuming part of a dynamic analysis is the Eigensolution.
This feature allows a job to be restarted and use a previous Eigensolution.
WRC Updates - The latest edition (1979) of the WRC107 bulletin has been incorporated.
Input Title Page - An optional title page has been added to the input module. You can now
define a title page of up to 19 lines which is stored with the input.
Expansion Joint Rating Program - This stand alone software allows you to compute the
compression of each expansion joint corrugation and the compression of the joint as a
whole. These values can then be compared to manufacturers recommendations for joint
acceptance.
Miscellaneous Modifications
Screen data presentation changes.
Direct control jumping between executables.
Increased number of allowed software designed hangers.
Additional spring hanger design options.
Database updates include additional spring hanger tables.
Soil Modeler for Buried Pipe.
Miscellaneous
A pen plotting program (PENPLT) plots up to 2500 element models (LARGE Includes) on
the screen or on an HPGL compatible hardware device.
The static output processor has been updated to support VGA graphics and to provide
screen dumps to HP Laser Jet Series II compatible printers.
Updated SYSCHK program now checks that SHARE is loaded when necessary. Missing
coprocessor is also immediately reported.
Updated PLTS now allow you to save labels, scaling information, and file names during
plotting sessions.
Updated ROT (rotating equipment program) provides additional code interpretations for the
HEI bulletin.
The BIGPRT (large job printing program) has been expanded to handle even larger jobs and
to provide a local element report.
As of Version 3.15, CAESAR II uses ESL devices to authorize access to the software. The
ESLs are more stable than the previously used keydisk and provide additional client
information to the software. Additional information on the ESLs can be found in the update
pages for the User Manual.
The first access of Version 3.15 will cause the ESL activation code to prompt for
the keydisks (both unlimited and limited). Both keydisks must be available to properly
activate the ESL.
A printer setup program (PRSET) is provided to adjust the number of lines per logical page
for dot matrix printers, useful for page lengths longer than 11 inches.
The Database option of the configuration program now allows you to set the Valve and
Flange database. Additionally a database excluding flanges (NOFLANGE) is included.
The Material Database used for the Flange Stress/Leakage module has been updated. The
new database includes all changes from the ASME Sect VIII, Division 1, A91 Addenda, the
materials are listed in code order, and the number of materials has increased from 450 to
1100.
The structural modules C2S and AISC have been updated to work with the German
structural steel library.
Interfaces Added
A new neutral file interface is provided which allows a two way transfer of data between the
CAESAR II input file and an ASCII text file.
An interface is provided between Stoners LIQT program and the dynamic modules of
CAESAR II. This interface enables dynamic pipe forces from a time domain analysis to be
used in the generation of a force spectrum.
Miscellaneous Changes
The static stress summary report has been modified so that the maximum code stress
percent is reported, not the maximum code stress.
A miscellaneous option has been added to the configuration program. This option allows
various options, including the specification of the ANSI, JIS, or DIN piping specifications.
Other options available from the Miscellaneous menu are:
Intro/Exit Screens (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the display of the initial entry
screen and the final exit screen.
Yes/No Prompts (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the yes/no/are_you_sure
prompts.
Output Reports by Load Case (Yes/No) - By default, CAESAR II produces static output
reports by load case. This option can be used to generate the same reports by subject.
Displacement Report Node Sort (Yes/No) - This option can be used to disable the nodal
sorting of the static displacement report.
The file handler has been modified to enable directory and disk drive selection and logging.
You also have control of the initial display of the file names. This allows you to set the sort
order as well as the single/multi-column display presentation.
A file verification routine has been added to check the installation of CAESAR II. This aids in
detecting software corruption due to hard disk defects and viruses.
A new report has been added to the static output menu. This enables you to obtain a local
force/moment report for the elements in the system.
A 32 bit version of the dynamic summation module is provided for large dynamic analysis.
This module requires at least a 386 processor.
The animation module has been modified to provide hard copy output of the mode shapes.
Seismic Anchor Movements - The dynamics modules allows the specification of seismic
anchor movements for independent support motion analysis.
RCC-M - The French piping code RCC-M, Section C has been incorporated.
Languages - The input and dynamic output supports English, French, and Spanish language
headings. Language dependent files can be activated with the appropriate command line
switch on the INSTALL directive. For example, INSTALL /S installs any Spanish specific
files.
PCX Files - All of the graphics modules have been modified to allow the images to be saved
to disk files in PCX format. This enables these images to be brought into word processing
and desktop publishing systems.
The ASME material database has been updated to reflect the 1992 Code addendum.
The printer testing routines have been completely rewritten. Additionally, output can be
directed to any LPT port.
The ability to configure the printer, either dot matrix or laser jet. This is implemented through
a text file containing the printer formatting codes which you can modify.
Password protection for input data files, to prevent modification of completed projects.
All of the screens in the piping preprocessor (except for the main spreadsheet) are now
supported in Spanish and French.
Input/Output file time/date sequencing checks have been added to the dynamics modules.
The Break command in the piping input processor has been modified to accept input in feet-
inch units instead of only feet. This should allow compound entries in any units system.
Added additional spring hanger manufacturer has been added, Carpenter & Paterson, UK.
The UBC (Uniform Building Code) earthquake spectra have been added.
The B31.5 piping code has been added.
The piping code addenda have been reviewed and any necessary changes made to the
software. The addenda include revisions for: ASCE #7, B31.1, B31.8, ASME NC, and ASME
ND.
The SIF scratch-pad from the Miscellaneous processor (Option C of the Main Menu) has
been incorporated into the piping preprocessor. This processor includes all of the supported
piping codes (not just B31.1 and B31.3 as before) and all of the fittings. Additionally, any
changes made to the scratch-pad data can optionally be transferred directly to the main
CAESAR II data spreadsheets.
Additional changes to the input piping preprocessor include the following:
problem size is now dependent on the amount of free extended memory - the old limit of 400
elements is now upwards of 8,000 elements
graphics menus automatically turned off for hard copies
optional node number display for supports, anchors, hangers, and nozzles
function key map shown on main spreadsheet
auxiliary input spreadsheets support help
The accounting system has been completely rewritten. This provides a more streamlined
interface. Additionally, accounting statistics are now recorded from the stress computation
modules (previous versions only recorded the actual matrix decomposition times).
The API-617 and NEMA-SM23 reports have been overhauled so that the code compliance
when using non-English units systems is consistent.
The new Flange Rigidity factor from ASME Section VIII has been added.
A new loader (C2.EXE) has replaced the original one (C2.COM). This new loader performs
initial startup checks, with diagnostic reporting if necessary, and enables error processing
from the Main Menu.
The configuration program has been modified to track changes. If you attempt to [Esc] out
after making changes, you are warned that the changes will not be saved.
A graphics viewer has been added to the file manager. This enables rapid model plotting
directly from the file manager of the Main Menu.
Additional directives are available to disable the generation of the Table of Contents page,
and disable the display of the spreadsheet function key mapping.
The following additional piping codes have been added: RCCM-D, CODETI, and TBK 5-6.
Center of Gravity calculations have been added with results displayed in the error checker.
A Bill of Materials report has been added.
Yield criterion stresses can be computed as either Von Mises or as 3D Maximum Shear
Stress intensity.
Hoop Stress can be computed based on Outer Diameter, Inner Diameter, Mean Diameter, or
Lames equation.
The spring hanger design spreadsheet has been modified to default to a 25% load variation.
In addition, the actual hanger load variation now appears in the hanger output reports.
A new command (WIND) has been added to the structural steel preprocessor. This allows
selective wind loading on an element by element basis.
A new key-combination Alt-D is available in the input processor to compute the distance
between two nodes.
User-specified coordinates for up to 30 nodes are saved in the input file.
The input title page has been expanded from 19 to 60 lines.
Automatic node numbering abilities have been added to the spreadsheets of the main piping
input module
Expansion Joint databases from IWK (Germany) are provided.
Expansion Joint database from Senior Flexonics is provided.
MISC converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the SIF, Flange, WRC297,
B31G, and expansion joint rating computations.
ROT converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the equipment calculations for
NEMA, API, and HEI. General revisions made for more consistent input screens and help
messages.
A new report option (in static output) is available to review the miscellaneous computations
made by the error checker. This report includes: SIFs and flexibility factors, pipe properties,
nozzle flexibility data, wind data, CG data, and the bill of materials report.
The Intergraph Interface has been improved. The interface now transfers the
temperature/pressure pairs. Additionally, if a material mapping file is present, material data
can be set correctly by CAESAR II.
The CADPIPE Interface has been updated in accordance with CADPIPE Version 4.0.
The Restraint Summary in the static output processor has been modified to include the
translational displacements of the restrained nodes.
The output processors (static and dynamic) have been modified to allow you to change the
name of the disk output file if necessary. Additionally, modifications have been made so that
only a single output device can be enabled.
All language files have been translated into German. Use INSTALL /G to acquire the
German files.
A new control F8 at the output menu level allows switching jobs without returning to the
Main menu.
Database management is provided from the Utilities option of the main menu. You can edit
COADE provided materials or add your own. Material parameters can be provided for code
0 (represents generic values for any non-specified code) or for specific codes. It is
recommended, due to future implementation plans, that metals be assigned identification
numbers between 100 and 699. FRP materials receive numbers between 700 and 999.
Selection of FRP materials from the material database does not currently activate the
orthotropic material model in CAESAR II. This must still be done through the use of material
20 (see item 6 concerning this below).
Eight-character job names are now supported. Input files are identified by extension ._A,
output files by extension ._P, ._S, and so on. Existing files are automatically recognized and
converted to their new format. (See related item 16 below.)
Modifications have been made to allow multiple users working from the same network data
directory through the environment variable COADE_USER. This environment variable
should be set to a unique 3 character combination, such as the initials, for each user working
in the common directory. Implementation can be done by adding to your AUTOEXEC.BAT
file a line such as: SET COADE_USER=TVL
CAESAR IIs Valve and Flange database now incorporates data files from CADWorx/Plant.
This change provides four advantages:
Component weights and lengths are more accurate, as well as traceable to specific
catalogs, standards, and so on.
Weights and lengths are provided for more components than were previously available
in the CRANE or GENERIC databases.
Because CADWorx/Plant data files are text files, you can easily edit or add
components.
If you also have CADWorx/Plant on your computer, the two programs share the same
data files and project specs, enhancing the performance of the bi-directional interface.
Gaskets are included for flanged items, so a better fit is provided between the
CADWorx/Plant and CAESAR II models.
You can now set default values for FRP (material 20) parameters through the
configuration/setup. These default parameters can be read automatically from
manufacturers data files by toggling through the list of available files, and then pressing
[ALT-U] (for Update) on the selected vendor file. Vendor files are recognized by their .FRP
extensions; because these are text files, you can create them easily yourself, or vendors
may distribute them to their customers.
The UKOOA (United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association) piping code for FRP piping
has been added.
The Z183 and Z184 piping codes have been replaced with the Z662 code, which has been
expanded to consider calculation of stresses in restrained piping.
The ASCE #7 wind code has been updated to the 1995 edition.
The API-610 code in the equipment module has been updated to the 8th edition.
ASME Section VIII Division 2 stress indices and WRC-107 SIF (kn, kb) values have been
incorporated into the WRC-107 module.
The Relief Load Synthesis dynamics module now supports metric (or custom) units.
A number of configuration file default values have been revised in order to improve
calculational results or software performance:
Changed From To
BEND_AXIAL_SHAPE = NO YES
FRICT_NORM_FORCE_VAR = 25 15
FRICT_ANGLE_VAR = 30 15
Added a field for specifying Marine Growth Density to the Wind/Wave dialog box.
Updated API-661 to 4th Edition.
Added the ability to save static load case data without running the job.
Added user control over whether or not insulation should be considered in hydro test cases.
Added PD-8010 Part 1 and Part 2 piping code.
Revised the following piping codes due to code changes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, Z662, EN-
13480.
Added support for B31.3 Section 319.2.3(c), allowing axial stress to be included in the
Expansion Code Stress.
Revised API-661 to 6th Edition.
Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.
Added a number of European materials to the material database.
Updated stainless steel pipe specification data per B36.19M.
Updated DIN pipe size specification to comply with EN-10220 (seamless) instead of DIN-
2458 (welded).
Added Chinese structural steel and expansion joint databases.
Added spring hanger data from Gradior Power, (Czech Republic).
Updated the flange material database per ASME Sect VIII Div 1, 2007 Edition.
Updated the Inoflex Spring Hanger data.
Enhanced List view Easier scrolling and viewing options, as well as filtering on
columns, drag-and-drop capabilities, and easier manipulation of load cases
Updated user documentation
Expedited Access to Finite Element Analysis Tools
Added easier access to third-party tools for better modeling and evaluation from the
CAESAR II main menu, to generate more accurate SIFs and K factors. Compare
multiple file results, assess the sensitivity of your model elements, and evaluate
nozzle/branch connections with NozzlePRO.
Expanded Hanger Data
Added hanger data for the following hanger manufacturers: Hesterberg, Unison, Spring
Supports Mfg. Co., Senior, and Wookwang
Revised the listing of the manufacturer, Flexider, to its new name, CASTIM 2000
Enhanced Piping Input Usability
Improved the Classic Piping Input to display a Pressure 3 value on the interface. This
allows you to input three sets of temperature and pressure values without having to
open a separate dialog box.
New single and multiple element-level right-click graphics menus containing many
frequently-used element commands and block (group) operations
Improved Distance Measuring
Minimize mode for measuring lets you perform multiple measurements without the
Distance dialog box blocking any of the model
Measure multiple distances (using CTRL+click) and see all of your measurements at
once.
Redesigned and more user-friendly dialog box
Better snapping in the Line Drawing (single line) mode and ability to snap from piping
elements to imported DWG pipe objects
Larger default font size setting on distance measurements for ease of reading
Enhanced S3D/SPR (VUE) Model Imports
Improved rotation capabilities for imports with a more user-friendly interface
Added functionality to include zipped VUE (ZVF) or stitched VUE (SVF) files in a
CAESAR II model
Added Filter/View Capabilities on 3D Models
Filter by Line Numbers in the Static Output Processor 3D model
View only node names on the 3D model by selecting a new Names Only option in
Piping Input, C2Isogen, and the Static Output Processor modules
Upgraded User Documentation
Added edition dates and information for piping, equipment, and wind/seismic code
editions supported (Quick Reference Guide)
More white space and indentation for field property formats
New glossary of industry/software terms (Users Guide)
Updated the software to display the .chm-based help when you press F1 in the Material
Database Editor, Accounting, Change Model Units, and Create/Review Units modules.
Previously, these modules displayed in a text-based help dialog box
Moved the help for the Stress Isometrics module into the main help file for CAESAR II
diameter, nominal
A name given to represent a particular size of pipe.
diameter, outside (OD)
The circumference measured around the outer wall of a pipe.
fitting
A generic term describing components that are used to make turns, branches, or reductions in a
run of pipe.
flange
A ring-shaped piece that is welded or screwed on to the end of a pipe, which permits the pipe to
attach to other piping components.
gasket
A material that is put between two meeting surfaces to prevent leaks.
gate valve
A valve designed for the on or off control of a substance flowing through a pipe.
hanger
A pipe support used on horizontal piping that suspends the piping using a stationary object from
above.
insulation
An exterior covering on pipe or equipment that maintains a constant temperature.
nozzle
A connecting point of the piping system to a vessel or equipment. Nozzles are used in locations
where fluids are introduced or removed from a vessel or a piece of equipment.
nozzle orientation
A drawing depicting the location of nozzles around the perimeter of vessels or a piping system.
A nozzle orientation plan shows angular measurements from 0 degrees.
o-lets
Any of several fittings used to make branch connections for piping. O-let connections can
include weldolets (for welds), sockolet (for socket-welds), sweepolet (for contoured connections
with low SIFs) and latrolets (for lateral connections).
pipe rack
A structural framework that consists of a series of vertical columns that connect with horizontal
components. Pipe racks are generally used to support pipes traveling in a process facility or
plant.
pipe size, nominal
A descriptive name given to a pipe with reference to its size in diameter.
pipe support
A structural component that carries the weight of a piping system configuration.
pump
A mechanical devise used to move fluids under pressure from one location to another.
reducer
A pipe fitting with one end larger than the other that reduces the diameter of a run of pipe.
reinforcing pad
A plate contoured to the shape of a the element it lines that is positioned around a nozzle to
provide additional strength in the connection area.
seamless
A manufactured pipe made without any welding connections.
slip-on flange
A flange with a low hub where a pipe can be inserted prior to welding.
spring hanger
A pipe hanger that uses a coil spring to absorb pipe movement.
tee
A three-way fitting used for branch connections on a run of pipe. Tee types include welded and
extruded (or drawn).
tee, extruded (drawn)
A tee fitting designed with a smoothly contoured intersection that does not include welds. This
tee design reduces fabrication stress, withstands greater external loading, and eliminates the
need for external reinforcement.
thermal expansion
An increase in pipe dimension due to the application of heat.
valve
A device used to control the flow of a fluid through a pipe.
weld neck flange
A flange with a tapered neck that you can butt-weld to another beveled-ended piping
component.
CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features (9/92) Changing the Model Display 380
1212 Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data
CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features (3/93) Transfer 1163
1214 Chemical Resistance (A2) 219
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) China GB 50009 Wind Code Options 558
1215 Circumferential Moment (MC) 826
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Circumferential Moment MC 811
Enhancements (7/94) 1216 Circumferential Shear (VC) 826
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Circumferential Shear VC 810
Enhancements (4/95) 1217 Clad Thk 224
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) Cladding Density 225, 342, 624
1219 Cladding Thickness 342, 624
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Class 1 Branch Flexibilities 910
Enhancements (3/97) 1219 Class 1 Branch Flexibility 92
CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and Classic Piping Input Dialog Box 106
Enhancements (1/98) 1222 Close Loop 236
CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History
Enhancements (1/99) 1222 Time Step (ms) 693
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and CNode 154, 164, 675
Enhancements (2/00) 1222 Code 201
CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and Code Compliance Considerations 977
Enhancements (3/01) 1223 Code Compliance Report 591
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Changes and Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8) 138
Enhancements (5/02) 1224 codes 1236
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Code-Specific Notes 982
Enhancements (11/03) 1225 Code-Specific Settings 93
CAESAR II Version 5.00 Changes and CODETI 1002
Enhancements (11/05) 1225 coefficient of expansion 1236
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Coefficient of Friction (Mu) 57
Enhancements ( 9/07) 1226 Cold Elastic Modulus 1039
CAESAR II Version 5.20 Changes and Cold Spring 901
Enhancements (4/09) 1227 Color - Ambient 75
CAESAR II Version 5.30 Changes and Color - Face 75
Enhancements (11/10) 1228 Color - Line 75
CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and Color - Specular 75
Enhancements (5/12) 1229 Color - Transmission 75
CAESAR II Version 6.10 Changes and Columns 463
Enhancements (10/13) 1229 Combination Method 544
CAESAR II Version 7.00 Changes and Combine PCF Files 325, 1184
Enhancements (10/14) 1231 Comma Separated Value Format 364
CAESAR II Version 8.00 Changes and Commands Menu 430
Enhancements (10/15) 1233 Commands tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Calculate Actual Cold Loads 260 358
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses 955 Comment 466
CANADIAN Z662 992 Comparison Method 193
Centerline Direction Cosine X 875 Compass 338, 620
Centerline Direction Cosine Z 875 Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC)
CFE Diseno por Sismo 718 271
CFE Sismo Example 269 Component Amplification Factor ap (ASCE)
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard 268 266
Change Model Units 1051 Component Colors 76
Change Password 104 Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn] (NBC)
Change Sequence 331 271
Component Elevation Ratio z/h (ASCE) Create a drawing using a new style 765
266 Create a drawing using an existing style
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar] (NBC) 764
271 Create a drawing using the default style
Component Information 119 763, 770
Component List 1115, 1117, 1123, 1128 Create a model using the Structural Steel
Composition/Type 215, 1038 Wizard 402
Compress CAESAR II Files 90 Create a new job 28
Computational Control 54 Create a new job file 402
Compute Pressure Stress per WRC-368 Create a New Units File 1050
(No Ext Loads) 813 Create a template 777
Computed Mass Flow Rate 731 Create and save an annotation template
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas) 728 767
Conclusion 976 Create Loop on Element 279
Condense Elbows 324, 1183 Create Spring Load Cases 908
Condense Rigids 324, 1183 Create/Review Units 1048
Condense Tees 1183 Creating the .FAT Files 954
Condenses Flanges/Valves 1132 Creep Loading 933
Configuration Editor 52 CROTCH R 136
Configure annotation preferences 761 Culling Maximum Extent 74
Configure isometric drawing split points Cumulative Usage 747
761 Cumulative Usage Report 592
Configuring 3D Graphics 378 Current Data 929
Configuring annotation preferences 775 Current Profile Type 568
Connect Geometry Through CNodes 71 Current Table Depth 571
Constant Effort Support 909 Current Table Velocity 571
Constant Effort Support Load 174 Custom 183
Continue 234 Custom Reports Toolbar 605
Control Information 1075 Customize Dialog Box 357
Control Parameters Tab 677 Cut 234
Controlling Results 535 Cutting Planes Toolbar 348
Controlling the Data Export 1188 Cycle Stress Table 215
Convention System 806 Cyclic Service (A3) 219
Convergence Tolerances 54
Conversion Type 1076 D
Convert selected files into CAESAR II
format 1183 Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) 694
coordinates 1236 Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases
Coordinates 854 1185
Copy 234 Data Export Wizard 1078
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Data Modification and Details 1133
Box 567, 568 Data Tab 848
Copy Wave Vector 568 Database Definitions 60
Copy Wind Vector 567 Database Status (Consistency Check)
corrosion 1236 Dialog Box 1042
Corrosion 114, 340, 622 Databases 61
Corrosion Allowance 802, 804, 822, 1236 Date Range 1047
Corrosion Allowance (WRC 297 Nozzle) Decomposition Singularity Tolerance 55,
824 708
Cos X & Y 867 Default 465
coupling 1236 Default Operator 79
Covers 259 Default Piping Code 98
CRC Check 45 Default Projection Mode 79
y 435
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle
Face 891 / 195
Y Distance to Discharge 883
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 884
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 885
Y Distance to Suction 882
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 883
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 882
Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
885
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 891
Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle
884
Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle
886
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle 883
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
885, 886
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle 891
y stiffness 435
YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR 507
Yield Stress 1041
Yield Stress Criterion 98
ym 453
Youngs Modulus 859
Young's Modulus 862
ys 453
Z
z 435